GIFT or m. ■ v.. ■I Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/bellumhelveticumOOjanerich ' ' ' ' c c' c ' c «^ c c c r c c^ c S < m Vpii Zb'c !JLaF?e Classical Series BELLUM HELVETIC UM A BEGINNER'S BOOK IN LATIN (REVISED EDITION) BY ARTHUR L. JANES BOYS' HIGH SCHOOL, BROOKLYN, N. Y. AND PAUL R. JENKS FLUSHING HIGH SCHOOL, LONG ISLAND, N. Y. WITH GRAMMATICAL APPENDIX BY ARTHUR TAPPAN WALKER, Ph. D. UNIVERSITY OF KANSAS SCOTT, FORESMAN AND COMPANY CHICAGO NEW YORK ^a' X h*^ 9 VJU-J2^ .^ COPYRIGHT, 1906, 1913 BY SCOTT, FORESMAN AND COMPANY PEEFACE The experience of many teachers has proved the excellence of Bellum Helveticum. It has been found interesting and stimulating to both teachers and classes during the actual time of using the book ; and the advantage of using it appears still more clearly when the student advances to his second year's work. The chasm between the beginner's book and Caesar does not exist when the student has been reading Caesar from almost his first lesson in Latin. But these teachers have suggested many improvements which have led to the revision and rearrangement of the book. Furthermore, since the last edition, Professor Lodge's studies in vocabulary and Mr. Byrne's studies in syntax have appeared, and these have been used as a basis in the present edition. The leading features of the present revision are: First: The text of Chapters 1-3 of Caesar's Gallic War is given in simplified form, Chapters 4-14 in both simplified and original form, and Chapters 15-29 in the original form only. Caesar's great work presents a model of perfect Latinity, sufficiently simple in form and structure for the beginner, when it is taken slowly. It affords an illustration of the most important principles of the language, and prepares the pupil for a further study of Latin. Second: Sixteen lessons preliminary to the text have been given in order to inculcate a real knowledge of forms before the translation of the narrative is begun. Throughout the book practically no form or construction occurs in the text until it is understood by the pupil. 3 417190 4 FREFi^CE Third: In the notes on the text, only such material has been included as is necessary for translation. Paradigms of inflection and the principles of syntax are introduced gradually and logically — not depending on their chance occurrence in the text — thus giving a thorough grammar method based upon connected narrative. The sentences almost without exception are new, and are based upon the vocabulary of the text and upon the principle taught in the lesson. Nothing has been included in the body of the book which is not needed for the second yearns work, as shown by Byrne's Syntax of High School Latin. Each construction is reviewed in at least three successive lessons. Fourth : In the first half of the book, vocabularies have been so arranged that new words are used in the short Latin-English and English-Latin sentences before they are met in the text. It is expected that the student will master the words of each lesson, so that he will recognize them as they occur again in the text. This saves the time of the student — often wasted in looking up the same words re- peatedly — strengthens the memory, cultivates the attention, and secures accurate knowledge. Fifth: The vocabulary of the body of the book (which includes Chapters 1-13,7) contains 519 words. Such of these words as are assigned by Professor Lodge to the prescribed list for the first year (with a very few additions) are repeated in the vocabularies of the review lessons. Of these, the 365 which are the most common are made the basis of the English-Latin sentences, and are also repeated in the English-Latin vocabularies of the review lessons. Sixth : When Lesson LXXXV has been reached, the pupil will have had all the forms, syntax, and vocabulary needed for starting his second year's work. Provision is made, however, in the lessons based upon Chapters 13 and 14, for those teachers who want additional forms and syntax. For PREFACE D those who wish more translation, Chapters 15-29 have been added, with copious notes. Upon these chapters are based sentences which review the forms and, in related groups, the principles of syntax of the earlier lessons. Seventh: Lessons upon word formation have been added, treating all the affixes which can profitably be studied in the first year. Eighth : Derivation of English words has received atten- tion throughout, and various methods of treating this valuable part of Latin study have been suggested. Ninth: The vocabularies are fuller than is usual, and much information generally placed in the notes has been inserted, with the idea that the pupil may be encouraged to use the vocabulary rather than the notes. Tenth: A classroom edition is supplied, containing the exercises which the pupil has prepared, but no information ; supplementary sentences for each section, to give additional matter for drill and for sight work, if desired ; also material for impromptu oral practice. The work of rewriting has been very materially assisted by suggestions from many teachers, for whose kindness hearty thanks are extended. It w^as impossible to carry out all the suggestions, but none was passed over without consideration, and all the changes made are in accord with what seemed to be the general trend of opinion. Arthur L. Janes. Paul R. Jenks. New York City, June, 1913. PUBLISHERS' ANNOUNCEMENT Bellum Helvetium, by Professors C. M. Lowe and Nathaniel Butler, was published in 1889. The book was revised by the same authors and published under the title of Bellum Helveticum in 1892. Both authors having gone into other fields of study and work in 1897, an arrangement was made with Professor Arthur Tappan Walker, of the Univer- sity of Kansas, to rewrite the Grammatical Appendix, and recast somewhat the lessons in the body of the book. This was done, and the book immediately took on new life, increas- ing its sale four-fold. Two years ago, Messrs. Janes and Jenks, of the Boys' High School, Brooklyn, where the book had been used since 1891, began working out some modifications and improvements, as they believed, on the Bellum Helveticum for their class reci- tations. An arrangement was made with them to embody these changes in a new edition of the book, to be published over their names, and Professor Walker was to provide the Grammatical Appendix. The book, with this successful career, and with the benefit of this experienced and scholarly author- ship, is given to the teaching public by the publishers with great confidence in its worth. June, 1906. June, 1913. TABLE OF CONTENTS Lesson. Page. Introductory 19 I. First Declension 25 II. First Declension (continued) 27 III. Present Indicative Active of the First Conjugation. .. 29 IV. Second Declension 33 V. Present Indicative Active of Second Conjugation.,,. 35 VI. Second Declension (continued) 37 VII. Gender 38 VIII. Adjectives of the First and Second Declension (con- tinued). Present Indicative of sum 41 First Review 43 IX, Third Declension 45 X. Third Declension (continued) 48 XI. Third Declension (continued) 50 XII. Third Declension (continued) 51 XIII. Adjectives of the Third Declension 54 XIV. Comparison of Adjectives. Use of Prepositions 56 XV. Present Indicative Active of the Third Conjugation. . 59 XVI. Present Indicative Active of the Fourth Conjugation and of the Third Conjugation in -io 60 Second Eeview 62 XVII. The Demonstratives hie and ille 64 XVIII. The Demonstrative is 66 XIX. The Eelative and Interrogative Pronouns 68 XX. Imperfect and Future Indicative of sum 71 XXI, Imperfect and Future Indicative Active of the First and Second Conjugations 73 XXII. Imperfect and Future Indicative Active of the Third and Fourth Conjugations 76 XXIII. Present Indicative Passive of the First and Second Conjugations 79 7 8 BELLUM HELVETICUM XXIV. Imperfect and Future Indicative Passive of the First and Second Conjugations 81 XXV. Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative Passive of the Third and Fourth Conjugations... 84 Third Review 87 XXVI. Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative of sum 88 XXVII. Principal Parts and Their Uses. Perfect Active System 91 XXVIII. Principal Parts (continued) 95 XXIX. Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative Passive 97 XXX. Simple and Compound Verbs 100 Fourth Review 102 XXXI. Adjectives with Genitive in ius 101 XXXII. Fourth Declension 106 XXXIII. Fifth Declension 108 XXXIV. Ablative of Agent 110 XXXV. Ablative of Means 112 XXXVI. Ablative of Time 114 XXXVII. Accusative of Extent 115 XXXVIII. Subjunctive of sum 117 XXXIX. Subjunctive Active of the First and Second Conjuga- tions 119 XL. Subjunctive Active of the Third and Fourth Conjuga- tions 122 XLI. Subjunctive Passive of all Conjugations 125 XLII. Indirect Questions. Sequence of Tenses 128 XLIII. Infinitives 131 Fifth Review 134 XLIV. Participles 136 XLV. Ablative Absolute 139 XL VI. The Intensive and Reflexive Pronouns 141 XL VII. Purpose Clauses 144 XLVIII. Deponent Verbs 147 XLIX. Subjunctive with Verbs of Fearing 150 L. Subjunctive of Result 153 LI. Gerunds. Impersonal Verbs 155 Sixth Review 158 LII. Declension of domus 159 LIII. Conjugation of eo 162 LIV. Place in which 165 TABLE OF CONTENTS LV. Declension of idem 168 LVI. Possessive and Partitive Genitives 170 LVII. Declension of vis 173 LVIII. Declension of duo. Conjugation of possum 176 Seventh Keview 179 LIX. Infinitive in Indirect Discourse. Subject Accusative.. 181 LX. Dative with Special Verbs 183 LXI. Dative with Compound Verbs 186 LXII. Dative of Purpose. Dative with Adjectives 188 LXIII. Personal Pronouns. Possessive Adjectives 191 LXIV. Conjugation of volo, nolo, malo 195 LXV. Comparison of Adjectives in er and lis 198 LXVI. Comparison of Certain Irregular Adjectives 200 LXVII. Formation and Comparison of Adverbs 204 LXVIII. Comparison of Certain Irregular Adverbs 207 LXIX. Direct Questions 210 Eighth Eeview 213 LXX. Ablative of Separation. Ablative of Cause 215 LXXI. Ablative of Comparison. Ablative of Measure and Difference 218 LXXII. Ablative of Manner 221 LXXIII. Conjugation of fid 223 LXXV. Ablative and Genitive of Description 228 LXXVI. Ablative of Specification 230 Ninth Keview 233 LXXVII. Imperative Mood. Commands 234 LXXVIII. Gerunds and Gerundives 238 LXXIX. Causal Clauses with quod and with cum 243 LXXX. Temporal Clauses with cum 246 LXXXI. Numerals 248 LXXXII. Conjugation of fero. Declension of deus 251 LXXXIII. Periphrastic Conjugations 255 LXXXIV. Supines 259 Tenth Review 263 LXXXV. Indirect Discourse 265 LXXXVI. Conditions 268 LXXXVII. Conditions (continued) 272 LXXXVIII. Wishes 277 LXXXIX. Word Formation 280 XC. Word Formation (continued) 284 Eleventh Review 287 10 BELLUM HELVETICUM Annotated Text, Chapters 15-29 289 Connected Text, Chapters 1-29 317 Selected Rules 334 Appendix ' 339 Latin — English Vocabulary 385 English — Latin Vocabulary 424 TO TEACHERS 1. In the present edition of Bellum Helveticum it has been the constant endeavor of the authors to put nothing before the pupil that he does not need to know and under- stand. Consequently the lessons should be taken up in the order in which they occur, and nothing should be omitted. 2. The most important thing at the outset is the accurate acquirement of forms. When the declension of porta has been assigned, it should be written in full by each pupil, corrected, and returned. If forms are learned accurately and thoroughly when first assigned, they are easily retained; if not, a pupil becomes more and more confused as each new declension occurs. In the teacher's class-book the section number of the written matter should be noted at the head of the column in which the marks are recorded (e.g., §16 for porta), and the pupils who fail to get this perfectly should repeat it in subsequent recitations until a check mark in the class-book indicates that it has been given perfectly at least once. The indiscriminate oral recitation of forms is of little use. 3. It is a common mistake for teachers to think that mere rapidity in giving forms is an end in itself. Accuracy is the proper aim. When a pupil has attained accuracy in giving a certain set of forms, time is wasted in trying to attain rapidity, because he is gaining no mental power, and because the time is better spent in teaching him to use these forms in sentences. The true pedagogical object is to train him to think directly to a certain form (e.g., a genitive plural), rather than to have him "run down" a declension 11 12 TO TEACHERS till he gets the desired form. And there is no advantage in having a pupil give a single form without associating with it its case and number, or tense, mood, voice, etc., for other- wise it is not truly apperceived. Consequently, at the start it is well to have the names of the cases written with the Latin, and to have the declension given orally. 4. During the first few weeks no effort or time should be spared in showing pupils how to reason out translations from the endings of Latin words. Strange as it seems to many teachers, a large number of pupils are absolutely incapable of grasping without assistance the mental proc- esses that lie behind the art of translation; and too many teachers forget that to explain such matters is at once their duty and their greatest opportunity to win gratitude and confidence. For it is a fatal mistake to allow a pupil to get the idea that translation is a combination of guess^vork and memory. 5. The assignment of the next lesson should be made absolutely definite and should be gone over with the cjass, so that new or difficult points may be thoroughly under- stood. Time spent in this way is saved many times over. 6. The suggestions about the derivation of English words will not be left unused by the live teacher. They are capable of much adaptation and extension. Teachers who believe that the formation of Latin words should be employed as an aid in acquiring and holding a vocabularj^, wall find in Lessons LXXXIX and XC the material they require. These lessons have 'been so planned that they can be used for reference or studied in part at any time during the year. 7. In the treatment of syntax, an effort has been made to get the synthetic point of view (the pupil's) rather than the analytic (the college professor's). About all the prac- tical advantage that the average pupil sees in learning the different uses of the ablative is that he finds out about the TO TEACHERS 13 uses of prepositions in his composition. He will very likely see that it is a help, in translating Latin, to know about the dative with special verbs, the ablative with certain deponent verbs, and some uses of the partitive genitive. But deal gently with him if he fails to display much interest in the objective genitive, or occasionally cannot tell whether an ablative denotes cause or means or specification or accordance. 8. In the English-Latin exercises the authors have tried to furnish enough material for teachers who believe in exten- sive work along this line. But it is their opinion, based upon experience with both methods, that one sentence of Latin composition reviewed is more profitable than two sentences taken up but once, and they would recommend that the assigned sentences be thoroughly mastered and that the additional sentences found in the classroom edition be used for training in translation as suggested in 4, above. 9. The review lessons should be taken up in the most thorough manner, according to the directions given in them. 10. It is perfectly feasible for teachers who think that the original text of Caesar is too difficult for first year pupils to omit the regular Caesar text, and use only the simplified text to be found at the beginning of each lesson. CAESAR AND THE HELVETIAN WAR The name of Gaius Julius Caesar has been called the greatest in history. He was Rome's greatest general. He laid the foundation of an empire which ruled the world for centuries, and from which have sprung, in a large degree, the modern nations of Europe. Although continually occu- pied with war and politics, he was great also in literature. We possess his two most important works, the "Commen- taries on the Gallic War,'' which describe the conquest of Gaul, and the ''Commentaries on the Civil War," which record his struggles with Pompey. The style of his works is characterized by great simplicity, conciseness, and vigor. Written in the purest Latin, they furnish excellent models for the study of the language. When Caesar was forty-four years old — that is, in the year 58 b. c. — he set out for Gaul, ostensibly for the purpose of protecting Roman territory, but as the event showed, for the subjugation of the land. In nine years he subdued the whole of Gaul, and converted it into a Roman province. In the campaigns of these nine years he disciplined and attached to himself an army which afterward made him the master of Rome. The first Gallic people whom Caesar encountered were the Helvetians, the inhabitants of modern Switzerland. The Helvetians thought their country was too small, and, besides, were harassed by the neighboring tribes of Germany, and so resolved to seek wider limits and a more peaceful home to the west, on the borders of the ocean. Before leaving their country they provided themselves plentifully with provisions, and burned all their houses, 14 CAESAR AND THE HELVETIAN WAR 15 some four hundred villages, and twelve walled towns. By appointment they met at the southern end of Lake Geneva. There they assembled, in the spring of 58 b. c, to the number of three hundred and sixty-eight thousand, of whom ninety- two thousand were fighting men. Under modern civiliza- tion, the same country now supports a population of over three millions. At Lake Geneva the Helvetians found their advance opposed by Caesar. Their most natural course was to cross the Rhone, passing through a corner of the Roman province in southeastern Gaul. They sent a deputation asking per- mission to pass through the province without damage. To gain time, Caesar put them off to a second conference, spent the interval in constructing a line of fortifications along the Rhone, and then formally forbade their passage. After vainly endeavoring to force a passage of the Rhone, the Helvetians, by arrangement with the Sequanians, their neighbors on the northwest, proceeded to cross the Saone instead of the Rhone, and thence to march northwest. Caesar added five fresh legions to the one already at his disposal, and after about three-fourths of the Helvetian troops had crossed the Saone, fell upon the remainder and cut them to pieces. Efforts on the part of the Helvetians to procure terms of peace satisfactory to themselves proved unavailing, and after some minor contests, the final decisive battle was fought near the Aeduan town Bibracte, now Mont Beuvray. Caesar acknowledges that the battle was closely contested and for a long time doubtful, but in the end Roman arms and discipline won a victory that ended all the hopes of the Helvetians. At the command of Caesar they returned to their desolated homes, but with the loss of more than two thirds of their entire number. Remains of skeletons, ornaments and arms have been unearthed on the field of the great battle noar Autun. PRINCIPLES OP GRAMMAR SENTENCES A sentence is a complete thought expressed in words. Sentences are classed according to their meaning as declarative, interrogative, and imperative. A declarative sentence is a statement. An interrogative sentence is a question. An imperative sentence is a command. The subject is that about which something is stated (in a declarative sentence), asked (in an interrogative sentence), or commanded (in an imperative sentence). The predicate is that which is stated, asked, or commanded about the subject. A clause is a group of words containing a subject and a predicate. Sentences are classed according to their clauses as simple, complex, or compound. A simple sentence contains only one clause. A complex sentence contains at least two clauses, one of which (the subordinate clause) modifies or depends upon some word or words in the other (the principal clause). A compound sentence contains at least two clauses of equal rank or value in the sentence {coordinate clauses). THE PARTS OF SPEECH A noun is the name of a person, place, or thing. Nouns have two numbers, singular and plural; and (in English) three cases, nominative, possessive, and objective. The nominative is the form which is the subject of a clause. 16 PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR 17 [There are also the predicate nominative, the nominative by direct address, the nominative absolute (in English), and the nominative in apposition.] The possessive is the form which indicates possession or ownership, and modifies another noun. The objective is the form which is the object of a verb or preposition. [There are also the adverbial objective, the objective complement, the objective subject of an infinitive, and the objective in apposition.] A pronoun is a word used in place of a noun. Pronouns have number and case like nouns; gender, to indicate sex ; and person. The first person indicates the speaker ; the second person, the person spoken to ; the third person, that spoken of. Substantive is the name given to any word or group of words used as a noun. An adjective is a word which limits or describes a substantive.^ Adjectives have three degrees of co^nparison, positive, comparative, and superlative. A verb is a word that can declare something. Verbs have tefise, mood, voice, person, and number. Tense indicates the time of the statement. Mood indicates the manner of the statement. Voice indicates whether the subject acts or is acted upon. Person in verbs represents the person of the subject (see pronouns). Number in verbs represents the number of the subject. An adverb is a word used to modify a verb, adjective, or another adverb. Adverbs have the same three degrees of comparison as adjectives. A preposition shows the relation between a following substantive (its object) and some other word in the clause. 18 BELLUM HELVETICUM A preposition with its object forms a prepositional phrase. A phrase may be used as an adjective, an adverb, or a noun. A conjunction is a word which connects sentences or parts of sentences. A coordinate conjunction connects words, phrases, or clauses of equal rank or value. A subordinate conjunction connects a subordinate clause with a principal clause, or with some word in a principal clause. A conjunctive adverb is one that serves at the same time as an adverb and a subordinate conjunction. INFLECTION The changes undergone by a word by which it expresses its meaning and its relation to other words are called its inflection. In nouns, pronouns, and adjectives, inflection is called declension. In verbs it is called conjugation. Adjectives and adverbs may also have comparison (see above). INTRODUCTORY LESSON This lesson is to be read over in class and thoroughly explained, not assigned for recitation. Eeference should be made to it con- tinually during the early lessons. But no amount of explanation or rules can teach correct pronunciation. It can be done only by correct and constant practice, following the accurate pronunciation of the teacher. The Latin language, the language of the ancient Romans, derives its name from the Latins, who once inhabited Latium in Italy. The modern languages of Italy, France, Spain, and Portugal are mainly derived from the Latin, and about sixty per cent of the v^ords of the English tongue have a similar origin. THE ALPHABET 1. The alphabet is the same as ours, except that there is no j or w. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, y. The rest of the letters are consonants. METHODS OF PRONUNCIATION 2. In the English method the letters are given sounds selected from the many sounds belonging to them in English. The Roman method is now almost universally adopted in this country, and is to be recommended. It is as close an approximation as can now be made to the pronunciation of the Romans themselves. In ordinary practice we recognize no exceptions in the pronunciation of individual words, but follow fixed rules. 19 20 BELLUM IIELVETICUM QUANTITY OF VOWELS 3. The quantity of a vowel is the length of time given to its pronunciation. Compare the first syllables in alight and twilight. The a is short, and the i long. In Latin every vowel is either short or long. The long vowels take twice as long to pronounce as the short. This point in Latin pronunciation is too likely to be neglected, because we do not make much of quantity (in this sense) in English. In this book every long vowel is marked ("). Diphthongs are always long and are unmarked. Otherwise unmarked vowels are short. The student should be very careful to give twice as much time to the long vowels as to the short. SOUNDS OF VOWELS 4. It will be noticed in the following table that in some cases the short and long vowels have the same sound, in others a slightly different sound. a = first vowel in aha' a = second vowel in aha' e = e in net e = ey in they i = i in pin i = i in machine = in obey o = oh u = 00 in foot u = 00 in hoot y = French u or German U, intermediate between oo and ee. SOUNDS OF DIPHTHONGS 5. The following are the diphthongs which appear in Latin : ae = ai in aisle ai = ai in aisle oe = oi in oil ei = ei in eight au = ow in how oi = oi in oil eu has no English equivalent. Eun together in one syllable the sounds eh'-oo. INTRODUCTORY LESSON 21 ui has no English equivalent. Eun together in one syllable the sounds oo'-ee. The diphthong appears in huius, huic, cuius, and cui. When the consonant i (=j) stands between two vowels, as in huius, eius, cuius, and maior, though i was written only once, it was pronounced twice, as if the spelling were huiius, eiius, cuiius, and maiior. The first i makes a diphthong with the preceding vowel. The second i is the consonant, pronounced like y in yet. SOUNDS OF CONSONANTS 6. The consonants are, in general, pronounced as in English; but the following points should be noted: c and g are always hard, as in can, go i (consonant) = 2/ in yet n before c, g, q, and x = ng in sing r pronounced distinctly. s as in ilfiis, never as in tlnese t as in iin, never as in nation v = w x = 'ks ch, ph, th = c, p, t bs, bt = ps, pt qu = qu in quart ngu = ngu in anguish su in suadeo, suavis, suesco, and their compounds = sw. When consonants are doubled, as in mitto, annus, both consonants should be sounded, as they are in out-talk, pen-lnife. In English, we sound only one consonant in ditty, penny. 7. i is generally a consonant between vowels, and at the begin- ning of a word before a vowel. In compounds of iacio, the form icio was written. It is commonly believed that in these words the eon- sonant i was pronounced, though not written, before vowel i; as deicio, pronounced as if deiicio; abicio, as if abiicio. 22 BELLUM HELVETICUM SYLLABLES 8. Every Latin word has as many syllables as it has vowels or diphthongs. a. A single consonant between two vowels is pronounced with the second vowel. For example, fe-ro, a-go, mo-ne. 6. The combination of a mute and a liquid (b, c, d, g, p, t, ch, ph, or th, followed by 1 or r) is pronounced together so easily that it goes with the following vowel like a single consonant. For example, pa-tris, a-gri. Compare this division of syllables with the English word consecrate. c. Any other combination of two or more consonants is divided before the last consonant or before the combination of a mute and a liquid; as mit-to, dic-tus, magis-ter, magis-tri. QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES 9. Syllables are long or short, according to the time taken in pronouncing them. a. A syllable is long by nature if it contains a long vowel or diph- thong. For example, both syllables of laudo. h. A syllable is long by position if its vowel is followed by any two consonants except a mute and a liquid, or by one of the double consonants, X and z. For example, the first syllable of lingua, the first two syllables of appello, and ex. Note. The quantity of a short vowel is not changed by this position: est is est; the syllable is long, but the vowel is short. The time taken in pronouncing a consonant at the end of the syllable before the consonant at the beginning of the next syllable (§8, c), lengthens the syllable. This will be felt if the consonants are pronounced distinctly in mit-to (§6), an-nus, dic-tus, par-tes, nos-ter. ACCENT 10. Words of two syllables are accented on the first syllable. For example, om'nis. INTRODUCTORY LESSON 23 11. Words of more than two syllables are accented on the penult (the syllable- next to the last) if it is long, other- wise on the antepenult (the syllable before the penult). For example, divi'sa, appel'lo, in'colunt. 12. When an enclitic (a word that has no accent of its own) is joined to another word, the accent falls on the syllable immediately preceding the enclitic. For example, Gallia'que. EXERCISES IN PRONUNCIATION 13. In the following passage divide each word into syllables, tell the quantity of each syllable, and if long, in which way it is long (see §9, a, ft), determine what syllable is accented, pronounce each syllable separately, and finally the whole word, properly accented. The first few lines should be taken up in the classroom with the pupils; this may be done either before or after the rules of the lesson have been learned. Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres, quarum unam incolunt Belgae, aliam AquitanT, tertiam qui ipsorum lingua Celtae, nostra Galli appellantur. Hi omnes lingua, insti- ttitis, legibus inter se differunt. Gallos ab AquTtanIs Garumna fltimen, a BelgTs Matrona et Sequana dividit. Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod a cuM atque humanitate provinciae longissime absunt, minimeque ad eos mercatores saepe commeant atque ea quae ad effeminandos animos pertinent important; proxi- mique sunt Germanis, qui trans Rhenum incolunt, quibus- cum continenter bellum gerunt. Qua de causa Helvetii quo- que reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt, quod fere cotidianTs proeliTs cum Germanis contendunt, cum aut suTs flnibus eos prohibent aut ipsi in eorum finibus bellum gerunt. 24 BELLUM HELVETICUM PRACTICAL DIRECTIONS FOR PRONUNCIATION 1. Gal'-li-a: all vowels short; both a's like final a as in Cuba; both I's sounded, est: just as -est in digest; the syllable is long (§9, h), but this does not make the vowel long (compare §3 and §9, Note). om'-nis: om-, as in obey; i as in pin. di-vi'-sa: dee-wee' -sa; s as in said; a as in Cuba, in: as in. par'-tes: par- as in party, but with a very clearly sounded r; -tes as tas- in taste, tres: as trace. 2. qua'-rum: Tcwah'-room; oo as in foot, u'-nam: oo'-nam; oo as in boot; a, see §4. in'-co-lunt: for vowels see §4. Bel'-gae: bel- as bell; -gae as guy. a'-li-am: for vowels see §4. A-qui-ta'-ni: a-kwee-tah'-nee; first a short, ter'-ti-am: e has its regular sound, as in net; English pronounces er, ir, ur all alike^ Latin gives the proper sound to each vowel; both t's hard, qui: Jcivee. ip-s6'-rum: for vowels see §4. lin'-gua: lin'-gwah; a as final a in aha'. Cel'-tae: c hard; -tae as tie. nos'-tra: a, see lingua, ap-pel-lan'-tur: sound both p's and both I's; the p's should be distinct; the I's should be run together. 3. hi: as he. om'-nes: es as ace. in-sti-tu'-tis: in-, een; -tis, with i=ee. le'-gi-bus: le- as lay; g hard; -bus not as in omnibus, but with u = oo, as in foot, in'-ter: -ter as first syllable in tertiam; see above, se: as say. dif'-fe-runt: both f's are sounded, but are run together. BELLUM HELVETICUM LESSON I FIRST DECLENSION THE LATIN CASES 14. Latin nouns have six cases. The names of these cases and their general English equivalents are as follows: I ATIN CASES ENGLISH EQUIVALENTS Nominative Nominative Genitive J Possessive \ Objective with of Dative C Indirect Objective \ Objective with to or for A causative Objective Vocative Nominative by Direct Address Ablative Objective with dy, from, in, or with The English equivalents of the genitive are merely different ways of expressing the same idea; thus, the hoy's father = the father of the hoy. The same thing is true of the equivalents given for the dative; thus, he gave his son the hook = he gave the hooJc to his son. On the other hand, the ablative may represent any one of several different ideas. 25 26 BELLUM HELVETICUM DECLENSION OF NOUNS 15. There are five declensions of Latin nouns. The end- ing of the genitive indicates to what declension a noun belongs. 16. FIRST DECLENSION porta, gate CASE FORM Norn, porta Gen. portae Dat. portae Ace. portam Voc. porta Abl. porta ENGLISH TRANSLATION SINGULAR (a, the) gate; subject {(a, the) gate's ^ of (a, the) gate J fto (a, the) gate "1 \for (a, the) gate j (a, the) gate; object (or you) gate by, from, in, with (a, the) gate CASE ENDING -a -ae -ae -am -a -a Nam. portae Gen. portarum Dat. portis Ace. portas Voc. portae Abl. portis PLURAL (the) gates; subject J (the) gates' ^ \of (the) gates J fto (the) gates ^ Xfor (the) gates] (the) gates; object (or you) gates by, from, in, with (the) gates -ae -arum -is -as -ae -is 17. Notice that certain forms are alike, — Nom. sing.1 Voc. sing. J port-a Gen. sing. Dat. sing. Nom. plu. Voc. plu. port-ae Dat. plu.^ Abl. plu.]"'"*- is LESSON II 27 18. The base of a word is the part that remains un- changed in inflection. The base of porta is port. 19. The various endings that are added to the base in declension are called the case endings. The case endings of the first declension are printed in heavy type in the above table. LESSON II FIRST DECLENSION— Continued 20. VOCABULARY Belga, -ae, a {the) Belgian. causa, -ae, reason. Celta, -ae, a {the) Celt. copia, -ae, plenty, supply. fuga, -ae, flight. Gallia, -ae, Gaul, the name of the country which, roughly speaking, is now modern France, lingua, -ae, language. porta, -ae, gate. provincia, -ae, province. silva, -ae, forest. ENGLISH DERIVATIVES 21. One great value of the study of Latin is that it helps one to understand the meaning of many English words. For example, we may recognize the fact that certain English words are derived from certain Latin words; or, again, if we know the Latin word from which a particular English word is derived, we recognize the original and, approximately, the present meaning of the English word. Thus, in the above list, the first three words should sug- 28 BELLUM HELVETICUM gest the English words Belgian, cause, Celt. What English words are derived or descended from porta and prdvincia? The English words copious and linguist are indirectly- derived from words in this list. What would you judge to be their approximate meaning? EXERCISES 22. 1. Write the declension of any three of the words in §20, placing a hyphen between the base and the ending. 2. Write the meaning ,of each form of one of them. 3. Write the nominative and genitive, both singular and plural, of each of the nouns in §20. 23. Of the following forms, give first the number and case, and then translate: 1. Galliam. This is shown by the ending to be accusative singular, and the translation will therefore be Gaul, objective. If it were in a sentence the English equivalent Gaul would be made objective by putting it after the verb. 2. Provinciae. This form may be genitive singular, dative singular, nominative plural, or vocative plural; there is no way of telling which it is here. In such cases always give a separate translation for each one of their possible forms. Note.. If this word were in a sentence, we could probably tell which one of these four forms it would be. So in English, if we see the word ** sheep" standing alone, we do not know whether it is singular or plural, nominative or objective. But if the word "sheep" is used with the word **are," we say at once that it is nominative plural. LESSON III 29 3. Belgarum. 4. Silva. 5. Fuga. 6. Celtis. 7. Causas. 8. Lingua. 9. Portae. 10. Copiam. 24. Write the Latin for the following words and phrases, first noting the number and the Latin case that will trans- late the English case or phrase : 1. To the Belgians. The noun in this phrase is plural, hence the Latin word will be plural. No separate word is needed in Latin for "to," because the dative case may be translated by to with the objective. So, just as this phrase might be expressed without a preposition in English by making it an indirect object (he gave this to the Belgians = he gave the Belgians this), the single Latin word, the dative plural of Belga, translates the whole English phrase. 2. Of the Celts. 3. By a gate. 4. The flight (objective). 5. Gaul (nominative). 6. In the language. 7. The forests (objective). 8. Celts. 9. With reasons. 10. The prov- ince's. 11. Of the supply. 12. Languages (nominative). 13. For the Celt. LESSON III PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION 25. There are four conjugations of Latin verbs. The first person singular present indicative and the present in- finitive, taken together, indicate to what conjugation a verb belongs. These two forms constitute the first two principal parts of a Latin verb, and must be known in order to con- jugate it. 30 BELLUM HELVETICUM 26. PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION Principal parts: laudd, laudare, praise Singular: laudo, / praise, am praising, do praise laudas, you praise, are praising, do praise laudat, he (she, it) praises, is praising, does praise Plural: laudamus, we praise, are praising, do praise laudatis, you praise, are praising, do praise laudant, they praise, are praising, do praise 27. The vowel before' the re in the second of the prin- cipal parts of a verb is the sign of the conjugation. If this vowel is a, the verb belongs to the fi^st conjugation. 28. The present base of this verb is laud, found by dropping the last three letters from the present infinitive active (the second principal part). 29. Except in the first person singular, the endings con- sist of the characteristic vowel of the conjugation, a (§27), and the personal endings given below (§30). 30. The personal endings are so called because they take the place of personal pronouns. They are nearly alike for all tenses and all conjugations, and should be learned sep- arately, as follows: SINGULAR PLURAL First person *o, *m, I mus, we Second person s, (thou) you tis, you Third person *t, he, she, it *nt, they •A vowel before these endings is always short. LESSON III 31 LATIN CASE ENDINGS COMPARED WITH ENGLISH WORD ORDER 31. The case of a noun in English is generally deter- mined by its position in the sentence ; e. g., the Belgians (nom.) praise the Celts (obj.) the Celts (nom.) praise the Belgians (obj.) ' But in Latin the case is denoted by the ending; e. g., Belgae laudant Celtas Celtas laudant Belgae In both these sentences Belgae is nominative and Celtas accusative, and therefore the meaning of both sentences is the same. RULES The following rules of syntax are almost the same in Latin as in English: 32. RULE. The subject of a finite verb is put in the nominative case.* 33. RULE. The direct object of a verb is put in the accusative case, 34. RULE. A finite verb agrees with its subject in person and number.^ 35. RULE. A noun which modifies another noun and does not mean the same person or thing is put in the genitive. * A finite verb is one that has person and number. tNouns arc third person. 32 BELLUM HELVETICUM 36. VOCABULARY appello, appellare, call. comparo, ccmparare, prepare. laudo, laudare, praise. occupo, occupare, seize. supero, superare, overcome, conquer. What English word is derived from occupo? What does the word appellation mean ? What is a laudatory speech ? EXERCISES 37. 1. Write the conjugation of the present indicative of any three of the verbs in §36, placing a hyphen between the base and the ending. 2. Write the meaning of each form of one of them. 38. Translate the following sentences into English: 1. Appellant; superatis; occupamus. 2. Linguam laudat. 3. Superant. 4. Belgae superant. Note. When translating a Latin verb that has its subject expressed, omit the English pronoun which would be the subject if the verb stood alone. Thus superant means they conquer, but Belgae superant means the Belgians conquer. 5. Belgae provinciam superant. 6. Portas Celtae occu- pant. 7. Pr5vinciam Galliam appellatis. 8. Celtae provin- cias superant. 9. Silvas laudas. 10. Copiam comparo. 39. Translate the following sentences into Latin. In a Latin sentence the verb is usually placed last. 1. You (sing.) are preparing. 2. You (plu.) are conquer- ing. 3. The Celts are conquering. 4. They are conquering Gaul. 5. I am seizing the province. 6. He praises the forest. 7. They call Gaul a province. LESSON IV 33 LESSON IV 40. SECOND DECLENSION murus, wall CASE SINGULAR CASE ENDING Nom, murus -US Gen, muri -i Bat. muro -6 Ace, murum -um Voc. mure -e Abl. muro -6 PLURAL C. ASE ENDIN muri -i murdrum -orum muris -is muros -OS muri -y muris -is The base of this noun is mur. See §18. The cases have the same meanings in all declensions, and the pupil may therefore translate the different forms for himself. Note 1. In all Latin nouns the vocative is like the nominative except in the singular of nouns declined like murus. Note 2. Nouns ending in -ius often form the genitive and vocative singular with -i (instead of -ii and -ie). 41. VOCABULARY amicus, -i, friend. Germanus, -i, a {the) German. gladius, -i, sword. Helvetius, -i, a (the) Helvetian, or ancient Swiss. legatus, -i, lieutenant, st a f -officer. murus, -i, wall. numerus, -i, numher. et, coordinate conjunction, and. MURUS GALLICUS 34 BELLUM HELVETICUM Give an English word derived from numerus, and de- fine it. Give the meaning of the italicized words in the following expressions: an amicable agreement; a mural painting ; the gladiators of Rome. EXEBCISES 42. 1. Write the declension of any two of the nouns in §41, placing a hyphen between the base and the endings. 2. Write the declension of the expression porta et murus. 3. Write the declension of the expression legatus et Belga. 4. Write the nominative and genitive, both singular and plural, of all the nouns in §41. 43. Translate into English: 1. Helvetio; murorum ; GermanTs. 2, Gladios; numeri; amicum. 3. Helvetius Germanum laudat. 4. Belgas laudat legatus. 5. Celtam gladio superat. 6. Muros Helvetii occupant. 7. Numerum Helvetiorum et Germanorum com- paramus. 8. Helvetios amicos appellas. 44. Translate into Latin: 1. To the German; to the Belgian. 2. With a sword; with a reason. 3. Of the lieutenant; of the lieutenants. 4. With walls. 5. I am praising the Helvetians. 6. You (sing.) are praising a number of friends. 7. We are seizing the walls and the gates. LESSON V 35 LESSON V SECOND DECLENSION— Continued PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION 45. SECOND DECLENSION— Continued ager, field puer, hoy vir, man case endings SINGULAR Nom. ager puer vir Gen. agri pueri viri -i Bat. agrd puero viro -5 Ace. agrum puerum virum -um Voc. ager puer vir AM. agro puero PLURAL viro -5 Nom. agri pueri viri -I Gen. agrorum puerorum virorum -drum Bat. agris pueris viris -is Ace. agros pueros viros OS Voc. agri pueri viri i All. agris pueris viris -is Notice that except for the nominative and vocative singular, the endings of these nouns are the same as those of murus; that the bases, agr, puer, and vir, are found in the genitive singular (see §18); and that the vocative singular is like the nominative singular (see §40, Note 1). PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION 46. Prrncipal parts: mone5, monere, warn moneo, 1 warn, am warning, do warn mones, you warn, etc. monet, he {she, it) warns, etc. monemus, we warn, etc, monetis, you warn, etc. monent, they warn, etc. 36 BELLUM HELVETICUM The e before the final re of the second principal part is the sign of the second conjugation. The present base of this verb is mon. See §28. The personal endings are the same as in the first conjugation, but the vowel before them is different. 47. VOCABULARY ager, agri, field, farm. puer, pueri, hoy. vir, viri, man. habeo, habere, have. moneo, monere, tvarn. prohibeo, prohibere, Tceep away. teneo, tenere, hold. ' caesar video, videre, see. Give English words derived from the bases of ager and prohibeo. What are the approximate meanings of the adjectives puerile and virile? Of monitor f Of tenacious? EXERCISES 48. "Write, with the meanings, the conjugation of the present tense of teneo and of habeo, placing a hyphen be- tween the base and the endings. 2. Write the conjugation of the present tense of appello et video. 49. Translate into English: 1. Tenet; prohibemus; vides. 2. Habetis; monent. 3. Legatus murum tenet. 4. Puer Germanum videt. 5. Viri pueros agris prohibent. 6. Fugam Helvetiorum video. 7. Belgae agros habent. 8. Copiam habemus. 9. Silvas et agros provinciae videtis. LESSON VI 50. Translate into Latin: 37 1. You (sing.) are warning; we see. 2. You (plu.) have; she holds. 3. I have a field. 4. The lieutenant is holding the walls and the gates. 5. He sees the boy's friends. 6. "We are keeping away the men from the province. LESSON VI 51. SECOND DECLENSION— Continued bellum, war SINGULAR CASE ENDINGS PLURAL CASE ENDINGS Nom. bellum -um bella -a Gen. belli -i bellorum -drum Bat. bello -6 bellis -is Ace. bellum -um bella -a Voc. bellum -um bella -a Ahl. bello -6 bellis -is The base of this noun is "bell. Compare its endings carefully with those of murus. 52. VOCABULARY bellum, -i, war. frumentum, -i, grain. initium, -i, beginning. oppidum, -i, town. proelium, -i, battle. n6n, adverb, not. do, dare, give. This is inflected like a verb of the first conjugation, except that the a is usually short. The present is do, das, dat; damus, datis, dant. What is the meaning of initial? Of initiation f 38 BELLUM HELVETICUM 53. RULE, The indirect object of a verb is put in the dative, EXERCISES 54. 1. Write the declension of frumentum and of proeli- um, placing a hyphen between the base and the endings. 2. "Write the declension of the expression murus et porta et bellum. 3. AYrite the nominative and genitive, both singu- lar and plural, of the nouns in §52. 55. Translate into English: 1. Initium proeliT ; copia frumenti ; agri provinciae. 2. Frumentum puer5 do. 3. Oppida Galliae tenemus. 4. Viros oppidis non prohibent. 5. Gladium habet vir. 6. Frumen- tum viri amico dat. 7. Initium belli vides. 56. Translate into Latin: 1. With grain; by wars; the beginnings of the battles. 2. Provinces and towns (nom.) ; provinces and towns (ace). 3. They do not see the grain. 4. He is giving the sword to a friend. 5. You (plu.) give a supply of grain to the boys. LESSON VII GENDER ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST-AND-SECOND DECLENSION 57. There are three genders in Latin as in English, — masculine, feminine, and neuter. In English we have only what is called natural gender, masculine and feminine nouns being, as a rule, only those which are names of objects that have sex. LESSON VII 39 58. In Latin there is this natural gender in the case of many words; but in the case of most words there is grammatical gender. The nouns of this latter class are masculine, feminine, or neuter according to rules which appear to us to be arbitrary. RULES FOR GENDER 59. Nouns of the first declension are feminine, except names of mate beings. Thus Belga and Celta are masculine. 60. Nouns of t/ie second declension ending In -um are neuter: others are masculine. 61. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES In English an adjective does not vary its form most adjectives have gender, number, and case. in Latin longus, -a, -um, long Masculine Feminine SINGULAR Neuter Nom. longus ' longa longum Gen. long! longae longi Bat. longo longae longo Ace. longum Ion gam longum Voc. longe longa longum AU. longo longa PLURAL longS Nom. longi longae longa Gen. longorum longarum longorum Dat. longis longis longis Ace. longos long§,s longa Voc. longi longae longa AU. longis longis longis 40 BELLUM HELVETIC UM It is evident at once that in an adjective of this sort the masculine has the endings of murus, the feminine the endings of porta, and the neuter the endings of bellum. This is therefore called an adjective of the first-and-second declension. Its base is long. 62. VOCABULARY altus, -a, -um, high, deep. latus, -a, -um, tcide, hroad. longus, -a, -um, long. magnus, -a, -um, great, large. proximus, -a, -um, nearest, very near. tertius, -a, -um, third. Give English words derived from altus, latus, longus and magnus. What is the meaning of proximity f 63. USE OF ADJECTIVES RULE. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, number , and case. Write in Latin: the nearest Belgians (nom.). Since, according to the rule, the form of the adjective will depend upon the noun, write first the noun in its^ proper case and number: Belgae. This is masculine (§59), plural, nominative. The adjective required will therefore be the masculine, plural, nominative of proximus, -a, -um, which is proximi. Therefore Belgae proximi is the required Latin. Other examples. To the third Celt: Celtae (mas. sing, dat.) tertio. Of the great icars: bellorum (neut. plu. gen.) magnorum. The nearest gates (ace.) : portas (fem. plu. ace.) proximas. EXERCISES 64. Decline together longus murus ; lata porta; magnum oppidum; ager latus; Belga proximus. LESSON VIII 65. Translate into English: 41 1. AgrI lati. 2. Oppidi magni. 3. Oppida magna. 4. Celtae proximl. 5. Celtae proximo. 6. Proximorum puero- rum. 7. Numeros magnos. 8. GJadio longo. 9. Causam tertiam. 10. Altis murls. 66. Translate into Latin: 1. Of the third man. 2. With a long wall. 3. The great gates (nom.). 4. The nearest Helvetians (nom.). 5. The nearest Celts (nom.). 6. By wide forests. 7. Of the great battles. 8. To the nearest Belgian. 9. Of the high walls. 10. The nearest towns (ace). LESSON vin ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST-AND-SECOND DECLENSION- Continued PRESENT INDICATIVE OF SUM 67. ADJECTIVES IN -ER OF THE FIRST-AND-SECOND DECLENSION aeger, aegra, aegrum, ill, sick SINGULAR PLURAL Nom. Gen. Bat. Ace. VOG. AU. Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fein. aeger aegra aegrum aegri aegrae aegri aegro aegrae aegro aegrum aegram aegrum aeger aegra aegrum aegro aegra aegro Neut aegri aegrae aegra aegrorum aegrarum aegrorum aegris aegris aegris aegros aegras aegra aegri aegrae aegra aegris aegris aegris 42 BELLUM HELVETICUM liber, libera, Uberum, free SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. liber libera liberum liberi liberae libera Gen. liberi liberae liberi liberorum liberarum liberor Dat. libero liberae libero liberis liberis liberis Ace. llberum liberam liberum liberos llberas libera Voc. liber libera liberum liberi liberae libera Abl libero libera libero liberis liberis liberis 68. The only forms in the declension of aeger and liber that are different in endings from longus are the nominative and vocative singular masculine. The bases are aegr and liber, which are shown in the feminine and neuter forms of the nominative singular. PRESENT INDICATIVE OF SUM sum, esse, he SINGULAR sum, I am es, (thou art) you are est, he (she, it) is, there is PLURAL sumus, we are estis, you are sunt, they are, there are 70. VOCABULARY aeger, aegra, aegrum, ill, sicTc. cotidianus, -a, -um, daily. divisus, -a, -um, divided. liber, libera, liberum, free. noster, nostra, nostrum, our. reliquus, reliqua, reliquum, remaining, the-rest-of. sum, esse, he. Give words derived from divisus and liber. What is the meaning of relic? FIRST REVIEW LESSON 43 EXERCISES 71. Decline together ager noster; aeger amicus; liber puer; liber Belga. 72. Translate into English: 1. Helvetius est aeger; Helvetii sunt aegri. 2. Silva magna provineiae; silva magnae provinciae. 3. Sumus amici proximorum Germanorum ; sumus amid proximi Ger- manorum. 4. OppidTs nostris Helvetios non prohibemus. 5. Belgae reliquT sunt llberT. 6. Proelia belli sunt cotidiana. 7. Gallia est divisa. 8. Gladium longum viro damus. 73. Translate into Latin: 1. He is the sick friend of the Helvetian. 2. He is the friend of the sick Helvetian. 3. He is warning the nearest Belgians. 4. He is giving fields to our friends. 5. The Celt sees the nearest German. 6. The nearest Celt sees the German. 7. There are daily battles. 8. The Belgians are divided. 9. The lieutenant is free. 10. We are giving the men the remaining grain. FIRST REVIEW LESSON 74. Memory Work. 1. Rules for quantity of syllables (§9). 2. Rules for accent (§§10-12). 3. First declension (nouns) (§16). 4. Second declension (nouns) (§§40, 45, 51). 5. Adjectives of the first-and-second declension (§§61,67), 6. Rules for gender (§§59, 60). 44 BELLUM HELVETICUM 7. Present indicative of sum (§69). 8. Present indicative active of first conjugation (§26). 9. Present indicative active of second conjugation (§46). 75. Latin-English Vocabulary. 1. Give the nominative singular, genitive singular, gender, and meaning of the following nouns : ager frumentum initium porta amicus fuga legatus proelium Belga Gallia lingua provincia bellum Germanus murus puer causa gladlus Humerus silva Celta Helvetius oppidum vir 2. Give the entire nominative singular and the meaning of the following adjectives: aeger, altus, cotidianus, divisus, latus, liber, longus, magnus, noster, proximus, reliquus, tertius. 3. Give the first two principal parts and the meaning of the following verbs: appello, compare, do, habeo, laudo, moneo, occupo, prohibeo, sum, supero, teneo, video. 76. English-Latin Vocabulary, Give the first form of the Latin for the following words: am flight keep away reason and forest language remaining are free large the rest of battle friend lieutenant see beginning gate long seize Belgian boy broad call Celt conquer daily deep divided field LESSON IX Gaul man German nearest give not grain number great our have overcome Helvetian plenty high praise hold prepare is province 45 sick supply sword third town very near wall war warn wide LESSON IX THIRD DECLENSION FIRST DIVISION— GENITIVE PLURAL IN -UM 11, MASCULINE AND FEMININE NOUNS c5nstQ, M., mercator, m., homd, m., f., legid, f., case consul trader human being legion endings Norn. consul mercator homo legio Gen. consulis mercatoris hominis legionis -is Dat. consul! mercatori homini legioni -i Ace, consulem mercatorem hominem legionem -em Foe. consul mercator homo legio Ahl. consule mercatore homine legione -e Nom. eonsules mercatores homines legiones -es Gen. consulum mercatorum hominum legionum -um Dat. consulibus mercatoribus hominibus legionibus -ibus Ace. eonsules mercatores homines legiones -es Voc. eonsules mercatores homines legiones -es Ail. consulibus mercatoribus hominibus legionibus -ibus 46 BELLUM HELVETICUM lex, P., civitas, p., virtus, p., miles, M., CASE law state manliness soldier ENDINGS Norn. lex civitas virtiis miles -s* Gen, legis civitatis virtutis militis -is Bat. legi civitati virtiiti militi -i Ace. legem civitatem virtutem militem -em Voc. lex civitas virtus miles -s* AU. lege civitate virtute milite -e Norn. leges civitates virtutes milites -gs Gen. legum civitatum virtutum militum -um Bat. legibus civitatibus virtutibus militibus -ibus Ace. leges civitates virtutes milites -es Voc. leges civitates virtutes milites -es AU. legibus civitatibus virtutibus militibus -ibus 78. In the third declension both the nominative and the genitive singular must be committed to memory in order to be able to decline a word. The base is found by dropping the ending is from the gen- itive singular. After the base is found, the same endings are added to it as for consul. The vocative is always like the nominative. 79. VOCABULARY civitas, civitatis, f., state. consul, consulis, m., consul, the title given to each of the two execu- tive officers of the Roman republic. homd, hominis, m. or f., man, in the sense of human heing. legio, legionis, f., legion; a division of the Eoman army which in actual service had about 3600 men. lex, legis, f., law. mercator, mercatoris, m., trader. miles, militis, m., soldier. virtus, virtutis, f., manliness, bravery. * In lex, x=g's. LESSON IX 47 Give English words derived from the bases of lex and miles, and from virtus and mercator. EXERCISES 80. 1. Decline together the words meaning our legion; the nearest man (homo) ; a great state. 2. Give the memo- randa* of all the words in §79. 81. 1. C5nsuli; mercatorem. 2. Lege; hominum. 3. Legionibus; milites. 4. Civitatis; virtute. 5. Virtutem militis laudamus. 6. Consul portas oppidi legione oceupat. 7. Homines Celtas lingua Galliae appellatis. 8. Reliquae civitates sunt liberae. 9. Leges Galliae non laudas. 10. Hominibus c5nsul frumentum dat. 82. 1. To the trader ; with the legions. 2. Of the man ; of the laws. 3. To the consuls ; the states. 4. The divided states (nom.) ; the divided states (ace). 5. Our consuls and our laws. 6. He is giving grain to the soldier. 7. The bravery of the legions is not great. ^Memoranda is the term which will be used to designate the nominative singular, genitive singular, gender, nominative plural, genitive plural, and meaning. 48. BELLUM IIELVETICUM LESSON X THIRD DECLENSION-Continued FIRST DIVISION (Continued)— GENITIVE PLURAL IN -UM 83. NEUTER NOUNS flumen, n., opus, N., tempus, N., iter, N., CASE river icorTc time journey ENDINGS Norn. flumen opus tempus iter Gen. flu minis operis temporis itineris -is Bat. flumini operi tempori itineri i Ace. flumen opus tempus iter Voc. flumen opus tempus iter AU. flumine opere tempore itinere -e Norn. flumina opera tempera itinera -a Gen. fluminum operum temporum itinerum -um Dat. fluminibus operibus temporibus itineribus -ibus Ace. flumina opera tempera itinera -a Voc. flumina opera tempera itinera -a AU. fluminibus operibus temporibus itineribus -ibus 84. In the declension of these nouns two principles are involved : 1. In the third declension both the nominative and the genitive singular must be committed to memory. See §78. 2. In all neuter nouns (of whatever declension) the nominative, accusative, and vocative are alike, and in the plural they end in short a. Compare the declension of bellum, §51. 85. RULE. An appositive or a predicate noun agrees in case with the word it explains. LESSON X 49 86. VOCABULARY flumen, fluminis, n., river. iter, itineris, n., journey, march, road. opus, operis, n., work. tempus, temporis, n., time. Garumna, -ae, *m., the Garonne, a river in southwestern Gaul. Matrona, -ae, *m., the Marne, a tributary of the Seine from the northeast. Sequana, -ae, *m., the Seine, on which modern Paris is situated. Give the meanings of the words, flume, itinerary, operate, temporary , and show their connection with words in the vocabulary. EXERCISES 87. 1. Decline together the words meaning our work; the river Seine; a long march. 2. Give the memoranda of all the words in §86. 88. 1. Flumine; itinera. 2. Operibus; temporum. 3. Itinera legionum ; opus mercatorum. 4. Opus est magnum, et tempus reliquum non longum est. 5. Legatus, amicus consulis, est proximus. 6. Gallia est divlsa fluminibus. 7. Garumna et Matrona et Sequana sunt flumina Galliae. 89. 1. Of the river; for the journey. 2. Work (ace); times (ace). 3. The beginning of our work. 4. The river is wide. 5. Our time is divided. 6. We are warning the traders, our friends. 7. The Gauls are not our friends. * All names of rivers are masculine in Latin, 50 BELLUM HELVETICUM LESSON XI THIRD DECLENSION-Continued SECOND DIVISION— GENITIVE PLURAL IN -lUM 90. MASCULINE AND FEMININE NOUNS pars, F., part hostis, M. or r., enemy Nom. pars / hostis Gen. partis hostis Dot parti . hosti Ace. partem hostem Voc. pars hostis Ahl. parte hoste Nom. partes hostes Gen. partium hostium Dat. partibus hostibus Aec. partes (-is) hostes (-is) Voc. partes hostes All. partibus hostibus 91. Notice that nouns whose genitive plural ends in -ium may also have the ending -is in the accusative plural. Some also have the ending -im in the accusative singular, and -i in the ablative singular. These forms will be noted as they occur. Note. Rules will be given later for determining what nouns have the ending -ium in the genitive plural. All the nouns in the vocabulary below are declined like pars or hostis. 92. VOCABULARY collis, collis, m., Mil. finis, finis, m., abl. fine or fini, end, boundary; plural, territory. hostis, hostis, m. or f., enemy. Not a collective noun in Latin, navis, navis, f., abl. often navi, ship. LESSON XII , 51 mons, mentis, m., mountain. pars, partis, f., part. pons, pontis, m., bridge. Give English words derived from the last six Latin words. EXERCISES 93. Decline the expressions collis et mons; navis et mercator; pars magna. 94. 1. Navibus; collium. 2. Pontis ; monte. 3. Finis; fines ; finis. 4. Ilostes oppida occupant. 5. Partem navium video. 6. Colles provinciae non magni sunt. 7. Hostes ponte prohibemus. 8. Montes Galliae videtis. 9. Partem frumenti nostri hostibus damus. 10. Belgae hostes gladiis superant. 95. 1. Of the hill; with the ships. 2. By the bridge; of the mountains. 3. The end (ace.) ; territory (ace). 4. Part of the great work; a great part of the work. 5. The ships of the enemy (plu.) ; the nearest mountains. 6. The bridges are long. 7. Our territory is wide. LESSON XII THIRD DECLENSION-Continued SECOND DIVISION (Continued)— GENITIVE PLURAL IN -lUM 96. NEUTER NOUNS mare, n., vectigal, n., mille, sea tax thousand CASE ENDINGS Nom. mare vectigal -e,— Gen. maris vectigalis (mille, an -is Bat. mari vectigali adj. in the -i Ace. mare vectigal singular.) -e,— Voe. mare vectigal -e,— Ahl mari vectigali -i 52 BELLUM HELVETIC UM Nom. maria vectlgalia milia -la Gen. mariuin vectigalium milium -inm Bat. maribus vectigalibus milibus -ibus Ace. niaria vectlgalia milia -la Voc. maria vectlgalia milia -la Ahl. maribus vectigalibus milibus -ibus 97. RULES FOR THE GENITIVE PLURAL IN -lUM The nouns that have -ium in the genitive plural are: 1. Those that end in -is (or -es) and have no more syllables in the genitive than in the nominative. 2. Those that end in -s or -x preceded by a consonant. 3. Neuters that end in -e, -al or -ar. 98. RULES FOR GENDER IN THE THIRD DECLENSION 1. Masculine are names of male beings, and nouns ending in -or, -OS, -er, -es. 2. Feminine are names of female beings, and nouns end- ing in -o, -as, -es, -is, -us, -x, and ' ' consonant-and-s. " 3. Neuter are those ending in -c, -i, -t, -y, -1, -a, -n, -e; -ar, -ur, -us. 99. VOCABULARY mare, maris, n., sea. mille, indeclinable in the singular, which is usually an adjective, a thousand; plural, milia, milium, n., thousands. vectigal, vectigalis, n., tax. Aquitanus, -i, m., an {the) Aquitanian, an inhabitant of southwestern Gaul. Gallus, -i, m., a {the) Gaul, an inhabitant of the country called Gallia. Sequanus, -i, m., a {the) Sequanian, a member of a powerful tribe in central Gaul. Give English words derived from mare. LESSON xm 53 EXERCISES 100. 1. Decline the expressions flumen et mare; lex et vectigal; coUis et navis et mare. 2. Give the memoranda of all the nouns in §99. 3. Give the rules for the gender of nouns of the first and the second declensions. 4. Give the gender of the following nouns according to the rules given in §98: civitas, consul, flumen, homo, hostis, legio, lex, mercator, mare, milia, navis, opus, pars, vectigal, virtus. 5. Give the gender of the following nouns, which are excep- tions to the rules given in §98 : iter, coUis, finis, mons, pons. 101. 1. Marl; vectTgali- um. 2. Mille; mllia. 3. Vectigalia Gallorum non magna sunt. 4. Mllle Ger- manos video. 5. Milia Ger- manorum video. 6. Consul est vir magnae virtiitis. 7. Sequani et Gall! reliqui sunt hostes Germanorum. 8. Aqui- tani partem Galliae tenent. 9. Partem navium Sequani vident. 10. Colles et montes nostri sunt alti. 102. 1. The sea (ace); with taxes. 2. A thousand Gauls; thousands of Gauls. 3. The remaining taxes are large. 4. The enemy (plu.) hold our territory. 5. You (plu.) praise the bravery of the legions. 6. We are keeping the Gauls away from the sea. \Zj--^^-^^^^^ — ROMAN GALLEY 54 BELLUM HELVETICUM LESSON XIII ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 103. Adjectives of the third declension may have one, two, or three different forms for the nominative singular. Apart from this it will be seen that there is little difference between the adjectives whose declension is given below. oriens, rising SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. oriens oriens oriens orientes orientes orientia Gen. orientis orientis orientis orientium orientium orientium Vat. orient! orient! orienti orientibus orientibus orientibus Ace. orientem orientem oriens orientes (-is ) orientes (-is) orientia Voc. oriens oriens oriens orientes orientes orientia All, orient! orient! orienti orientibus orientibus orientibus fortis, brave Nom. fortis fortis forte fortes fortSs fortia Gen. fortis fortis fortis fortium fortium fortium Bat. forti forti forti fortibus fortibus fortibus Ace. fortem fortem forte fortes (-is) fortes (-is) fortia Voc. fortis fortis forte fortes fortes fortia Ail. forti forti forti fortibus fortibus fortibus acer, sharp, Jceen Nom. acer acris acre acres acrgs acria Gen. acris acris acris acrium acrium acrium Bat. aeri acri acri acribus acribus acribus Ace. acrem acrem acre acres (-is) acres (-is) acria Voc. acer acris acre acres acres acria All. acri acri acri acribus acribus acribus LESSON XIII 55 104. The declensions of fortis and oriens may be abbreviated by writing the masculine and feminine together as one column, as given in App. 37, 38. Thus: M. and F. N. Nom, fortis forte Gen. fortis fortis Dat. forti forti elc. 105. -^^^ three may be abbreviated by writing only one form each for the genitive, dative, and ablative, which are alike for all three genders. Thus: Nom. acer acris acre Gen. acris Dat. acri etc. 106. DECLENSION OF TRES Tres (base tr-) is declined like the plural of fortis. tres, three Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. tres tres tria Gen. trium trium trium Dat. tribus tribus tribus Ace. tres (tris) tres (tris) tria Voc. tres tres tria AU. tribus tribus tribus 107. VOCABULARY acer, acris, acre, sharp, Tceen. celer, celeris, celere, quiclc, swift. fortis, forte, hrave. nobilis, nobile, noted, 'prominent. omnis, omne, all. oriens, genitive orientis, rising. tres, tria, three. sol, solis, m., sun. scutum Give English words which you think are derived from each of the above, then look them up in the dictionary and see if you are right. 56 BELLUM HELVETICUM EXERCISES 108. Decline the Latin for the expressions a hrave soldier; a noted river; the rising sun. 109. 1. Celeres naves; Helvetius nobilis. 2. Acris viri; Germanorum fortium. 3. Leges omnes civitatum; leges omnium civitatum. 4. Solem orientem video. 5. Omnia oppida hostes tenent. 6. Consul tres legatos laudat. 7. German! acres omnes Gallos superant. 8. Pueri sunt fortes. 9. Sunt tria itinera.' 10. Proelium est acre. 110. 1. A sharp battle (ace.) ; of the brave lieutenant. 2. Of the noted consuls; of the rising sun. 3. All the boys (nom.) ; three friends (ace). 4. The Belgian is brave; the Belgians are brave men. 5. "We hold all the roads. 6. They see the soldier's bravery. 7. I see a swift ship. LESSON XIV COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES USE OF PREPOSITIONS 111. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES The comparative of an adjective is regularly formed by adding -lor, and the superlative by adding -issimus, to the base of the positive. E. g., fort-is, fort-ior. fort-issimus brave, braver, bravest or very brave long-US, long-ior, long-issimus long, longer, longest or very long All comparatives are declined like fortior (§112). All superlatives are declined like longus (§61). LESSON XIV 57 112. DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES fortior, braver SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. fortior fortior fortius fortiores fortiores fortiora Gen. fortioris fortioris fortioris fortiorum fortiorum fortiorum Dat. fortiori fortiori fortiori f ortioribus f ortioribus f ortioribus Ace. fortiorem fortiorem fortius fortiores fortiores fortiora Voc. fortior fortior fortius fortiores fortiores forti5ra Ahl. fortiore fortiora fortiora f ortioribus f ortioribus f ortioribus 113. USE OF PREPOSITIONS Latin prepositions are divided into three classes: 1. Those used with the accusative only. 2. Those used with the ablative only. 3. Those used with either the accusative or the abla- tive. With these there is a difference in meaning according to the case used. 114. VOCABULARY ad, prep, with ace, to, toward. inter, prep, with aec, 'between. a or ab (before vowels or h), prep, with abl., (away) from; hy. cum, prep, with abl., with. de, prep, with abl., {down) from; concerning. e or ex (before vowels or h), prep, with abl., {out) from, out of. in, prep.; with aec, intoj with abl., in, on. Note that, as the ablative case alone is translated by from, with, hy, in, so the Latin prepositions that mean from, with, hy, in, are used with the ablative case. 58 BELLUM HELVETICUM State the meaning of the prefix in each of the following words: intervene, absent, induce, descend, exit, addition. EXERCISES 115. 1. Like fortis and longus (§111), compare altus, latus, and nobilis. 2. Decline the expression for a longer river. 3. Decline nobilis and its comparative. 116. 1. Ad fortem consulem; ad forti5rem consulem. 2. Inter fltimina lata; inter flumina latissima. 3. A flu- mine; ab oppidis. 4. In provinciam; in provincia. 5. De monte alto; de montibus altissimls. 6. Cum legionibus fortioribus; cum legione fortissima. 7. E finibus nostris; ex oppidis omnibus. 8. Gallia est omnis divTsa in partes tres. 9. German! longos gladios habent; gladios longiores habemus. 10. Belgas cum Germanis superamus. 117. Note. In the following sentences, and in all tlie English-Latin exercises in the following lessons (until special rules are learned in Lesson XXXIV and after), use a preposition when one is used in English, except when a whole prepositional phrase may be trans- lated into Latin by the genitive or by the dative of indirect object with the verb do. 1. Into the towns; in the towns; to (ad) the towns. 2. The brave Gauls; the braver Gauls; the bravest Gauls. 3. Among the brave Gauls; among the braver Gauls. 4. By the brave man ; by a braver man ; by the bravest man. 5. Down from the hill ; out of the forest ; with our legions. 6. I see a man of great bravery. 7. He is on a very wide river. 8. The road is longer. LESSON XV 59 LESSON XV PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION 118. duco, ducere, lead duco, I lead, am leading, do lead. ducimus, we lead, etc. ducis, you lead, etc. ducitis, you lead, etc. ducit, he (she, it) leads, etc. ducunt, they lead, etc. The short e before the final re of the second principal part is the sign of the third conjugation. The present base of this verb is due. The personal endings are the same as in the first and second conjugations, but the vowel before them is different. Here it is not the conjugation vowel as it appears in the second principal part (short e)^ but short i, except in the third person plural, where it is u. 119. VOCABULARY contends, contendere, (struggle); fight; hasten. divido, dividere, divide, separate. duco, ducere, lead. gero, gerere, carry on, do. incolo, incolere, inhabit, live (in). mitto, mittere, send. EXERCISES 120. 1. Write the conjugation of the phrase appello et moned et mittd. 2. Write the ablative singular and the genitive plural of the positive, comparative, and super- lative of fortis. 3. Decline the Latin for a ivide river; a wider river. 121. 1. Ducitis; incolo; gerunt. 2. Mittis; dividit; con- tendimus. 3. Altior mons; montes altissiml. 4. Legiones 60 BELLUM HELVETICUM fortes; legiones fortissimae. 5. Homines nobilissimos in Galliam dticit. 6. Bellum magnum in Gallia gerimus. 7. Garumna flumen Gallos ab Aquitanis dividit. 8. Belgae partem Galliae incolunt. 9. Lingua nostra Celtas Gallos appellamus. 10. Ex provincia consul contendit. 122. 1. Long walls ; longer walls ; the longest walls. 2. He leads ; you send ; I hasten. 3. They are carrying-on war with* a very brave enemy. 4. A wider river separates the Gauls from* the Germans. 5. The Sequanians inhabit a part of Gaul. 6. "We are not sending men out of* the province into Gaul. LESSON XVI PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION, AND OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN -10 123. PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION audio, audire, hear SINGULAR PLURAL audio, I hear, I am hearing, I do hear audimus, we hear, etc. audis auditis audit audiunt The present base of this verb is aud. The i in the present infinitive is the sign of the fourth conjugation. ♦ See §117, Note. LESSON XVI 61 124. PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN -/CF A few verbs are partly like the third conjugation and partly like the fourth in their inflection. The first two principal parts indicate this; e.g., capio, capere, take. The first form would apparently indicate a verb of the fourth conjugation, but the short e of the second principal part marks it as belonging to the third conjugation. Such a verb is described as belonging to the third conjugation in -id. 125. Verbs belonging to the third conjugation in -io have fourth conjugation forms where the fourth conjuga- tion endings have two successive vowels, but elsewhere they have third conjugation forms. capio,* 1 take, etc. capimus capis capitis capit capiunt* 126. VOCABULARY audio, audire, hear. impedio, impedire, hinder. munio, munire, fortify. venio, venire, come. capio, capere, talce. facio, facere, maTce, do. Give English words derived from audio, impedio, and capio. EXERCISES 127. Conjugate in the present indicative active prohibeo et supero; teneo et facio; veni5 et laudo. * Fourth conjugation endings. 025 BELLUM HELVETICUM 128. 1. Audit ; impedio ; facimus. 2. Veniimt ; capitis ; munis. 3. Hostes ad oppidum itfer faciunt. 4. Naves nostras capit legatus. 5. Ad fltimina latiora venlmus. 6. Celtae tertiam partem Galliae incolunt. 7, Oppida omnia mtinT- mus. 8. Viros nobilissimos impeditis. 9. Murum longiorem facit. 10. Fltimen Sequana Gallos a Belgis dividit. 129. 1. You hear; you take. 2. We hinder; we make. 3. They fortify; they take. 4. "We are coming down-from the higher mountains. 5. You are fortifying three towns. 6. They are making a very long bridge. SECOND REVIEW LESSON 130. Memory Work. 1. Nouns of the Third Declension (§§77, 83, 90, 96). 2. Rules for the Genitive Plural of Third Declension Nouns (§97). 3. Rules for the Gender of Third Declension Nouns (§98). 4. Adjectives of the Third Declension (§§103,112). 5. The Comparison of Adjectives (§111). 6. Present Indicative Active of the Third and Fourth Conjugations (§§118,123-125). 131. Latin-English Vocabulary. 1. Give the memoranda (the nominative singular, genitive singular, gender, nominative plural, genitive plural, and meaning) of the following nouns: SECOND REVIEW LESSON 63 Aquitanus homo mercator pars cxvitas hostis miles pons coUis iter milia Sequanus consul legio mons sol finis lex navis tempus flumen mare opus virtus Gallus 2. Give the entire nominative singular and the meaning of acer, celer, fortis, nobilis, omnis, and oriens ; the entire nomi- native plural and the meaning of tres. Compare altus, fortis, latus, longus, and nobilis. 3. Give the first two principal parts and the meaning of the following verbs : audio, capio, contends, divido, duco, facio, ger5, impedio, incolo, mitto, munio, venio. 4. Give the meanings of the following prepositions, and the case used with each : a or ab, ad, cum, de, e or ex, in, inter. 132. English-Latin Vocabulary. Give the first form of the Latin for the following words: all fortify manliness ship Aquitanian from (til iree words) march soldier away from Gaul (a : person) mountain state between hasten noted struggle brave hear, hear of on sun bravery- hill out from swift bridge hinder out of take hy in part territory carry on inhabit prominent three come into quick thousand concerning journey rising thousands consul keen river time 64 BELLUM HELVETICUM divide law road to do lead sea toward down from legion send trader end live in separate with enemy make Sequanian work fight man (not vir) sharp LESSON XVII THE DEMONSTRATIVES HIC AND ILLE 133. TEXT Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres ; unam^ partem incolunt Belgae, aliam^ AquTtani, tertiam Celtae. Nostra lingua Celtas Gallos appellamus. (1-3,* Ch. 1.) NOTE 1. unam, aliam: these forms are the feminine singular accusative of the adjectives unus, one, and alius, another, which are slightly irregular in their declension and will be given later. 134. THE DEMONSTRATIVES HIC AND ILLE hie, this, plu. these SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nam. hie haec hoc hi hae horum Gen. huius huius huius horum harum his Dat. huic huic huic his his haec Ace. hunc hanc hoc hos has haec Abl. hoc hac hoc his his his For the pronunciation of the genitive and dative singular, see §5. * The references after the text are to the lines as numbered in the con- tinuous text, pages 317-333. LESSON XVII 65 135. ille, that, plu. those SINGUT,AR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. ille ilia illud illi illae ilia Gen. illius iUius illius illorum illarum illorum Dat. illi illi illi illis illis illis Ace. ilium illam illud iUos illas ilia Abl. illo ilia illo illis Ulis illis 136. These demonstratives have two uses. 1. When used like an adjective, hie means this in the sin- gular and these in the plural, and ille means that in the singular and those in the plural. 2. When used like a pronoun (or substantive), the masculine of hie means this man, the feminine this womaiif the neuter this thing (plural these men, these women, these things) ; and the masculine of ille means that man, the feminine that woman, the neuter that thing (plural those men, those women, those things). Both these pronouns however are often to be translated by emphatic personal pronouns of the third person, he, she, it, they, and their other cases. 137. VOCABULARY hie, haec, hoc, this, plu. these; see §§134, 136. ille, iUa, illud, that, plu. those; see §§135, 136. institutum, -i, n., custom. diflferunt, present indicative active, third plural, of the irregular verb differo, differ, he diferent. 66 BELLUM HELVETICUM EXERCISES 138. Decline hie vir; illud iter; haec magna navis. 139. 1. Hic consul; ille mercator. 2. Hums mstituti; illius legis. 3. Ilia tempora; haec opera. 4. Instituta nostra laudant. 5. Galli institutis differunt. 6. Ad illas silvas venimus. 7. Hoc opus est longum. 8. Hos impeditis. 9. Haec facimus. 10. Illas video. 140. 1. These parts (nom.) ; of those mountains. 2. Those rivers are in* the mountains. 3. I am giving grain to* these (men). 4. We are making that bridge. 5. They are leading the legions into that state. 6. He is taking this (thing). LESSON XVIII THE DEMONSTRATIVE IS 141. TEXT Gallia est omnis dIvTsa in partes tres ; Unam partem in- colunt Belgae, aliam AquTtani, tertiam Celtae. Nostra lingua Celtas Gallos appellamus. Hi omnes lingua, insti- tutis, legibus differunt. (1-4, Ch. 1.) 142. THE DEMONSTRATIVE IS SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut Nom. is ea id ei (ii) eae ea Gen. eius eius eius eorum earum eorum Bat. ei ei ei eis (iis) eis (iis) eis (iis) Ace. eum earn id e5s eas ea Abl. eo ea eo eis (iis) eia (iis) eis (iis) For the pi •onunciation of the genitive singular, gee §5, a. Note. ♦ See §117, LESSON XVIII 67 143. The demonstrative is has two uses. 1. When it agrees with a noun in gender, number, and case, it is a demonstrative adjective meaning either this or that, plural these or those. 2. When it does not so agree, it is used as the personal pronoun of the third person, the singular meaning he, she, or it, according to the gender of the noun to which it refers, and the plural theij. Thus, ei mercatores, these (or those) traders; eos mercatores moneo, / am warning these (or those) traders. But ei alone, they, eorum, earum, their, etc.; eos video, I see them, earn video, I see her, id vide5, I see it. Notice carefully the sentence, est mSns proximus, atque ad eum Gallos duco, there is a mountain very near, and to it / am leading the Gauls; here eum is masculine in Latin because it refers to mons, while its English equivalent is neuter because the word mountain is neuter. 144. VOCABULARY imports, importare, import. is, ea, id, he, she, it, they, etc.; this, that, etc.; see §§142, 143. propterea, adv., on this account. quod, subordinate conjunction, because. saepe, adv., often. EXERCISES 145. 1. Decline hie and ille. 2. Decline id altum mare; is latus pons; ea nobilis silva. 146. 1. Eum video; eam video; eos audio. 2. Eorum civitas; eius frumentum. 3. Id ad Gallos importamus. 4. Eos mllites in Galliam ducunt. 5. Saepe bellum eum Gallls gerimus, propterea quod in provinciam veniunt. 6. Saepe in nostros fines haec Galli important. 7. Insti- tuta ilia differunt. 8. Belgae fortissimi sunt Gallorum propterea quod cum GermanTs saepe contendunt. 9. Homi- nes ad id oppidum mitto. 10. Eius gladium habeo. 68 BELLUM IIELVETICUM 147. 1. He sees it. 2. They hear her. 3. I see their father. 4. AVe often come to him. 5. We are fortifying that part of the town. 6. A bridge separates them. 7. His legions are on the march. LESSON XIX THE RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 148. TEXT Gallos ab AquItanTs Garumna flumen dividit; Gallos a Belgis Matrona et Sequana dividit.^ (4-6, Ch. 1.) NOTE 1 The two rivers formed one boundary, and the verb is therefore singular. 149. THE ENGLISH RELATIVE PRONOUN M.,F. N. M ., F., N. ' Norn. who which that Singular and plural - Poss. whose Obj. whom which that 150. THE LATIN RELATIVE PRONOUN qui, who, which SINGULAR PLUEAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Norn, qui quae quod qui quae quae Gen, cuius cuius cuius quorum quarum quorum Bat. cui cui cui quibus quibus quibus Ace. quern quam quod quos quas quae Ahl. quo qua quo quibus quibus quibus For the pronunciation of the genitive and dative singular, see §5. LESSON XIX by 151. SYNTAX OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN Model Germanos, qui trans Rhenum incolunt, video, I see the Germans, who live across the Rhine. Note. German5s is masculine plural accusative, while qui is mascu- line plural nominative. The same is true of the English words Germans and who. The rule then is evidently the same in the two languages. 152. RULE. A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender and number, but its case depends on its construction in its own clause, 153. Model for Parsing. Qui is a relative pronoun, agreeing with its antecedent Germands in masculine gender, plural number; it is nominative case, subject of incolunt. 154. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. AU. DECLENSION OF THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN AND ADJECTIVE quis (qui), who? what? SINGULAR PLUEAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. quis (qui) (quae) quid (quod) qui (quae) quae cuius (cuius) cuius r^uorum (quarum) quorum cui (cui) cui quibus (quibus) quibus quern (quam) quid (quod) quos (quas) quae quo (qua) quo quibus (quibus) quibus The forms in parentheses are used as adjectives only. Thus : But: Who is coming ? Quis venit What do you see? Quid vides What man is coming? Qui vir venit What river do you see? Quod flumen vides 70 BELLUM HELVETICUM 155. VOCABULARY qui, quae, quod, relative pronoun, icTio, which, etc.; see §§149-152. quis, quae, quid, interrogative pronoun and adjective, who, what, etc.; see §154. ab-sum, ab-esse, he from, he away; conjugated like sum. Tn trans- lating an adverb with this word, put the adverb before the word fr^m or away; e. g., longe abesse, to he far away. humanitas, humanitatis, f., refinement. longe, adv., far; superlative longissime, farthest, very far. What is the English noun derived from hiimanitas, and what is its usual meaning ? Can you see its connection with homo, from which humanitas is derived ? EXERCISES 156. Decline the words meaning this river; a hrave man; that soldier, 157. 1. Video hominem qui venit. 2. Homo quem video vcnit. 3. Video hominem cuius virtus est magna. 4. Video hominem cui frumentum dant. 5. Video homines quorum frumentum est in hoc oppido. 6. Quis eum videt? 7. Quem audis? 8. Belgae longissime absunt. 9. Belgae sunt for- tissimi omnium Gallorum propterea quod a provincia lon- gissime absunt. 10. Humanitas provinciae est magna. 11. Consul est vir magnae humanitatis. 12. Quem hominem audis ? Note. In translating English into Latin, use forms of is to mean this or {hat only when a relative pronoun is to follow. In other places use hie or ille. 158. 1. The man whom you see. 2. The men whom you see. 3. The town which you see. 4. The towns which are LESSON XX 71 large. 5. The mountain which you see. 6. The ships which you see. 7. Those (things) which we import. 8. The part which the Celts inhabit is far away. 9. Whom do you see? 10. What is he making ? 11. What men do you see ? LESSON XX IMPERFECT AND FUTURE INDICATIVE OF SUM 159. TEXT Gallos ab AquTtanis Garumna flumen dividit; Gallos a BelgTs Matrona et Sequana dividit. Horum omnium for- tissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod ab htimanitate provin- ciae longissime absunt. (4-7, Ch. 1.) 160. PRESENT (reviewed), IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE OF SUM sum, esse, he Present SINGULAB PLURAL sum, I am sumus, we are es, you are estis, you are est, he is, there is sunt, they are, there are Imperfect eram, I was eramus, ive were eras, you were eratis, you were erat, he was, there was erant, they were, there were Future ero, 7 shall he erimus, we shall he eris, you will he eritis, you will he erit, he will he, there will he erunt, they will he, there will he 72 BELLUM HELVETICUM 161. Imperfect is the name given to the Latin tense that is equivalent to the English past progressive or the simple past. In the verb sum the imperfect is regularly translated by the simple past. Notice that the future has the same endings as the present of duco. 162. VOCABULARY animus, -i, m., mind, energy, courage. commeo, commeare, resort. eflfemino, eflfeminare, weaken. specto, spectare, face, stretch. Give English words derived from effemino and specto. EXERCISES 163. 1. Write the declension of the vrords meaning: What soldier? What law? What work? 2. Write the declen- sion of the masculine of is, and translate each form. 164. 1. Es; eras; eris. 2. Erunt; erant. 3. Legio quam vides fortissima erat. 4. Mercatores non saepe ad Belgas commeant. 5. Ad reliquos Gallos mercatores saepe com- meant. 6. Mercatores important ea quae animos Gallorum effeminant. 7. Provincia ad orientem solem spectat. 8. Quern in oppidum ducitis? 165. 1. We are; we were; we shall be. 2. The man whom you see was our friend. 3. The men whom you see will be in the province. 4. Those (things) which we import weaken our minds. 5. I see towns which are large. 6. This was the nearest road into Gaul. LESSON XXI 73 LESSON XXI IMPERFECT AND FUTURE INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS 166. TEXT Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod ab humanitate provinciae longissime absunt, et non saepe mercat5res ad eos commeant et ea quae animos effeminant important. (6-9, Ch. 1.) PRESENT (reviewed), IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS 167. FIRST CONJUGATION Present SINGULAR PLURAL 1. laudo, I praise, I am praising, laudamus, we praise I do praise 2. laudas, you praise laudatis, you praise 3. laudat, he praises laudant, they praise Imperfect 1. laudabam, I was praising, laudabamus, tve were praising, I praised we praised 2. laudabas, you were praising, laudabatis, you were praising, you praised you praised 3. laudabat, he was praising, laudabant, ihcy were praising, he praised they praised Future 1. landabo, I shall praise laiidabimus, we shall praise 2. laudabis, you will praise laudabitis, you will praise 3. laudabit, he will praise laudabunt, they will praise 74 BELLUM HELVETICUM 168. SECOND CONJUGATION Present 1. moneo, 7 warn, I am warning, monemus, wc warn, etc. 2. mones [7 do -warn monetis 3. monet monent Imperfect 1. monebam, 7 was warning, monebamus, we were warning, 2. monebas [7 warned [we warned 3. monebat monebant Future 1. monebS, 7 shall warn monebimus, we shall warn 2. monebis monebitis 3. monebit monebunt 169. After the conjugation vowel in the imperfect and future comes the tense sign, which in the imperfect is ba, in the future bi. These are followed by the usual personal endings. The endings of the future are the same as in the present of duco. See §118. ' DRILL EXERCISES 170. Decline the Latin for a keen mind; three traders. 171. Model for verb analysis: (1) laudabam, (2) laudabis. 1. laud is the present base, a is the conjugation vowel, ba is the sign of the imperfect tense, and m is the ending of the first person singular active. 2. laud is the present base, a is the conjugation vowel, bi is the sign of the future tense, and s is the ending of the second person singular active. 172. Analyze the following forms, as above, and translate. 1. Superat; superabat; superabit. 2. Tenebit; tenebat. LESSON XXI 75 3. Appellabam; appellabunt. 4. Videbit; habebis. 5. Pro- hibemus; occupabitis. 173. Give the tense, voice, person, and number of the following forms, and translate: 1. We shall conquer. 2. We shall have. 3. You were seizing the town. 4. You were holding the tow^n. 5. We are preparing. 6. They see. 174. VOCABULARY continenter, adv., continually. Ehenus, -i, m., the Bhine. Rhodanus, -i, m., tJie Bhone. trans, preposition with accusative, across. Give English words in which trans- is used as a prefix, and tell their meaning. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 175. 1. Trans Rhenum Germanos videbamus. 2. Omnia oppida trans Rhodanum habebitis. 3. Belgae sunt proximi Germanis qui trans Rhenum incolunt. 4. Belgae sunt proximi Germanis quibuscum"* bellum saepe gerunt. 5. Belgae continenter cum Germanis bellum gerunt. 176. 1. This is the Rhine; that is the Rhone. 2. We were far rway from the sea. 3. I shall see the rivers which you are praising. 4. There were very brave men in that legion. 5. Our soldiers were on a longer march. * In this phrase cum is enclitic, 1. e., it is appended to the word which it governs. Translate it before qtUbus. See §12. 76 BELLUM HELVETICUM LESSON XXII IMPERFECT AND FUTURE INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS 177. TEXT Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod ab humanitate provinciae longissime absunt, et non saepe mercatores ad eos commeant et ea qua'e animos effeminant important; et proximi sunt Germanis, qui trans Khenum ineolunt, quibuseum continenter bellum gerunt. (6-11, Ch. 1.) PRESENT (reviewed), IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF THE THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS 178. THIRD CONJUGATION Present SINGULAE PLURAL duco, I lead, etc. ducimus ducis ducitis ducit ducunt Imperfect ducebam, I was leading, I led ducebamus ducebas ducebatis ducebat ducebant Future ducam, I shall lead due emus duces ducetis ducet ducent 179. LESSON XXII FOUETH CONJUGATION 77 Present audio, I hear, etc. audis audit audimus auditis audiunt Imperfect audie"bam, 1 was hearing, I heard audiebamus audiebas audiebatis audiebat audiebant Future 180. audiam, I shall hear audiemus audies audietis audiet audient THIRD CONJUGATION IN -i6 Present capio, I take,^ etc. capimus capis capitis capit capiunt Imperfect capiebam, I was talcing, I tooTc capiebamus capiebas eapiebatis capiebat capiebant Future capiam, 7 shall take capies capiet capiemus capietis capient 78 BELLUM IIELVETICUM DRILL EXERCISES 181. Give a synopsis* of video et supero in the third person plural. 2. Give a synopsis of gero et faci5 in the third person singular. 3. Conjugate in the future occupo et habeo. 4. Conjugate in the imperfect facid et gero. 182. Analyze the following forms, as in §170, and translate : 1. Ducit; ducebat; ducet. 2. Munies; muniebas. 3. Capient ; capiunt. 4. Tenet ; mittet. 5. Geretis ; incole- batis; facitis. 183. Give the tense, voice, person, and number of the following forms, and translate: 1. I am fortifying; I was fortifying; I shall fortify. 2. You (sing.) are sending; you (sing.) were sending; you (sing.) will send. 3. He sees; he hears. 4. We shall hear; we shall hold. 5. You (plu.) will take; we inhabited; they w^ere importing. 184. VOCABULARY ol), preposition with ace, on account of. prae-cedo, prae-cedere, literally, go before, i. e., surpass, quoque, 'adverb, also. What is the English verb derived from praecedo? TRANSLATION EXERCISES 185. 1. Helvetii quoque sunt fortes. 2. Ob earn causam Helvetii quoque reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt. 3. Homines quos vides capiemus. 4. Ob eas causas homines continenter ex proximTs civitatibus veniebant. 5. Montes erant altiores et flumina latissima. * A synopsis of a verb consists of the forms of the same person and number from each tense. LESSON XXIII 79 186. 1. The lieutenant was coming to that river. 2. We shall make a march to the river Rhine also. 3. They will lead to the Rhone the men that they see. 4. You will see the men that they are leading. 5. (There) will be daily battles in the mountains. LESSON xxni PRESENT INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF THE FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS 187. TEXT Ob earn causam Helvetii quoque reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt. (11, 12, Ch. 1.) PRESENT INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF THE FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS 188. FIRST CONJUGATION laudor, I am called, am 'being called laudamur, ice are called, etc. laudaris laudamini laudatur laudantur 189. SECOND CONJUGATION moneor, I am warned, am being teamed monemur, we are warnedy etc. moneris monemini monetur monentur 190. The personal endings of the passive voice are as follows: SINGULAR PLURAL First person *or, *r mur Second person ris mini Third person tur *ntiir *A vowel before these endings is always short. 80 BELLUM HELVETICUM DRILL EXERCISES 191. 1. Decline the Latin for all the supply. 2. Make is agree with the following nouns, and then decline the expressions: tempus; virtus; legatus. 192. Analyze the following verb forms, and translate. 1. Laudo; laudor. 2. Vides; videris. 3. Miles laudat; miles laudatur. 4. Hostes prohibemus; hostes prohiben- tur. 5. Hostes capiemus; hostes audiebamus. 193. Give the tense, voice, person, and number of the following forms, and translate : 1. I see; I am seen. 2. You are conquering; you are being conquered. 3. They are praising the troops; the troops are being praised. 4. You are called brave. 5. We shall see and hear. 194. VOCABULARY atque, coordinate conjunction, and; emphasizing what follows. copia, -ae, f., plenty, supply ; plural, forces, troops. fere, adv., almost. undique, adv., from all sides, on all sides. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 195. 1, Celtae lingua nostra Galll appellantur. 2. Hel- vetii fere cotidianis proeliTs contendunt. 3. Copiae hostium undique videntur. 4. Portae nostrae atque murl occupan- tur. 5. AnimI Gallorum effeminantur. 6. Laudamur prop- terea quod Helvetios praecedimus. 196. 1. The towns which you see are held by the enemy (plu.). 2. The Belgians are called the bravest of the Gauls. LESSON XXIV 81 3. On all sides were those high mountains. 4. We shall send our troops into Gaul. 5. You were carrying on war in almost all the towns. LESSON XXIV IMPERFECT AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF THE FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS 197. TEXT Ob eam causam Helvetii quoque reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt, quod fere cotldianis proelils cum Germanis contendunt. (11-13, Ch. 1.) PRESENT (reviewed), IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF THE FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS 198. FIRST CONJUGATION SINGULAR PLURAL Present laudor, I am (being) called laudamur laudaris or -re laudamini laudatur laudantur Imperfect laudabar, I was (being) called laudabamur laudabaris or -re laudabamini laudabatur laudabantur Future laudabor, I shall he called laudabimur laudaberis or -re laudabimini laudabitur laudabuntur 82 BELLIJM IIELVETICUM 199. SECOND CONJUGATION Present moneor, / am (heing) warned monemur moneris or -re monemini monetur monentur Imperfect monebar, I was {heing) warned monebamur monebaris or -re monebamini monebatur monebantur Future monebor, I shall he warned monebimur moneberis or -re monebimini monebitur monebuntur 200. In these tenses a form of the passive differs from the corresponding form of the active only in the personal endings; except that in the second person singular of the future, the vowel before the personal ending is i in the active and e in the passive, e. g., Active laudab-i-s moneb-i-s Passive laudab-e-ris moneb-e-ris 201. Therefore the follovring statements are true for the passive as for the active: ba is the sign of the imperfect tense, and is always pre- ceded by a long vowel ; bi is the sign of the future tense in the first and second conjugations, and is always preceded by a long vowel. DRILL EXERCISES 202. 1. Give a synopsis in the third person plural passive of prohibeo et comparo. 2, Conjugate in the future passive appello et teneo. LESSON XXIV 83 203. 1. Appellor; appellabar; appellabor. 2. Teneba- tur; tenebitur. 3. Prohibeberis ; prohibebamim. 4. Op- pida occupabantur ; oppida occupabuntur. 5. Mtinient; faciebatis. 204. 1. I am held; you (sing.) were held; he will be held. 2. We shall be conquered; you (plu.) were being conquered; they are being conquered. 3. You (sing.) will see; you (sing.) will be seen. 4. They are imported; they were imported ; they will be imported. 5. I shall take ; he will take. 205. VOCABULARY aut, coordinate conjunction, or ; aut . . . aut, either . . . or. cum, subordinate conjunction, when, since, although. If it introduces a verb in the indicative, it means when. suus, -a, -um, possessive adjective, his (own), her (own), its (own), their {own), according to the subject of its clause or sentence. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 206. 1. Helvetil aut Germanos prohibent aut cum els contendunt. 2. Helvetil Germanos finibus suls prohibent. 3. Helvetil cum Germanis contendunt cum eos prohibent. 4. Helvetil in finibus Germanorum saepe bellum gerunt. 5. Fere cotidianis proeliis cum hostibus contendebant. 207. 1. He sees his (own) forces. 2. They see their (own) friend. 3. Fields will be given to the men. 4. We shall send the grain which is held in the town. 5. You have plenty of grain. 84 BELLUM HELVETICUM LESSON XXY PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF THE THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS 208. TEXT Ob earn causam Helvetii quoque reliquos Gallos virtiite praecedunt, quod fere cotidianis proelils cum GermanTs contendunt, cum aut suTs finibus eos prohibent, aut in Germanorum finibus bellum gerunt. (11-14, Ch. 1.) PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF THE THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS 209. THIRD CONJUGATION SINGULAR Present ducor, 1 am {teing) led duceris or -re ducitur PLURAL ducimur ducimini ducuntur Imperfect ducebar, I was (being) led duceljaris or -re dueebatur ducebamur dueebamini ducebantur Future ducar, 7 shall he led duceris or -re ducetur ducemur ducemini ducentur 1. imperator 2. Ie(jatu8 3. centurio Jf. Gallic icarrior 5. Gallic standard hearer 6. Gallic chief Roman Officers and Gauls 210. T.-RSSON XXV FOURTH CONJUGATION Present SINGULAR PLURAL audior, I am {being) heard audimur audiris or -re audimini auditur audiuntur Imperfect audiebar, I was (heing) heard audiebamur audiebaris or -re audiebamini audiebatur audiebantur Future audiar, I shall he heard audiemur audieris or -re audiemini audietur audientur 85 211. THIRD CONJUGATION IN -16 Present SINGULAR capior, I am {being) taTcen caperis or -re capitur Imperfect capiebar, I was (being) taTcen capiebaris or -re capiebatur Future capiar, I shall be taken capieris or -re caDietur PLURAL capimur capimini capiuntur capiebamur capiebamini capiebantur capiemur capiemini capientur 212. In these tenses a form of the passive differs from the corresponding form of the active only in the personal endings; except that in the second person singular of the third conjugation present, the vowel before the personal ending is i in the active and e in the passive, e. g., 86 BELLUM HELVETICUM Active duc-i-s cap-i-s Passive duc-e-ris cap-e-ris 213. Therefore the following statements are true for the passive as for the active : ba is the sign of the imperfect tense in all conjugations, and is always preceded by a long vowel ; a is the sign of the future in the first person singular, and e elsewhere, in the third and fourth conjugations. DRILL EXEECISES 214. 1. Give a synopsis in the second person plural passive of mitto et impedio. 2. Conjugate in the present passive capi5 et munio. 215. 1. Capitur; duceris; audietur. 2. Incolebatur; impedimus; mittentur. 3. Oppidum munietur; bella gere- bantur. 4. Duceris; impedimur. 5. Facietis; veniebamus. 216. 1. I Lm led; you (sing.) were being led; he will be led. 2. We are heard ; we were heard ; we shall be heard. 3. They are coming; they are hindered. 4. You (sing.) are holding; you (sing.) will be held. 5. You (sing.) are being sent; you (sing.) will be sent. 6. They are led; they will be given. 217. VOCABULARY coniuratio, coniurationis, f., conspiracy. imperium, -i, n., rule, control. nobilitas, nobilitatis, f. [nobilis, noted, nohle], nobility, often in the sense of a collective noun, 1. e., the nobles. ob-tineo, ob-tinere, hold (stronger than teneo). For pronunciation, see §6. Give an English adjective derived from imperium. THIRD REVIEW LESSON 87 TRANSLATION EXERCISES 218. 1. Una pars a Gallls obtinetur. 2. Imperium viri fortes obtinent. 3. Nobilitas Helvetiorum coniurationem faciebat. 4. Hostes fltimine impediebantur. 5. Gallia initium capit a flumine Rhodano. 219. 1. A long time will be given to the men. 2. We are making a conspiracy. 3. We were fighting with the legions. 4. The control of Gaul will be held by the nobility of the Helvetians. 5. The legions which you see are coming from Gaul. THIRD REVIEW LESSON . Memory Work. 1. Declension, meanings, and uses of hie, ille, is, and qui (§§134-136, 142, 143, 150-152). 2. Present, imperfect, and future indicative, active and pa. .live (App. 66-71). 121. Latin-English Vocabulary. 1. Give the memoranda of the following nouns: animus, coniuratio, imperium, institutum, nobilitas, Rhenus, Rhodanus. 2. Give the entire nominative singular and four meanings of suus. 3. Give the first two principal parts and the meaning of the following verbs: absum, importo, obtineo, praecedo, specto. 88 BELLUM HELVETICUM 4. Give the meaning of ob and trans, and the case used with each. 5. Give the meaning of each of the following words, and tell what part of speech it is : atque, aut, continenter, cum (conjunction), fere, longe, longissimg, propterea, quod, quoque, saepe, undique. 222. English-Latin Vocabulary. Give the first form of the Latin for the following words: across far it surpass almost very far its that also farthest its (own) their and (two words) from all sides mind their (own) be away he nobility them be from her (poss.) often these because her (obj.) on all sides they bring in her (own) on this account this conspiracy him or those continually his Rhine when control his (own) Rhone who custom hold (two words) rule whom either import she whose LESSON XXVI PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE OF SUM 223. TEXT Horum omnium una pars, quam Galli obtinent, initium capit a flumine Rhodano. (14-16, Ch. 1.) LESSON XXVI 89 PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE OF SUM sum, esse, /wi, he Perfect SINGULAR PLURAL fu% 1 was, I have been fuimus fuistl fuistis fait fueiunt, fuere Pluperfect fuernm, I had been /"weramus /weras /"weratis /werat /"Mcrant Future Perfect fueio, I shall have been fuevimus fueiis /"weritis /werit fueTint 125. The endings of the perfect indicative active are: SINGULAR PLURAL First person -i -imus Second person -isti -istis Third person -it -erunt, -ere 226. The formation of the tenses may be described as follows: perfect = fu (perfect base) + a special set of personal endings, pluperfect = fu (perfect base) -f- era (= had, sign of past perfect) + the regular personal endings, iuture perfect = /w (perfect base) -|- eri (= shall or will have, sign of future perfect) + the regular personal endings. Notice that the i is retained in the third person plural of the future perfect, fuerint. i^otice the two translations of the perfect, I was and I have been. 90 BELLUM IJELVP^TICUM DRILL EXERCISES 227. 1. Give a synopsis of sum through the indicative in the first singular, third singular, and third plural. 2. Decline the Latin for a great conspiracy, 228. 1. Es; eratis; fuimus. 2. Fueritis; sunt; eramus. 3. FuistI; fueratis; eritis. 4. Fuerint; fuerant; fuerunt. 5. Tenetur; tenebantur. 6. Mittemus; mittemur. 229. 1. I have been; you had been; he v^ill have been. 2. You were ; you will be ; you will have been. 3. We have been; you (plu.) had been. 4. You will be seen; you will be sent. 5. I shall make; you (sing.) will make. 6. It was held; they will be held. 230. VOCABULARY contineo, continere, hound. etiam, adverb, also. extremus, -a, -um, superlative, most distant, farthest. Oceanus, -i, m., the Ocean. Give the English verbs from obtineo (§217) and contineo. What is our word from extremus? TRANSLATION EXERCISES 231. 1. Una pars Galliae fluminibus continetur. 2. Gal- lia ad Oceanum etiam spectabat. 3. Extrema pars Galliae a Belgis incolebatur. 4. Extremi Galli reliquos virtute praecedebant. 5. Ea quae a mercat5ribus importantur animos effeminant. LESSON XXYll ' 91 232. 1. All parts of Gaul were bounded (by) rr^ers. 2. The Belgians were the most distant. 3. The Helvetians also are brave. 4. The rule of Gaul will be held by the Helvetians. 5. You were making a conspiracy. LESSON XXVII PRINCIPAL PARTS AND THEIR USES PERFECT ACTIVE SYSTEM 233. TEXT Horum omnium una pars, quam Galli obtinent, initium capit a flumine Rhodano ; continetur Garumna flumine, Oceano, flnibus Belgarum. (14-17, Ch. 1.) PRINCIPAL PARTS 234. The principal parts of a Latin verb are as follows: pres. indie, act. pres. infin. act. perf. indie, act. supine first singular first singular laudo laudare laiiddvi laudatuiii 235. The first of the principal parts shows how the conjugation begins. It is always convenient to know the first form (this is the form by which the verb is desig- nated), and it is necessary in the third conjugation, to distinguish the ordinary verb of this conjugation (like dtico) from the verbs of the third conjugation in -io (like capio). 92 ■ BELLUM HELVETICUM 236. The second of the principal parts gives the present base (see §240), and tells to what conjugation the verb belongs by the characteristic vowel that precedes the final -re, e. g., 12 3 4 3 laud a-re mon-e-re dtic-e-re aud-i-re cap-e-re 237. The third of the principal parts gives the perfect base (see §241). 238. The fourth of the principal parts gives the supine base (see §242). BASES 239. Three bases are used in the conjugation of a verb — the present, the perfect, and the supine. 240. In any regular verb the present base is found by dropping the last three letters from the present infinitive active. 241. In any verb the perfect base is found by dropping the last letter from the perfect indicative active. 242. In any verb the supine base is found by dropping the last two letters from the supine. PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF ALL VERBS 243. To conjugate the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect indicative active of any verb, obtain the perfect base from the principal parts as directed above, and add the same endings as for these tenses of sum. See §224. These tenses can not be conjugated until the principal parts are known. LESSON XXVII' 93 244. Learn thoroughly the principal parts of the follow- ing verbs, and, their meanings. laudo, laudare, lauddvi, laudatuhi, prai&e do, dare, dedi, DATum, give moneo, monere, monul, MONiTum, warn video, videre, vidi, visum, see duco, ducere, dilxi, DucTum, lead gero, gerere, gcssi, GESTum, carry on audio, audire, audlvi, AUDiTum, hear venio, venire, veni, VENTum, come capio, capere, cepl, CAPTum, talce facio, facere, fen., rACTum, maTce, do 245. Perfect / praised, I have praised, etc. -i, -isti, -it; -imus, -istis, -erunt or -ere lauddv monu dux audlv cep laudav "" monu dux audiv cep lauddv monu dux audiv cep Pluperfect I had praised, etc. >-eram, -eras, -erat; -eramus, -eratis, -erant Future Perfect 7 shall have praised, etc. ^-ero, -eris, -erit; -erimus, -eritis, erint For the full conjugation of these tenses see App. 67-71. 94 BELLUM HELVETICUM 246. -^^ ^^6 same way give the conjugation of these tenses of do, video, gero, venio, facio. 247. ENGLISH DERIVATIVES FROM LATIN VERBS It will be a great help in learning the principal parts of Latin verbs to think of English words derived from the present and supine bases. Thus from the present bases of the verbs in §244 are derived laud, e-vident, pro-duce, helli-gerent, audience, con-venient ; from the supine bases, laudatory, date, monitor, vision, pro-duction, gesture, auditor, auditory, auditorium, con-vention, capture, captive, fact, fac- tion, factory, etc. DRILL EXERCISES 248. Give a synopsis throughout the indicative active in the first singular, third singular, and third plural, of do, video, gero, venio, faci5. 249. 1. Laudavit ; monueram ; duxerint. 2. Audiet ; audi- verit. • 3. Capit ; cepit. 4. Dabunt ; dederunt. 5. Vldisti ; videramus. 6. Gerentur; mittebamini. 7. Venit; venit. 250. 1. I gave (perf.) ; he has carried on; they made (perf.). 2, You (sing.) had warned; you (plu.) will have warned. 3. They are coming; they have come. 4. We are carrying on; we carried on (perf.). 5. I had been; I had made. 6. They were giving; they were being given. 251. VOCABULARY at-tingo, at-tingere, at-tigi, at-tactum, touch upon, "border on. per-tineo, per-tinere, per-tinui, per-tentum, extend. vergo, vergere, , , literally, slope; lie, he situated. LESSON XXVIIl 95 septentrio, septentrionis, m.; generally plural, septentriones, septen- trionum, literally, the seven plow-oxen, i e., the seven stars that form the constellation of the Great Bear; hence regularly translated the north. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 252. 1. Una pars Galliae flumen Rhenum attingit. 2. Haec pars ad septentriones vergit. 3. Belgae ad septen- triones pertinent. 4. GallT tinam partem obtinent quae ini- tium capit a flumine Rhodano. 5. IJna pars, quae a Gallis obtinetur, Garumna flumine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum continetur. 253. 1. These towns will be taken. 2. We saw (perf.) the Gauls across the Rhine. 3. The Germans had led them to that river. 4. The enemy will have taken the hill. 5. "Who gave (perf.) them the control of Gaul? LESSON XXVIIl PRINCIPAL PARTS— Continued 254. TEXT Horum omnium una pars, quam Galli obtinent, initium capit a flumine Rhodand ; continetur Garumna flumine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum ; attingit etiam flumen Rhenum ; vergit ad septentriones. (14-18, Ch. 1.) 255. PRINCIPAL PARTS Learn the principal parts and meanings of the following verbs ; give the bases of each one, and tell to what conjuga- tion it belongs. 96 BELLUM HELVETICUM Like laudo: appello, appellare, appelldvi, appellatuiii, call. comparo, comparare, etc., prepare. importo, etc., import. occupo, etc., seize. specto, etc., face, stretch. supero, etc., conquer, overcome. at-tingo, at-tingere, at-tigl, AT-TACTum, toucli upon, horder on. con-tendo, con-tendere, con-tendl, con-tentuhi, fight, hasten. divido, dividere, dlvisi, Divisum, divide, separate. habeo, habere, hahui, HABiTum, have, hold. im-pediS, im-pedire, im-pedivi, iM-PEDiTum, hinder. in-col6, in-colere, in-colui, , inhabit, live in. mitto, mittere, misi, Missum, send. munio, munire, mUnivi, MUNiTum, fortify. teneo, tenere, tenul, TENTum, hold. verg5, vergere, , , slope; lie. Give one English word from the present base, and another from the supine base, of importo, occupo, contendo, dividd, and per-mitto. DBILL EXERCISES 256. Give a synopsis throughout the indicative active, in the first singular, third singular, and third plural, of importo, teneo, attingd, munio. 257. 1. Attingebat; contenderat; divisimus. 2. Impe- diam; impedientur; incoluerant. 3. Mlsimus; mittimur; mittemur. 4. MunlvistT; muniveris; superavimus. 5. Mi- lites venerant. 6. Iter fecimus. 258. 1. He had seized; they will seize. 2. You will be sent; it was being fortified. 3. We have hindered; you LESSON XXIX 97 had given. 4. We shall have conquered; we were hasten- ing; they had divided. 5. We inhabit; we shall inhabit. 259. VOCABULARY angustus, -a, -um, narrow, limited. inferus, -a, -um, low. cupiditas, cupiditatis, f., desire, fondness. regnum, -i, royal power, sovereignty. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 260. 1. Nostra cupiditas regni* fuit magna. 2. Belgae ad inferiorem partem fltiminis Rheni pertinent. 3. Fines Helvetiorum fuerunt angustl. 4. Gallia ad septentriones spectat. 5. Solem orientem vidimus. 261. 1. We sent men to the lower hills. 2. The enemy (plu.) fortified (perf.) the town. 3. You (sing.) did not seize (perf.) the royal power. 4. We shall praise his fond- ness for royal power (gen.). 5. That legion will be sent to our state. LESSON XXIX PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE PASSIVE 262. TEXT Belgae ab extremis Galliae f Inibus initium capiunt ; perti- nent ad Inferiorem partem fltiminis RhenI; spectant in septentriones et orientem solem. (18-20, Ch. 1.) *After cupiditas a genitive may be translated by for. 98 BELLUM HELVETICUM 263. PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE PASSIVE Perfect I was praised, or I have been praised SINGULAB LAUDATus (-a, -um) sum LAUDATUS eS LAUDATUS est PLURAL LAUDATi (-ae, -a) sumus LAUDATl eStiS LAUDATi sunt Pluperfect I had teen praised LAUDATUS (-a, -um) eram laudati (-ae, -a) eramus LAUDATUS eras LAUDATUS erat LAUDATi eratis LAUDATi erant Future Perfect I shall have been praised LAUDATUS (-a, -um) ero LAUDlTi (-ae, -a) erimus LAUDATUS eris LAUDATi critls LAUDATUS erit LAUDATi cruut MONiTUS, -a, -um DUCTUS, -a, -um AUDiTus, -a, -um CAPTUS, -a, -um Perfect sum, es, est MONiTi, -ae, -a DucTi, -ae, -a AUDiTi, -ae, -a CAPTi, -ae, -a - sumus, estis, sunt MONITUS, -a, -um DUCTUS, -a, -um AUDiTUS, -a, -um CAPTUS, -a, -um Pluperfect eram, eras, erat MONITI, -ae, -a DucTi, -ae, -a AUDiTi, -ae, -a CAPTi, -ae, -a eramus, eratis, erant LESSON XXIX , 99 Future Perfect MONITUS -a -um DUCTUS, -a, -um AUDiTUS, -a, -um CAPTUS, -a, ■um ero, eris, erit MONiTi, -ae, -a DucTi, -ae, -a AUDiTi, -ae, -a CAPTi, -ae, -a erimus, eritis, erunt 264. The perfect passive participle of all verbs, which constitutes the first part of the compound tenses in the above table, is formed on the supine base, and its nominative singular masculine is the same as the fourth principal part, but with final s instead of m. This participle is a predicate adjective and agrees with the subject in gender, number, and case. DRILL EXERCISES 265. Give a synopsis throughout the indicative, active and passive, in the first singular, third singular, and third plural, of supero, video, mittd, impedio. 266. 1. Moneor; monitus sum. 2. Videbitur; visus erit. 3. Miserant; miss! erant. 4. Impedltus erat; impedita erat. 5. Capiemini; venistis. 6. Oppidum munltum erat; oppida munita erant. 7. Attingit; attigit. 8. Contendit;* contendimus.* 267. 1. I was praised (perf.) ; we were praised (perf.). 2. You (sing.) were sent (perf.) ; you (sing.) will be sent. 3. You (plu.) had been hindered; you (plu.) will have been hindered. 4. He has conquered; he has been conquered. 5. You (sing.) made (perf.) ; you (sing.) will make. 6. It will have been given. 7. They have been separated. ♦What two tenses may these forms be? 100 BELLUM IIELVETICUM 268. VOCABULARY Aquitania, -ae, f., Aquitania, the southwestern part of Gaul, inhabited by the Aquitanians. Hispania, -ae, f., Spain. occidens, genitive occidentis, adjective, falling, setting. Pyrenaeus, -a, -um, Pyrenees. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 269. 1. Aquitania ad Hispaniam pertinet. 2. Montes PyrenaeT proximi Aqultaniae sunt. 3. Occidentem s5lera vidimus. 4. Aquitania inter occidentem solem et septen- trionem spectat. 5. Belgae in extremis Galliae partibus fuerunt. 270. 1. These towns had been fortified. 2. All the roads were narrow. 3. The rivers which you will see are large. 4. Control was being seized by the Helvetians. 5. A con- spiracy had been made. LESSON XXX SIMPLE AND COMPOUND VERBS 271. TEXT Aquitania a Garumna flumine ad Pyrenaeos montes et eam partem OceanT quae est ad Hispaniam pertinet ; spectat inter occidentem solem et septentrionem. (20-23, Ch. 1.) 272. SIMPLE AND COMPOUND VERBS The verbs do and over do, rate and under-rate, illustrate what may be called simple and compound verbs in English ; other examples are out-run, up-hold, hack-slide. Such modi- fications of verbs by particles are very common in Latin. LESSON xx:^, , ',', r^ ',\ : ; -101 With some verbs the preposition is simply prefixed to the verb in all its forms : cedo, cedere, cessi, cessum, go {from) prae-cedd, prae-cedere, prae-cessi, prae-cessum, go before, go ahead of, i. e., precede, surpass sum, esse, fui, futurus, he ab-sum, ab-esse, a-fui, a-futurus, he away from With many other verbs, however, a vowel in the principal parts of a simple verb may be weakened when the verb is compounded : tened, tenere, tenui, tentum, hold con-tineo, con-tinere, con-tinui, con-tentum, hold together,:!. e., hound per-tineo, per-tinere, per-tinui, per-tentum, hold through, i. e., extend ob-tineo, ob-tinere, ob-tinui, ob-tentum, aold (against someone) habeo, habere, habui, habitum, have, hold pro-hibeo, pro-hibere, pro-hibui, pro-hibitum, holdoff , i.e., Tceep away As a rule, all compounds of the same simple verb have similar principal parts. For example, the principal parts of any other com- pounds of teneo and habed are like contineo, probibeo, etc. Learn the principal parts and meanings of the above verbs. DRILL EXERCISES 273. 1. Conjugate prohibeo in the perfect tense, active and passive. 2. Conjugate capio in the future perfect tense, active and passive. 274. 1. Continetur; continebantur. 2. Prohibebiminl ; prohibitus est. 3. Praecedebatis ; praecessistis. 4. Habet; habuit; habuerat. 5. Tenebatur; tenebitur; tenebuntur. 6. Tentus erit ; tentum erat ; tenta erit. 102 BSLLUM HELVETICUM 275. 1. He surpassed; we had surpassed. 2. You (sing.) will be held; you (sing.) have held. 3. It was bounded; they are bounded. 4. You (plu.) will be kept away; they had been kept away. 5. They have been away; they had been away. 6. I shall come; you (sing.) will come. 7. I shall be sent; you (sing.) will be sent. 8. You (sing.) have been brave; you (plu.) have been brave. 276. VOCABULARY apud, preposition with ace, among. dives, genitive divitis, rich. Superlative ditissimus. inductus, -a, -um, participle, influenced. Orgetorix, Orgetorigis, m., Orgetorix, a chief of the Helvetians. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 277. 1. Apud Helvetios Orgetorix fuit ditissimus. 2. Orge- torix, inductus a nobilitate, coniiirationem fecit. 3. Orgetorix regni cupiditate inductus, coniiirationem fecit. 4. Fines Aqultanorum mare attigit. 5. Orgetorix fuit nobilissimus Helvetiorum. 278. 1. Orgetorix will make these conspiracies. 2. He is the most prominent among the Helvetians. 3. The trad- ers will be taken by the enemy. 4. You will see that part which is nearest to the sea (dat.). 5. What had been given to the soldiers? FOURTH EEVIEW LESSON 279. Translation. Translate the text of Chapter I, page 317. Look up on the map, page 204, the proper names used in the descrip- FOURTH REVIEW LESSON 103 tion. Try to think of it as an account of a country, its geography and its inhabitants, not as an exercise in language. This chapter is the general geographical introduction to Caesar ^s narrative of his extraordinary campaigns in Gaul. Such a chapter was especially necessary at the time he wrote, because the Eomans then knew almost nothing of the geography of Gaul, except the parts nearest to Italy and the Mediterranean. Gaul was to them only a vast unknown country whose inhabitants had once taken and sacked Rome, and had several times defeated Roman armies with fearful slaughter. Note especially the position of the Helvetians and what Caesar has to say about them; for it is with them that the narrative is now most concerned. 280. Memory Work. Review the conjugation of the entire indicative mood. (App. 66-71.) 281. Latin-English Vocabulary. 1. Give the memoranda of the following nouns: Actuitania, Hispania, Oceanus, Orgetorix, regmim, septentri5. 2. Compare angustus, and give its meaning. Give the meaning of etiam, extremus, inferus, Pyrenaeus. Give the meaning of apud, and the case used with it. 3. Give the principal parts in full, and the meaning of the following verbs: absum divido incolo prohibeS append do laudd spectd attingo contineo mitto sum audio importo moned super5 capio impedio niuni5 teneo cedo duco obtineo veni5 compare facio occupo vergO contendo gero pertineo video habed praecedo 104 BELLUM HELVETICUM 282. English-Latin Vocabulary. Give the first form of the Latin for the following: also bound limited ocean among even low royal power border on extend narrow touch upon lie north LESSON XXXI ADJECTIVES WITH GENITIVE IN -lUS 283. Nine adjectives of the first-and-second declension have the genitive singular in -ius (in alter usually -ius) and the dative singular in -i, in all genders, but are otherwise regular. These are: alius, another ullus, any uter, which solus, only alter, the other nuUus, no (of two) totus, whole (of two) neuter, neither unus, one 284. SINGULAR If as. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom, unus iina unum totus tota totum Gen. unius unius unius totius totius totius Dat, uni uni uni toti toti toti Ace. unum unam unum totum totam totum Abl. uno una lino toto tota toto SINGULAR Nom. alius alia aliud alter altera alterum Gen. alius alius alius alterlus alterlus alterlus Dat. alii alii alii alteri alteri alteri Ace. alium aliam aliud alterum alteram alterum Abl. alio alia alio altero altera altero LESSON XXXI 105 Notes. . 1. Observe that the genitive and dative singular have the same endings as ille, is and qui; that the neuter aliud is like illud; that other forms are like longus. 2. All these adjectives have a plural, declined like that of longus. The plural of tinus means only, alone. 285. VOCABULARY alius, -a, -ud, another; plural, other, others. alter, altera, alterum, the other (of two) ; the second. totus, -a, -um, whole {of). unus, -a, -um, one. prae-sto, -stare, -stiti, -statum, literally, stand before, i. e., surpass. This verb governs the dative, which is translated by a direct object. Give definitions for alternate, total, and unit, which are suggested by the Latin words above. DRILL EXERCISES 286. 1. Decline hie. 2. "Write the three bases of laudo, moneo, duco, audio, capio. 3. Conjugate the future indica- tive, active and passive, of do and of duco. 4. Give the principal parts of atting5, and a synopsis in the first singular, active and passive. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 287. 1. Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres, quarum unam incolunt Belgae, aliam AquitanI, tertiam Celtae. 2. Ab Orgetorlge imperium totius Galliae occupabitur. 3. Omnibus Gallis^ praestamus. 4. Helvetii una ex^ parte^ flumine Rheno continentur; altera ex^ parte^ flumine Rhodano 1 See praesto in vocabulary. ^ on. ^ side. 106 BELLUM HELVETICUM continentur. 5. Haec oppida a militibus unms civitatis capta sunt. 6. Orgetorix, regni cupiditate inductus, con- iurationem fecit. 7. Alter! legion! praestatis. 8. Un! viro totum agrum dedit. 9. Conitiratio nobilitatis omnis facta erat. 10. Aliud flumen v!dimiis. 1. Of the whole state. 2. Of one ship. 3. They had surpassed (praesto). 4. "We shall come to (ad) another road. 5. I shall give the grain to the other soldier. 6. The towns of another part of Gaul will be fortified. 289. LESSON XXXII FOURTH DECLENSION TEXT Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus~ fuit et d!tissimus Orgetor!x. (24, 25, Ch. 2.) 290. FOURTH DECLENSION passus, M., pace comu, n., horn; wing CASE CASE SINGULAR ENDINGS SINGULAR ENDINGS Norn. passus -US cornu -ft Gen. passus -US cornus -us Bat. passu! -ui cornu -11 Ace. passum -una cornu -a Voc. passus -us cornu -a ALL passu -u cornu -a LESSON XXXII PLURAL Norn. passtis -US cornua -na Gen. passuum -uum cornuum -uum Dat. passibus -ibus cornibus -ibus Ace. passus -us cornua -ua Voc. passus -us cornua -ua AU. passibus -ibus cornibus -ibus 107 The bases of these nouns are pass and com. 291. RVLE FOR GENDER. Nouns of the fourth declension ending in =us are masculine, except domus, manus, and Idus, which are feminine; those ending in =u are neuter. 292. VOCABULARY cornu, -us, n., horn; of an army, wing. cultus, -us, m., civilization. lacus, -us, m., Ia1{e. Dative and ablative plural lacubus. occasus, -us, m., literally, falling; setting. passus, -us, m., pace, which with the Eomans was a double step, about five of our feet. Lemannus, -i, m., (Lalce) Geneva. DRILL EXERCISES 293. 1. Decline mille. 2. Decline ille. 3. Give the three bases of comparo, ced6, and contineo. 4. Give the princi- pal parts of ger5, and a synopsis in the third person singu- lar, active and passive. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 294. 1. Passu; cornus; lacuum. 2. Occasum soils vidi. 3. Belgae a cultu atque humanitate provinciae longissime absunt. 4. Helvetii continentur una ex parte lacu Lemanno 108 BELLUM HELVETICUM et flumine Rhodano. 5. Unum hostium cornu superatum est. 6. Coniurationem nobilitatis laudavimus. 295, 1. Of the other wing; on these lakes. 2. A thou- sand paces ; thousands of paces. 3. We shall make another march. 4. The men of the whole state are coming. 5. The soldiers of one legion conquered the Gauls. 6. We saw the setting of the sun. LESSON XXXIII FIFTH DECLENSION 296. TEXT Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus fuit et ditissimus Orgetorix. Is, regni cupiditate inductus, coniurationem nobilitatis fecit. (24-26, Ch. 2.) 297. FIFTH DECLENSION dies, M., day SINGULAR PLURAL Nom . dies dies Gen. diei dierum Bat. diei dietous Ace. diem dies Voc. dies dies Abl die diebus res, F., i •Jung, affair CASE ENDINGS SINGULAR PJ.URAL SING. PLU. res res •es -es rei rerum -ei -erum rei rebus -ei -ebus rem res -em -es res res -es -es re rebus -§ -ebus The bases of these nouns are di and r. The e is short in the accusative singular of all nouns, and in the genitive and dative singular of fides, spes, and res. LESSON XXXIII 109 Dies and res are the only nouns of this declension which are fully declined in the plural. Spes and acies have in the plural only the nominative and accusative. 298. RULE FOR GENDER. Nouns of the fifth dectension are feminine, except dies, which is usually masculine. 299. VOCABULARY acies, aciei, f., line-of -battle, battle-line. dies, diei, usually masculine, sometimes feminine in the singular, day. fides, fidei, f., pledge. res, rei, f., thing. spes, spei, f., hope. f acilis, facile, easy. per-suadeo, -suadere, -suasi, -suasum, persuade. This verb governs the dative, which is translated by a direct object. Fides also means loyalty; can you think of an English word from fides that means the same? What noun comes from f acilis? What verb from the present base, and what noun from the supine base, of persuadeo? DRILL EXERCISES 300. 1. Decline is. 2. Decline the Latin for another wing; any lake. 3. Give the principal parts of teneo and miinio, and a synopsis of each in the third person plural, active and passive. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 301. 1. Trium dierum; ilia re. 2. Fidem huic viro dedisti. 3. Magnam spem habeo. 4. Homines his rebus moniti erant. 5. Acies nostra superabitur. 6. Militibus persuasimus. 7. Hae res faciles sunt. 110 BELLUM HELVETICUM 302. 1. The days are long. 2. This pledge will be given. 3, Our hopes were great. 4. The enemy had seen our line-of-battle. 5. These things ^vere heard by other traders. LESSON XXXIV ABLATIVE OF AGENT 303. TEXT Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus fuit et ditissimus Orgetorix. Is, regni cupiditate inductus, coniurationem nobilitatis fecit et civitatl persuasit ut^ de flnibus suTs cum omnibus copils exTrent.- (24-27, Ch. 2.) NOTES 1. that. 2. they should go out. 304. USE OF PREPOSITIONS It has been seen that ablatives are used sometimes with and sometimes without a preposition. The use or omis- sion of a preposition depends upon the particular force which the expression has in the sentence. In some uses a preposition is employed, in others not. It is alw^ays, there- fore, the use of an ablative in a sentence that determines whether or not a preposition is used, and what preposition it is, if any. 305. ABLATIVE OF AGENT Model Belgae a Gallis visi sunt, the Belgians were seen hy the LESSON XXXIV 111 Notes, a. This use of the ablative answers the question, ''By whom?" b. This use of the ablative always designates a person. c. This use of the ablative always has the preposition 9, or ab. d. This use of the ablative is found only with the passive voice. e. The same thought expressed by the active voice would be writ- ten: — Gain Belgas viderunt. Here the agent of the passive verb becomes the subject of the active verb, and the subject of the passive verb becomes the object of the active verb. 306. RULE. Agency with the passive voice Is expressed by the ablative with a or ab. 307. VOCABULARY pater, patris, m., father. mater, matris, f., mother. frater, fratris, m., brother. sorer, sororis, f., sister. filius, filii, m., son. filia, niiae, f., daughter. Dative and ablative plural, fUiS^bus. Give an English derivative from each of the vrords above. DBILL EXERCISES 308. 1. Decline qui. 2. Decline the Latin for another thing; the whole line-of-hattle. 3. Give the principal parts of supero, video, vergo, venio, and conjugate their present and future indicative active. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 309. 1. Pater puerum misit. 2. Puer a patre suo missus est. 3. Mater a filiabus suis laudatur. 4. Aquitania flu- minibus et montibus continetur. 5. Haec sorori a fratribus dabantur. 6. Helvetii omnibus^ praestant. 7. Vir a filiis vTsus est. 8. Initium itineris facile fuit. ^See §285. 112 BELLUM HELVETICUM 310. 1. The boy saw (his) mother. 2. The soldier's mother was seen by the men. 3. The town had been taken by the soldiers. 4. The town was being fortified (by) walls. 5. The brothers liad been sent by (their) sister. 6. The men will be praised by (their) sons and daughters. LESSON XXXV ABLATIVE or MEANS 311. TEXT Orgetorix, ''Facile est," inquit/ ''quod virtute omnibus praestamus, totlus Galliae imperium occupare."^ (27-29, Ch. 2.) NOTES 1. said. 2. occupare, the second principal part of occupo, is the present 312. ABLATIVE OF MEANS Model Fliimine continetur, it is hounded hy a river. Notes, a. This use of the ablative answers the question, *'By what?" ''With whatf "By means of what?" h. This use of the ablative almost always designates a thing, c. This use of the ablative never has a preposition. 313. RULE. Means is expressed by the ablative without a preposition. LESSON XXXV 113 314. VOCABULAEY carrus, -i, m., cart. co-emo, -emere, -emi, -emptum, l)uy up, purchase. iumentum, -i, n., ieast of bur- den, pacTc animal; applied to oxen and horses. locus, -i, m., plural loca, loco- rum, n.; place. multus, -a, -um, much; plural many. natura, -ae, f., character. CARRUS (From Trajan's Column) Give a noun, a verb and an adjective from locus, and a verb from multus. DBILL EXERCISES 315. 1. Compare angustus in the nominative singular, all genders. 2. Give the ablative singular and genitive plural of facilis, and of the comparative of facilis. 3. Give the principal parts of importo and mitto, and conjugate them in the perfect and pluperfect indicative active. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 316. 1. Frumentum ab amicTs nostris missum est. 2. Frumentum carrTs et iumentls missum est. 3. Haec loca a multis hominibus visa sunt. 4. Ea a mercatoribus magno carrorum numero importabantur. 5. Magnum numerum carrorum coemebamus. 6. Helvetii natura loci continentur. 317. 1. This place was being fortified by walls. 2. These places were bounded by rivers. 3. The men were hindered by the carts. 4. The carts were drawn (duco) by pack animals (iumentum). 5. They had been bought by the Helvetians. 6. Gaul was inhabited by the Celts. 114 BELLUM HELVETICUM LESSON XXXVI ABLATIVE OF TIME 318. TEXT Helvetiis persuasit quod undique loci natura continentur. (29, 30, Ch. 2.) 319. ABLATIVE OF TIME Models 1. Eo tempore venit, he came at that time. 2. Tribus annis veniet, he will come withi7i three years. Notes, a. In sentences such as these the ablative answers the question, "When?" b. In sentences like Model 1, the ablative is translated by at or on, and denotes "time when." c. In sentences like Model 2, the ablative is translated by within, and denotes "time within which." 320. RULE. Time, when or within which, is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. 321. VOCABULARY annus, -i, m., year. biennium, -i, n., literally, tJie space of two years, i. e., two years. mensis, mensis, m., month. lura, -ae, m., the Jura mountain range, or the Jura mountains, which extend from the Ehine to the Ehone. What is an annual election? A biennial election? LESSON XXXVII ' 115 DRILL EXERCISES 322. 1. Decline the Latin for this place: a month and a day. 2. Give the principal parts of coemo and conjugate it in the future indicative, active and passive. 3. Give the principal parts of persuaded, and conjugate it in the future and future perfect indicative active. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 323. 1. Illo die legio nostra in Hispaniam missa est. 2. Hoc mense in Galliam mittemur. 3. Oppidum biennio miini- tum erit. 4. Legiones alterius cornus ab hostibus superatae erant. 5. lura mons est inter Sequanos et Helvetios. 6. Tertio anno iter de finibus nostris faciemus. 324. 1. At that time we came to a hill. 2. Within three months they prepared a supply of grain. 3. All the work had been done by the soldiers of one legion. 4. This year (there) are many Germans in our territory. 5. Gaul was divided by rivers. LESSON xxxvn ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT 325. TEXT Helvetiis persuasit quod undique loci nattira continentur : una ex^ parte^ flumine Eheno, latissimo atque altissimo, qui agrum-^ Helvetium* a GormanTs dividit. (29-32, Ch. 2.) 116 BELLUM HELVETICUM NOTES 1. on. 3. territory. 2. side. 4. adjective: Helvetian. 326. ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT Models 1. Multos annos in Gallia erit, he will he in Gaul many years. 2. Tria milia passuum missus est, he was sent three miles. Notes, a. The words underlined are accusatives or objectives, but are not objects. h. They answer the question, "How long?" "How far?" c. While in English we may say "for many years," "for three miles," no preposition is used in Latin. 327. RULE, The accusative without a preposition is used to express duration of time and extent of space. 328. VOCABULARY pateo, patera, patui, , literally, be open; extend, pes, pedis, m., foot. spatium, -i, n., space, of time or distance. quadraginta, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective, forty. octoginta, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective, eighty. centum, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective, one hundred. ducenti, -ae, -a, cardinal (numeral) adjectiv.e, two hundred. mille passus, a thousand voces milia passuum, thousands aces, I e., a mile 1 gee §96. of paces, 1. e., miles. J Give two English words from centum, and two from the base of pes. LESSON XXXVIII 117 DRILL EXERCISES 329. 1. Give the rules for gender in all the declensions. 2. Give the principal parts of impedio, and a synopsis in the third singular, active and passive. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 330. 1. Fines nostri centum mllia passuum patebant. 2. Dies quadraginta frumentum comparabamus. 3. Ager erat pedes ducentos latus. 4. Tertio die milites in haec loca venerunt. 5. Silva octoginta milia passuum patet. 6. Hoc spatium erat centum pedes latum. 7. Frumentum magno iumentorum numero mittetur. 331. 1. We marched (made a march) the whole distance in one day. 2. (For) three days we kept away the enemy. 3. That year you fought with all the Germans. 4. Our line-of-battle was seen by the enemy. 5. The town had been fortified with very-high walls. LESSON XXXVIII SUBJUNCTIVE OF SUM 332. TEXT Helvetiis persuasit quod undique loci nattira continentur: una ex parte fltimine Rheno, latissimo atque altissimo, qui agrum Helvetium a Germanis dividit; altera^ ex parte monte lura altissimo, qui est inter Sequanos et Helvetios. (29-33, Ch. 2.) NOTE 1. the second. 118 BELLUM HELVETICUM 333. SUBJUNCTIVE OF SUM Present Perfect SINGULAR PLURAL Sim simus sis sltls sit sint Imperfect essem essemus esses essetis esset assent SINGULAR PLURAL fuQiim fuetis fueiit /"Merimus fweritis fuerint Pluperfect fuissem fuisses fuisset fwissemus /•wissetis /Missent 334. Note the following facts about the subjunctive mood of all verbs: 1. There is no future or future perfect tense. 2. All the tenses are conjugated regularly ; that is, in the conjugation of any tense, nothing changes but the personal ending. Therefore, if the first person singular is known, the entire tense can be conjugated. 3. The vowel before the personal ending is always long in every tense, where it can he; that is, everywhere except before the personal endings m, t, nt; r, ntur. 4. The perfect and pluperfect tenses are formed on the perfect base like the same tenses of the indicative. 5. The translation of the subjunctive varies with its use, so that no general set of meanings can be given for it. 335. VOCABULARY altittido, altitudinis, f. [altus], height; depth. fortitudo, fortltudinis, f. [fortis], hravery. latitudo, latitudinis, f. [latus], width, Ijreadth. longitudo, longitudinis, f. [longus], length. multitudo, multitudinis, f. [multus, much'], literally, ** muchness " ; muUitude; great number. LESSON XXXIX 119 It will be noticed that these nouns are all abstract; that is, they are formed from adjectives and denote qualities. Give the English words derived from the first four. DRILL EXEECISES 336. 1. Decline the Latin for a great height; many feet. 2. Review the conjugation of the indicative mood of sum, and give a synopsis through the indicative and subjunctive, in the first singular. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 337. 1. Mons lura erat magnae altitudinis. 2. Fortitudo Helvetiorum est magna. 3. Haec loca a multitudine homi- num incolebantur. 4. Ad Rhenum venimus, qui est flumen magnae latittidinis et longitudinis. 5. Tres dies cum Ger- manls contendimus. 338. 1. The length of the march was great. 2. You often praised (perf.) the Helvetians' bravery. 3. (For) three years we inhabited (pei*f.) those places. 4. The sword was given by the soldier to a friend. 5. The field was bounded by a forest. LESSON XXXIX SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE OF THE FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS 339. TEXT Helvetiis persuasit quod undique loci natura continentur: una ex parte flumine Rheno, latissimo atque altissimo, qui agrum Helvetium a Germanis dividit ; altera ex parte monte 120 BELLUM HELVETICUM Itira altissimo, qui est inter Sequanos et Helvetios; tertia^ lacu Lemanno et flumine Rhodano, qui nostram provinciam ab Helvetiis dividit. (29-35, Ch. 2.) ^ NOTE 1. With tertia supply ex parte. 340. SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE FIRST CONJUGATION Present SINGUT.AB PLURAL laudem laudemus laudes laudetis laudet laudent Imperfect laudarem laudaremus laudares laudaretis laudaret laudarent Perfect SINGULAR PLURAL lauddveiim lauddveTimns lauddveiis lauddveiitis lauddveiit lauddverint Pluperfect lauddvissem lauddvissemus lauddvisses lauddvisset lauddvissetis lauddvissent 341. SECOND CONJUGATION Present Perfect moneam moneamus monuerim monuerlmus moneas moneatis monueris monueiitis moneat moneant monueTit monuerint Imperfect Pluperfect monerem moneremus monuissem monuissemus moneres moneretis mo7iuisses monuissetis moneret monerent monuisset monuissent 342. Review what was said about the subjunctive mood in §334, and note the following points also: LESSON XXXIX 121 1. The sign of the imperfect subjunctive in regular verbs is re, and the following rule may be used to remember the forms of this tense for any verb : Imperfect subjunctive = present active infinitive + per- sonal endings. 2. The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive have the same endings as these tenses of sum. 343. VOCABULARY amicitia, -ae, f. [amicus], friendship ; which in foreign relations meant practically alliance. con-firmo, -are, -avi, -atum [con-, intensive], literally, maJce firm; i.e., establish; declare. end, -are, -avi, -atum, wander. finitimus, -a, -um [finis], neighboring; near. Masculine as noun, neighbor. facile, adverb, easily. late, adverb, widely. minus, adverb, less. "What English verb comes from the present base of confirmo, and what noun from the supine base? *'He erred greatly in doing this." — What does *'err" mean? What is the noun formed from errd? DRILL EXERCISES 344. 1. Decline the expressions tdtus dies ; pater et puer. 2. Give the synopsis in the subjunctive active, first singular, of do and of video. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 345. 1. AmTcitiam confirmabimus. 2. Ob eas res Helve- tii minus late errabant. 3. IVIinus facile cum finitimis bel- 122 BELLUM HELVETICUM lum gerebant. 4. Nostri fines erant fmitiml Germanis. 5. Silva multa milia passuum pertinet. 346. 1. Friendship will be established by the Germans. 2. These places were near to the Germans (dat.). 3. The enemy were hindered by these walls. 4. Within one year we established friendship with all the states. 5. Men of great bravery will be kept away less easily. LESSON XL SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE OF THE THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS , S 347. TEXT Ob eas res HelvetiT et^ minus late errabant et^ minus facile cum finitimls bellum gerebant. (35-37, Ch. 2.) NOTE 1. et . . . et, both . . . and. ♦ SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE 348. THIRD CONJUGATION Tresent Perfect SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL due am ducamus duxeTim duxeiimus ducas ducatis diixetis diixerltis ducat ducant duxerit duxennt LESSON XL Imperfect Pluperfect ducerem duceremus duod^sQTQ. diZoissemns duceres duceretis dwarisses dwaissetis duceret ducerent dwarisset dwaissent 123 349. FOURTH CONJUGATION Fresent SINGULAR PLURAL audiam audiamus audias audiatis audiat audiant Perfect SINGULAR audlvetivd audivens audlv&nX PLURAL audivenams audivenXi^ audivetinX Imperfect audirem audiremus audires audiretis audiret audirent Pluperfect audivissem audivisBQS audivi&Eet aw^i/issemus awditissetis audXviaseii\. 350. THIRD CONJUGATION IN -16 Present Perfect SINGULAB 1 PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL capiam capiamus ceperim ceperimus capias eapiatis ceperis ceperitis capiat eapiant ceperit ceperint Imperfect Pluperfect caperem caperemus cepissem ceplssemus caperes caperetis cepisses cepissetis caperet caperent cepisset ceplssent Review what was said about the subjunctive mood in §§334 and 342, and see how those statements apply to the conjugations above. 124 BELLUM HELVETICUM 351. VOCABULARY af-ficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum [ad, to, facio, do], literally, do to; a feet. cupidus, -a, -um, desirous, fond. dolor, doloris, m., distress. maximus, -a, -um [irregular superlative of magnus], greatest, very great. pax, pacis, f., peace. quam, adverb; when preceding a superlative, it is translated by possible placed, after the superlative in English. What English word does the supine base of afRcio form? What does it mean to do the maximum amount of work? What does pacify mean? DBILIi EXERCISES 352. 1. Decline the expressions omnis locus (see §314) ; filius et filia (see §307). 2. Give the synopses in the sub- junctive active, first singular, of gero, veni5, facio. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 353. 1. Helvetii erant cupidl belli. 2. Quod loci natura continebantur, magn5 dolore afficiebantur. 3. Quam maxi- mum numerum carrorum coemerunt. 4. Numerus iumen- torum quoque coemptus est. 5. Pacem et amicitiam cum finitimls civitatibus confirmaverunt. 354. 1. In the third year we established peace. 2. For three years we bought carts. 3. These were drawn (diico) a hundred miles. 4. The height of these mountains was very great. 5. Friendship was less easily established by the Helvetians. LESSON XLI 125 LESSON XLI SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE OF ALL CONJUGATIONS 355. TEXT Ob eas res Helvetii et minus late errabant et minus facile cum finitimis bellum gerebant. Ob eam causam hi homines, qui erant belli cupidi, magno dolore afficiebantur. (35-38, Ch. 2.) SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE 356. FIRST CONJUGATION Present SINGULAR lauder lauderis or -re laudetur PLURAL lau demur laudemini laudentur Perfect SINGULAB LAUDATUS Sim LAUDATUS sis LAUDATUS sit PLURAL LAUDATl SimUS LAUDATi SitiS LAUDATl Sint Imperfect laudarer laudaremur laudareris or -re laudaremini laudaretur laudarentur Pluperfect LAUDATUS essem laudAti essemus LAUDATUS esses LAUDlTi essctis LAUDATUS esset LAUDATi csseiit 357. SECOND CONJUGATION Present monear monearis or -re moneatur moneamur moneamini moneantur Perfect MONITUS Sim MONiTus sis MONITUS sit MONiTi simus MONiTi sitis MONiTi sint Imperfect monerer monereris or -re moneretur moneremur moueremini monerentur Pluperfect MONITUS essem moniti essemus MONITUS esses MONiTi essetis MONITUS esset moniti essent 126 BELLUM HELVETICUM 358. THIRD CONJUGATION Present Perfect SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL ducar ducamur ductus sini DucTi simus ducaris or -re ducamini ductus sis DucTi sitis ducatur ducantur ductus sit DucTi sint Imperfect ducerer ducereris or -re duceretur duceremur duceremini ducerentur Pluperfect DUCTUS essem DUCTUS esses DUCTUS esset DUCTI essemus DucTi essetis DUCTI essent 359. FOURTH CONJUGATION Present audiar audiaris or -re audiatur audiamur audiamini audiantur Perfect AUDITUS Sim AUDITUS sis AUDiTus sit AUDiTi simus AUDiTi sitis AUDIT! sint Imperfect audirer audireris or -re audiretur audiremur audiremini audirentur Pluperfect AUDITUS essem AUDITUS esses AUDITUS AUDITI essemus AUDiTi essetis AUDlTi essent 360. THIRD CONJUGATION IN -io Present capiar capiaris or -re capiatur capiamur capiamini capiantur Perfect CAPTUS sim CAPTus sis CAPTUS sit cAPTi simus CAPTi sitis CAPTi sint Imperfect caperer capereris or -re caperetur caperemur caperemini caperentur Pluperfect CAPTUS essem capti essemus CAPTUS esses CAPTi essetis CAPTUS esset CAPTi essent LESSON XLl 127 361. Observe that in the present and imperfect tenses, the active and passive subjunctive differ only in the per- sonal endings, just as do the same tenses of the indicative (§§200, 212). Note that the perfect and pluperfect are formed by com- bining the present and imperfect tenses of the subjunctive of sum v^ith the perfect passive participle, on the same principle as the same tenses of the indicative passive. 362. The formation of the subjunctive tenses can best be learned by inspection of a synopsis, as follows: SUBJUNCTIVE laudem lauder laudarem laudarer lauddveTim LAUDATUS Sim lauddvissem LAUDATUS essem 363 autem, adverb, moreover. existimo, -are, -avi, -atum, think. gloria, -ae, f., reputation. pro, preposition with ablative, for; in view of. ut, conjunctive adverb with indicative, as. DEILL EXERCISES 364. 1. Decline the Latin for a great lake (§292). 2. Give the synopsis in the subjunctive mood, active and pas- sive, first singular, of praesto, teneo, attingo, munio. INDICATIVE Pres. Act. laudo Pass. laudor Imp. Act. laudabam Pass. laudabar Fut. Act. laudabo Pass. laudabor Perf. Act. lauddvl Pass. LAUDATUS sum Plup. Act. laudaveT3Lm Pass. LAUDATUS eram F. P. Act. lauddvero Pass. LAUDATUS ero VOCABULARY 128 BELLUM. HELVETICUM TRANSLATION EXERCISES 365. 1. Helvetil non late errabant, propterea quod eoruiii fines erant angusti. 2. Magn5 dolore autem afficiebantur quod pro multitudine Helvetiorum fines angustos habebant. 3. Eorum gloria belli^ atque fortitudinis^ erat magna. 4. Pr5 multitudine- autem hominum- atque gloria belli^ et fortitudinis\ fines nostri sunt angusti. 5. Angustos fines habemus, ut existimamus. 366. 1. Peace will be established by our consuls. 2. Friendship had been established by these things. 3. At that time their bravery was great. 4. For many days we were very near to these lakes (dat.). 5. There is another river at (ad) this end of the town. LESSON XLII INDIRECT QUESTIONS SEQUENCE OF TENSES 367. TEXT Pro multitudine autem hominum et pro gloria belli at- que fortitudinis, angustos fines habebant, ut existimabant. (38-40, Ch. 2.) 368. DIRECT QUESTIONS Models (a) Quis venit. Who is coming? {b) Quis venit. Who came (has come)? 1 These words, though genitive, may be translated with the preposition for. ^multitudo hominum^ literally, multitude of human beings, here large population. LESSON XLII 129 369. INDIRECT QUESTIONS Models fquisveniat, (who is coming? 1. Quaerit j^^^^ ^^^^^.^^ he is asMng |^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ , f quis veniret, Civho was coming? 2. Quaesivit |^„j^ ^^„j^^^^_ A. a«M |^,^^ „^^ ^^^^, Notes. «. Subordinate clauses in Latin like the above, which are introduced by an interrogative word and have their verb in the subjunctive mood, are called Indirect Questions. h. The verb of an indirect question, while subjunctive in Latin, is indicative in English. c. The tense of the verb in the subordinate clause depends partly upon the tense of the main verb and partly upon the kind of action denoted. d. The rule below (§371) is the general rule for the tense of the subjunctive mood in all uses. The subjunctive does not express time like the indicative, but its tenses represent action as incomplete or completed at the time denoted by the main verb. 370. RULE. The verb of an indirect question Is In tlie subjunctive. 371. RULE. If the main verb is present, future, or future perfect, a subordinate subjunctive verb is present or perfect; if the main verb is imperfect, perfect, or pluperfect, a sub" ordinate subjunctive verb is imperfect or pluperfect. The present and imperfect subjunctive denote incomplete action; the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive denote completed action. Note 1. The present, future, and future perfect indicative, and the present and perfect subjunctive, are called principal (or primary) tenses; while the imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect indicative, and the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive are called historical (or secondary) tenses. Note 2. The rule is therefore sometimes stated: 130 BELLUM HELVETICUM 371. a* Principal tenses are followed by principal tenses, and historical by historical. Note 3. This rule applies only to complex sentences whose sub- ordinate verbs are subjunctive. There are certain exceptions which will be noted as examples occur. 372. VOCABULARY cur, adverb, why. ubi, adverb, where. e-nuntio, -nuntiare, -nuntiavi, -nuntiatum, literally, tell out; regularly, disclose, report. quaero, quaerere, quaesivi, quaesitum, asic (a question). The words inquire and inquisitive come from the present and supine bases of the compound of in and quaerd. What do they mean? DRILL EXERCISES 373. 1. Give the principal parts of confirmo, and a synopsis in the indicative and subjunctive moods, active and passive, first singular. 2. Give the principal parts of coemo, and a synopsis in the indicative and subjunctive moods, active and passive, third plural. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 374. 1. Audimus cur hoc faciat; audivimus cur hoc faceret. 2. Video cur hoc f ecerit ; vidi cur hoc fecisset. 3. Quaerunt quis mittatur; quaerebant quis mitteretur. 4. Enuntiabitur ubi hostes sint; enuntiatum erat ubi hostes essent. 5. N5n audivi quem misisses; audies quem miserim. 375. 1. They are asking vi^here you are ; they were ask- ing where you were. 2. They see why you have come; LESSON XLIII 131 they saw why you had come. 3. The consul reported what he had done; he will report what he is doing. 4. We had heard what was being sent; we heard what had been sent. 5. We asked who had come; you are asking who has come. LESSON XLIII INFINITIVES 376. TEXT Pro multitudine autem hominum et pro gloria bell! atque fortittidinis, angustos fines, ut existimabant, habebant, qui in^ longitudinem milia passuum ducenta et quadraginta, in* latitiidinem centum et octoginta, patebant. (38-42, Ch. 2.) NOTE 1. in. 377. INFINITIVES ActWe Passive sum Pres. esse, to he Perf. fuisse, to have been Put. FUTurus esse, to he going-to-he FIRST CONJUGATION Pres. laudare, to praise laiidari, to he praised Perf, lauddvisse, to have praised laudatus esse, to have been praised Put. LAUDATurus csse, LAUDATum iri, to he going-to-praise to he going-to-he-praised 132 BELLUM HELVETICUM SECOND CONJUGATION Pres. monere, to warn moneri, to he warned Perf. momiisse, to liave warned monitus esse, to have been warned Put. MONiTurus esse, MONiTum iri, to he going-to-warn to he going-to-he-warned THIED CONJUGATION Pres. ducere, to lead duci, to he led Perf. duxisse, to have led ductus esse, to have heen led Put. DucTurus esse, DucTum iri, to he going-to-lead to he going-to-he-led FOUETH CONJUGATION Pres. audire, to hear audiri, to he heard Perf. audlvi8se, to have heard auditus esse, to have heen heard Put. AUDlTurus esse, AUDiTum iri, to he going-to-hear to he going-to-he-heard THIRD CONJUGATION IN -16 Pres. capere, to taTce capi, to he taTcen Perf. cepisse, to have taTcen captus esse, to have heen taken, Put. CAPTums esse, CAPTum iri, to he going-to-taTce to he going -to-he-taTcen 378. Note the following facts about the infinitives given above : 1. The present infinitives are formed on the present base. 2. The perfect active infinitive is formed on the perfect base. 3. The compound forms (the perfect passive and both the future infinitives) are formed on the supine base. 4. In the perfect passive infinitive the first word is the perfect passive participle (which is used in the perfect in- dicative and perfect subjunctive passive). This form may, therefore, be in any gender and number. LESSON XLIII 133 5. In the future active infinitive, the first form is the future active participle. This form may also be in any gender and number. 6. In the future passive infinitive, the first word is the supine (the fourth principal part), and this form does not change. 379. VOCABULARY cdg5, cogere, coegi, coactum, collect; with complementary infinitive, compel. c6n-stitu6, -stituere, -stitui, -stitutum, decide; determine. debeo, debere, debui, debitum, ought. iubeo, iubere, iussi, iussum, order. mature, -are, -avi, -atum, hasten. What English verb and noun are from the supine base of constituo? What is a cogent reason? DRILL EXERCISES 380. Give the principal parts, bases, and all the infini- tives, with their translation, of do, teneo, mitto, impedio, facio. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 381. 1. Tenuisse; tentus esse. 2. Venturus esse ; vSnisse. 3. Confirmare ; confirmari. 4. Misisse ; missiirus esse. 5. Mitti; missum iri. 6. Constituerunt ea comparare. 7. Eum maturare iussimus. 8. Garros coemere debemus. 9. Ilelvetii errare cogebantur. 10. Oppidum munire maturaverunt. 11. Gonstitueramus rogare ubi esses. 12. Omnes audient cur carrT coemptT sint. 382. 1. To be going-to-have. 2. To have been seen. 3. To have carried on ; to have been carried on. 4. To be seen ; 134 BELLUM HELVETICUM to be sent. 5. To be compelled; I have compelled. 6. He ordered the town to be fortified. 7. He asked what we had. 8. They will hear where we have been. 9. They were compelled (perf.) to fight. FIFTH REVIEW LESSON 383. Give an account of the events narrated in Chapter n, and translate it. 384. Memory work. 1. Adjectives with genitive in -ins (§284). 2. Fourth and fifth declensions (§§290,297). 3. Subjunctive mood and infinitives (App. 66-71). 385. Latin-English vocabulary. 1. Give the memoranda of the following nouns acies fides longitude pater altitudo filia mater pax amicitia filius mensis pes annus frater multitud5 res carrus lacus natura soror comu latitude occasus spatium dies locus passus spes 2. Give the meaning of the following adjectives, and show how each is declined : alius, alter, centum, cupidus, ducenti, finitimus, maximus, multus, quadraginta, octoginta, totus, unus. Compare cupidus. FIFTH REVIEW LESSON 135 3. Give the principal parts and meaning of the following verbs : coemo, cogo, confirmo, constitud, debeo, enuntio, existimS, iubeo, mature, pateo, persuadeo, praesto, quaero. 4. Give the meanings of the following words: autem, cur, facile, late, minus, ubi, ut with the indicative. Give the meaning of pro and the case which it governs. 386. Give the first form of the Latin for the following announce disclose less report another distance line of battle setting appoint easily many sister as eighty mile son ask establish miles space breadth extend month sunset brother father moreover surpass buy foot mother thing cart forty much think character friendship multitude two hundred collect great number neighbor (ing) in view of compel greatest one west daughter hasten order where day- (not contends) the other whole decide height ought why declare hope pace widely depth horn peace width desirous hundred persuade wing determine lake place year length pledge 387 Give complete Latin sentences, with translation, illus- trating the expression of agency, means, time (three uses), extent (two uses) ; and a direct and an indirect question. 136 BELLUM HELVETICUM LESSON XLIV 388. PARTICIPLES Active Passive sum Pres. yheing Perf. , having been Fut. FUTurus, going-to-be FIRST CONJUGATION Pres. laudans, praising , being praised Perf. , having praised TjAvdatus, (having been) praised Fut. LAUDATurus, going-to-praise laudandus, to-be-praised SECOND CONJUGATION Pres. monens, warning , being warned Perf. , having warned MotiiTUS, (having been) warned Fut. MO^iTUius, going-to warn monejidus, to-be-war7ied THIRD CONJUGATION Pres. diicens, leading , being led Perf. , having led ductus, (having been) led Fut. DUCTurus, going-to-lead ducendus, to-be-led FOURTH CONJUGATION Pres. audiens, hearing , being heard Perf. , having heard audItus, (having been) heard Fut. AVDiTivocvL^j going -to-hear audiendus, to-be-heard THIRD CONJUGATION IN -io Pres. capiens, talcing , being taTcen Perf. , having taJcen caftus, (having been) taken Fut. CAPTurus, going-to-talce capiendus, to-be-tahen LESSON XLIV 137 389. Note the following facts about the participles given in §388: 1. The present active and future passive participles are formed on the present base. 2. The future active and perfect passive participles are formed on the supine base. 3. The future active participle is the first part of the future active infinitive. 4. The perfect passive participle is the first part of the compound tenses of the passive, e. g., laudatus sum, lauda- tus sim, laudatus esse, etc. 5. All the participles ending in -us are declined like longus. 6. The present active participles are declined like laudans, §390. 390. DECLENSION OF PRESENT PARTICIPLES laudans, praising MAS. FEM. ITEUT. Nom. laudans laudans laudans Gen. laudantis laudantis laudantis Bat. laudanti laudanti laudanti Ace. laud an tern laudantem laudans Voc. laudans laudans laudans Ahl. laudante laudante laudante Nom. laudantes laudantes laudantia Gen. laudantium laudantium laudantium Dat. laudantibus laudantibus laudantibus Ace. laudantes (-is) laudantes (-is) laudantia Voc. laudantes laudantes laudantia Ahl. laudantibus laudantibus laudantibus Notiee that this is declined like the adjective oriens (§103), except for the ablative singular. 138 BELLUM HELVETICUM 391. TRANSLATION OF PARTICIPLES Remember that participles are verbal adjectives. All forms of the same adjective (e. g., longus, longa, longos, longis, etc.), are translated alike, and in the same way all forms of the same participle are translated the same. Thus laudans, laudantes, or any other form of this par- ticiple would be translated praising. But in translating a sentence it is as necessary with a participle as it is with an adjective to observe with what the participle agrees. A participle is usually placed in English next to the word which it modifies. 392. VOCABULARY ad-duc6, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, lead on, induce. auctoritas, auct5ritatis, f., influence. per-moveo, -movere, -movi, -motum, literally, move thoroughly; arouse, profectio, profectionis, f., departure. sup-petd, -petere, -petivi, -petitum [peto, seelc'], he on hand. Give English words from moveo, motum, petitum. DRILL EXERCISES 393. Give the principal parts, bases, and all the parti- ciples, of do, teneo, mitto, munio, faci5, with their transla- tion. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 394. Give the gender, number, and case of the participles in the following exercises, and translate them in the proper voice and tense: 1. Cogens; coaetiirus; coactus; cogendus. 2. lubentes; iubendi; iussi; iussuri. 3. Adductus; adductl. 4. Ilelve- tii, his rebus adductl, e suTs flnibus venerunt. 5. Helvetii, auctoritate Orgetorlgis permotT, frumentum coemere con- LESSON XLV 139 stituerunt. 6. Copia frumenti in itinere suppetebat. 7. Helvetil omnia ad profectionem comparaverunt. 8. Magnus numerus itimentorum, ab HelvetiTs coemptorum, in itinere captus est. 9. Copias filio suo dedit ducendas in Galliam. 10. Tria milia hominum, a legato captorum, magno dolore affect! sunt. 11. Vidimus ubi homines essent. 395. 1. Thinking (mas. sing. dat.). 2. Going-to-fight (mas. plu. ace.). 3. Having been bought (neut. plu. gen.). 4. One part of the Helvetians, separated from the rest, was hastening to make a march into Gaul. 5, The men, coming from the fields, were taken by the Germans. 6. The Helve- tians were not going-to-divide their troops. 7. Part of the field given to these men is across that river. 8. We shall hear why they have decided to do this. LESSON XLV ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE 396. TEXT Helvetil, adducti et permoti, omnia ad profectionem cora- parare constituerunt. Helvetil, his rebus adducti et aucto- ritate Orgetorlgis permotT, omnia comparare constituerunt. Constituerunt omnia comparare atque iumenta et carros cocmere. Constituerunt omnia ad profectionem comparare, iumentorum et carrorum auam maximum numerum coemere. His rebus adducti et auctoritate Orgetorlgis permoti, Helvetil constituerunt omnia ad profectionem comparare, iumentorum et carr5rum quam maximum numerum coemere. (43-46, Ch. 3.) 140 BELI-UM HELVETICUM 397. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE IMODEL Oppido occupato, ad flumen contendimus, the town having been seized, we hastened to the river. Notes, a. In this sentence the noun oppidd and the participle occupato, agreeing with it, are in the ablative case and are gram- matically independent of the rest of the sentence. In the English translation the construction is called the nominative absolute. b. While in a single sentence this construction is good English, it is not good style to use it frequently. It is very common in Latin, however, and it is therefore often necessary, for the sake of good English, to translate it freely, e. g., by a clause. Thus the sense of the above might be expressed in this way: "After the town had been seized, we hastened;" or "After seizing the town we hastened. ' ' c. The ablative absolute is used only when the participle agrees with a noun which is not connected in syntax with the rest of the sentence. 398. RULE. A noun and an agreeing participle (or their equivalents) are used in the ablative independently. Note. The equivalents may be, — a pronoun for the noun, and an adjective or a second noun for the participle. Where no participle is expressed, the lacking present participle of sum may be understood. 399. VOCABULARY ante, adverb, or preposition with ace, before. con-ficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum [con, intensive, facio, do], literally, do up, do completely, i. e., finish, complete. de-ligo, -ligere, -legi, -lectum [de, from, lego, choose], select. satis, adverb, sufficiently; considered as an indeclinable adjective, sufficient, enough. sementis, sementis, f., sowing, planting. Give an English verb, noun and adjective from satis-facio. LESSON XLVI 141 DRILL EXERCISES 400. 1. Give the principal parts of c5go, its bases, and all its infinitives, with their translation. 2. Give the prin- cipal parts of iubeo, its bases, and all its participles, with their translation. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 401. 1, Multis carris coemptis, Helvetil iter facere con- stituerunt. 2. Quam maximis sementibus factis, copia fru- menti suppetet. 3. Orgetorlge delecto, ad profectionem omnia comparavimus. 4. Casticus, hostibus a patre suo superatis, coniurationem fecit. 5. His rebus confectis, satis magnus numerus iumentormn et carrorum coemetur. 6. Copia frtimenti suppetente, iter facere debemus. 7. Galli quaesiverunt cur Orgetorix delectus esset. 402. 1. The town having been fortified, we came to our territory. 2. These men having been chosen, the work was finished. 3. Peace having been established, the consul came into Gaul. 4. Having finished the war (the war having been finished), the troops came into their (own) towns. 5. The enemy having been seen, the consul asked where our legions were. LESSON XLVI THE INTENSIVE AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 403. TEXT Helvetil constituerunt omnia ad profectionem comparare, iumenta et carros coemere, sementes facere, pacem et araici- tiam confirmare. Constituerunt sementes quam maximas 142 BELLUM HELVETICUM facere. Cdnstituerunt pacem et amieitiam cum proximis cTvitatibus confirmare. His rebus adducti et auctoritate Orgetorigis permoti, Helvetii constituerunt omnia ad profectionem comparare, iumentorum et carrorum quam maximum numerum coemere, sementes quam maximas facere, cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amieitiam confirmare. (43-47, Ch. 3.) 404. THE INTENSIVE AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS The compounds of self in English have two different uses. 1. A form of self may be in apposition with another noun or pronoun and make it more emphatic. E. g., he himself came; they saw the man himself ; they saw the man them" selves, etc. This is called the intensive use. 2. A form of self may refer to the subject. E. g., he hurt himself; they saw themselves in the glass; they brought food for themselves, etc. This is called the reflexive use. 405. Latin has two different pronouns for these two uses — (1) ipse, the intensive pronoun; (2) sui, the reflexive pronoun of the third person. Since a reflexive pronoun refers to the subject, it can not itself be nominative ; for the same reason its gender and number are always apparent and need not be indicated by different forms. 406. ipse, self SINGULAR PLURAL Nom. ipse ipsa ipsum ipsi ipsae ipsa Gen. ipsius ipsius ipsius ipsorum ipsarum ipsorum Dat. ipsi ipsi ipsi ipsis ipsis ipsis Ace. ipsum ipsam ipsum ipsos ipsas ipsa Ahl. ipso ipsa ipso ipsis ipsis ipsis LESSON XLVI 143 407. sui, of himself SINGULAR AND PLURAL Gen. sui, of himself, herself, itself, themselves Dat. sibi, to or for himself, etc. Ace. se (sese), himself, etc. Al)l. se (sese), from, with, hy himself, etc. With se, as with quibus (§175), cum is enclitic (secum). 408. VOCABULARY ipse, ipsa, ipsum, self; see §405. sui, sibi, se, of himself, etc., see §405. Diviciacus, -i, m., Diviciacus, a very influential Aeduan. legatio, legationis, f. [legatus, ambassador], embassy. populus, -i, m., people; plural, peoples. R5manus, -a, -um, Roman. senatus, -us, m., senate. sus-cipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum [sub, under, capid, tafce], undertake. Give and define an adjective from populus. What is the American legation in London? What does sui-cide mean? DRILL EXERCISES 409. 1. Review the declension and meanings of suus, -a, -um, §205. 2. Give the principal parts of deligo, its bases, and a synopsis through the indicative and subjunctive, in the first singular. 3. Give the principal parts of conficio, and all its infinitives and participles. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 410. 1. Homo se vidit. 2. Homo ipse visus est. 3. Ipsi bellum gerunt. 4. Helvetil se fortissimos appellabant. 5. Helvetii ipsT- fortissiml appellabantur. 6. Aedui eos for- 144 BELLUM HELVETICUM tissimos appellabant. 7. Helvetii a se fortissimi appella- bantur. 8. Ab Helvetiis ipsis fortes appellabamur. 9. Le- gatione suscepta, populus Romanus bellum gerere constituit. 10. Diviciacus amicus populi Romani a senatu appellatus erat. 11. Non entintiatur cur haec legatio mittatur. 411. 1. The man himself came. 2. The man praised himself. 3. The consul sent the troops himself. 4. The troops were sent by the consul himself. 5. They will take (dtico) the carts with them (i. e., with themselves). 6. This bridge having been made, he decided to send the legion to the town. 7. Coming to this town we saw a hundred carts. 8. It was asked why Dumnorix undertook this mission? LESSON XLVII PURPOSE CLAUSES 412. TEXT Ad eas res conficiendas^ biennium satis esse duxeru^;^ in^ tertium annum profectionem lege confirmant.^ Ad eas res conficiendas OrgetorTx deligitur.* Is sibi^ legationem ad civitates suscipit.* (47-51, Ch. 3.) , . NOTES 1. ad eas res conficiendas: literally, for these things to-he-completed; i. 6., for completing these things. 2. duco has here its less usual meaning, consider. 3. for. 4. The present tense is often used instead of the perfect for vivid- ness; in such cases it is called the ''historical present," and may- be translated by the past tense. 5. sibi, with sus- of sus-cipit, means upon himself. LESSON XLVII 145 413. SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE Models f ut veniat, f in-order-that he may come 1. Idfacio |ne veniat, ^^^^oingit ^in-order-that he may not come j ut veniret, . . j in-order-ihat he might come ®^^ ine veniret, * * \in-order-that he might not come Notes, a. In these complex sentences the subordinate verb ex- presses the intention or purpose for which the action of the main verb was done. Latin uses the subordinate verb in the subjunctive intro- duced by ut, affirmative, ne, negative. h. When the tense of the verb upon which the subordinate clause depends is present or future, English uses may (present potential) as an auxiliary, and Latin the present subjunctive (§371). c. When the tense of the verb upon which the subordinate clause depends is past, English uses might (past potential) as an auxiliary, and Latin the imperfect subjunctive (§371). 414. I^ULE. The subjunctive is used to express purpose, introduced by ut (affirmative), ne (negative), 415. VOCABULARY acceptus, -a, -um [perfect passive participle of ac-cipio, receive] ^ acceptable. Casticus, -i, m., Casticus, a powerful chief of the Sequanians. Catamantaloedes, Catamantaloedis, m,, Catamantaloedes, father of Casticus. Dumnorix, Dumnorigis, m., Dumnorix, a troublesome Aeduan chief. matrimonium, -i, n., marriage. maxime, adverb [maximus, greatest, very great], most, especially. ne, negative subordinate conjunction, in-order-that . . . not, that . . . not. plebs [for pronunciation see §6], plebis, f., the common people, corre- sponding to the plebeians at Rome. principatus, -us, m., leadership. -que, coordinate conjunction, and; a closer connective than et. An en- clitic; see §12. Ut, subordinate conjunction, in-order-that; that. 146 BELLUM HELVETICUM DRILL EXERCISES 416. 1. Decline the Latin for father himself ; the thing itself ; the work itself. 2. Give the infinitives and participles of moveo and pet5 (see per-moveo and sup-peto, §392). TRANSLATION EXERCISES 417. 1. Oppidum munimus ut hostes prohibeantur. 2. Oppidum munlvimus ut hostes prohiberentur. 3. Oppidum mtiniemus ne occupetur. 4. Oppidum miiniebamus ne occu- paretur. 5. Ilelvetil sementes fecerunt ut copia frumenti in itinere suppeteret. 6. Casticus, Catamantaloedis filius, coniiirationem facit ut principatum habeat. 7. OrgetorTx filiam suam Dumnorigi in matrimonium dedit ut regnum teneret. 8. Filil flliaeque venerunt ne pax confirmaretur. 9. Dumnorix ipse erat maxime acceptus plebi. 10. Hel- vetii sese ad profectionem comparaverunt. 418. 1. He is sending this in-order-that we may see it. 2. He sent this in-order-that we might see it. 3. They are fortifying the town in-order-that it may not be seized. 4. They fortified it that it might not be seized. 5. They will choose Orgetorix that peace may be made (confirmo). 6. They had chosen him that peace might be made. 7. They did these things that they might not be hindered on the march. 8. We shall do other things in order that we may not be hindered. LESSON XLVIII 147 LESSON XLVIII DEPONENT VERBS 419. TEXT In eo itinere Orgetorix Castico/ Catamantaloedis filio, Sequano, persuasit. CasticT pater regnum in^ Sequanis multos annos obtinuerat, et a senatti amicus populi Romani appellatus erat. Orgetorix Castico persuasit ut^ regnum in sua civitate occuparet.^ Ei persuasit ut regnum (quod* pater ante habuerat) occuparet. Castico persuasit, cuius •pater amicus appellatus erat, ut regnum occuparet. In eo itinere persuadet^ Castico, Catamantaloedis filio, Sequano, cuius pater regnum in Sequanis multos annos obtinuerat et a senatu populi Romani amicus appellatus erat, ut regnum in sua civitate occuparet, quod pater ante habuerat. (51-55, Ch. 3.) NOTES 1. See what was said about persuaded in §299. 2. among. 3. ut . . . occuparet: that he should seize. 4. Kelative pronoun. 5. See §412, 4. 420. DEPONENT VERBS Deponent verbs are those which have mostly passive forms but active meanings. They are conjugated like the passive voice of other verbs in the indicative and subjunc- tive ; their infinitives and participles are partly active and partly passive in form. They have both a future active and a future passive participle. 148 ■ BELLUM HELVETICUM 421. Principal Parts: conor, conari, conatus sum, try, attempt. Infinitives Pres. Act. conari, to try Perf. Act. CONATUS esse, to have tried Fut. Act. coNATurus esse, io he going-to-try Participles Pres. Act. conans, trying Perf, Act. CONATUS, having tried Fut. Act, coNATiirus, going-to-try Fut. Pass, conandus, to-he-tried 422. Principal Parts: vereor, vereri, veritus sum, fear, he afraid sequor, sequi, SECutus sum, follow potior, potiri, pcti'tus sum, get possession of patior, pati, passus sum, suffer, allow Infinitives SECOND CONJUGATION Pros. Act. vereri Perf. Act. \^ritus esse Put. Act. VERiTiirus esse THIRD CONJUGATION sequi SECuTus esse sECtJTurus esse FOURTH CONJUGATION Pres. Act. potiri Perf. Act. Fut. Act. poTiTus esse POTiTiirus esse THIRD CONJUGATION IN -15 pati PASSUS esse PASsdrus esse Participles SECOND CONJUGATION Pres. Act. verens Perf. Act. VERITUS Fut. Act. VERiTiirus Fut. Pass, verendus THIRD CONJUGATION sequens SECUTUS sEctJTiirus sequendus LESSON XLVIII 149 FOURTH CONJUGATION THIRD CONJUGATION IN -iO Pres. Act. potiens patiens Perf. Act. POTiTus passus Put. Act. POTiTurus PAssurus Put. Pass, potiendus patiendus 423. SUBJUNCTIVE CLAUSES— Continued Models 1. Homines missi sunt qui oppidum munirent, men were sent {ivho were) to fortify the town. 2. Civitati persuasit ut proficiscerentur, he persuaded the state that they should start out, i. e., to start out. 3. Civitati persuadet ne proficiscantur, he is persuading the state not to start out. Notes, a. Model 1 is another example of a purpose clause. The relative pronoun is used in place of ut to introduce a purpose clause when there is a convenient antecedent for it, especially after such verbs as mitto, venio, etc. h. The subordinate clauses of Models 2 and 3 may be regarded as complementary purpose clauses, their construction being the same as those of §413. They are sometimes called volitive clauses. c. In English, purpose is often expressed by the infinitive. 424. VOCABULARY Aeduus, -a, -um, Acduan. Masculine used as a noun, singular, an Aeduan, the Aeduan; plural, the Aeduans, the leading tribe of Gaul. item, adverb, likewise. Conor, conari, conatus sum, try, attempt. patior, pati, passus sum, suffer, allow. proficiscor, proficisci, profectus sum, start out. sequor, sequi, secutus sum, follow. vereor, vereri, veritus sum, fear, he afraid. 150 BELLUM HELVETICUM DBILL EXERCISES 425. 1. Give the principal parts of suscipid, and all its infinitives and participles, with their translation. 2. Give the principal parts of proficiscor, and all its infinitives and participles, with their translation. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 426. 1. Homines profecti sunt qui carros iumentaque coemerent. 2. Helvetils persuadere conabimur ut sequan- tur. 3. Eos in fines nostros venire non patiemur. 4. Or- getorix item Dumnorigl Aeduo persuasit ut regnum occu- paret. 5. Diviciacus ipse fratrem Dumnorlgem maxime verebatur. 6. His rebus induct! eramus ne pacem c5nfirma- remus. 7. Legationem suscipit ut has res conficiat. 8. Helvetii ab Orgetorlge proficTscI iussi sunt. 9. Orgetorix delectus erat ut amicitiam cum civitatibus confirmaret. 427. 1. "We do not fear this road. 2. We were starting out to seize (i.e., in order that we might seize) this bridge. 3. Men came (who were) to establish peace. 4. Induced by the influence of Orgetorix, Dumnorix tried to seize the royal-power, 5. We asked why the Helvetians were starting out. LESSON XLIX SUBJUNCTIVE WITH VERBS OF FEARING 428. TEXT Dumnorix erat Aeduus, frater DiviciacT. Diviciacus eo tempore prmcipatum in Aedua civitate obtinebat ac^ maxi- me acceptus plebi erat. Orgetorix item Dumnorigl per- LESSON XLIX 151 suasit ut regnum in sua civitate occuparet, et ei flliam suam in^ matrimonium dedit. In eo itinere persuade! Castico, Catamantaloedis filio, Sequano, cuius pater regnum in Sequanis multos annos obtinuerat et a senatu populi Romani amicus appellatus erat, ut regnum in civitate sua occuparet, quod pater ante habuerat; itemque Dumnorigi Aeduo, fratri Diviciaci, qui eo tempore principatum in civitate obtinebat ac maxime plebi acceptus erat, persuadet ut hoc in civitate sua faceret, eique filiam suam in matrimonium dat. (51-59, Ch. 3.) NOTES 1. a form of atque, used before some consonants. 2. in. 429. subjunctive with verbs of fearinq Models 1. Vereor ne bellum gerat, / /ear that he is carrying on war (or that he will carry on war). 2. Veritus sum ut bellum gereret, I feared that he was not carrying on war (or that he would not carry on war). Notes, a. The substantive clauses ne bellum gerat and ut bellum gereret are the direct objects of the verhs of fearing. h. In this construction ne and ut have meanings which are the reverse of those used in purpose clauses. c. The rule for sequence of tenses is applied here. 430 RULE. Verbs expressing fear take the subjunctive with ne (affirmative), ut (negative). 152 BELLUM HELVETICUM 431. VOCABULARY conatum, -i, n. [conor], attempt. concilid, conciliare, conciliavi, conciliatum, win, gain. exercitus, -us, m., (trained) arviy. meus, -a, -um, possessive adjective, my. per-ficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum [per, through, facio, do}, literally, do through, i. e., complete, accomplish. potens, genitive potentis, adjective, powerful. Declined like oriens. Give and define words from the base of potens. DRILL EXERCISES 432. 1. Decline the Latin for the whole senate; a power- ful man (vir). 2. Conjugate the perfect indicative active of c5go. 3. Conjugate the future indicative, active and passive, of deligo. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 433. 1. Verebatur ne venirent. 2. Veremur ut veniant. 3. Vereor ut conata nostra perficiamus. 4. Cum exercitu potentissim5 veniam ut regnum conciliem. 5. Exercitum meum mittam qui conata nostra perficiat. 6. HelvetiT vere- bantur ne OrgetorTx coniurationem faceret. 7. Proficlsci conati sumus ut principatum occuparemus. 434. 1. We are afraid that this will be seen. 2. We were afraid that this would not be seen. 3. Orgetorix feared that the Helvetians had heard-of this conspiracy. 4. Orget- orix undertook the mission in-order-that the Helvetians might not accomplish their attempts. 5. We saw why he was not sent. 6. Who was afraid that we would not come ? LESSON L 153 LESSON L SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT 435. TEXT Orgetorix, ''Facile est/' inquit\ ''conata nostra perficere, propterea quod meae civitatis imperium obtenturus sum; atque Helvetii potentissimi sunt omnium Gallorum; meis copiis meoque exercitu vobls^ regna^ coneiliabo." (59-63, Ch. 3.) NOTES 1. said. 2. for you. 3. Plural because referring to regnum in each state. Translate by the singular. 436. SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT Models 1. Finis nostri angustissimi sunt, ut in Galliam iter facere constituerimus, oi^r territory is very Ihnited, so-that we have decided to march into Gaul. 2. Tarn fortes sunt ut hostes non vereantur, they are so brave that they do not fear the enemy. Notes, a. In these sentences the fact stated in the subordinate clause is the result of the statement contained in the main clause. &. The introductory word is ut (affirmative); ut non (negative). c. A result clause is often preceded by tarn, ita, so, tantus, so great, and similar words; after them ut is translated that; without them, if the clause is result, ut is often translated so that. d. The subjunctive in a result clause is translated by the indicative. e. When a question arises as to whether a subordinate subjunctive verb denotes purpose or result, remember 154 BELLUM HELVETICUM 1. that an ut-clause may denote either purpose or result. It is purpose if any icill or intention is implied; otherwise it is result. 2. that ne-clauses must be purpose; ut nan-clauses must be result. 437. RULE. Result is expressed by the subjunctive with ut (affirmative), ut non (negative). 438. VOCABULARY firmus, -a, -um, strong. fortiter, adverb [fortis], hravely. ita, adverb, fo, in the sense of in such a manner. ius iurandum, gen. iuris iurandi, n., compound noun, each part declined, dat. iuri iurando, abl. lure iurando, oath, given as a pledge for the sacredness of some promise or declaration. oratio, orationis, f,, speech. per, preposition with accusative, through. spero, -are, -avi, -atum, hoiie, hope for. tam, adverb, so, in the sense of to such a degree. tantus, -a, -um, so great. DRILL EXERCISES 439. 1. Decline and compare potens (see §111). 2. De- cline the Latin for my army. 3. Give the tense, mood, voice, person, and number of the following forms: coemeris; coemeris; coemeris; coemeris. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 440. 1. Virtus Germanorum tanta erat ut omnes Gallos superarent. 2. Hostes tam fortiter contenderunt ut non superarentur. 3. Hostes fortiter contendunt ne superen- tur. 4. Hostes verebantur ne superarentur. 5. Oratidnc Orgetorigis adducti, Casticus et Dumnorix ius iurandum LESSON LI 155 dederunt. 6. Hoc itire itirandd coniurationem firmiorem fecerunt. 7. Hoc fecerunt propterea quod imperium totlus Galliae sperabant. 8. Monies undique erant, ut Helvetii continerentur. 9. Dumnorix tarn aceeptus Orgetorigi erat ut flliam in matrimonium ei daret. 10. Tarn angusti erant Helvetiorum fines ut magno dolore afficerentur. 441. 1. The mountains are so high that the Helvetians are shut-in (contineo). 2. The river was so wide that we did not hear him, 3. They led the men many miles so that they might not be seen in the province. 4. This was done (perf.) so that they were not seen in the province. 5. They were afraid that they would not be seen in the province. 6. Their hope was so great that they started out into Gaul with all their forces. LESSON LI GERUNDS IMPERSONAL VERBS 442. TEXT Hac oratione adductl, inter se fidem et itis iurandum dant, et, regno occupato, per tres potentissimos ac firmissi- mos populos totius Galliae imperium occupare conantur. (63-66, Ch. 3.) 443. GERUNDS The gerund is a verbal noun, corresponding to the English gerund or verbal noun ending in -inq, except that the Latin 156 BELLUM HELVETIC UM gerund has no nominative. It is of the second declension, neuter gender. It is formed on the present base. FIRST CONJUGATION SECOND CONJUGATION THIRD CONJUGATION Gen. laudandi, of praising monendi, of warning ducendi, of leading Dot. laudando, for praising monendo, for warning dticendo, for leading Ace. laudandum, praising monendum, naming ducendum, leading Ahl. laudando, hy, from, monendo, hy, from, ducendo, hy, from, in, with praising in, with warning in, with leading FOURTH CONJUGATION THIRD CONJUGATION IN -16 Gen. audlendi, of hearing capiendi, of taling Bat. audiendo, for hearing capiendo, for talcing Ace. audiendum, hearing capiendum, talcing Abl. audiendo, by, from, capiendo, hy, from, in, with hearing in, with talcing Note. It will be seen that these forms are like the neuter of the future passive participle (see §388), which is also called the gerundive. Kecall its translation, and distinguish it from the gerund in sentences 4 and 5, §447. 444. IMPERSONAL VERBS Model Hoc facere ei licet {to do this is permitted to him), it is permitted him to do this. Note. Impersonal verbs correspond to English impersonals with it as subject. They have no personal subject, but most of them take as subject a noun clause, or infinitive, or sometimes a neuter pronoun. They are used only in the third person singular of the indicative and subjunctive, and in the present and perfect infinitives. Almost all of them are of the second conjugation, like licet. 445. LESSON Ll licet, licere, licuit, it is permitted INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE INFINITIVES Pres. licet liceat licere Imp. licebat liceret Fut. licebit Perf. licuit licuerit licuissG Plup. Hcwerat licuisset 157 Fut. Perf. licuetit 446. VOCABULARY licet, licere, licuit, it is permitted. oportet, oportere, oportuit, it is fitting, it is right; freely, ought. DRILL EXERCISES 447. 1. Give the gerunds of do, teneo, mitto, munio, facio. 2. Give the ablative singular and genitive plural of potens and of its comparative. 3. Conjugate the perfect and future perfect indicative and the perfect subjunctive of perficio. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 448. 1. Exercitus erat cupidus occupandl hoc oppidum. 2. CarrI ad proficlscendum coementur. 3. Ad hoc fiumen mature jdo iter fecimus. 4. Has copias legato dedimus ducendas in Galliam. 5. Hae res faciendae sunt. 449. 1. Orgetorigi licebat legationem suscipere. 2. Apud Helvetios non licebat regnum obtinere. 3. Oportebit hostes sequl. 4. Quaerebant cur hoc sibi liceret. 5. Ilac oratione adducti sunt ne itis iurandum darent. 6. Tanto ..^lore afificiebantur ut in Galliam venire constituerent. 7. Quis verebatur ut hoc facere oporteret? 8. Hoc iure iurand5 158 BELLUM HELVETICUM dato, illl homines tres regnum sperabant. 9. Hoc cornti ex- ercitus superabatiir. 10. Tres annos quam maximas sementes fecimus. 450. 1. It was permitted (to) the Helvetians to make this journey. 2. It is fitting to choose Orgetorix. 3. We shall send men (who are) to complete (§423, 1) our attempts. 4. The enemy's army was so great that we did not conquer. 5. They asked where you (sing.) were. SIXTH REVIEW LESSON 451. Give an account of the events narrated in Chapter III, and translate it. 452. Memory Work. 1. Ipse (§406), sui (§407). 2. Infinitives (§377), participles (§388), gerunds (§442), deponents (§§421, 422), impersonals (§444). 453. Latin-English Vocabulary. 1. Give the memoranda of the following nouns: auctoritas, conatum, exercitus, ius iurandum, legatio, oratio, populus, principatus, profectio, senatus. 2. Give the principal parts and meaning of the following verbs : adduco, concilio, conficio, conor, deligo, patior, perficio, permove5, proficiscor, sequor, spero, suscipi5, vereor. LESSON Lll 159 3. Give the meaning of the following words: ante, firmus, fortiter, ita, item, maxime, per, potens, -que, satis, tam, tantus. Compare firmus and potens. What case is used with per? 454. English-Latin Vocabulary. Give the first form of the Latin for the following : accomplish complete induce speech allow departure influence (noun) start out and (three words) embassy leadership strong army- enough mission suffer arouse especially oath sufficient attempt (noun) fear people through attempt (verb) finish powerful try before follow senate undertake bravely gain so (two WOl -ds) win choose hope (verb) so great 455. Syntax. Give complete Latin sentences, with translation, illus- trating the ablative absolute, and clauses of purpose and result, and with verbs of fearing. 456. LESSON LH DECLENSION OF DOMUS PLACE TO WHICH TEXT Ea res est^ Helvetils per indicium enuntiata. Orgeto- rlgem ex^ vinculis causam dicere coegerunt. Poena eum damnatum sequetur. Poena erit ut igni cremetur. 160 BELLUM HELVETICUM Ea res est^ Helvetiis per indicium enuntiata. Moribus suTs^ Orgetorlgem ex^ vinculis eausam dicere coegerunt; damnatum* poenam^ sequi^ oportebat, ut^ igni cremaretur. (67-69, Ch. 4.) NOTES 1. est enuntiata: to be taken altogether. 2. mdribus suis: an ablative like this is best translated by the words according to or in accordance with. 3. We should say in. 4. Modifies Orgetorigem understood, the object of sequi. For its force here, compare the use of the participle in the English sentence, "Beaten, we shall retreat." 5. Subject of sequi. 6. poenam sequi (Orgetorigem) damnatum, taken together, is the subject of oportebat, and tells the thing that was fitting, 7. ut igni cremaretur explains what the punishment was; i. e., the clause is in apposition with poenam. The literal translation therefore is, yunishment-to- follow (Orgetorix) condemned was fitting, that he he burned with fire; freely, if he was condemned, it was the proper thing that the punishment of being burned to death should follow. 457. VOCABULARY Caesar, Caesaris, m., a Roman "family name" (cog-n5men); (Gaius Julius) Caesar, the Roman general and statesman, author of the Commentaries. cremo, -are, -avi, -atum, burn. •damno, -are, -avi, -atum, condemn. died, dicere, dixi, dictum, say; eausam dicere, plead a case. domus, -us, f., home; for declension, see §458. Genava, -ae, f., Geneva. ignis, ignis, m., abl. igni, fire. indicium, -i, n., information, evidence; freely, informers. mos, moris, m., custom.. poena, -ae, f., punishment. Roma, -ae, f ., Borne. vinculum, -i, n., chain. What English words are derived from cremo, ignis? What is the meaning of the phrase to subpoena? LESSON LII 161 458. DECLENSION OF DOMUS The noun domus has all the forms of the fourth and several of the second declension. In the following declension the more common form is given first, and should be so learned. Remember also that the gen- der of this noun is irregular, and that it omits the preposition in all place constructions. domus, F., house, home domus domuum, domSrum domibus domos, domus domus domibus The locative is explained in §474. 459. PLACE TO WHICH Models Nom. domus Gen. domus Bat. domui, domo Ace. domum Voc. domus All. domo, domu Log. doTTiT, at home Venit, he is coming < ad oppidum, to, or toward, the town. in oppidum, to, or into, the town. Romam, to Rome. domum, home. riis, to, or into, the country. Notes, a. In these sentences the phrases answer the question, *Ho what place?" b. The verbs with which they are used imply motion or extension. 460. RULE, Place to which is denoted by the accusative with ad or in; but names of towns, domus, and rus, omit the preposition. DRILL EXERCISES 461. 1. Give all infinitives and participles of cogo and sequor w^ith their meanings. 2. Give synopsis of oportet. 1G2 BELLUM HELVETICUM TRANSLATION EXERCISES 462. 1. In provinciam ; ad mtirum ; ad colles ; in omnia loca. 2. Ad fines nostros profecti sunt. 3. Ad monies eum sequi oportet. 4. Ipse ex vinculTs causam dicet ut domum mittatur. 5, Genavam multos homines sequI exercitum cogunt. 6. Illo tempore in Galliam iter facere Helvetii constituerant. 463. 1. Into the forest; to the river; into the sea; to Spain; into Aquitania. 2. Those (men) will be compelled to start out into these mountains. 3. We had followed him to another river. 4. The oath having been given, we shall come to Rome. 5. We are leading troops home that the town may not be seized. 6. Within three years, these places will be seized by our army. 7. It is fitting to disclose our custom to Caesar. 8. By this custom, we are compelled to burn Orgetorix by fire. LESSON Lin CONJUGATION OP EO PLACE PROM WHICH 464. TEXT Dies^ constituta est dictionis^ causae. Ea die Orgetorix ad indicium omnem suam familiam undique coegit; omnes clientes, quorum magnum numerum habebat, eodem con- duxit; per eos se eripuit ne causam diceret. Die^ constituta causae dictionis^ Orgetorix ad indicium omnem suam familiam, ad^ hominum* milia decern, undique coegit, et omnes clientes obaeratosque suos, quorum mag- LESSON LIII 163 num numerum habebat, eodem conduxit ; per eos, ne causam diceret, se eripuit. (70-74, Ch. 4.) NOTES 1. For the gender see §298. 2. Though genitive, this word may be translated by for, 3. To-the-numher-of . 4. For the case and translation compare passuum in the phrase milia passuum. 465. VOCABULARY cliens, clientis, m. or f., dependent, retainer. con-duc5, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, lead together; colled, decern, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective, ten. dictio, dictionis, f. [dico, say^, literally, a saying ; causae dictio, the pleading of the case, pleading the case. eo, ire, ii or ivi, itum, go. For conjugation, see §466. eodem, adverb [idem, the same'], to the same place. e-ripio, -ripere, -ripui, -reptum [rapid, rapere, rapui, raptum, snatch'\f literally, snatch out; free. familia, -ae, f., literally, a body of servants, i. e., retinue, iudicium, -i, n., trial. obaeratus, -i, m., dehtor. What English words are derived from conduce, decern, iudicium? 466. CONJUGATION OF EO Eo, ire, ii or ivi, itum, go INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Pres. e6,is,it imus, itis, eunt earn Imp. ibam ir«m Fut. ibo Perf. ii (ivi) ierim (iverim) Plup. ieram (iveram) issem (ivissem) Fut. Perf. iero (ivero) 164 BELLUM HELVETIC UM INFINITIVES PARTICIPLES Pres. ire Pres. iens (Gen. euntis) Perf. isse (ivisse) Fut. iturus Fut. iturus esse Notes. (1) Though eo is, in some forms, like a fourth conjugation verb, the imperfect and future indicative are formed as in the first and second conjugations. (2) Before a vowel the i of the stem becomes e in the present indicative and subjunctive. 467. PLACE FROM WHICH jModels Venit, he is coming ' ab oppido, (away) from the town. de oppido, (down) from the town. ex oppido, (out of) from the town. Roma, from Rome. domo, from home. rure, from the country. Notes, a. In these sentences, the modifiers answer the question, <*From what place?" h. The verbs with which they are used imply motion. 468. RULE. Place from which is denoted by the ablative with ab, de, or ex; but names of towns, domus, and rus, omit the preposition. DRILL EXERCISES 469. 1. Give memoranda of senatus, imperium. 2. Give synopsis in third person singular of conficid. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 470. 1. Ex itinere; ab hoc lacu; de montibus. 2. Ex Gallia in fines Helvetiorum German! ire conabuntur. 3. LESSON LIV 165 Domum omnes clientes nostri mittentur, ut finibus nostris Germanos prohibeamus. 4. Hie se eripiet ne ex vinculis causam dicere cogatur. 5. Genavam omnem familiam con- ducere conatur. 6. Profectio ab Helvetiis lege confirmabi- tur, ne fllil filiaeque fines angustos habeant. 471. 1. Out of the sea; away from the fields; down from the hill. 2. We were going from that river to an- other. 3. I shall go from Rome. 4. We have decided to march ten miles from home. 5. His dependents started down from this mountain. 6. They will be collected by his sons and daughters. LESSON LIV PLACE IN WHICH 472. TEXT Civitas ob earn rem incitabatur et armis ius suum exsequT conabatur; multitudinem hominum ex agris magistrattis cogebant. Interea Orgetorlx mortuus est. Et est suspicio ut ipse^ sibi mortem consciverit. Cum^ civitas ob eam rem incitata armis ius suum exsequi conaretur, multitudinemque hominum ex agris magistrates cogerent, Orgetorlx mortuus est; neque abest suspicio, ut^ Helvetii arbitrantur, quin ipse^ sibi mortem consciverit. (74-78, Ch. 4.) NOTES 1. cum with the subjunctive may mean when, ivhile, since, although; which makes the best sense here? 166 BELLUM HELVETICUM 2. ut with the indicative is a conjunctive adverb which here means as, 3. Used to intensify sibi; it may be omitted in translation. 473. VOCABULARY arbitror, arbitrari, arbitratus sum, thinJc. anna, armorum, n., plural only, arms. cdn-sciscd, -sciscere, -scivi, -scitum, decree; sibi mortem consciscere, literally, decree death to owe 's self, i. e., commit suicide. ex-sequor, -sequi, -secutus sum, literally, follow out; as we say, follow up, i. e., enforce. in-cito, -are, -avi, -atum, urge on; arouse. interea, adverb, meanwhile. ius, iuris, n., right. maglstratus, -us, m., literally, magistracy ; here, magistrate. morior, mori (or moriri), mortuus sum, future participle moriturus, die. mors, mortis, f., death. neque, negative coordinate conjunction, and . . . not; neque . . . neque, neither . . . nor. propter, preposition with ace, on account of. quin, subordinate conjunction, that. suspicio, suspicionis, f., suspicion. vagor, vagari, vagatus sum, wander. 474. LOCATIVE CASE The locative case, which is used only to denote place in which, is confined to names of towns and small islands in the singular of the first declension (where it is formed by adding ae to the base), and in the singular of the second and third declensions (where it is formed by adding i to the base) ; and to the following forms of common nouns, domi {at home), ruri {in the country), hum! {on the ground), militiae and belli {in war). Examples: First declension; Genavae, at Geneva. Second declension; Corinthi, at Corinth. Third declension; Carthagini, at Carthage. LESSON LIV 167 475. PLACE IN WHICH Models Est, he is ' in oppido, m the town. Romae, in Rome, at Rome, domi, at home. ruri, in the country. Notes, a. In these sentences the modifiers answer the question, "In what place?" or ''Where?" ft. The verbs with which they are used do not imply motion. 476. RULE. Place in which is denoted by the ablative with in, but names of towns, domus, and rus, omit the prepo^ sit ion and use the locative if there is one. DRILL EXERCISES 477. 1. Give the memoranda of arma, ius, magistratus. 2. Give all infinitives and participles of proficiscor with their meanings. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 478. 1. In agris ; in silva ; in his montibus ; Romae ; in illo itinere. 2. In Gallia sunt multae civitates. 3. Illo anno, Castieus in finibus nostris vagabatur. 4. Omnes clientes suos ad tria milia domI habebat. 5. Ex vinculTs ab amlcis ereptus, Orgetorlx Genavae mortuus est. 6. Ipsi magistratus de montibus ad lacus ducuntur. 479. 1. He went to the province ; he went into the prov- ince ; he is in the province ; he will go out of the province ; he will go away from the province. 2. In the cart was a supply of arms. 3. Men on the highest mountains were being aroused. 4. At that time the magistrates were lead- 168 BELLUM HELVETICUM ing their army, which was in the province. 5. On account of (express with propter) this suspicion, we have not tried to establish peace in Geneva. 6. The Gauls fought at home and in other states that they might snatch their friends from death. LESSON LV DECLENSION OF 7dEM 480. TEXT Helvetii e flnibus suls exire constituerant. Itaque post Orgetorigis mortem id facere conati sunt. Ubi iam^ ad eam rem parati sunt, oppida sua omnia, numero ad* duodecim, vicos ad^ quadringentos, reliqua privata aedificia incendunt. Post eius mortem nihilo minus Helvetii id quod constitu- erant facere conantur, ut^ e fmibus suis exeant. Ubi iam^ se^ ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida sua omnia, numero ad* duodecim, vicos ad* quadringentos, reliqua privata aedificia incendunt. (79-83, Ch. 5.) NOTES 1. ut exeant, literally, that they ihould go out, may be translated by the English infinitive, to go out. See §423, 2, 3. 2. ubi iam, as soon as. 3. se esse arbitrati sunt, they considered themselves to te, 4. up to, as many as. 481. VOCABULARY aedificium, -i, n., huilding. duo-decim, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective [duo, two, decern, ten'], twelve. . LESSON LV 169 ex-eo, ex-ire, ex-il, ex-itum, go out, go forth. iam, adverb, already ; now. idem, eadeni; idem, the tame. For declension, see §482. in-cendo, -cendere, -cendi, -censum, set fire to, set on fire. nihilo, n., ablative of defective noun, hy nothing, nihilo minus, liter- ally, none the less, i. e., nevertheless. paratus, -a, -um [perfect passive participle of par5, prepare], literally, prepared; ready. post, preposition with ace, after. privatus, -a, -um, private. quadringenti, -ae, -a, cardinal (numeral) adjective, four hundred, vicus, -i, m., village. 482. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN 7dEM idem, the same SINGULAR PLURAL Nom. idem eadem idem eidem eaedem eadem Gen. eiusdem eiusdem eiusdem eorundem earundem eorundem Bat. eidem eidem eidem eisdem eisdem eisdem Ace. eundem eandem idem eosdem easdem eadem All. eodem eadem eodem eisdem eisdem eisdem In the plural, idem and isdem are sometimes used instead of eidem and eisdem. Eeview the declension of is (§142). Idem is formed of the demon- strative is and the suffix -dem. Note the changes undergone by is before the suffix. DRILL EXERCISES 483. 1. Give the conjugation in the present indicative, and the synopsis in the first plural, of the verb exeo. 2. Give all the infinitives and participles of conor with their meanings. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 484. 1. Eadem die; in eodem marl; eiusdem vici; eidem viro ; eaedem domiis. 2. Ubi eidem HelvatiT omnes vicos, 170 BELLUM HELVETICUM oppida, privata aedificia incenderunt, spes suas sustulerunt. 3. Magistratus eos nihil domo efferre iubebant. 4. Galli eos hostes suis navibus prohibere conatT sunt. 5. Omnibus domibus nostris incensis, Romanos trans idem fltimen sequemur. 485. 1. By the same road; at the same time; on the same ship; of the same home; by means of four hundred soldiers. 2. After this, he ordered the twelve legions to follow that they might seize those villages. 3. The same buildings had been set-on-fire. 4. In Rome and in other towns, the same men had homes. 5. As soon as (ubi iam) all things were prepared, Caesar ordered the soldiers to come to him. LESSON LVI POSSESSIVE AND PARTITIVE GENITIVES 486. TEXT Frtimentum omne, praeter quod^ secum portaturi erant, combtirunt ut domum reditionis^ spes tolleretur. Ob earn causam paratiores sunt ut omnia perlcula subirent;^ trium mensium^ molita cibaria quemque domo efferre iubent. Frtimentum omne, praeter quod^ secum portatur! erant, combtirunt, ut, domum reditionis- spe sublata,^ paratiores ad omnia perlcula subeunda* essent;'^ trium mensium^ molita cibaria sibi quemque domo efferre iubent. (83-87, Ch. 5.) LESSON LVI 171 NOTES 1. Supply id as antecedent and as the object of praeter; then id quod = that which = what. 2. A verbal noun, as its meaning shows; therefore it is modified by the noun domum, in the construction of place to which (§459). 3. Omit the translation of the ablative absolute spe sublata and its modifier domum reditionis until the rest of the sentence has been worked out. 4. ad pericula subeunda: subeunda is the future passive participle of the irregular verb subeo; literally, for clangers to-he-undergone, i. e., to undergo dangers. 5. An imperfect subjunctive may be used when the main verb is historical present. For the translation of ut subirent, see §423, 2, 3. 6. trium mensium: literally, three months'; i. e., enough to last three months. 487. VOCABULARY cibarius, -a, -um, relating to food. Neuter plural used as substantive, like English * 'food-stuffs, " i. e., provisions. com-buro, -btirere, -bussi, -bustum [con, intensive], hum up; the up being intensive in English. ef-fero, -ferre, etc., irregular, literally, bear out; tale. molo, molere, molui, molitum, grind, molita cibaria, literally, ground food-stuffs, i. e., meal. periculum, -i, n., danger. porto, -are, -avi, -atum, carry. praeter, preposition with accusative, except. quis-que, quae-que, quid-que (quod-que), genitive cuius-que, etc., in- definite pronoun, each one. reditio, reditionis, f., (a) returning. sub-e5, sub-ire, sub-ii, sub-itum, irregular, undergo. tollo, tollere, sus-tuli, sub-latum, literally, raise; very often, talce away. What is the difference in meaning between incendo and comburo? 172 BELLUM HELVETICUM 488. POSSESSIVE GENITIVE Model Fines Helvetiorum erant lati, ihe territory of the Helve- tians was wide. Notes, a. The general use of the genitive with nouns (§35) is divided into several subdivisions, one of which is illustrated in this sentence. h. The word Helvetiorum tells ichose territory is meant. Hence this genitive is called the possessive genitive; it answers the question "Whosef 489. RULE. The possessive genitive is used to denote tlie person or thing that possesses something. 490. PARTITIVE GENITIVE Model Gallorum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, the bravest of all the Gauls are the Belgians. Notes, a. The expression Galldrum omnium denotes the whole of which fortissimi is a part. b. Remember that the partitive genitive is used to denote the whole of which a part is mentioned — not the whole of which the whole is mentioned; e.g., pars hominum, part of the men, but omnes homines, all (of) the men. c. Adjectives (especially neuter) and pronouns are often used with this construction; e.g., quid dolorls, what (how much) grief; multum frumenti, much grain. 491. RULE. The partitive genitive (or genitive of the whole) is used to express the whole of which a part is mentioned. LESSON LVII 173 DRILL EXEECISES 492. Decline tres, frumentum omne, spes, quisque. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 493. 1. Quisque eorum ; in provincia nostra ; in provin- ciam nostram ; multa milia passuum. 2. Arma exercitus ex oppidis ab hominibus tollentur. 3. Multos menses fru- mentum efferent. 4. Decem mllia hominum ab Gallis mit- tentur qui ex finibus omnia arma portent (§423, 1). 5. Vereor ne haec comburantur. 494. 1. Part of the grain; all (of) the grain; the Gaul's home; the Gauls' home; the days of this month. 2. You are the best-known of all the Gauls. 3. Three thousand men are now ready. 4. All of the towns will be set-on-fire by the same army. 5. Each one was ordered to carry his neighbor's arms and to undergo all dangers. 6. All hope had been taken away by this fire. LESSON Lvn DECLENSION OF VlS OBJECTIVE GENITIVE 495. TEXT Finitimi Helvetiorum eodem consilio* utuntur. Hoc con- silium est utl^ una cum Helvetiis proficiscantur. Oppidis exustis, proficiscentur. Helvetil fmitimis suTs persuadent ut proficiscantur. Eodem consilio* usT," oppidis suTs vicTs- que exustis, una cum Helvetiis proficiscentur. 174 BELLUM HELVETICUM Persuadent Rauracis et Tulingis et LatobrlgTs, finitimis, uti^ eodem- usi^ consilio,* oppidis suis vicisque exustis, una cum eis proficlscantur. (87-90, Ch. 5.) NOTES 1. Another form of ut. It is distinguished from titi, the present infinitive of utor, by its short u. 2. In translating the sentence, omit the words eodem . . . exustis, until the rest of the sentence is done. 3. Determine exactly what form this is (it is plural), and its syntax, before attempting to translate. 4. Translate as though a direct object of utuntur (usi). 496. VOCABULARY consilium, -i, n., plan. ex-uro, -urere, -ussi, -ustum [compare com-buro], literally, hum out; we say, hum up. Latobrigi, -orum, m., the Latohrigi, a tribe living north of the Hel- vetians. memoria, -ae, f., memory, recollection. Rauraci, -drum, m., the Eauraci, a tribe living north of the Helvetians. Tulingi, -orum, m., the TuUngi, m., a tribe living northeast of the Helve- tians. una, adverb [unus, one], together. utor, titi, tisus sum, use; with consillo, adopt. Governs ablative. vis, vis, f., force, strength; for declension, see §497. 497, DECLENSION OF VIS vis, F., force SINGULAR PLUEAL Nom. vis vires Gen. vis virium Dat. vi viribus Ace. vim vires (virls) Voc. vis vires Abl. vi viribus LESSON LVII 175 498. OBJECTIVE GENITIVE Model Orgetorigis spes regni fuit magna, Orgetorix's hope (of) for royal power was great. Note. The objective genitive may be used with nouns that have a corresponding verbal idea. The notion expressed by the noun and limiting genitive can usually be expanded into a sentence containing an active verb. If the genitive becomes the object of such verb, it is objective. In the model above, the idea is implied that Orgetorix hoped for royal power and therefore regni is objective. 499. RULE. An objective genitive is used to denote the person or thing that receives the act or feeling implied in a noun or adjective. DRILL EXERCISES 500. Decline the expressions haec magna vis, acer vir, omne tempus. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 501. 1. Causae dictio ; Helvetiorum spes gloriae. 2. GallT propter initium belli domo profecti erant. 3. Orgeto- rix imperium suae civitatis vi obtinebit. 4. Galli propter memoriam virtutis suae bellum parabant. 5. HelvetiT, domum reditionis spe sublata, profectionem suam suscepe- runt. 502. 1. Many soldiers ; many of the soldiers ; all the sol- diers ; all the homes of the soldiers. 2. They were not influ- enced by the memory of these things. 3. Caesar will make a beginning of his journey at the same time. 4. We have not disclosed the cause of our plan. 5. The part of the army that has used (facio) force will be conquered. 176 BELLUM HELVETICUM LESSON LVIII DECLENSION OF DUO CONJUGATION OF POSSUM COMPLEMENTARY INFINITIVE 503. TEXT Boi trans Rhenum incoluerant et in agrum Noricum transierant Noreiamque oppugnarant.^ Hos Boios^ recep- tos ad se soeios sibi Ilelvetii adscTscunt. Boiosque,^ qui trans Rhenum incoluerant et in agrum Noricum transierant Noreiamque oppugnarant/ receptos ad se soeios sibi adsciscunt. (90-92, Ch. 5.) NOTES 1. Contracted from oppugnaverant. In the tenses formed from the perfect base the v is sometimes dropped, and the vowel following it then unites with the preceding vowel. 2. Arrange thus: adsciscunt sibi, soeios, Boios receptos ad se: literally, they accept to themselves, (as) allies, the Boii, (having been) received to themselves ; freely, the Boii . . . they admit to their number and receive as allies. 504. VOCABULARY ad-scisc6, -sciscere, -scivi, -scitum, receive to anyone; accept. Boi, Boiorum, m., the Boii, a tribe living near the Helvetians. duo, duae, duo, cardinal (numeral) adjective, two; for decl. see §505. Noreia, -ae, f ., Noreia, a town of the Norici. Noricus, -a, -um, of the Norici, a people living north of the Alps. op-pugno, -are, -avi, -atum, [ob, against], literally, fight against; regu- larly, assault, attacTc. possum, posse, potui, irregular, he able, can; he powerful. For con- jugation, see §506. LESSON LVIII 177 re-cipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum [capio, taTce], literally, take hacTc; receive. socius, -a, -um, associated. Masculine used as substantive, ally. trans-eo, -ire, -ii, -itum, irregular, literally, go across, i. e., cross. 505. DECLENSION OF DUO duo, two Mas. Fern. Neut. Norn. duo duae duo Gen. duorum duarum duorum Bat. duobus duabus duobus Ace. duos, duo duas duo All. dudbus duabus duobus 506. CONJUGATION OF POSSUM possum, posse, potui, he ahle, can INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Fres. possum, potes, potest possim possumus, potestis, possunt Imp. Put. poteram potero possem Perf. potui potuerim Plup. potueram potuissem Fut. Perf. potuero INFINITIVES PARTICIPLE Fres. posse Fres. potens Perf. potuisse The verb possum is a compound of potis, able (base, pot) and sum, I am, and is therefore conjugated like sum; but note the following: 1. t before s is changed to s. 2. f in the perfect base is dropped. 3. The imperfect subjunctive may be found by adding the personal endings to the present infinitive; see §342, 1. 178 BELLUM HELVETICUM 507. INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT AND COMPLEMENT An infinitive partakes of the nature of both noun and verb. Its noun nature may be seen from the fact that it may be used in the nominative as the subject of a verb. Its verb nature may be seen from the facts that it has tenses, usually has a subject, and may have an object and an adverbial modifier. 508. Models 1. Poenam sequi oportebat, punishment to follow was fitting; i. e., it was fiting that punishment follow. 2. Duobus itineribus exire poterant, they {were aUe to) could go forth hy two roads. Notes, a. In Model 1 the infinitive phrase poenam sequi is the subject of the impersonal verb oportebat. h. In Model 2 the infinitive is used to complete the thought of the verb poterant, and so is called a complementary infinitive. c. The complementary infinitive is used in both English and Latin. DRILL EXERCISES 509. 1. Decline unum iter, duo itinera, tria itinera. 2. Decline any third declension adjective of three terminations. 3. Give all infinitives and participles of recipio, with their meanings. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 510. 1. Poteram, potueram ; potero, potuero ; poterunt, potuerunt, potuerint. 2. Ad flumen Rhodanum duobus annis ducemini. 3. Angusto itinere exTre constittitum est. 4. Sequani itinere Helvetios prohibere potuerunt quod mul- tos fmitimos socios sibi adscTverant. 5. Caesarem oppidum Gallorum oppugnare posse speramus. 6. Flumen transire constituunt ut oppidum occupetur. SEVENTH REVIEW LESSON . 179 511. 1. You were able, you had been able ; you will be able, you will have been able. 2. Caesar had ordered the people to prepare a supply of grain. 3. You can start out by these two roads. 4. The Helvetians were attempting to assault the town, on account of their desire for royal-power. 5. Two thousand (s) of our allies were not able to cross the river. SEVENTH REVIEW LESSON 512. Give an account of the events narrated in Chapters IV and V, and translate those chapters. 513. Memory work. 1. Conjugation of eo (§464), possum (§507). 2. Declension of domus (§458), idem (§482), vis (§495), duo (§505). 514. Latin-English vocabulary. Give the memoranda of the nouns ; the entire nominative of the adjectives and their comparison; the principal parts of the verbs; the case used with the prepositions; and the meanings of all the words. aedificium idem oppugno recipio arma ignis paratus socius cliens incendo periculum subeo conducd incito porta suspicio consilium interea possum tollo c'.ecem ius post transeQ 180 BELLUM HELVETICUM domus magistratus praeter una duo memoria privatus utor duodecim mors propter vagor eo mds quadringenti vicus eodera neque quisque vis * iam 515. English-Latin vocabulary. Give the first form of the Latin for the following : after custom meanwhile set fire to ally (noun) danger memory suspicion already death neither take away am able dependent nor ten and not each now together arms except on account of twelve arouse fire plan two assault force private undergo building four hundred ready urge on carry go receive use carry away go across right village collect home to the same place wander cross magistrate 516. Syntax. Give the rules of syntax for the three expressions of place, for the possessive genitive, objective genitive, and partitive genitive. 517. Composition. Make up a short English sentence illustrating each of the constructions mentioned in §516, and then translate those sentences. LESSON LIX .181 LESSON LIX INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE SUBJECT ACCUSATIVE 518. TEXT Erant omnino itinera duo. His itineribus* domo^ exire poterant. tjniim iter erat per Sequands, angustum et difficile, inter montem luram et flumen Rhodanum. Hoc itinere singulT carri vix duel poterant. Mons autem altissi- mus impendebat, ut^ facile perpauci eos prohibere possent. Erant omnino itinera duo quibus itineribus* domo^ exire possent: unum^ per Sequanos, angustum et difficile, inter montem luram et flumen Rhodanum, vix qua singull carri ducerentur;* mons autem altissimus impendebat, ut^ facile perpauci prohibere^ possent. (93-97, Ch. 6.) NOTES 1. See §468. 2. quibus itineribus: see §313. quibus is here a relative adjective. 3. unum (iter): supply erat. 4. could he drawn. 5. Supply eos, referring to the Helvetians. 6. See §436, c. 519. VOCABULARY diflicilis, -e, comparative difficilior, superlative difficillimus [dis-, apart, facills, easy], difjficult, hard. im-pendeo, im-pendere, , [in, into], literally, overhang, i. e., in the case of a mountain, tower above. 182 BELLUM HELVETICUM omnlnd, adverb [omnis, all], in all. perpauci, -ae, -a, very few. qua, relative adverb, where. singuli, -ae, -a, distributive numeral adjective, one by one, one at a time. vix, adverb, with difficulty. INDIRECT DISCOURSE IN LATIN AND IN ENGLISH 520. We have direct discourse when the exact words of the original statement are used. "We have indirect discourse when the substance of the statement is given, not in the original form, but with a change of construction. A. When the original statement is in the present tense: Caesar laudat, Caesar praises (is praising) Dicit Caesarem laudare, he says that Caesar praises (is praising) Dixit Caesarem laudare, he said that Caesar praised (was praising) B. When the original statement is in the past tense : Caesar laudavit, Caesar (has) praised Dicit Caesarem laudavisse, he says that Caesar (has) praised Dixit Caesarem laudavisse, he said that Caesar had praised C. When the original statement is in the future tense: Caesar laudabit, Caesar will praise Dicit Caesarem laudaturum esse, he says that Caesar will praise Dixit Caesarem laudatiirum esse, he said that Caesar ivould praise 1. Note that, with the Latin verb: 2. Note that, with the English verb ; a. an infinitive with subject a. an indicative with subject accusative is used. nominative is used. b. the tenses after dicit and b. the tenses after he says and dixit are the same. he said are not the same. c. there is no word for ' ' that. ' ' c. the word ' * that ' ' is used. 521. RULE. The accusative is used as the subject of infinitives. LESSON LX 183 522. RULE. After verbs of saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving, and the Nice, the main verb of a statement is in the infinitive mood with its subject in the accusative, DRILL EXERCISES 523. Give, with meanings, all infinitives of transeo, utor, cogo. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 524. 1. Dicit se contendere. 2. Dixit se contendere. 3. Dicit se eontendisse. 4. Dixit se contendisse. 5. Dicit se contenttirum esse. 6. Dixit se contenttirum esse. 7. Dicit eos appellari. 8. Dixit eos appellarl. 9. Dixerunt eum appellatum esse. 10. Dixit eos appellatos esse. 11. Dixerunt eum appellavisse. 12. Dicit eos coegisse. 13. Dixit eos coactos esse. 525. 1. He says that he is able. 2. He says that he was able. 3. He knew that Caesar would go. 4. He did this because (quod) he was able. 5. (It) was decided to collect two legions in all. 6. (It) was easy to set-fire-to their towns. 7. The men were taken because they tried to march through the province. 8. The Helvetians with difficulty drew their carts one-by-one. LESSON LX DATIVE WITH SPECIAL VERBS 526. TEXT Alteram iter erat per provinciam nostram. Inter fines Helvetiorum et Allobrogum, qui niiper a Romanis pacati erant, Rhodanus fluit. Id fliimen nonntillls locis^ vado 184 BELLUM HELVETICUM transitiir. Qua de* causa hoc iter erat multo facilius atque expeditius. Alterum^ per provinciam nostram, multo facilius atque expeditius, propterea quod inter fines Helvetiorum et AUobrogum, qui nuper pacati erant, Rhodanus fluit isque nonnullls locis^ vado trans! tur. (97-101, Ch. 6.) NOTES 1. Look at the map on p. 204 and notice the two possible ways for the Helvetians to leave their country. The one described by Caesar as overhung by a mountain is at Pas de PEcluse. The easier way was to cross the Ehone at Geneva or any one of several points between Geneva and Pas de I'Ecluse, and march through the country of the Allobroges. 2. Supply iter. 3. By exception, used without a preposition. 4. for. 527. VOCABULARY expedio, -pedire, -pedivi, -peditum [pes, pedis, foot], literally, get one's foot out, i.e., extricate one's self. Perfect passive participle as adjective, quicTc; free. fluo, fluere, fluxi, fluxum, flow. impero, -are, -avi, -atum, command; with dative and accusative, levy {upon), demand (from). multo, adverb [multus], (hy) much, {hy) far. noceo, nocere, nocui, , harm. nonnullus, -a, -um [non, not, nuUus, not any'], some, several. For declension see §283. nuper, adverb, no comparative, superlative nuperrimS, recently. paco, -are, -avi, -atum [pax, pacis], literally, pacify; regularly, subdue. stude5, studere, studui, , he eager, desire. vadum, -i, n., ford. What English words are derived from expedio, paco, impero? LESSON LX 185 628. DATIVE WITH SPECIAL VERBS Model. Helvetiis persuasit, he persuaded the Helvetians. Note that the dative, Helvetiis, is translated by the direct object, Helvetians. RULE. A dative which is translated by a direct object is used with most Latin verbs signifying benefit or injure, please or displease, serve or resist, trust or distrust, com= mand or obey; believe, envy, favor, pardon, persuade, spare, threaten, and the like. Examples of such verbs are: impero, noce5, persuade5, resisto, and studeo. DRILL EXERCISES 530. Form English sentences exemplifying agent, means, time when, extent; and tell how each is expressed in Latin. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 531. 1. Ilostibus resistere; nocere magistratibus ; dixit se GallTs nonnuilis persuadere ; dicit se eldem rel studere. 2. Boi frumento quod domo tollebant maxime studebant. 3. OrgetorTx Castico persuaserat ut flumen vado translret. 4. DumnorigT ut idem conetur persuadebit. 5. Helvetii Rauracos pacaA^erant atque Germanls nocere conabantur. 6. Flnitimls eorum imperavit ut ad flumen venlrent. 532. 1. I shall not harm his friends. 2. He says he does not desire peace. 3. They desired our friendship on account of our bravery. 4. lie tried to resist his son's plan. 5. We had persuaded our friends to do (that they should do) this. 6. Some rivers flow in-such-a-way that they can not be crossed bv fords. 186 BELLUM HELVETICUM LESSON LXI DATIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS 533. TEXT Extremum oppidum Allobrogum proximumque finibus Hel- vetiorum est Genava. Ex eo oppido pons ad Helvetios per- tinet. AUobroges nondum bono animo- in^ populum Roma- num esse videbantur quod nuper pacati erant. Qua de causa Helvetii existimabant sese Allobrogibus persuasuros^ esse ut per suos fines eos Ire paterentur.* Si hoc facere non possent, sese vi eos coacturos^ esse existimabant. Extremum oppidum Allobrogum est proximumque Helve- tiorum finibus Genava. Ex eo oppido pons ad Helvetios pertinet. Allobrogibus sese vel persuasuros/ quod nondum bono animo- in^ populum Romanum viderentur, existima- bant vel vT coacturos^ ut per suos^ fines eos^ ire paterentur.* (101-106, Ch. 6.) NOTES 1. vel persuastiros (esse) and vel coacturos (esse): future infini- tives with sese as subject. Translate: They thought they would cither persuade . . . or would compel. 2. bond animo: of friendly spirit. 3. in: toward. 4. ut . . . paterentur: to allow. See §423, 2. 5. Kefers to the AUobroges. 6. Refers to the Helvetians. 534. VOCABULARY bonus, -a, -um, comparative melior, superlative optimus; good. exterus, -a, -um, comparative exterior, superlative extremus (or extimus); outside, comparative outer, exterior, superlative most distant, farthest. LESSON LXI 187 non-dum, adverb, not yet. prae-ficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum [facio], place in command of, put in charge of. vel, coordinate conjunction, or; vel . . . vel, either . . . or. COMPOUNDS OF SUM 535. Notice the following compounds of sum and the influence the prepositions have on the meaning: absum, be away, he absent adsum, be near, be present, assist intersum, be among, take part in praesmn, be over, be in command of 536. DATIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS Models 1. Helvetii omnibus praestabant, the Helvetians surpassed all. 2. Labienum legioni praeficit, he puts Labienus in charge of the legion. Notes, a. Some Latin verbs, because of their meaning, cannot take an object, direct or indirect. These may be so changed in meaning by prefixing certain prepositions that they take an indirect object in the dative. Example: praestabant in Model 1 above. b. Other Latin verbs which can take only a direct object are so changed by prefixing certain prepositions that they may take an indirect object in addition to the direct object. Example: praeficit in Model 2 above. c. Not all verbs, however, that are compounded with these preposi- tions take a dative, because the meaning does not always permit the use of the dative. Examples : incendo, interfici5, oppugno, and many others. d. The English translation may require an objective case or a phrase with a preposition suggested by the Latin compound. e. This dative of the indirect object may be used with any com- pound of sum except absum and possum. 188 BELLUM HELVETICUM 537. RULE. The dative of the indirect object is used with many verbs compounded with ad, ante, con, in, inter, ob, post, prae, pro, sub, super, and sometimes circum. DRILL EXERCISES 538. 1. Give synopsis of eo in third person, plural; of video in second person, singular. 2. Give all infinitives and participles of vereor with meanings. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 539. 1. Caesari adest ; bello intererat ; legion! praefuerat ; legion! praefectus est. 2. Caesar in Galliam ibit ut Gallis persuadeat. 3. Quern praefecit Caesar exercitui? 4. Or- getorlx c6pi!s ab Helveti!s non erat praefectus. 5. Existimat hanc legionem copils Helvetiorum praestare. 540. 1. To place a lieutenant in command of the bridge ; to assist the neighbors. 2. To be in command of the sol- diers; to be placed in command of these men. 3. He will carry on war with that legion which has been sent to Rome. 4. Did the Helvetians allow the neighbors to assist them? 5. This army was so large that it surpassed all the others. 6. Who persuaded the lieutenants? LESSON LXII DATIVE OF PURPOSE DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES 541. TEXT Omnes res ad profectionem comparant. Diem d!cunt^ qua^ die* ad ripam Rhodan! omnes conveniant. Is dies* erat ante diem qmntum Kalendas Aprlles. Hoc tempore L. P!so et A. Gablnius erant consules. LESSON LXII 189 Omnibus rebus ad profectionem comparatis,* diem dicunt^ qua^ die* ad ripam Rhodani omnes conveniant. Is dies* erat a.^ d. V. Kal. Apr., L. Pisone,^ A. Gabinio consulibus. (106- 109, Cli. 6.) NOTES 1. omnibus rebus . . . comparatis: see §398. 2. they appoint. 3. qua . . . conveniant: see §423, 1. 4. qua die; is dies: note the change in gender and see §298. 5. a. d. V. Kal. Apr., the twenty-eighth of March. From the Kalends, time was reckoned backwards, and both extremes included. Thus, in reckoning the fifth day before the Kalends of April, we must include both the first of April and the twenty-eighth of March. Here the logical construction would read erat dies quintus ante Kalendas Apriles. The expression in the text is the regular idiomatic way of expressing dates, but it can not be parsed. 6. L. Pisone . . . consulibus: literally, Lucius Pisa and Aulus Gabinius (being) consuls; freely, in the consulship of, etc. See §398. The year was 58 B.C. 542. VOCABULARY a. d. V. Kal. Apr. (ante diem quintum Kalendas AprilSs), the fifth day before the Kalends of April. Aprilis, -e [abbr. Apr.], adjective, of April. Aulus, -i, m. [abbr. A.], Aulus, a Koman ''first name*' (prae-nomen). auxilium, -i, n., aid, help. con-venio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, literally, come together, i. e., assemble. Gabinius, -i, m., [Aulus] Gabinius. impedimentum, -i, n., [impedio, hinder], hindrance. inimicus, -a, -um [in-, not, amicus, friendly], unfriendly. Kalendae, -arum, f. [abbr. Kal.], the Kalends, the first day of a Eoman month. Lucius, -i, m. [abbr. L.], Lucius, a Eoman ''first name'* (prae-nomen). praesidium, -i, n., garrison, protection. rlpa, -ae, f., banJc (of a river), subsidium, -i, n., reserve, reinforcement. 190 BELLUM HELVETICUM What are the meanings of auxiliary, suhsidiary, inimical, convention? 543. DATIVE OF PURPOSE (SERVICE) Models 1. Exercitus erat auxilio, the army was (for) a help. 2. Aedui milites auxilid Caesari miserunt, the Aeduans sent soldiers as a help to Caesar. Notes, a. This dative expresses the purpose or end for which something exists or which it serves. b. This dative, when used with sum, is best translated by a predicate noun; when used with other verbs, translate with the word as, c. This dative may be accompanied by another dative denoting the person (or thing) affected, which forms the (so-called) double dative construction. 544. RULE. The dative is used to denote the purpose which a thing serves, 545. DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES Model Proximi sunt Germanis, they are nearest (to) the Germans. 546. RULE. Adjectives meaning near, also fit, friendly, similar, and the like, with their opposites, may have a modifying dative. DRILL EXERCISES 547. Decline the expressions is dies, eadem res. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 548. 1. Hoc est auxilio ; illud est impedlmento exercituT. 2. Ea loca erant proxima provinciae; erit plebi acceptus. LESSON LXIIl 191 3. Ea de causa Caesar tribus legionibus imperavit ut essent Aeduis auxilio. 4. Quod omnes civitates erant inimicae Helvetils, multa bella his locis gerebant. 5. Exercitus erat subsidio eis qui in alteram ripam conveniebant. 6. Helvetii potentissimi erant sed Romanis inimlcl. 549. 1. He is unfriendly to the Helvetians. 2. Caesar will do this as a protection to the Aeduans. 3. The Aeduans had a village very near the bank of the river. 4. Those men will be a reinforcement to our fathers and brothers. 5. The narrow territory was a (source of) distress to the Helvetians. 6. Have you been placed in command of this legion? LESSON LXm PERSONAL PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES 550. TEXT Helvetii per provinciam nostram iter facere^ conaturl erant. Ubi Caesari id nuntiatum est, Roma proficTsci' maturat. Quam^ maximis potest itineribus in Galliam ulteriorem^ contendit et ad^ Genavam pervenit. Sed erat omnino in Gallia ulteriore legio^^ una^^ Romana. Qua de causa provinciae^ Romanae quam maximum potest mllitum numerum imperat; pontem qui erat ad^^ Genavam iubet rescind!. Caesari cum id nuntiatum esset/ eos^ per provinciam nostram iter facere^ c5nari, maturat^ ab urbe^ proficiscl,^ et quam^ maximis potest itineribus in Galliam ulteriorem^ contendit et ad^ Genavam pervenit. Provinciae^ toti quam 192 BELLUM HELVETICUM maximum potest mllitum numerum imperat^'' (erat omnlno in Gallia ulteridre legio^^ una^-), pontem qui erat ad'^ Genavam iubet reseindi. (110-116, Ch. 7.) NOTES 1. ntintiatum esset: translate by an indicative. 2. Subject of conari; the phrase eos . . . conari is in apposition with id; that they were trying, etc. 3. See §508, 6. 4. Historical present and hence may govern historical sequence. 5. ab iirbe: from (near) the city, because the fact that he held a military command prevented him from entering Kome. 6. quam . . . itineribus: (by the greatest marches he is able), hy the greatest possible marches. Compare §396, where no form of possum was used; the translation is the same whether possum is used or not. 7. Gallia ulterior was Gaul on the farther side of the Alps from Rome. What is now called the northern part of Italy was called Gallia citerior, hither Gaul. Caesar's province included both Gauls, but only so much of Transalpine Gaul as had been conquered. The Allobroges belonged to his province, but the Helvetians did not. In his narrative Caesar explains to the Eomans how necessary it was for the safety of the province for him to go outside of his province and do things which the Eomans never thought of when they sent him there. 8. (to) in the vicinity of. 9. See §529. 10. Connect imperat with iubet by et (supplied). 11. legio: it is not known precisely what the full strength of a Roman legion was at this time. The actual strength varied, just as is the case with our regiments. It probably averaged about 3600 men. 12. una: only one. 13. near. 551. VOCABULARY nuntio, -are, -avi, -atum, report. per-venio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, literally, come through, i. e., arrive. re-scindo, re-scindere, re-scidi, re-scissum, literally, cut back; cut down; break ^own. LESSON LXIII 193 ulterior, ulterius, comparative adjective, no positive, superlative ultimus; farther: Gallia ulterior, farther Gaul, i.e., the portion of modern France that had been overrun by the Komans. urbs, urbis, f., city. For pronunciation see §6. What is the meaning of inter-urban f What is an ulterior motive ? 552. DECLENSION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS First person, ego, / SINGULAR PLURAL Norn, ego nos Gen. mei r nostrum 1^ nostri Dat. mihi nobis Ace. me nos Abl. me nobis Second person, tu, you (thou) SINGULAR PLURAL tu vos tni J vestrum i vestri tibi vobis to vos te vobis a. There is no personal pronoun of the third person. Its place is taken either by a demonstrative pronoun, usually is,he,ea,, she, id, it; or, when him, them, etc., refer to the subject, by the reflexive pronoun, sui (§407). When they are used as subjects, it is for emphasis only. b. nostrum and vestrum are the forms used as partitive genitives; nostri and vestri, as objective genitives. c. The preposition cum is enclitic with personal pronouns; as, ndbiscum, with us. 553. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES (PRONOUNS) These are similar in form to the genitives of the corre- sponding personal pronouns, which are never used to denote possession. Istpers. meus, -a, -um, my noster, -tra, -trum, our Sdpers. tuus, -a, -um, your (of one) vester, -tra, -trum, your (of more than one) 194 BELLUM HELVETICUM Sd pers. suus, -a, -um, his, her, its suus, -a, -um, their (when (when referring to the subject) referring to the subject) eius (gen. sing, of is), his, her, eorum, earum, eorura (gen. its (when not referring to the plur.of is), e- g-? adjective, longissimus, -a, -um; adverb, longissime. Thus the entire comparison of all the adjectives and ad- verbs mentioned above would be as follows: Adjective Adverb longus, -a, longe -um longior, -ius Itngius loflgissimus, -a, -um longissime Adjective Adverb f ortis, -e fortiter fortior, -ius fortius fortissimus, -a, -um fortissime Adjective Adverb potens, potentis potenter potentior, -ius potentius potentissimus, -a, -um potentissime DRILL EXERCISES 584. Compare the following adjectives, then form and compare their adverbs: nobilis, certus, angustus, cupidus, latus, aeger, liber, acer, celer. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 585. 1. Latissime multos annos vagatus est. 2. Quis tlbi nocebit? 3. Reliquis Ilelvetils facillime praestatis. 4. Mi- LESSON LXVIII 207 lites sunt cupidissimi gloriae. 5. Proximo die homines plu- riml ex agrls cupidissime profecti sunt. 6. Flumina, quae in hoc mare influunt, sunt angustissima. 7. Altitudo murl et fossae erat pedum sedecim. 8. Mons impendebat ut murum perducere vix possent. 9. Interea illos montes transire non conabuntur quod sunt altiores. 586. 1. To help your friends; my desire for glory. 2. In a sharper battle; of the larger army; of nineteen feet. 3. The Helvetians wandered too widely and fought too often. 4. Meanwhile they followed the troops of the Gauls very bravely. 5. The other Gauls wandered more widely in their (own) territory. 6. He does not wish to go by this road because the height of the mountain is very great. 7. A wall and ditch will be constructed for sixteen miles. LESSON LXVin COMPARISON OF CERTAIN. IRREGULAR ADVERBS 587. TEXT Eo opere perfecto praesidia disponit, castella communit. Haec facit quo^ facilius Helvetios prohibere possit, si se invito transire conentur. Ubi Idus Aprlles quas constituerat cum legatTs venerunt, legatT ad eum reverterunt. Caesar, *'n6n possum," inquit, "more^ et exemplo populT Roman! iter^ per provinciam tilli dare; si vim facere* conabimini, prohibebo." 208 BELLUM HELVETICUM Eo opere perfects praesidia disponit, eastella commiinit, quo^ facilius, si se invito transire conentur, prohibere possit. Ubi ea dies quam constituerat cum legatis venit et legatl ad eum reverterunt, negat se more^ et exemplo popull Ro- mani posse iter^ ullT per provinciam dare ; et, sT vim f acere* conentur, prohibiturum^ ostendit. (137-142, Ch. 8.) NOTES 1. quo . . . possit: so that he may he able to checJc (them) more ea^ly. If a purpose clause contains a comparative form, quo is used in place of ut. 2. more et exemplo: see §456, Note 2. 3. right of way. 4. use. 5. prohibiturum (esse): supply se (Caesar) as subject. 588. VOCABULARY castellum, -i, n., fort. com-mtinio, -munire, -miinivi, -munitum [con, intensive], literally, fortify strongly; eastella communire, literally, to fortify forts strongly; i. e., to construct strong forts. dls-pdn5, -ponere, -posui, -positum, literally, place apart, i. e., place at intervals. exemplum, -i, n., example, precedent. inquam, -is, -it, a defective verb used only with direct quotations, say. invitus, -a, -um, unwilling; freely, unwillingly ; se invito, ablative abso- lute, literally, he {being) unwilling, i. e., without his consent. nego, -are, -avi, -atum, deny, say . . . not, the English negative belong- ing with the dependent verb. os-tendo, -tendere, -tendi, -tentum, show. quo, subordinate conjunction, that; used to introduce a purpose clause which contains a comparative. What is the meaning of ostentatious, negative? LESSON LXVIII 209 589. COMPARISON OF CERTAIN IRREGULAR ADVERBS "bene, melius, optime; well, better, hest. diti, diutius, diutissime; long (of time), longer, longest. facile, facilius, facillime; easily, more easily, most easily. (magnopere), magis, maxime; greatly, more, most. male, peius, pessime; ill, worse, worst. multum, plfis, plurimum; much, more, most. niiper, nuperrime; recently, most recently. parum, minus, minime; too little, less, least. prope, propius, proxime; near, nearer, next. DRILL EXERCISES 590. Give synopsis of pond et munio in third person singular. 2. Decline facilis. 3. Conjugate eo in present in- dicative and give synopsis in second person singular. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 591. 1. Diutius vagari; plus posse;* plurimum posse.* 2. Diu bellum invitus geret. 3. De his rebus Caesarem certiorem faciunt. 4. De hoc opere Helvetil certiores fact! erant. 5. Helvetil ipsi plurimum poterant quod maximum exercitum habebant. 6. Sed agrorum Gallorum erant cupidi quod agri horum erant latissimi. 7. Maxime verebantur ut castella sua commtinire possent. 592. 1. To come nearer; to be much influenced. 2. To see very easily ; to inhabit this place longer. 3. That town will be fortified with more walls and forts. 4. The Helve- tians were not very easily beaten. 5. They were the least desirous of more soldiers. 6. He asked in what town garri- sons had been placed. 7. Caesar willing (ly) showed that his friends were very powerful. * See possum in general vocabulary. 210 BELLUM HELVETIC UM LESSON LXIX DIRECT QUESTIONS 593. TEXT Helvetii ea spe deiecti erant. Qua de causa naves iurix- erunt ratesque compltires fecerunt; alii vadls Rhodani, qua minima altitude fluminis erat, perrumpere conati sunt. Nonnumquam interdiu, saepius noctu, conati sunt si- per- rumpere possent. Sed operis munltione^ et militum concursu et tells repulsi, conatu destiterunt. Helvetii ea spe deiecti, navibus itinctis^ ratibusque com- pluribus factis,^ alii vadis Rhodani, qua minima altitude flu- minis erat, nonnumquam interdiu, saepius noctu, si^ perrum- pere possent c5natl, operis munitione^ et militum concursu et tells repulsi hoc conatu destiterunt. (142-147, Ch. 8.) NOTES 1. navibus iunctis and ratibus factis: ablatives which, together with vadis, denote the means of conati, while the adverbs interdiu and noctu denote the time. 2. si . . . possent: (to see) if they could force their passage: si is here used, in the sense of whether or to see if, to introduce an indirect question. 3. munitione, concursu, telis: ablatives of cause modifying repulsi. 094. VOCABULARY com-plures, com-plura (or com-pluria), genitive complurium [con, intensive], several, quite a number of. c5natus, -us, m. [conor, attempt], attempt. con-cursus, -us, m., literally, a running together; charge. LESSON LXIX 211 de-icio, de-icere, de-ieci, de-iectum, literally, throw down; with sp5, cast down; disappoint. de-sisto, -sistere, -stiti, , stop (intransitive) from something, i. e., cease. inter-diu, adverb [dies, day], during the day, by day. iungo, iungere, iunxi, iunctum, join. munitio, munitionis, f., [munio, fortify], fortification; strength. -ne, enclitic, interrogative particle, not hinting the answer, noctu, adverb [nox, night], hy night, i. e., during the night. non-ne, interrogative particle, hinting an affirmative answer, not. non-numquam, adverb, not never, i. e., sometimes. num, interrogative particle, hinting a negative answer. It cannot be translated by any one word, per-rumpo, -rumpere, -rupi, -ruptum, hreaTc through. ratis, ratis, f ., raft. re-pello, re-pellere, rep-puli, re-pulsum [pello, pellere, pepuli, pulsum, drive], drive hacTc. telum, -i, n., missile. From what are the following words derived: dejected, junction, nocturnal, repulse? 595. DIRECT QUESTIONS 1. Questions which cannot be answered by yes or no are introduced in Latin, as in English, by an interrogative pronoun, adjective, or adverb. Examples: quis venit? who came? qui homo venit? what man came? ubi est? where is he? 2. Questions which can be answered by yes or no are usually intro- duced by an interrogative particle. In written English* the inter- rogation point and usually the order of words show that a sentence is a question. The Eomans had no interrogation point, and the order of the words was free, so that an introductory particle was usually necessary. a. When the question asks for information without hinting whether the answer will be yes or no, the enclitic -ne is suffixed to the word about which the question centers, and that word is placed first. Example: videtne hominem? does he see the man? hominemne videt? does he see the man? 212 BELLUM HELVETIC UM h. When the form of the question hints that the answer yes is expected, noune is used as the first word; i. e., to hint the answer yes, both Latin and English insert a negative. Example: nonne hominem videt? doesn't he see the man? c. When the form of the question hints that the answer no is expected, num is used as the first word. Example: num hominem videt? he does not see the man, does he? Notice that in translating a num-question into English, a negative statement is followed by the question. d. Latin has no words corresponding exactly to yes or no. Eeplies are made by repeating the verb as a statement, or ita, sane, etc., may be used for yes and minime, non, etc., for no. DRILL EXERCISES 596. 1. Decline quis, ipse, sui, navis. 2. Give all the infinitives of repello, Avith meanings. 3. Give memoranda of conatus, ratis, telum. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 597. 1. Licetne nobis sequi? 2. Nonne pueros laudare oportet? 3. Num hoc flumen noctu transire erit facile? 4. Quid Caesarl enuntiatum erat? 5. Num fines Helvetiorum longe a Gallorum finibus aberant? 6. Milites Caesaris prae- sidia ostenderunt quae erant disposita. 7. Num naves iunctas et rates repellere desistes? 8. Nonne concursus complurium militum opere mtinitionis hostes prohibebit? 598. 1. What raft is this? 2. What fortification is that? 3. Whose missiles are these? 4. Will you cease to harm me? 5. Diviciacus was not friendly to the Helvetians, was he? 6. Were you driven back at night by the enemy's charge? 7. Will you be greatly disappointed? EIGHTH REVIEW LESSON 213 EIGHTH REVIEW LESSON Give an account of the events narrated in Chap- ters VI, VII, and VIII, and then translate those chapters. 600. Memory Work. a. Of the verbs volo, nolo, malo (§560), give the conju- gation in the present indicative, and the synopsis complete in the third person plural. h. Decline ego, tu (§552), plus (§576). Compare the irregular adjectives of §§573-575 and give meanings. c. Compare the irregular adverbs of §589 and give meanings, 601. Latin-English Vocabulary. Give the memoranda of the nouns ; the entire nominative and comparison of the adjectives ; the principal parts of the verbs ; and the meanings of all the words. adventus impero omnin5 si Pvuxilium iniuria ostendo sine bonus intercedo pacd singuli castellum invitus pello studeo certus iugum perduc5 sub complures iungo pervenio subsidium concede legatus praeficio sumo concursus maleficium praesidium tamen convenio multo princeps telum deicio munitio puts tempers desists noceo qua uUus dum nol5 quis ulterior 214 expedltus exterus facultas fluo fossa impedimentum BELLUM HELVETICUM nondum ratis sedecim nonnullus repello vadura novem responded vel nuUus reverter vel— vel ntintio rip a vix occidd rogo volo voluntas 602. English-Latin Vocabulary. Give the first form of the Latin for the following: aid either — or missile show ambassador farther much (adv.) sixteen answer first nevertheless some any fliow nine subdue approach (noun) ford no (adj.) take arrival fort not yet think arrive fortification one by one throw down assemble garrison opportunity under bank good or unhampered cease grant outside unwilling certain harm (noun) place in command (be) unwilling charge harm (verb) prefer weapon come together hasten protection where command hindrance raft while construct if refrain (be) willing depth in all reply willingness desire (verb) injure report wish ditch intervene reserve without drive join return (verb) wrong drive back kill several yoke 603. Forms. # Name the possessive pronouns and give their meanings. How are adjectives in -er compared? the six in -lis? How are adverbs formed from first-and-second declension adjec- tives? How from third declension adjectives? Illustrate. LESSON LXX 215 604. Syntax. Give rule for the subject of infinitives ; for the dative with intransitive verbs; for the dative with compound verbs; for the dative of purpose; for the dative with adjectives. Tell how each of the three classes of yes-ov-no questions is introduced. How are other questions introduced? 605. Composition. Make up a short English sentence as an example of each of the constructions mentioned in §604, and then translate those sentences into Latin. LESSON LXX ABLATIVE OF SEPARATION ABLATIVE OF CAUSE 606. TEXT Relinquebatur una^ per Sequanos via. HelvetiT hac via, Sequanis invitls,^ propter angustias ire non poterant. Se- quanls sua sponte* persuadere non poterant. Qua de causa legatos ad Dumnorlgem Aeduum mittunt ut^ a Sequanis impetrarent. Dumnorige deprecatore, se impetrare posse sperant. Relinquebatur una^ per Sequanos via, qua Sequanis in- vitis^ propter angustias Tre n5n poterant. His cum^ sua sponte* persuadere non possent, legatos ad Dumnorlgem Aeduum mittunt, ut^ eo deprecatore a Sequanis impetrarent. (148-152, Ch. 9.) 216 BELLUM HELVETICUM NOTES 1. una via: only the way. 2. Sequanis invitis: compare this with se invito, §588. 3. cum non possent: since they could not. 4. See §313. 5. ut . . . impetrarent: that they might obtain their request. 607. VOCABULARY angustiae, -arum, f. [angustus, narrow], narrowness, narrows; narrow pass. deprecator, deprecatdrls, m., intercessor, advocate; eo deprecatore, ablative absolute, literally, he (being) intercessor, i. e., with him as intercessor. impetro, -are, -avi, -atum, obtain one's request. re-linqu6, -linquere, -liqui, -lictum, leave {behind). sponte, ablative of a defective noun, meaning free will; sua sponte, by their own influence. via, -ae, f ., way. What are the meanings of the expressions via Chicago; spontaneous combustion? 608. ABLATIVE OF SEPARATION Models 1. Helvetii eos suis finibus prohibent, the Helvetians keep them from their territory. 2. Gallos ab Aquitanis Garumna dividit, the Garonne separates the Gauls from the Aquitanians. Notes, a. This use of the ablative answers the question "From whomf or "From what?" and is employed with verbs (and adjec- tives) meaning Tceep out, deprive, free, be without, need, and the like. b. When a Latin verb compounded with ab, de, or ex is used, the preposition is generally used also with the ablative. LESSON LXX 217 c. The ablative of 'place from which is simply a subdivision of the ablative of separation. Note the similarity in construction and the difference in meaning between the two constructions. See §468. 609. RULE. Separation is expressed by the ablative, with or without ab, de, or ex, 610. ABLATIVE OF CAUSE Models 1. Spe regni hoc fecit, he did this because of a hope of royal power. 2. Virtute sua erat nobilis, he was noted for (on account of) his bravery. Notes, a. This use of the ablative answers the question, "Why?'' "For what reason?" "On account of what?" h. It may be translated by — on-account-of ; as in the sentence, "He succeeded on account of his wealth; " because-of ; as in the sentence, "He succeeded because of his wealth;" from; as in the sentence, "He died from starvation;" with; as in the sentence, "He was crazed with trouble;" for; as in the sentence, "He was noted for his courage." c. Cause may also be expressed by the accusative with ob or propter. 611. RULE, Cause may be expressed by the ablative, usually without a preposition. DRILL EXEECISES 612. 1. Compare bonus, malus, magnus, parvus, multus. 2. Decline the comparatives of parvus and multus. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 613. 1. Plures homines; plus virtutis. 2. Maiore telo; ab optimis hominibus ; plurimis annis. 3. Virtute sua Belgae 218 BELLUM HELVETICUM nobilissimi omnium Gallorum fuerant. 4. Ad hoc oppidum Helvetii ex sua provincia faciliore via venient. 5. Angus- tiae viae sunt tantae ut Helvetii sua sponte transire non possint. 6. Ei homines, qui domi relinquuntur, hostes pro- hibere non poterunt. 7. Aquitania ab Hispania altissimis montibus erat divlsa ut adventus mercatorum esset difficilis. 614. 1. We were left at Rome on the same day. 2. Do you wish to obtain-your-request ? 3. Because-of our cus- toms, we are larger and braver. 4. Of pur own free will, we shall start out from this village. 5. For his bravery, control has been given to him by the Helvetians. 6. This way is less easy on-account-of its narrowness. LESSON LXXI ABLATIVE OF COMPARISON ABLATIVE OF MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE 615. TEXT Dumnorlx^ gratia et largltione apud Sequanos plurimum poterat. Helvetiis erat amicus quod ex ea civitate Orgeto- rigis filiam in matrimonium duxerat. Cupiditate regni adductus novis rebus- studebat. Quam plurimas^ civitates suo beneficio obstringere volebat. Dumnorix^ gratia et largitione apud Sequanos plurimum poterat, et Helvetiis erat amicus quod ex ea civitate Orgeto- rlgis filiam in matrimonium duxerat; et cupiditate regni adductus novis rebus^ studebat et quam plurimas^ civitates suo beneficio habere obstrictas* volebat, (152-157, Ch. 9.) LESSON LXXI 219 NOTES 1. See Chap. III. This is the Dumnorix who had conspired with Orgetorix. Although that plot had failed, he was still seeking a chance to make himself king. 2. See §529. 3. quam plurimas: the most possible. 4. quam . . . obstrictas: to have the most possible states bound by his Tcindness. 616. VOCABULARY beneficium, -i, n. [bene, well, facio, do], Tcindness; Tcind deed. gratia, -ae, f ., favor, popularity. largitio, largitionis, f., free giving. nevus, -a, -um, no comparative, superlative novissimus, new; novae res, literally, new things; regularly, change, revolution. ob-stringo, -stringere, -strinxi, -strictum, bind. quam, coordinate conjunction, than. What are meanings of beneficial, benevolent? 617. ablative of comparison Model Helvetu erant fortiores JRoj^anis, f ^^^^ Helvetians were braver than the Romans. Notes, a. When two persons or things are compared, both nouns are in the same case if quam is used. b. Quam may be omitted only when the first of the two nouns is either nominative or accusative. c. If quam is omitted, the second noun is in the ablative. d. After the comparative plus, minus, amplius and longius, quam is usually omitted without the ablative being used. 618. RULE, A comparative without quam is followed by the ablative. 220 BELLUM HELVETICUM 619. ABLATIVE OF MEASURE (OR DEGREE) OF DIFFERENCE Model Hoc flumen est latius tribus pedibus , this river is {wider hy ihree feet) three feet wider. Notes, a. This ablative answers the question, "How much?" and is used with comparatives and words implying comparison. fc. The English translation of this ablative requires no preposition. 620. RULE. The ablative without a preposition is used with comparatives to express the measure (or degree) of difference. DRILL EXERCISES 621. 1. Decline vir, vis. 2. Conjugate vol5 in present indicative and give synopsis in first person plural. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 622. 1. Munitioni novae praefici; auxilio esse tibi. 2. Naves erant maiores ratibus. 3. Dumnorix plebi acceptior erat Diviciaco. 4. Exercitus Helvetiorum erit maior quam Caesaris. 5. Haec via erat multis pedibus latior ut hostes finibus nostris facillime prohibere non possemus. 6. Fines Helvetiorum sunt angustiores multis milibus passuum quam reliquorum Gallorum. 7. Sequani beneficiis Dumnorigis studebant quod eius gratia erat maior. (Express the following sentences in two ways where possible.) 623. 1. The Germans were larger than the Romans. 2. We had a narrower territory than the others. 3. They fought more bravely than the other soldiers. 4. Was not Dumnorix 's popularity greater than his brother's? LESSON LXXII 221 5. Because-of his popularity and kindness, Dumnorix was more powerful than his brother. 6. Had he desired peace more than a revolution ? LESSON LXXII ABLATIVE OF MANNER 624. TEXT Itaque rem suscipit et a SequanTs impetrat ut per fines suos Helvetids Ire patiantur.^ Obsides^ uti inter^ sese dent^ perficit. Sequani obsides dant ne itinere Helvetios pro- hibeant. Helvetii obsides dant ut sine malefieio et iniuria transeant. Itaque rem suscipit et a SequanTs impetrat ut per fines suos Helvetios Ire patiantur/ obsidesque- utI inter^ se dent* perficit: Sequani,* ne itinere Helvetios prohibeant;^ Hel- vetii,* ut sine malefieio et iniuria transeant.^ (157-160, Ch. 9.) NOTES 1. ut . . . patiantur and uti . . . dent: objects of impetrat and perficit respectively; see §423, 2. 2. Object of dent. 3. inter se dent: (give among themselves), exchange. 4. Sequani and Helvetii: subjects of obsides dent (understood). 5. ne . . . prohibeant and ut . . . transeant: clauses of purpose depending on obsides dent (understood). 625. VOCABULARY itaque, conjunction and adverb, and so, therefore. obses, obsidis, m. or f ., hostage, a person given by one party to anothei as security for an agreement. For pronunciation see §6. 222 BELLUM IIELVETICUM 626. ABLATIVE OF MANNER Models 1. Cum virtute bellum i^erunt, they wage war with bravery (or bravely). 2. Magna (cum) virtute bellum gerunt, they wage war with great bravery (or very bravely). Notes, a. Contrast this use of the English preposition with and those employed with other ablatives. 6. This use of the ablative answers the question "How?" c. This ablative must have cum or an adjective, and may have both. "When both the adjective and cum are used, the cum is generally placed between the adjective and the noun. d. This ablative sometimes answers the question "Under what circumstances?" When so used, it may be called the ablative of attendant circumstance. e. Manner may be expressed in Latin by an adverb as in English. 627. RULE. Manner is expressed by the ablative with either cum or a modifying adjective, rarely with both. DRILL EXERCISES 628. 1. Give memoranda of obses, beneficium, nox, pes. 2. Give all infinitives and participles of iungo, with mean- ings. 3. Decline nova res. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 629. 1. Plura beneficia; maximum numerum obsidum. 2. Voluistine plurimum posse? 3. Oppidum maxima vi oppugnare voluit in quo erat magna copia frumentl. 4. Magno dolore reverterunt quod oppidum capere non potu- erant. 5. Itaque Genavam venerunt et magna fortitudine hostes reppulerunt. 6. Haec civitas erat multo paratior ad proficiscendum quam reliquae. V LESSON Lxxm 223 630. 1. The nearer river; the fort nearer the river. 2. The farthest hill; with greater bravery. 3. Eome is a larger city than Geneva. 4. Caesar had more hostages than the others. 5. And so with great grief he allows them to return. 6. The enemy tried very courageously to keep them out of the town. 7. These men who were not friendly often fought bravely. LESSON LXXIII CONJUGATION OF Fid ABLATIVE WITH CERTAIN DEPONENT VERBS 631. TEXT Helvetiis est^ in animo^ per agrum Sequanorum et Aeduo- rum iter in Santonum fines facere. Id Caesarl nuntiatur. Santones non longe a Tolosatium finibus absunt. Haec civitas est in provincia. Caesari nuntiatur^ Helvetiis esse- in animo^ per agrum Sequanorum et Aeduorum iter in Santonum fines facere, qui non longe a Tolosatium finibus absunt, quae civitas* est in provincia. (161-164, Ch. 10.) NOTES 1. nuntiatur: the subject is Helvetiis . . . facere. 2. esse (est) : the subject is per . . . facere. 3. esse in animo: compare §558, Note 2. 4. quae civitas: (which state), a state which. 224 BELLUM IIELVETICUM 632. VOCABULARY fio, fieri, f actus sum [passive of facio], he made, he done; happen, potior, potiri, potitus sum, obtain control, gain. Santones, Santonum (Santoni, Santonorum), m., the Santones, a tribe living on the northern bank of the Garonne, in southwestern Gaul. Tolosates, Tolosatium, m., the Tolosates, a tribe in southwestern Gaul, near modern Toulouse. 633. CONJUGATION OF FIO Fio is the irregular passive of facio, male, do. Note the i before all vowels except e in the combination -er. fio, fieri, factus sum, he made, he done; happen, hecome. SUBJUNCTIVE INDICATIVE Pres. fio, fis, fit fimus, fitls, fiunt fiam Imp. fiebam fierem Fut. fiam Perf. factus sum factus Sim Plup. factus eram factus essem Fut. Perf. factus ero INFINITIVES PARTICIPLES Pres. fieri Perf. factus Perf. factus esse (gerundive) Fut. factum iri Fut. faciendus 634. ABLATIVE WITH CERTAIN DEPONENT VERBS Models 1. Frumento utor, I am using the gram. 2. Imperio potiemur, we shall obtain control. Note. The ablatives in the above sentences are translated by direct objects. LESSON Lxxrv 225 635. RULE. Utor, fruor, fungor, potior, and vescor, and their compounds^ govern an ablative which is translated by a direct object. DRILL EXERCISES 636. Give all infinitives and participles of utor, potior, facio, with meanings. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 637. 1. Hoc opus fiet; haec itinera fiunt. 2. Maior pons fit; illo frumento uti iubebimini. 3. Omni frumento, quod in oppidls est, utemur in itinere. 4. Multos menses Orgetorix regno potirl summa vi conatus est. 5. Multae res a Caesare flent ne provincia hos homines f initimos habeat. 6. Nonne nuntiatum est Ilelvetios angustiores fines quam alias civitates habere? 638. 1. What has happened? 2. Where do you wish this to be done? 3. Will this building be made much larger than that? 4. They very often obtained-control-of towns by means of battles. 5. They are using the same armies that were in Gaul. 6. Where is the bridge that is being made by Caesar? 7. When (at what time) will these matters (res) be reported to Caesar? LESSON LXXIV ABLATIVE OF ACCOMPANIMENT 639. TEXT Id^ sT fiet, provincia Romana homines bellicosos, populi Romani inimicos, locis^ patentibus finitimos^ habebit. Haec loca sunt maxime frtimentaria. Id magno cum periculo* "226 BELLUM HELVETICUM provinciae futurum esse intellegebat.^ Ob eas eausas T. Labienum legatum praeficit ei munitioni quam fecerat. Id^ SI fieret, intellegebat- magno cum periculo^ provinciae futurum ut homines* bellicosos, populi Roman! inimlcos, locis^ patentibus maximeque frumentariis finitimos^ haberet. Ob eas eausas ei munitioni quam fecerat T. Labienum legatum praeficit. (164-169, Ch. 10.) NOTES 1. Eefers to iter . . . facere in §631. 2. intellegebat . . . futurum (esse): he realised that it would he (attended) with great danger (of) to the province. The subject of futurum (esse) is the clause ut . . . haberet. 3. magno cum periculo: see §626, Note d. 4. homines: object of haberet, of which provincia (understood) is subject. 5. Dative, modifying the adjective finitimos. 6. adjacent. It modifies homines. 640. VOCABULARY bellicosus, -a, -um [bellum, u-ar], literally, full of ivar; warliTce. frumentarius, -a, -um [frumentum, grain], literally, pertaining to grain; productive (of grain). intel-lego, -legere, -lexi, -lectum [inter, among, lego, choose'\, under- stand, realize. Labienus, -i, m., (Titus) Lahienus, Caesar's favorite officer. pateo, patere, patui, , he open, he exposed. Present participle used as an adj., open, exposed. Titus, -i, m. [abbr. T.], Titus, a Koman *' first-name" (prae-n5men). 641. ABLATIVE OF ACCOMPANIMENT Model Cum Caesare profecti sunt, they started out with Caesar. LESSON LXXIV 227 Notes, a. This use of the ablative answers the question ''In company with whom?" and always denotes persons (singly or in bodies). &. In military expressions cum is sometimes omitted. c. Distinguish this meaning of the preposition wi1h from those used in such sentences as: Be was crazed with (because of) grief. They carry grain with (by means of) carts. 642. RULE. Accompaniment is expressed by the ablative with cum. DRILL EXERCISES 643. 1. Decline the Latin for the nearer road; the large place. 2. Compare magnus and maxime. 3. Give synopsis of intelleg5 in second person singular. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 644. 1. Militibus imperare ; legatum exercituT prae- ficere. 2. Mea cupiditas belli; erit Romae. 3. Possuntne haec loca fieri maxime frumentaria? 4. Nonne intellegitis Helvetios cum principibus suis Noreiam iter facere? 5. Legationes duarum civitatum cum multis hominibus Genavam iter faciunt. 6. Llultl dolore afficiuntur quod cum bostibus contendere non possunt. 645. 1. He goes with his friend. 2. He was killed with a missile. 3. He starts out with great courage. 4. They asked whom he had placed in command of the army. 5. He did not know whom they had sent home with Labienus. 6. This province was so productive that the soldiers were not able to use all the grain. 228 BELLUM IIELVETICUM LESSON^ LXXV ABLATIVE AND GENITIVE OF DESCRIPTION 646. TEXT Ipse in Italiam magnis itineribus^ contendit duasque ibi legiones conscribit. Tres legiones, quae circum Aquileiam hiemabant, ex hibernis educit. Proximum iter in ulterio- rem Galliam per Alpes erat. Hoc itinere cum his quinque legionibus ire contendit. Ibi Ceutrones et Graiocell et Caturiges locis superioribus occupatis itinere* exercitum prohibere conantur. Ipse in Italiam magnis itineribus^ contendit duasque ibi legiones conscribit, et tres,- quae circum Aquileiam hie- mabant, ex hiberms educit, et, qua^ proximum iter in ulte- riorem Galliam per Alpes erat, cum his quTnque legionibus ire contendit. Ibi Ceutrones et Graiocell et Caturiges locTs superioribus occupatis itinere* exercitum prohibere conan- tur. (169-175, Ch. 10.) NOTES 1. magnis itineribus: see §627. 2. Supply legidnes. 3. qua proximum iter . . . erat: where (there) was the shortest road, 4. See §609. 647. VOCABULARY Alpes, Alpium, f., the Alps, a term applied by the Eomans to all the mountains in the vicinity of modern Switzerland. Aquileia, -ae, f., Aquileia, a Roman city at the head of the Adriatic Sea. Caturiges, Caturigum, m., the Caturiges, an Alpine tribe. Ceutrones, Ceutronum, m., the Ceutrones, an Alpine tribe. LESSON LXXV 229 circum, preposition with ace, around, about. con-scribo, -scribere, -scripsi, -scriptum, literally, write together; enroll, e-duco, -ducere, -duxi, -due turn, lead out. Graioceli, -drum, m., the Graioceli, a Gallic tribe living in the Graian Alps. hibemus, -a, -um, adjective, winter. Neuter plural used as a substantive (with castra understood), literally, winter-camp, i. e., winter-quarters. Iiiem5, -are, -avi, -atum, winter, pass the winter. ibi, adverb, there, in that place. Italia, -ae, f., Italy. QUinque, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective, five. superus, -a, -um (for comparison see §574), high. Mention English words derived from circum, hibernus, quinque, superus. ABLATIVE AND GENITIVE OF DESCRIPTION 648. Models 1. HominesJ "^^y amniv I jjjj^ijgjjt^r men of unfriendly [inimici animi ' > / j ^ inimico animol disposition will he sent. 2. Fliiminis altitude erat trium pedum, the river's depth was (of) three feet . Notes, a. This ablative (or genitive) describes a noun and hence is an adjective phrase. Most other uses of the ablative are adverbial. h. This ablative (or genitive) is always modified by an adjective or an equivalent genitive. c. When a definite number is given, the genitive is always used and is then called the genitive of measure. d. The descriptive genitive is often used predicatively, as in Model 2. 649. RULE. The ablative or genitive, modified by an adjective, describes a person or thing by naming some quality. 230 BELLUM HELVETICUM DRILL EXERCISES 650. 1. Decline ipse, sui, duo, tres. 2. Conjugate eo in the present indicative and give synopsis in third person plural. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 651. 1. Circum Genavam sunt mult! montes magna alti- tudine. 2. Exercitus erat Caesaris. 3. Exercitus eius erat magnae virtutis. 4. Caesar ipse erat magna auctoritate. 5. Iter duorum milium passuum facere coacti sunt. 6. Al- lobroges, populus bono animo, ibi incolunt. 7. Hi quinque milites ex hibernis educentur quod non sunt summa forti- tudine. 652. 1. A river of great width; a province of many- mountains. 2. lie will use the winter-quarters which are being made there. 3. With these lieutenants, I shall lead out an army of great bravery. 4. Within one year we pre- pared five months' grain. 5. They crossed two rivers with very high banks. 6. Garrisons were placed-at-intervals about the town. LESSON LXXVI ABLATIVE OF SPECIFICATION 653. TEXT Hae gentes compluribus proeliis sunt pulsae. Ocelum est citerioris provinciae extremum oppidum. Vocontii sunt ulterioris provinciae. Ab Ocelo^ Caesar in fines* Voconti- orum die septimo pervenit. Inde in Allobrogum fines, ab LESSON LXXVI 231 Allobrogibus in Segusiavos* exercitum ducit. Segusiavi sunt extra provinciam trans Rhodanum primi. Compluribus his^ proeliis^ pulsis, ab Ocelo,^ quod est oppidum citerioris provinciae extremum, in fines Voconti- orum ulterioris provinciae die septimo pervenit ; inde in AUobrogum fines,* ab Allobrogibus in Segusiavos* exer- citum dticit. Hi sunt extra provinciam trans Rhodanum primi. (175-180, Ch. 10.) NOTES 1. his . . . pulsis: ablative absolute. 2. compluribus . . . proeliis: ablative of means modifying pulsis. 3. ab Ocelo: ab, with names of towns, means from the neighborhood of. 4. in fines: into the country; in Segusiavos: among the Segusiavi. Look at the map (p. 204) and notice the junction of the Rhone and Saone. Caesar probably encamped just there, and Labienus must have brought the rest of the army to the same point. Caesar had been absent some time in Italy, and in the next chapter it will be learned that the Helvetians had meanwhile gone through the pass and were somewhere to the north. 654. VOCABULARY citerior, citerius, comparative adjective (for comparison see §575), nearer; with provincia, it refers to the province of Cisalpine Gaul, the part of Italy north of the Po. extra, preposition with ace, outside, gens, gentis, f., race, tribe. inde, adverb, thence, from that place. Ocelum, -i, n., Ocelum, a town of the Graioceli in Cisalpine Gaul. Segusiavi, -orum, m., the Segusiavi, a tribe of Gauls to the south of the Aeduans. Septimus, -a, -um, ordinal (numeral) adjective, seventh. Vocontii, -drum, m., the Vocontii, a tribe living in the Eoman province of farther Gaul. 232 BELLUM HELVETICUM 655. ABLATIVE OF SPECIFICATION Models 1. Galli virtute praestabant, the Gauls excelled in bravery, 2. Oppida, numero duodecim, habent, they have towns, twelve in mimher. Notes, a. This use of the ablative answers the question, "In what respect?" or "In respect to what?" b. It may modify a verb (like other ablatives), an adjective, or sometimes a noun, c. The English in is translated into Latin only when it denotes place, not when it denotes time or specification. 656. RULE. The ablative, without a preposition, is used to denote that in respect to which a statement is true. DEILL EXERCISES 657. 1. Compare citerior, ulterior, primus. 2. Decline citerior. 3. Give all the infinitives and participles of pello, with meanings. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 658. 1. Mons erat magnus altitudine. 2. Mons erat magna altitudine. 3. Num milites legionis septimae reli- quos virtute praecedunt? 4. Facile erit citeriorem Galliam occupare quod omnibus fortitudine praestamus. 5. Privata eorum aedificia erant multa numero. 6. Inde in oppidum primum trans flumen ibimus. 659. 1. Caesar's soldiers were very keen in battle. 2. We surpass our neighbors of the nearer towns in number of soldiers. 3. These men are powerful in arms. 4. In NINTH REVIEW LESSON 233 this respect (res), our first attempt will be very easy. 5. That river is great in length, not in width. 6. Thence we shall come with you to Ocelum on the seventh day of the next month. NINTH EEVIEW LESSON 660. Give an account of the events narrated in Chap- ters IX and X, and then translate those chapters. 661. Latin-English Vocabulary. Give the memoranda of the nouns; the entire nominative and comparison of the adjectives; the principal parts of the verbs ; and the meanings of all the words. angustiae hiberna itaque quinqiie "beneficium hiems nuntio relinquo circum ibi novus Septimus citerior irapetro obses sponte educd inde pateo superus frumentarius intellegd primus via gratia English-Latin Vocabulary. Give the first form of the Latin for the following: about hostage nearer report (verb) and so in that place new seventh favor kindness obtain one's ; request thence first know (be) open there five lead out popularity therefore free will leave productive way from that place narrows realize winter (verb) high winter-quarters 234 BELLUM HELVETICUM 663. Syntax. Give the rules for the following constructions: separation with certain deponents cause accompaniment comparison description measure of difference specification manner 664. Form a short English sentence as an example of each of the constructions named under §663, and then translate those sentences into Latin. LESSON LXXVII IMPERATIVE MOOD COMMANDS 665. TEXT Dum haec a Caesare geruntur, Helvetii iam per angustias et fines Sequanorum suas^ copias tradtixerant, et in Aedu- orum fines pervenerant eoriimque^ agros populabantur.^ AeduT se suaque^ ab HelvetiTs defendere non poterant. Itaque legatos ad Caesarem miserunt qui auxilium rogarent. Helvetii iam per angustias et fines Sequanorum suas^ copias tradtixerant et in Aedudrum fines pervenerant eorumque^ agros populabantur.- AeduT, cum se suaque^ ab eis defendere non possent, legatos ad Caesarem mittunt rogatum* auxilium. (181-185, Ch. 11.) LESSON LXXVII 235 NOTES 1. Eefers to whom? 2. traduxerant . . . pervenerant . . . populabantur: note the change of tenses. 3. and their property. 4. rogatum auxilium: to ash aid; rogatum is a supine. 666. VOCABULARY defends, -fendere, -fendi, -fensum, literally, ward of from; usually, defend. populor, popular!, populatus sum, ravage. tra-dtico, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, lead . . . across. 667. IMPERATIVE MOOD The imperative mood has only two tenses, the present and the future. In the present only the second person is found, and in the future only the second and third. The future is rarely used. 668. FIRST CONJUGATION ACTIVE Present SINGULAR PLURAL ^nd Pers. lauda, praise laudate, praise Future Bnd Pers. laudato, you shall praise laudatote, you shall praise 8rd Pers. laudato, he shall praise laudanto, they shall praise PASSIVE Present SINGULAR PLURAL Bnd Pers. laudare, he praised laudamini, be praised Future Pers. laudator, you shall be praised 8rd Pers, laudator, he shall be praised laudantor, they shall be praised 236 BELLUM HELVETICUM 669. PRESENT IMPERATIVES SECOND PERSON Active Passive SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL lauda laudate praise laudare laudamini he praised mone monete advise monere monemini he advised due* ducite lead ducere ducimini he led audi audite hear audire audimini he heard cape capita take capere capimiul he taken es i este ite he go ndn nolite he unwilling *dic6, duco, facio, fero have die, due, fac, fer for present active singular imperative, instead of the regular forms which end in -e. EXERCISES 670. 1. Vide. 2. Existimate. 3. Fac. 4. Este. 5. Pellite. 6. Defende. 7. Comparamini. 8. ArbitraminT. 9. CommunT. 10. Patere. (Give both singular and plural.) 671. 1. Start out. 2. Say. 3. Come. 4. Hold. 5. Receive. 6. Try. 7. Send. 8. Follow. 9. Use. 10. Cross. COMMANDS 672. Models 1. (a) Laudemus, let us praise. (h) Ne laudemus, let us not praise, 2. {a) Lauda, praise. (h) Noli laudare, he unwilling to praise, douH praise, 3. (a) Laudet, let Mm praise. (&) Ne laudet, let Mm not praise. LESSON LXXVII 237 Notes, a. A command in the first person is called an exhortation or a hortatory subjunctive. b. Ne or non with the imperative is not used in prose to express a command. c. A command in the third person is called a jussive subjunctive. 673. RULES. (1) A command in the first person Is ex= pressed by the first person plural of the present subjunctive, the negative being ne. (2) A positive command in the second person is expressed by the present imperative. The negative is usually expressed by noli or nolite with the present infinitive. (3) A command in the third person is expressed by the present subjunctive, the negative being ne. 674. SUMMARY OF COMMANDS Affirmative Negative SINGULAR SINGULAR 1st Pers. (is not found) (is not found) B7id Pers. lauda, praise noli laudare, don H praise 3rd Pers. laudet, let him praise ne laudet, let him not praise PLURAL PLURAL 1st Pers. laudemus, let us praise ne laudemus, let us not praise 2nd Pers. laudate, praise nolite laudare, don H praise 3rd Pers. laudent, let them praise ne laudent, let them not praise DRILL EXERCISES 675. Give all the present imperatives of do, munio, sequor, iubeo, deligo. 238 BELLUM HELVETICUM TRANSLATION EXERCISES 676. 1. Exercitum educat. 2. Ne hlberna defendamus. 3. Nolite agros nostros popular!. 4. Mihi obsides dent. 5. Orgetorix ad eas res conficiendas deligatur. 6. Noll Caesari enuntiare quid legatl dicant. 7. Dixit se suTs auxilium dare non posse. 8. Helvetii per fines Sequanorum copias suas traducent ut Aeduorum agros populentur. 677. 1. Let us come. 2. Let them go. 3. Don't start out. 4. Let us not follow. 5. Let them all defend their homes and children. 6. Don't come into Gaul without a large army. 7. Let him lead his army across that river. 8. Let us not fear that the enemy will ravage the province. LESSON LXXVin GERUNDS AND GERUNDIVES 678. TEXT ''Ita n5s," inquiunt, *'omni tempore de populo Romano merit! sumus ut agr! nostr! vastar! non debuerint.^ Paene in conspectu exercitus Roman!, l!ber! nostr! in servittitem abducl, oppida nostra expugnar! non debuerunt." Ambarr! erant necessari! et consanguine! Aeduorum. Helveti! agros Ambarrorum depopulat! sunt. Ambarr! Caesar!, "Non facile,'* inquiunt, "ab oppid!s nostr!s vim hostium pro- hibemus. ' ' Ita se^ omn! tempore de populo Romano meritos esse ut paene in conspectu exercitus nostr!^ agr!^ vastar!,* l!ber! in servittitem abduc!, oppida expugnar! non debuerint.^ Eodem LESSON Lxxvm 239 tempore AmbarrI, necessarii et cdnsanguinei Aeduorum, Caesarem certiorem^ faciunt^ sese^ depopulatis^ agrls non facile ab oppidis vim hostium prohibere. (185-191, Ch. 11.) NOTES 1. se . . . meritos esse: the indirect discourse depends on the idea of saying implied in the previous words. In translating supply the words, '' saying that." 2. Modifies exercitus. 3. agri, liberi, oppida: subjects of debuerint. 4. vastari, abduci, expugnari: infinitives complementary to de- buerint. 5. The perfect tense is sometimes used in a result clause depending on a secondary tense, though this is an exception to the rule for sequence of tenses. See §371. Note the difference between the Latin and the English idiom. The present infinitive and the perfect tense of debeo are here to be translated: ought not to have been laid waste, etc. 6. Predicate adjective agreeing with Caesarem. 7. certiorem faciunt: equivalent to a verb of saying. 8. Subject of prohibere; translate this by the progressive form. 9. depopulatis: passive in meaning though the verb depopulor is deponent. 679. VOCABULARY ab-duc6, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, lead away, carry away. Ambarri, -drum, m., the Ambarri, dependents of the Aeduans, south- east of them, near the Saone. con-sanguineus, -a, -um, literally, of common blood, i. e., related. Masculine as substantive, kinsman. conspectus, -us, m., sight. de-populor, -popular!, -populatus sum, ravage (completely). ex-pugno, -are, -avi, -atum, literally, fight out; regularly, talce (by storm). liberi, -orum, m., (free) children. mereor, mereri, meritus sum, deserve. necessarius, -a, -um, literally, necessary. Masculine plural as substan- tive, close friends. 240 BELLUM HELVETICUM paene, adverb, almost. servitus, servitutis, f., slavery. vasto, -are, -avi, -atum, lay waste. What are the meanings of consanguinity, depopulate, meritorious, devastate f 680. GERUND AND GERUNDIVE Both the gerund and the gerundive may be formed from the present participle by dropping the s and adding -di for the genitive Of the gerund and -dus for the masculine singular nominative of the gerundive, shortening the vowel before the ending. 681. GERUNDS FIRST CONJUGATION SECOND CONJUGATION THIRD CONJUGATION Gen. laudandi, of praising Dat. laudando, for praising Ace. laudandum, praising Abl. laudando, by, in praising monendi, of warning monendo, for warning monendum, warning monendo, hy, in warning ducendi, of leading ducendo, for leading ducendum, leading ducend5, by, in leading FOURTH CONJUGATION Gen. audiendi, of hearing Bat. audiendo, for hearing Ace. audiendum, hearing Abl. audiendo, by, in hearing THIRD CONJUGATION IN -16 capiendi, of talcing capiendo, for talcing capiendum, talcing capiendo, by, in talcing 682. GERUNDIVES The gerundives are the same in form and meaning as the future passive participles. See §388. LESSON LXXVIII 241 First Conj. Second Conj. Third Conj. Fourth Conj. Third Conj. in -io laudandus, -a, -um; monendus, -a, -um; ducendus, -a, -um; audiendurf, -a, -um; capiendus, -a, -um; to-he-praised to-he-warned to-he-led to-he-heard to-he-taTcen 683. The Gerund is active is a neuter verbal noun. is used like any other noun. has only four forms. The Gerundive is passive. is a verbal adjective. always agrees with a noun in gender, number, and case. has all the forms of any regular adjective. 684. In the following sentences, illustrating the uses of the gerund, notice : 1. That the infinitive is used in place of the nominative of the gerund and also of the accusative (except as object of a preposition). 2. That, with an intransitive verb, the gerund is used like the English verbal noun in -ing. Nom. proficisci erat diflacile, starting out was difftcult; it was dif- ficult to start out. Gen. proficiscendi causa frumentum comparaverunt; they prepared grain for the purpose of starting out. Dat. dies proficiscendo constituta est (rare) ; a day icas appointed for starting out. Ace. dies ad proficiscendum constituta est; a day was appointed for starting out. proficisci conati sunt; they tried starting out; they tried to start out. Ahl. eos pugnando superavit; he conquered them hy fighting. 242 BELLUM HELVETICUM 685. Ill the following sentences, comparing the gerund with the gerundive, notice that, when the English verbal noun in -i7ig is used with a direct object: 1. The gerund is not employed, except in the genitive case. 2. The English direct object, retaining its gender and number, takes the case the gerund would have had, and the gerundive is made to agree with this noun in gender, number, and case. Gen. He came for the purpose of huilding a ship = (either), Gerund: navem faciendi causa* venit; (or), Gerundive: navis faciendae causa* venit. (of a ship to-be-built) Dat. He came for (the purpose of) building a ship = Gerundive: navi faciendae venit (rare), (for a ship to-be-built) Ace. He came for (the piirpose of) building a ship = Gerundive: ad* navem faciendam venit. (for a ship to-be-built) Abl. He conquered the enemy by building ships = Gerundive: navibus faciendis hostes superavit. (by ships to-be-built) DRILL EXERCISES 686. Give, with meanings, all the participles of the model verbs ; also, of proficiscor, conor, eo. TRANSLATION EXERCISES In distinguishing the gerund from the gerundive, remember: 1. That the gerund has no endings except -i, -6, and -um. 2. That the gerundive always agrees in gender, number, and case with some noun. * causa with the genitive and ad with the accusative express purpose, LESSON LXXIX 243 687. 1. Spes regni obtinendi erat OrgetorigT. 2. Mitte homines ad rates faciendas. 3. Helvetii cupidi eius rei con- ficiendae esse debent, 4. Helvetii erant cupidissimi earum rerum c5nficiendarum. 5. Liberos nostros defendendi facul- tatem meremur. 6. Nostros necessaries consanguineosque in servittitem abducendi causa hoc fecit. 688. 1. Your children will be sent to (ad) see their (own) homes. 2. Their (close) friends will do those things that prepare them for (ad) resisting. 3. The Sequanians will make war by laying waste the territory. 4. Many kinsmen were left to (ad) set-fire-to the village. 5. Taking the town by storm will not be easy. 6. The army went almost out of sight by crossing the river. 7. We did not deserve slavery, did we ? LESSON LXXIX CAUSAL CLAUSES WITH QUOD AND WITH CUM 689. TEXT Allobroges trans Rhodanum vicos possessionesque habe- bant. Itaque fuga se ad Caesarem recipiunt^ et demonstrant sibi^ praeter agri solum nihil esse reliqul.^ Quibus rebus adductus Caesar non exspectandum esse sibi* statuit dum- omnes fortiinae sociorum consumerentur. Statuit etiam non exspectandum sibi dum^ in Santonos Helvetii pervenlrent. Item Allobroges, qui trans Rhodanum vTcos possessio- nesque habebant, fuga se ad Caesarem recipiunt^ et demon- 244 BELLUM HELVETICUM strant sibi- praeter agri solum nihil esse reliqui.^ Quibus rebus adductus Caesar non exspectandum sibi^ statuit dum,^ omnibus fortunls sociorum consumptis, in Santonos Helvetii pervemrent. (191-197, Ch. 11.) NOTES 1. With se: literally, laTce one's self haclc, hetdke one's self, retreat, retire (in good order). 2. Dative of possessor. 3. sibi . . . esse reliqui: {that there was to them nothing of left), that they had nothing left. For reliqui, see §491. 4. non exspectandum (esse) sibi: {that it ought not to he waited by himself), that he ought not to wait. 5. dum with the subjunctive means until. 690. VOCABULARY con-siim5, -sumere, -siimpsi, -sumptum, literally, talce away altogether, i. e., use up, consume, destroy. de-m5nstr5, -are, -avi, -atum, point out, show. ex-specto, -are, -avi, -atum, literally, look out; regularly, wait, await. fortuna, -ae, f., fortune; in plural, property. nihil, n., indeclinable noun, nothing. possessio, possessionis, f., possession. solum, -i, n., soil. statud, statuere, statui, statiitum, literally, station; decide. 691. CAUSAL CLAUSES WITH QUOD, QUIA, QUONIAM Models 1. Reliquos Gallos praecedunt quod cum finitimis saepe contendunt, they surpass the other Gauls hecause they fight often with the neighbors. 2. Caesar milites laudavit quod fortiter pugnavissent, Caesar praised the soldiers hecause {as he said) they had fought bravely. LESSON LXXIX 245 Notes, a. Of the two subordinate verbs introduced by quod, the first is indicative; the second, subjunctive. h. The reason in the first is not quoted; the reason in the second ia quoted. 692. RULE. Quod, quia, quoniam are used with the indicative unless the reason is quoted. 693. CAUSAL CLAUSES WITH CUM Model His cum persuadere non possent, legates miserunt, since they were not able to persuade them, they sent am- bassadors. Notes, a. The verb of the subordinate clause, though subjunctive, is translated by an indicative. &. The rule for sequence applies here. 694. RULE. Cum, meaning since or because, is used with the subjunctive. DRILL EXERCISES 695. 1. Decline together the Latin for our children, the nearer province. 2. Give the forms of the present impera- tive of Conor and cdnsumo. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 696. 1. Noll adventum meum exspectare. 2. Mitten- turne ad fortunas consumendas? 3. Cum civitas ob eas res incitata esset, magistratus homines multos ex agrls cogere statuerunt. 4. Cum Germanos possessionibus nostris pro- hibuerlmus, totius Galliae plurimum poterimus. 5. Cum hanc fidem et ius iurandum dederltis, vobis obsides osten- dam. 6. Civitate incitata, arma plura comparari oportet. 7. VobIs demonstrabimus cur nos superare non possTtis. 246 BELLUM HELVETICUM 697. 1. Let us start out. 2. Can't you decide who I am? 3. We are more powerful because we fight with the armies of the Germans. 4, Since all their property had been destroyed, they decided to await Caesar's approach. 5. Because a beginning of war has been made, we shall collect more men. 6. Will you show me why he praises his children ? LESSON LXXX TEMPORAL CLAUSES WITH CUM 698. TEXT Fltimen^ est Arar, quod per fines Aeduorum et SequanS- rum in Rhodanum influit. Hoc flumen incredibill lenitate^ fluit ita ut oculTs in utram partem fluat^ itidicari non possit.^ Id Helvetii ratibus^ ac lintribus iunctls transibant. Flumen^ est Arar, quod per fines Aeduorum et Sequano- rum in Rhodanum Tnfluit incredibill lenitate^ ita ut oculis in utram partem fluat^ iudicari n5n possit.* Id Helvetii ratibus^ ac lintribus itinctis transibant. (198-201, Ch. 12.) NOTES 1. flumen est Arar: There is a river, the Saone. 2. See §627. 3. See §370. 4. See §437. 5. ratibus and lintribus: ablatives of means, not absolute. LESSON LXXX 247 699. VOCABULARY Arar, Araris, m., accusative Ararim, ablative Arari, the Saone, a river of southern Gaul tributary to the Khone. in-credibilis, -e, literally, unbelievable, incredible; extraordinary. iudico, -are, -avi, -atum, judge. lenitas, lenitatis, f., smoothness. linter, lintris, f., genitive plural lintrium, small boat, probably a "dug-out." oculus, -i, m., eye. uter, utra, utrum, genitive utrius, etc., interrogative adjective, which (of two). For declension see §283. What English words are derived from iudico, oculus? 700. CUM TEMPORAL Models 1. Helvetii contendunt cum suis finibus eos prohibent, the Helvetians fight when they are keeping them out of their territory. 2. Cum civitas ius suum exsequi conaretur, Orgetorix mortuus est, when the state was trying to assert its right, Orgetorix died. 3. Caesari cum id niintiatum esset , matiiravit ab urbe proficisci, when this had been reported to Caesar, he hastened to stai't out from the city. Notes, a. In Model 1, the main verb is principal and cum is used with the indicative; in Models 2 and 3, the main verbs are historical and cum is used with the subjunctive. h. The subjunctive is here translated by the indicative. c. The rule for sequence applies here. 701. RULE. When the main verb is historical, cum tern' poral takes the subjunctive; otherwise the indicative is regularly used. 248 BELLUM HELVETICUM DRILL EXEPCISES 702. 1. Give the synopsis of transeo in third person singular. 2. Decline vis, vir, incredibilis. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 703. 1. Mains oppidum; meliorum consiliorum. 2. Duo milia passuum iit. 3. Ad oppidum oppugnandum eodem die revertit. 4. Incredibilis numerus militum auxilio urbi missus erat. 5. Cum Caesar ab urbe profectus esset, Gena- vam venit. 6. Cum omnia ad profectionem comparata essent, ad ripam convenerunt. 7. Cum Caesar Roma ve- nerit, exercitus domum contendet. 8. Helvetii cum popu- lum Romanum non esse amicum iudicarent, per Sequanos exierunt. 704. 1. With extraordinary violence; with more sol- diers. 2. A river of the greatest smoothness; to excel in number of men. 3. He does this when he wishes. 4. He does this because (cum) he wishes. 5. When they were not able to persuade the Allobroges, they compelled them by force. 6. Can you decide in what direction (pars) you are going? 7. When you are willing (future perfect) to send me, I shall go. LESSON LXXXI NUMERALS 705. TEXT Helvetii tres iam partes^ copiarum id fltimen^ traduxe- rant. Quarta fere pars citra flumen Ararim reliqua^ erat. Ubi per exploratores Caesar de his rebus certior factus est, LESSON LXXXI 249 de tertia vigilia^ cum legionibus tribus e castrls profectus est. Ad earn partem pervenit quae nondum flumen transierat. Ubi per exploratores Caesar certior factus est tres^ iam partes- copiarum Helvetios id flumen^ traduxisse,* quartam fere partem eitra flumen Ararim reliquam^ esse, de tertia vigilia^ cum legionibus tribus e castrls profectus ad eam partem pervenit quae nondum flumen transierat. (201-206, Ch. 12.) NOTES 1. tres . . . traduxisse: that the Helvetians had already conveyed three parts (or fourths) of their troops across this river. 2. partes is object of the verb and flumen is accusative governed by the preposition in the verb. 3. left. 4. Connect with esse by et (supplied). 5. de tertia vigilia: in the third watch. 706. VOCABULARY castra, -orum, n., plural only, a (fortified) camp. citra, preposition with ace, on this side of. explorator, exploratoris, m., literally, one who finds out; regularly, scout. quartus, -a, -um, ordinal (numeral) adjective, fourth. vigilia, -ae, f., watch, one of the four equal divisions into which the Eomans divided the time between sunset and sunrise. 707. NUMERALS Numeral adjectives are of three classes: 1. Cardinals, answering the question ''How many?" as: one, two, etc. 2. Ordinals, answering the question ^^ Which in order f as : first, second, etc. 3. Distributives, answering the question ''How many each?" as : one each, two each, etc. 250 BELLUM HELVETICUM 708. Learn the following; Cardinals Ordinals 1. tinus, -a, -um 11. undecim 1st. primus, -a, -um 2. duo, -ae, -o 12. duodecim 2nd. secundus, -a, -um 3. tres, tria 13. tredecim 3rd. tertius, -a, -um 4. quattuor 14. quattuordecim 4th. quartus, -a, -um 5. quinque 15. quindecim 5th. quintus, -a, -um 6. sex 16. sedecim 6th. sextus, -a, -um 7. septem 17. septendecim 7th. Septimus, -a, -um 8. octo 18. duodeviginti 8th. octavus, -a, -um 9. novem 19. undeviginti 9th. nonus, -a, -um 10. decern 20. 21. (decern novem) viginti unus et viginti (viginti unus) 10th. decimus, -a, -um Distributives 1 each, singuli, -ae, -a 2 each, bini. -ae, a 3 each, temi (trini). -ae, -a 4 each, quaterni, -ae. -a • 5 each, quini, 6 each, seni. -ae, -a -ae, -a Notes, a. Study (App. 47) the formation of the multiples of ten and of a hundred. Notice that the multiples of ten above twenty end in -inta, and the hundreds above one hundred end in -enti, -ae, -a. b. Of the cardinals, unus, duo, tres, all the hundreds (except centum) and milia (plural of mille) are declinable. See §§96, 106, 284, 505. The hundreds are declined like the plural of longus. c. Notice that mille in the singular is indeclinable, has two I's, and is usually an adjective, as: mille passus, a thousand 'paces. In the plural, milia is declinable, has one 1 (usually), and is a noun, as: duo milia passuum, two thousands of paces. d. The ordinals are declined like longus; the distributives like the plural of longus. DRILL EXERCISES 709. Decline together maior pars; omnis civitas; pater noster. LESSON LXXXII 251 TRANSLATION EXERCISES 710. 1. Duobus bellTs. 2. Decern flumina. 3. Ab quln- que mercatoribus. 4. Tertia vigilia. 5. Binae naves. 6. Centum partium. 7. Quarto die. 8. Septuaginta homines. 9. Septingenti homines. 10, Cum terms mllitibus. 11. Aedui itidicare non poterant quas copias Helvetii flumen traduxissent. 12. Duos exploratores misit qui locum castris deligerent. 13. Diviciacus Caesari resistere non conabitur quod est ei amicus. 711. 1. By two roads. 2. Two soldiers each. 3. With the tenth legion. 4. One thousand paces. 5. Eight thou- sand paces. 6. Of the third watch. 7. Two eyes (ace). 8. In the fourth month. 9. He awaited them for six days. 10. Two villages and three towns were being set-on-fire when I was with the army. 11. The others w^ere able to send men to fortify the camp. 12. Caesar led his soldiers across the river w^hich w^as nearest the town. 13. The scout 's memory of these things was extraordinary. LESSON LXXXII CONJUGATION OF FERO DECLENSION OF DEUS 712. TEXT Hos Helvetios impeditos et inopinantes Caesar aggressus est et magnam partem eorum concidit. ReliquI sese fugae^ mandarunt^ atque in proximas silvas^ abdiderunt. Is pagus appellabatur Tigurlnus;* nam omnis civitas Helvetia in quattuor pagos dlvisa^ est. Hic pagus unus patrum nostro- rum memoria'^ domo exierat atque L. Cassium consulem interfecerat et eius exercitum sub iugum miserat. 252 BELLUM IIELVETICUM Eos impeditos et inopinantes aggressus magnam partem eorum concidit; reliqui sese fugae^ mandarunt- atque in proximas silvas^ abdiderunt. Is pagus appellabatur Tiguri- nus;* nam omnis civitas Helvetia in quattuor pagos dlvTsa^ est. Hie pagus unus, cum domo exisset^ patrum nostrorum memorial L. Cassium consulem interfecerat et eius exer- citum sub iugum miserat. (206-213, Ch. 12.) NOTES 1. See §53. 2. Shortened form of mandaverunt. See §503, Note 1. 3. Accusative, because motion is implied in abdiderunt. 4. See §85. 5. Here an adjective. 6. See §701. 7. See §320. 713. VOCABULARY ab-dd, -dere, -didi, -ditum [do, dare, dedi, datum, give], literally, put away; regularly, conceal, hide (transitive), se abdere, literally, conceal one's self, i.e., hide (intransitive), withdraw. ag-gredior, ag-gredi, ag-gressus sum, literally, go toward, ''go for"; regularly, attack. con-cido, -cidere, -cidi, -cisum [con, intensive, caedo, cut], cut to pieces, slay. in-opinans, -opinantis, adjective, literally, not expecting, i. e., unaware; when modifying a subject or an object, it may be translated by the adverb unawares, unexpectedly. inter-ficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum [facio, facere, feci, factum, do,ma7ce], literally, male away with; regularly. Mil. mando, -are, -avi, -atum, literally, put into the hands, i. e., entrust; se fugae mandare, take to flight, flee. nam, coordinate conjunction, for. pagus, -i, m., canton, district. Tigurinus, -i, m., Tigurinus, the name of a Helvetian canton. 714. LESSON LXXXU CONJUGATION OT FERO Fero, ferre, tuli, latum, lear ACTIVE VOICE 253 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Pres. fero, fers, fert feram ferimus. fertis, ferunt Imp. ferebam ferrem Fut. feram Ferf. tuli tulerim Plup. tuleram tulissem Fut. Ferf. tulero IMPERATIVE INFINITIVES PARTICIPLES Fresent Fres. ferre Fres. ferens Snd Fers. f er ferte Ferf. tulisse Fut. laturus Fut. laturus esse GERUND • ferendi, etc. PASSIVE VOICE INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Fres. feror, ferris, fertur ferar ferimur. ferimini, feruntur Imp. ferebar ferrer Fut. ferar Ferf. latus sum latus Sim Flup. latus eram latus essem Fut. Ferf. latus ero IMPERATIVE INFINITIVES PARTICIPLES Fresent Fres. ferri Ferf. latus Snd Fers. ferre, ferimini Ferf. latus esse (gerundive) Fut. latum iri Fut. ferendus 254 BELLUM HELVETICUM 715. DECLENSION OF DEUS SIXOITLAR PLURAL Nom. deus dii, di Gen. dei deoruiu Dat. deo diis, dis Ace. deum deos Voc. deus dii, di Abl. deo diis, dis Notice that, though deus is a noun of the second declension ending in -us, it has a vocative singular like the nominative. DRILL EXERCISES 716. 1. Give synopsis of facio in third person plural, with all infinitives and participles. 2. Give synopsis of possum in second person plural. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 717. 1. Fers. 2. Tulerant. 3. Feremus. 4. Fiebat. 5. Factum est. 6. Flunt. 7. Tulisse. 8. Ferris. 9. Fereris. 10. Fieri. 11. Ferar. 12. Ferimini. 13. Aggredi poteras. 14. Hae res fieri possunt. 15. Nam eis persuadebo ne eant. 16. Cum reliqui interfecti essent, homines huius pagi fugae se mandaverunt. 17. Quattuor mllibus hominum concisis, complures Helvetii in montes se abdiderunt. 718. 1. They are made. 2. They are carried. 3. You will go. 4. It will be made. 5. You (sing.) will be car- ried. 6. You (plur.) carry. 7. They go. 8. They were made. 9. We are able. 10. "Will you (sing.) be able to persuade them to go? 11. I fear those four legions will be cut to pieces. 12. For they attacked and killed all the men of that canton. 13. "When will you withdraw into the forest ? LESSON LXXXIII 255 LESSON LXXXIII PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS DATIVE OF AGENT 719. TEXT Ea pars cTvitatis Helvetiae, quae pagus Tigurinus appel- labatur, insignem calamitatem populo^ Romano intulerat. Ita is pagus sive casu^ sive c5nsilio deorum iinmortalium prmceps* poenas persolvit. Qua in re Caesar non solum ptiblicas sed etiam privatas initirias ultus est. Nam Tigu- rini avum Caesaris soceri, L. Pisonis, interfeeerant eodem proelio quo Cassium interfeeerant. L. Pisonis avus erat L. Piso legatus. Ita sTve casu^ sTve consilio deorum immortalium, quae pars- cTvitatis Helvetiae Insignem calamitatem populo^ Ro- mano intulerat, ea princeps^ poenas persolvit. Qua in re Caesar non solum publicas sed etiam privatas iniurias ultus est, quod^ eius soceri L. Pisonis avum, L. Pisonem legatum, Tigurlnl eodem proelio quo Cassium interfeeerant. (213- 219, Ch. 12.) NOTES 1. casu and c5nsilid: see §611. 2. quae pars . . . ea: literally, what part had inflicted . . . that (part) paid, etc., i. e., that part which had inflicted . . . paid. 3. populo: see §537. 4. princeps . . . persolvit: flrst paid the penalty. Observe that the adjective princeps has here the force of an adverb. 5. An English order from quod eius soceri would be: quod Tigu- rini eodem proelio quo (interfeeerant) Cassium interfeeerant L. Pisonem legatum, avum L. Pisonis eius (i. e., Caesaris) soceri. 256 BELLUM IIELVETICUM There were two men named Lucius Piso, one the grandfather of the other. Caesar had married as his fourth wife Calpurnia, a daughter of the younger Lucius Piso. 720. VOCABULARY avus, -i, m., grandfather. calamitas, calamitatis, f., disaster, defeat. casus, -us, m. [cado, fall], literally, a falling; regularly, chance. im-mortalis, -e [in, not, mors, death], immortal. in-fero, in-ferre, in-tuli, il-latum, literally, dring upon; with calamita- tem, inflict. in-signis, -e, marJced. per-solvo, -solvere, -solvi, -solutum, literally, release completely; pay (in full). publicus, -a, -um, public. sed, coordinate conjunction, hut. sive, cocrdinate conjunction, or if: sive . . . sive, either . . . or. socer, soceri, m., father-in-law. solum, adverb, only, non solum . . . sed etiam, not only . . . hut also, ulciscor, ulciscl, ultus sum, avenge. 721. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS There are two Periphrastic Conjugations. 1. a. The first periphrastic conjugation is the future active participle + some form of sum, as : lauda- turus {going-to-praise) -\- est {he is)=he is going to praise. h. It is always active and has an idea of futurity or intention. c. The present infinitive of the first periphrastic con- jugation is the same in form and meaning as the regular future active infinitive. d. The subjunctive of the first periphrastic conju- gation is used where a future or future perfect subjunctive active of the ordinary conjugations is wanted. LESSON LXXXIII 257 2. a. The second periphrastic conjugation is the future passive participle (gerundive) + some form of sum, as: laudandus {to-he-praised) + est {he is) = he is to-he-praised, he must {ought to, deserves to, has to) be praised, h. It is always passive and has generally not so much an idea of futurity or intention, as of ohligation, necessity, or propriety. 722. FIRST (OR ACTIVE) PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION INDICATIVE Pres. laudaturus sum, I am going-to-praise Impf. laudaturus eram, / was going-to-praise Fut. laudaturus ero, I shall he going-to-praise Perf. laudaturus fui, I was, or have been, going -to -praise Plu. laudaturus fueram, I 'had been going-to-praise Fut. Perf. laudaturus fuero, I shall have been going-to-praise SUBJUNCTIVE INFINITIVES Pres. laudaturus sim Pres. laudaturus esse, to be going-to- Impf. laudaturus essem praise Perf. laudaturus fuerim Perf. laudaturus fuisse, to have been Plu. laudaturus fuissem going-to-praise 723. Pres. moniturus sum, I am going -to -advise ducturus sum, I am gcing-to-lead auditurus sum, I am going-to-hear capturus sum, I am going-to-taTce Impf. moniturus eram, I was going-to-advise etc. 258 BELLUM HELVETICUM 724. SECOND (OR PASSIVE) PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION INDICATR^E Pres. laudandus sum, I am to he, have to he, must he praised Impf. laudandus eram, I ivos to he, had to he, praised Fut. laudandus ero, I shall have to he, shall deserve to he, praised Perf. laudandus fui, I was to he, had to he, praised Plu. laudandus fueram, I had deserved to he praised Fut. Perf. laudandus fuero, I shall have deserved to he praised SUBJUNCTIVE INFINITIVES Pres. laudandus sim Pres. laudandus esse, to deserve to he Impf. laudandus essem praised Perf. laudandus fuerim Perf. laudandus fuisse, to have Plu. laudandus fuissem deserved to he praised 725. Pres. monendus sum, I am to he, must he, advised ducendus sum, I am to he, must he, led audiendus sum, I am to he, must he, heard capiendus sum," I am to he, must he, taken Impf. monendus eram, I was to he, had to he, advised etc. 726. DATIVE OF AGENT Models 1. Caesari omnia erant facienda, everything had to-he-done hy Caesar . 2. Pugnandum erat Caesari, it {the battle) had to-be- fought by Caesar . Notes, a. Caesari here denotes the person who had something to do, and answers the question "By whom?" It is called the dative of agent. Compare with the ablative of agent, §306. h. Intransitive verbs in this conjugation must be used impersonally. See Model 2. LESSON LXXXIV 259 727. RULE. The dative is used with the second (passive) periphrastic conjugation to denote the person who has the thing to do. DRILL EXERCISES 728. 1. Decline deus immortalis ; quae pars. 2. Give synopsis of fero in third person singular. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 729. 1. Nonne exspectattirus es? 2. Exspectandum est Caesari. 3. Quid secum laturl erant ? 4. Orgetorix ipse suae civitatis imperium obtenttirus erat. 5. Sed quattuor pag5s Helvetiae civitatis uno tempore casti aggressi sumus. 6. Nonne illam calamitatem msignem ulturus es ? 7. Non solum public! sed etiam privati fines sunt vastandT. 730. 1. The Helvetians were going-to-assault Noreia. 2. We are going-to-await the man who has been placed-in- command of the town. 3. He asked not only what the lieu- tenant had done but also what he was going-to-do. 4. The gods surpass men in influence. .5. The chance of a public disaster ought not to-be-awaited by you. 6. Did he avenge that extraordinary private wrong? LESSON LXXXIV SUPINES VARIOUS WAYS OF EXPRESSING PURPOSE 731. TEXT Hoc proelio facto Caesar reliquas copias Helvetiorum con- sequi vult. Itaque pontem in^ Arari faciendum curat atque ita exercituro tradticit Helvetii ilium id uno die fecisse in- 260 BELLUM HELVETICUM tellegebant. Helvetii id, ut^ fltimen transirent, diebus vigint! aegerrime confecerant. Repentino eius adventu commoti legates ad eum mittunt. Cuius legationis Divico princeps fuit, qui bello Cassiano dux Helvetiorum fuerat. Hoc proelio facto, reliquas c5pias Helvetiorum ut consequi posset, pontem in^ Arari faciendum curat atque ita exerci- tum traducit. Helvetii repentino eius adventu commoti, cum^ id quod ipsi diebus vTginti aegerrime confecerant, ut^ fltimen transirent, illum'^ uno die fecisse intellegerent, le- gates ad eum mittunt ; cuius legationis Divico princeps fuit, qui bello Cassiano dux Helvetiorum fuerat. (220-227, Ch. 13.) NOTES 1. over. 2. cum . . . intellegerent: English order, cum intellegerent ilium fecisse uno die id quod, etc. 3. ut flumen transirent: in apposition with id; translate, (namely) [that they] cross the river. See §414. 4. Eefers to Caesar. 732. VOCABULARY aegre, adverb, comparative aegrius, superlative aegerrime [aeger], hardly; with difficulty; superlative, with the greatest difficulty. Cassianus, -a, -um [Cassius], relating to Cassius; bellum Cassianum, the war with Cassius. com-moveo, -movere, -movi, -motum [con, intensive], literally, move strongly; regularly, alarm. c6n-sequor, -sequi, -seciitus sum [con, intensive], literally, follow closely, i. e., pursue, overtake. euro, -are, -avi, -atum, literally, care for; Avith an object modified by gerundive, cause. Divico, Diviconis, m., Divico, a Helvetian chief, dux, ducis, m. orf. [diico, lead], leader. repentinus, -a, -um, unexpected. What are the meanings of commotion, consecutive? LESSON LXXXIV 261 733. PURPOSE WITH GERUND AND GERUNDIVE Models ^ nir-i-x- 'J.J. ^ r ad puffnandum. ] He will send soldiers 1. Milites mittet ^ ,- - > ^ ^ is I pugnandi causa. J to fight. ad urbem oppugnandam. 2. Milites mittet -<| urbem oppugnandi causa, urbis oppugnandae causa. He will send soldiers to attack the city. Note. Notice that in Model 2 either the gerund or the gerundive is used in the genitive case; after a preposition, tlie gerund is used with intransitive verbs and the gerundive with transitive. See §685. 734. SUPINES The supine is a verbal noun of the fourth declension. It has two forms: the accusative in -um (which is given as the fourth principal part of verbs) and the ablative in -ti. 735. The following are the supines of the model verbs : Ace. laudatum monitum ductum auditum captum Ahl. laudatu monitu ductu auditu captu 736. SUPINE IN -UM i\IODEL Legates ad Caesarem mittunt auxilium rogatum, they send ambassadors to Caesar to ask aid. Notes, a. The supine rogatum = qui (or ut) rogent. b. The main verb mittunt implies motion. 737. RULE. The accusative of the supine is used with verbs of motion to express purpose. 262 BELLUM HELVETICUM 738. SUPINE IN -I? Model Facile factu est, it is easy (in-the-doing) to do . 739. RULE. The ablative of the supine is used with adjectives as an ablative of specification. 740. VARIOUS WAYS OF EXPRESSING PURPOSE Purpose may be expressed in five ways. The sentence he will send soldiers to attack the city, may be written as follows: ut (or qui) urbem oppugnent. ut (ne) or a relative with the subjunctive. Milites mittet ad urbem oppugnandam. Gerundive with ad. urbem oppugnandi causa. Gerund with causa, urbis oppugnandae causa. Gerundive with causa. urbem oppugnatum. Supine. Notice that the infinitive is not used in Latin to express purpose. DRILL EXERCISES 741. Give the supines of statuo, toUo, fero, eo, sequor. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 742. 1. Dux Helvetiorum copias aegre consequetur. 2. Aedui dixerunt se Romam auxilii rogandl causa legatos missuros esse. 3. Romam auxilium ferendum ctiraverunt. 4. LegatI cTvitatum viginti venerunt Caesarem visum. 5. Propter amlcitiam Aeduorum milites Caesari ad vim hos- tium prohibendam mittendi sunt. 6. Sed initium miiniendi fecerunt cum repentmo Caesaris adventu commoti essent. TENTH REVIEW LESSON 263 743. [Write the first three sentences in as many ways as possible.] 1. The Aeduans sent men to overtake the leader. 2. He went to see the city. 3. Ambassadors came to seek peace. 4. They did not wish to ask Caesar why his sudden arrival alarmed the Helvetians. 5. With difficulty he caused twenty men to-be-sent (as) hostages. 6. Will the gods bring us help? TENTH EEVIEW LESSON 744. Give an account of the events narrated in Chapters XI, Xn, and XHI (seven lines), and then translate those chapters. 745. Memory Work. a. Give the present imperative of each of the model verbs and of sum, e5, fero (§669). &. Give the gerund and the gerundive of each of the model verbs (§§681, 682). c. Give the first twenty-one cardinals; the first ten ordi- nals ; the first six distributives. What is the ending of the tens above viginti? of the hundreds above centum (§709) ? d. Give the conjugation in the present indicative active and passive of fero; also the synopsis in the third person singular (§714). e. Give the synopsis of the first periphrastic conjugation of dtico in the third person plural; of the second peri- phrastic of audio in the third person singular (§§722-725). /. Give the supines of the model verbs (§735). 264 BELLUM HELVETICUM 746. Latin-English Vocabulary. Give the memoranda of the nouns; the entire nominative and comparison of the adjectives; the principal parts of the verbs ; and the meanings of all the words. abdd euro iudico publicus aegre defends liberi repentinus aggredior demonstrd mandd sed calamitas dux mereor servitus castra explorator nam solum casus expugno necessarius status commoveo exspecto nihil traducS concido fortuna non s51um — ulciscor coiisanguineus incredibilis sed etiam uter consequor infero paene vasts conspectus insignis pagus vigilia consumo interfici5 populor 747. English-Latin Vocabulary. Give the first form of the Latin for each of the following : alarm consume judge public almost cut to pieces kill pursue attack (verb) decide kinsman ravage avenge defeat (noun) lay waste scout await defend leader show bring upon deserve lead across sight but disaster marked slavery camp entrust not only — take by storm canton extraordinary but also unexpected cause (verb) for nothing use up chance fortune only watch (noun) children hardly overtake which (of two) close friend hide point out with difficulty conceal inflict property LESSON LXXXV 265 748. Syntax. Commands: How is a command in the first person ex- pressed? What is it called? How is a command in the second person expressed? How is its negative expressed? How is a command in the third person expressed ? What is it called? Name the characteristics of the gerund ; of the gerundive. When must the gerundive be used rather than the gerund? What is expressed by causa and ad with the gerund or gerundive ? Give the rule for cum causal; for cum temporal. Contrast the periphrastic conjugations in form; in mean- ing. Give the rule for dative of agent; contrast it with the ablative of agent. 749. Composition. Translate in five ways the following sentence : They went to fortify the town. Make up a short English sentence as an example of each of the following: command; use of gerundive; cum tem- poral ; cum causal ; second periphrastic conjugation ; dative of agent. Translate those sentences into Latin. LESSON LXXXV INDIRECT DISCOURSE To the teacher: It is thought that, with the completion of the work to this point, all the subjects that can be studied with profit during the first year and all that are necessary for beginning the second year's work have been covered. The remainder of the book is added: 266 BELLUM IIELVETICUM 1st. For those teachers who want more translation. These may omit Lessons 85-90, reading to their classes the translation of the intervening text, and pass immediately to the translation of Chapters 15-29, which, with the sentences under each, serve to apply and review the principles already taught. 2nd. For those teachers who want more drill in forms and syntax. These may take up the lessons in order and then proceed with the translation of Chapters 15-29. INDIRECT DISCOURSE 750. Review: Infinitive in Indirect Discourse, §522. Sequence of Tenses, §370. 751. Models 1. Hoc itinere venimus quod nuUam aliam viam habemus. 2. Dicunt se hoc itinere venire quod niillam aliam viam habeant. 3. Dixerunt se hoc itinere venire quod nullam aliam viam haberent. Translation 1. We are commg by this road because we have no other way. 2. They say that they are coming by this road because they have no other way. 3. They say that they were coming by this road because they had no other way. Notes. When direct discourse is changed to indirect, notice that: a. The main verb of the direct discourse becomes in the indirect discourse an infinitive with subject accusative. See §520. h. The tense of the infinitive is not influenced by that of the introductory verb, but corresponds to that of the direct discourse. c. The subordinate verb becomes (or remains) subjunctive, the tense depending on the rule for sequence of tenses. If either the LESSON LXXXV 267 introductory verb or the main verb of the direct discourse is a past tense, the subordinate verb of the indirect discourse is a historical tense. d. The changes in person and pronouns are the same as in English. 752. RULE. In indirect discourse wain clauses containing a statement require the infinitive with subject accusative; subordinate verbs require the subjunctive, 753. Remember that: a. Latin indirect statements never have an introductory word, like that in English; always have their main verbs in the infinitive. h. Latin indirect questions always have an interrogative as an introductory word; always have their main verbs in the subjunctive. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 754. 1. Dixerunt hunc pagum qui esset in civitate Hel- vetia appellarl Tigurinum. 2. Caesar ab Aeduls certior fac- tus est eos vim hostium prohibere velle qui iter in fines eorum fecissent. 3. Enuntiatur Caesarem Labienum legion! praeficere noluisse quae in Gallia hiemaret. 4. Rogavit cur Ilelvetii ea spe deiecti essent. 5. Caesar non intellexit cur homines a maleficio temperavissent. 6. Consul putavit mllites in hiberna reversuros esse cum Caesar pervenisset. 755. 1. I fear that the scouts will not cross the river. 2. Translate 1 after dixit. 3. The children are being led away because the enemy are coming. 4. Translate 3 after intellego. 5. I shall go when I am able (future tense). 6. Translate 5 after respondit. 7. They say that they are willing to choose Orgetorix because he has been friendly to your state. 268 BELLUM HELVETICUM LESSON LXXXVI CONDITIONS TEXT (It will be found that pupils more readily understand Chapters XIII and XIV if the direct discourse is translated and discussed first; then the indirect may be translated and the differences pointed out.) 756. DIRECT FORM Si pacem popnlus Romanus cum Helvetiis^ faciet (inquit Divico), in earn partem^ ibunt atque ibi erunt^ Helvetii ubi eos tu constitueris atque esse volueris: sin* bello persequi perseverabis, reminiscere^ et^ veteris incommodr populi R5- mani et pristinae virtutis Helvetiorum. Quod^ improviso tinum pagum^ adortus es, cum ei qui fltimen transierant suls^° auxilium ferre non possent/^ noli^^ ob earn rem aut tuae magnopere virtuti tribuere aut nos despicere. (227- 235, Ch. 13.) NOTES 1. In the direct discourse, n5biscum, ibimus, and erimus might be used instead of cum Helvetiis, ibunt, and erunt Helvetii. There is often a similar choice, but only one form will be printed. 2. i. e., of Gaul. 3. will stay. 4. sin . . . perseverabis: but if you (Caesar) continue to follow them (the Helvetians) up with war. 5. reminiscere: second person singular imperative. 6. et . . . et: both . . . and. 7. incommodi, virtutis: verbs of remembering and forgetting may govern a genitive which is translated as a direct object. 8. as to the fact that, whereas. 9. iinum pagum: i.e., the Tigurini. LESSON LXXXVI 26^ 10. to their comrades. 11. See §693. 12. nSn . . . tribuere aut . . . despicere: do not ascribe it especially to your bravery or despise us. For the use of noli, see §673, 2. 757. VOCABULARY ad-orior, -oriri, -ortus sum, literally, rise against; attacTc. ago, agere, egi, actum, literally, put in motion, drive; discuss, talk. de-spicio, -spicere, -spexi, -spectum, literally, looTc down on; despise. improviso, adverb, not compared, unexpectedly. in-commodus, -a, -um, inconvenient. Neuter used as a substantive, literally, an inconvenience ; disaster. per-sequor, -sequi, -secutus sum, literally, follow thoroughly, i. e., fol- low up. per-severo, -are, -avi, -atum, continue. pristinus, -a, -um [prior, former'], former. re-miniscor, -minisci, , remember. sin, subordinate conjunction, but if. tribuo, tribuere, tribui, tributum, assign (it). vetus, veteris, adjective, comparative vetustior, superlative veterrimus, literally, old; former. For declension see App. 35. What are the meanings of persecute, persevere, pristine, reminiscences, veteran, improvise? 758. INDIRECT FORM Is ita cum Caesare egit : Si paeem populus Romanus cum Helvetiis faceret,^ in earn partem ituros- atque ibi futures Helvetios ubi eos Caesar constituisset atque esse voluisset; sin bello persequi perseveraret, reminlsceretur^ et veteris incommodi populi Roman! et pristinae virttitis Helvetiorum. Quod improviso unum pagum adortus esset, cum el qui flumen translssent suis auxilium ferre non possent, ne* ob eam rem aut suae magnopere virtuti tribueret aut ipsos despiceret. (227-235, Ch. 13.) 270 BELLUM HELVETICUM NOTES 1. faceret, constituisset, voluisset, perseveraret: see §371. 2. ituros, futures, Helvetios: see §§521,522. 3. A verb in indirect discourse expressing a command is in the sub- junctive. 4. ne . . . tribueret aut . . . despiceret: that he should not ascribe it, etc., or despise them (the Helvetians). See Note 3, above. 759. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES A conditional sentence is complex, having two essential clauses, condition and conclusion ; e. g., if he asks, I reply. The condition is introduced in Latin by the subordinate conjunctions : si, if; nisi, if not, unless; sin, but if. 760. Conditional sentences are divided into three classes as regards time: Present. Past. Future. They are divided into two classes as regards meaning: (1) Indicative conditions, which include both as- sumed and future more vivid; and (2) Subjunctive conditions, which include contrary to fact and future less vivid. 761. INDICATIVE CONDITIONS Indicative conditions are subdivided into two classes as regards meaning: A. Assumed. B. Future More Vivid. LESSON LXXXVI 271 762. A. Assumed Conditions. Models 1. Present: si rogat, responded; if he asks, I reply. 2. Past: si J - .^' ,- ' lif he asked, I replied. I^rogavit, respondi; J Note. Nothing is assumed as to the actual facts in these condi- tions. But if the conditions are assumed as true, the conclusions are also assumed as true. 763. B. Future More Vivid Conditions, Model Future: si | J^Serit, }>^e^P<>"dSb6; . . pie shall ask, asks, \j -l jj j ' Yhe shall have asked, j Note. This form of condition is of practically the same nature as assumed conditions, but it refers to the future and vividly expresses confidence in the fulfillment of the condition. 764. RULE, Assumed and more vivid future conditional sentences have both verbs in the indicative. 765. 1. Si quid volent, revertentur. 2. Eos prohibere poterat, si se invito transire conabantur. 3. Si vim facere conabuntur, Caesar eos prohibebit. 4. Si id fit, est pericu- lum. 5. Si hostes impeditos improviso aggressi sunt, mag- nani partem eorum conciderunt. 6. Nisi nobiscum de pace ages, magno dolore afficiar. 7. Si vos adoriri volent, prls- tina virtute pugnabunt. 8. Despicisne nos propter veterem calamitatem nostram? 272 BELLUM HELVETICUM 766. 1. If he does (fut) not talk with me about the former wrongs, I shall despise him. 2. If Divico talked thus with Caesar, the ambassador announced it. 3. But if we (shall) attack them suddenly, they will go into Gaul. 4. If I am able to persuade my old friends, (there) is no danger. 5. If the Helvetians have decided to go from their state, they have already started out. 6. If the depth of the river was great, the enemy were not willing to cross. 7. Caesar said he would come when he wished. LESSON LXXXVII CONDITIONS-Continued 767. TEXT DIRECT FORM Nos^ ita a patribus- maioribusque nostris didicimus ut magis virtute contendamus quam dolo aut msidiis nitamur. Quare nolP committere ut hic locus ubi constitimus ex calami- tate populi Roman! et internecione exercitus nomen capiat aut memoriam prodat . (Caesar respondit) : Eo* mihi minus^ dubitationis® datur, quod eas res quas vos commemoravistis memoria teneo, atque'^ eo^ gravius fero quo minus merito^ populi Roman! acciderunt. (235-2447Chs. 13 and 14:) NOTES 1. nos . . . nitamur: we have so learned from our fathers and ancestors that we fight by (means of) bravery rather than depend on deceit or ambuscades. LESSON LXXXVII 273 2. patribus maioribusque: see §609. 3. noli . . . prodat = (literally) do not allow that this place where vje have taken our stand shall take its name from the disaster of the Eoman people and the destruction of the army or hand down the memory (of such a disaster and destruction); (freely) do not allow this place where, etc., to take, etc. 4. Ablative of cause, explained by the following quod clause. 5. Used substantively, subject of datur. 6. minus d'ubitationis; the less hesitation : see §491. 7. atque . . . acciderunt: (literally) and I bear (it) more heavily by that amount by which they (these things) did not happen by the fault of the Eoman people; (freely) I am more displeased in just the same proportion as they have not happened through the fault of the Eoman people. 8. eo, quo: see §620. 9. See §456, Note 2. 768. VOCABULARY ac-cido, ac-cidere, ac-cidi, , literally, fall to (any one); regu- larly, befall, happen. com-memoro, are, -avi, -atum, literally, call to mind, i. e., mention. com-mitto, -mittere, -misi, -missum [con, together], literally, send together; allow, permit. c6n-sist6, c6n-sistere, con-stiti, , literally, stand together; take one's stand, halt. disco, discere, didici, , learn. dolus, -i, m., deceit. dubitatio, dubitationis, f., hesitation. graviter, adverb, literally, heavily; gravius ferre, bear more heavily, i. e., be more displeased. insidiae, -arum, f., ambuscades. internecid, interneci5nis, f., destruction. maior, maius (comparative of magnus, great), greater; maior (natu understood), greater as to birth, i.e., older; plural as a substantive, ancestors. meritum, -i, n. [mereor, deserve], desert. nitor, niti, nisus or nixus sum, literally, lean, rest; rely. nomen, nominis, n., 7iame. pro-do, pro-dere, pro-didi, pro-ditum [do, dare, dedi, datum, give], literally, give forth; hand down (to future generations). 274 BELLUM IIELVETICUM Give the derivations and meanings of insidious, majority, accident, commemorate, disciple. 769. INDIRECT FORM Se ita a patribus maioribusque suis didicisse nt magis virtute contenderent quam dolo aut insidiis niterentur. Quare ne committeret^ ut is locus ubi constitissent^ ex calamitate populi Roman! et intemecione exercittis nomen caperet^ aut memoriam proderet. His Caesar ita respondit : Eo sibi miiius dubitationis dari, quod eas res quas legati Helvetii commemorassent* memoria teneret, atque eo gravius ferre^ quo minus merito populi Roman! accidissent. (235-244, Chs. 13 and 14.) NOTES 1. See §758, Note 3. 2. See §751, Note c. 3. caperet, proderet: see §371. 4. commemorassent, accidissent: see §371. 5. Supply se (Caesar) as subject. 770. SUBJUNCTIVE CONDITIONS Subjunctive conditions are subdivided into two classes as regards meaning: A. Contrary to Fact. B. Less Vivid Future. 771. A. Contrary to Fact Conditions. Models 1. Present: si rogaret, responderem ; if he were asking (now), I should he replying (now). LESSON LXXXVII 275 2. Past: si rogavisset, respondissem ; if he had asked, I should have replied. Notes, a. In Model 1, notice that: the condition is evidently untrue, hence the conclusion is untrue; the imperfect subjunctive is used in both clauses. h. This is called a present contrary to fact condition. c. In Model 2, notice that: the condition is evidently untrue, hence the conclusion is untrue; the pluperfect subjunctive is used in both clauses. d. This is called a past contrary to fact condition. 772. RULE. Contrary to fact conditional sentences have both verbs in the imperfect subjunctive, if referring to present time; in the pluperfect subjunctive, if referring to past time. 773. B. Future Less Vivid Conditions. Model Future: si roget, respondeam ; if he should ask, I should reply. Notes, a. In the model, notice that: the condition is stated less vividly than the other future condition, or as merely possible, the present subjunctive is used in both clauses, the English auxiliaries are should and would. b. This is called a future less vivid condition. c. Compare it with the indicative future more vivid condition, §763. 774. RULE. Less vivid future conditional sentences have both verbs in the present (or perfect) subjunctive. 276 BELLUM HELVETICUM 775. SUMMARY OF CONDITIONS I. Indicative: a. Assumed; 1. Present, use the present indicative. 2. Past, use a past tense of the indicative. h. More Vivid Future; use the future or future perfect indicative. II. Subjunctive : a. Contrary to Fact; 1. Present, use the imperfect subjunctive. 2. Past, use the pluperfect subjunctive. b. Less Vivid Future ; use the present (or perfect) subjunctive. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 776. 1. Nisi exercitus constitisset, Helvetios non super- avisset. 2. Si Ilelvetil insidiis non nitantur, nobis resistere non possint. 3. Si Caesar id committat, aut fugae se man- dent aut interficiantur. 4. SI principes in hoc oppidum Gena- vam nomine revertantur, hostes eos c5nsequl conentur. 5. Si muro et fossa castra communire voluisset, civitas eum defendisset. C. Si mllites Labienum aggrederentur, se de- fenderet. 7. Gravius tulissem, nisi eae res accidissent. 777. 1. If I undertake a matter (res), I complete it. 2. If I undertook a matter, I completed it. 3. If I under- take (future) a matter, I shall complete it. 4. If I should undertake a matter, I should complete it. 5. If you were with Caesar, you would not wish to go home. 6. If the Aeduans had been able to defend their name, this would not have happened. 7. If you should allow this, I should be much displeased. 8. If you had depended on ambuscades, you would not have halted here. 9. I say that I shall go home if I am able. LESSON LXXXVIII 277 LESSON LXXXVIII WISHES TEXT 778. DIRECT FORM Qui sP alicuius initiriae sibi conscius^ fuissef, non fuit^ difficile cavere, sed eo* deceptus est, quod neque commissum^ a se intellegebat quare^ timeret, neque sine causa timendum^ putabat. Quod si veteris contumeliae^ oblivisci velit, num^ etiam recentium iniuriarum/^ quod eo invito" iter per pro- vinciam per vim temptavistis , quod Aeduos, quod Ambarros, quod Allobroges vexavistis, memoriam deponere potest? (244-251, Ch. 14.) NOTES 1. qui si: for if they, qui is the subject of fuisset, deceptus est, intellegebat, timeret, putabat, and refers to the Eoman people. 2. sibi conscius: literally, conscious to themselves; but English omits to themselves. 3. non fuit . . . cavere: it uonld not have heen difficult to be on their guard, fuit is indicative by exception. 4. See §611. 5. (aliquid) commissum (esse): that anything had been done. 6. quare timeret: on account of which they should be afraid. 7. timendum (esse) : the construction is impersonal, it was to be feared, but it is better to render the impersonal Latin verb by the personal construction: nor did they thinlc they ought to be afraid without reason. 8. See §756, Note 7. 9. See §595, c. 10. Objective genitive, modifying memoriam and explained by the quod clauses that follow: that you have attempted, etc., that you have troubled the Aeduans, etc. 11. 60 invito: see general vocabulary under invitus. 278 BELLUM HELVETICUM 779. VOCABULARY aliqui, aliqua, aliquod, genitive alicuius, dative alicui, etc., indefinite adjective, any. See App. 62, caveo, cavere, cavi, cautum, he on one's guard. con-scius, -a, -um, conscious, aware. contumelia, -ae, f., insult, afront. de-cipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum [capio, capere, cepi, captum, talce], literally, take away (one's security), i.e., deceive, '^ talce in." de-pono, -ponere, -posui, -positum, literally, place down, i. e., lay aside. obliviscor, oblivisci, olDlitus sum, forget. recens, recentis, adjective, recent. tempts, -are, -avi, -atum, try, attempt. utinam, adverb, may, I icish that, I hope that, would that. vexo, -are, -avi, -atum, trouble, harass. 780. INDIRECT FORM Qui SI alicuius iniuriae sibi conscius fuisset, non fuisse difficile cavere; sed eo deceptum, quod neque commissum a se intellegeret quare timeret, neque sine causa timendum putaret. Quod si veteris contumeliae oblivisci vellet,^ num etiam recentium initiriarum, quod eo invito iter per pro- vinciam per vim temptassent, quod Aeduos, quod Ambar- ros, quod Allobroges vexassent, memoriam deponere posse? (244-251, Ch. 14.) NOTE 1. Not a contrary to fact condition. See §371. 781. SUBJUNCTIVE OF WISH (OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE) "Wishes are divided into three classes as regards time: Present. Past. Future. LESSON LXXXVIII 279 They are divided into two classes as regards meaning : Possible Wishes referring to the future (i.e., hopes) and Impossible Wishes referring to the present or past (i. e., regrets). Models 1. Present: Utinam Caesar veniret, / wish that Caesar were coming (now) ! 2. Past: Utinam Caesar venisset, / wish that Caesar had come (in the past) ! 3. Future: (Utinam) Caesar veniat, I hope that Caesar will come (in the future) ! Notes, a. In Model 1 the wish, expressed by the imperfect subjunctive, implies that Caesar is not coming and so is impossible of fulfillment in present time. h. In Model 2 the wish, expressed by the pluperfect subjunctive, implies that Caesar did not come in the past and so was impossible of fulfillment in past time. c. In Model 3 the wish, expressed by the present subjunctive, is possible of fulfillment in future time. d. Compare wishes with subjunctive conditions (§§772,774) and note that: 1. Contrary to fact conditions and impossible wishes (regrets) refer to present and past time, and take the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive. 2. Future less vivid conditions and possible wishes (hopes) refer to future time and take the present subjunctive. e. Utinam is often omitted with possible wishes, but never with impossible wishes. f. The negative is ne. 782. RULE, Future (possible) wishes are expressed by the present subjunctive with or without utinam; present and past (impossible) wishes are expressed by the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive with utinam. The negative is ne. 280 BELLUM HELVETICUM TRANSLATION EXERCISES 783. 1. Utinam Cassius cavisset! 2. Utinam ne Helve- tii ullam calamitatem populo Romano intulissent! 3. Si Romanis invitis per provinciam iter temptavissent, Caesar eos vexavisset. 4. Utinam ne a vobis deceptus essem ! 5. Harum contumeliarum memoriam deponere conemur! 6. Nolite vererl ne Helvetii Caesarem superent. 784. 1. I wish I were in Italy! 2. I hope this may happen often ! 3. I wish this had not been done ! 4. I wish that we were with Caesar's army! 5. I hope that we may live at home for a year! 6. Would that we had tried to lay aside the memory of this recent insult ! 7. But this will not trouble me, if I am (future) on my guard. 8. I fear that I have been deceived by your leader. 9. That will not happen if you defend (future) me. LESSON LXXXIX WORD FORMATION TEXT 785. DIRECT FORM Quod^ vestra victoria^ tam insolenter gloriamini, quodque^ tarn diu vos impune initirias intulisse admlramini , eodem pertinent. Consueverunt'"' enim di immortales, quo* gravius homines ex commtitatione rerum doleant, quos pro scelere eorum ulcTscT volunt, his secundiores inter dum res et diii- turniorem impunitatem concedere. (251-257, Ch. 14.) LESSON LXXXIX 281 NOTES 1. quod: the fact that. The two quod clauses are the subjects of pertinent. 2. See §611. 3. quodque . . . admiramini, pertinent: and the fact that you are surprised that you have inflicted these injuries so long without punish- ment, tend to the same result : i. e., that it is now high time that you should receive the punishment due you. 4. quo gravius doleant: in order that they may feel more pain, quo is used for ut when there is a comparative in the purpose clause. 5. consueverunt, etc.; translate in the following order: Enim qu5 homines, quos volunt ulcTsci pro eorum scelere, doleant gravius ex commutatione rerum, di immortales con- sueverunt concedere interdum his (hominibus) secundiores res et diuturniorem imptinitatem : for, in order that men whom they wish to punish for their crimes may feel more pain (from) because of a change of circumstances, the immor- tal gods are accustomed to grant sometimes to these (men) greater prosperity and longer freedom from punishment. 786. VOCABULARY ad-miror, -mirari, -miratus sum, wonder, be surprised. commutatio, commutatidnis, f., change. c6n-suesc6, -suescere, -suevi, -suetum, became accustomed; perfect, 1 have become accustomed = (regularly) I am accustomed. diii, adverb, comparative diutius, superlative diiitissime, for a long time. diutiirnus, -a, -um [diu, adverb, long], long, adjective, referring to time. doleo, dolere, dolui, , feel pain, suffer. cn'm, coordinate conjunction, for. glorlor, gloriari, gloriatus sum [gloria, glory], boast (of), glory (in). imptine, adverb, without punishment, with impunity. impunitas, impunitatis, f., freedom from punishment, impunity. insolenter, adverb, haughtily. inter-dum, adverb, literally, between whiles, as we say; meanwhile. 282 BELLUM HELVETICUM scelus, sceleris, n., crime, secundus, -a, -um [sequor, follow'], second; favorable; secundiores res, literally, more favorable things, i. e., greater prosperity. victoria, -ae, f., victory. 787. INDIRECT FORM Quod sua victoria tarn msolenter gloriarentur, quodque tarn diu se impune iniurias intulisse admirarentur, eodem pertinere. Consuesse euim deos immortales, quo gravius homines ex commutatione rerum doleant, quos pro scelere eorum ulcisci velint, his secundiores interdum res et diti- turniorem impunitatem concedere. (251-257, Ch. 14.) COMPOUND WORDS 788. a. Some words in Latin, as in English, are formed by prefixing certain particles to other words. Such words are called compounds. Compound words differ in meaning from the simple words in accordance with the meanings of the prefixes, as : ab, from -\- dtico, lead = abduco, lead from. ad, to (toward) + duco, lead = adduc5, lead to (toward). b. The following words that are often used as prefixes should, with their meanings, be carefully noted: a, ab(abs); away from. '^ ad; to, toward, at, near. ante; before, in front of. circmn; around. cum (con-); together, with; often intensive, completely. de; do^vn from. e, ex; out froin, out of ; often intensive, completely. in; in, on, into, against. inter; among, between. ob; towards, against. LESSON LXXXIX 283 per; through; hence also intensive, thoroughly. prae; before, in front of; sometimes intensive, very, very much. pro; forth, before. sub; under, underneath, from under, up. trans (tra-); across. c. Words are also formed by prefixing particles that are never used independently, as: dis-; apart, between; as: dis-, apart -\- "pono, place = disvond, place at intervals. re-, red-; hacTc, again; as: re-, feacfc + pello, dm-e = repello, drive bacTc. d. Some adjectives are formed by prefixing in-; in-j un-; as: in-, un- -\- credibilis, believable = incredibilis, unbelievable. e. Most of these prefixes take on different forms adapted to the initial consonants of the words with which they are used. Notice, for example, the ad- in the following: appello, attingo, afficio, adduc5, accipio, aggredior, ascendo. f. Notice also that, with verbs compounded with prefixes, a short a or e in the stem may be changed to short i, as: facio, afficid; teneo, retined. Other changes of vowels may occur. EXERCISES 789. Give the meaning of each of the following words: 1. Subeo. 2. Transport©. 3. Reddo. 4. Redeo. 5. Pro- video. 6. Adeo. 7. Praefero. 8. Perfero. 9. Antep5no. 10. Obvenio. 11. Circumduco. 12. Interpono. 13. Commoveo. 14, Infirmus. 15. Impono. 16. Demitto. 17. Dimitto. 18. Expello. 284 BELLUM HELVETICUM 790. Form words by combining the following prefixes with words as indicated, and give their meanings : a, a"b; and sum, verto, similis. ad; and fero, eo, sum. ante; and cedo, fero, mitto. circum; and venio, eo, -icio (iacio). cum (con-); and venio, munio, voco. de; and duco, pello, fluo. e, ex; and venio, voco, mitto. in; and fluo, sequor, eo. inter; and mitto, pello, -icio (iacio). ol); and duc5, pono, pugno. • per; and sequor, eo, facilis. prae; and died, pono, eo. pro; and mitto, sequor, veniS. sub; and port5, sum, moved, trans; and eo, fero, mitto. dis-; and pdno, pello, cedo. re-, red-; and porto, peto, fero. in-; and certus, firmus, auditus. LESSON XC WORD FORMATION— Continued TEXT 791. DIRECT FORM Cum^ ea ita sint, tamen, si obsides a vobis mihi dabuntnr, ^ utl^ ea quae pollieemini vos facturos intellegam , et si* Aeduis de iniuriis quas ipsis^ sociisque eorum^ intulistis, item si Allobrogibus satisfacietis, voblscum pacem faciam . (Divico respondit) : Ita Helvetil a maioribus suTs mstituti sunt uti obsides accipere, non dare, consuerint;^ eius rei^ populus Romanus est testis. (257-264, Ch. 14.) LESSON xc 285 NOTES 1. cum . . . sint: although these things are so. cum here has a concessive force. 2. dabuntur, satisfacietis, faciam: see §764. 3. uti . . . intellegam: in order that I may Jcnow that you will do those things that you promise. See §414. 4. si Aeduls . . . item si Allobrogibus satisfacietis: if you will pay damages to the Aeduans . . . and likeivise to the Allotroges. 5. ipsis sociisque: see §537. 6. ipsis and e5rum: refer to the Aeduans. 7. Contracted from consueverint. See §503, Note 1. 8. rei: see §499. 792. VOCABULARY ac-cipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum [ad, to, capio, taTce], receive. dis-cedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, literally, go apart; regularly, go away, depart. in-stitu6, -stituere, -stitui, -stitutum [statuo, statuere, statui, statiitum, statio7i], literally, iilace upon; establish; train. poUiceor, poUiceri, pollicitus sum, promise. responsum, -i, n. [neuter of perfect passive participle of responded used substantively], answer, reply. satis-facio, -facere, -feci, -factum, passive, satis-fio, -fieri, -factus sum, literally, do enough, i.e., satisfy; pay damages. testis, testis, m. or f ., witness. 793. INDIRECT FORM Cum ea ita sint, tamen, si obsides ab eis sibi dentur, utI ea quae polliceantur facturos intellegat, et si Aeduis de iniurils quas ipsis sociisque eorum intulerint, item si Allo- brogibus satisfaciant, sese cum els pacem esse facturum. Divieo respondit: Ita Helvetios a maioribus suls mstitutos esse utI obsides accipere, non dare, cdnsuerint; eius rei populum Romanum esse testem. Hoc responso dato discessit. (257-264, Ch. 14.) 286 BELLUM HELVETICUM DERIVATION OF NOUNS AND VERBS 794. The following endings added to verb stems form nouns with meanings as indicated: a. -tor (-sor), agent or doer, i. e., one who performs the act indicated by the verb stem. English equivalents are -er, -or, -tor; as : maker, donor, navigator. Model explorator = stem of explore {find out) + -tor {one who) = one who finds out, a scout. h. -tio (-sio) and -tus (-sus), genitive -us, act or the result of an act. English equivalents are -ing, -ion, -tion; as: fastening, coercion, direction. IMODEL munitio = stem of munio {f or tify) -\- -iio {act or result of act) = fortification (either the act or the result). 795. The following endings added to noun and adjective stems form nouns that denote abstract quality: -ia, -tia, -tas, -tus, -tudo. English equivalents are -ness, -ship, -tude, -{t)y; as: weariness, friendship, altitude, luxury. Model magnitudo = stem of magnus {large) -{- -tudo {abstract quality) = largeness, size. EXERCISES 796. Give the meaning of each of the following in such a way as to show the formation: 1. Imperator. 2. Deditio. 3. Victoria. 4. Difficultas. 5. Defensor. 6. Oppugnatio. 7. Firmitudo. 8. Potentia. 9. Conventus. ELEVENTH REVIEW LESSON 287 797. Form words by combining the following endings and stems as indicated, and give their meanings : 1. -tor; and da-, e-voca-, due-. 2. -ia; and audac-, miser-. 3. -tio; and profec- (proficiscor), existima-, conten- (contendo). 4. -tia; and amici-, poten(t)-, perseveran(t)-. 5o -tus; and mo- (moved), adi- (adeo), c5na- (conor). 6. -tus; and vir-, servi-, senec-. 7. -tas; and ndbili-, boni-, pauci-. 3. -tudd; and firmi-, soli-, ampll-. ELEVENTH EEVIEW LESSON 798. Give an account of Divico's speech and Caesar's reply, and then translate. 799. Latin-English Vocabulary. Give the memoranda of the nouns ; the entire nominative and comparison of the adjectives; the principal parts of the verbs; and the meanings of all the words. accidd consuesco improviso responsum admiror contumelia insidiae recens adorior decipio instituo secundus ago depono interdum sin aliqui despiciS nitor tempts caveo disced© nomen vetus committo diu poUiceor vexo commutatio doleo pristinus victoria consists enim quam (conj.) 288 BELLUM HELVETIC UM 800. English-Latin Vocabulary. Give the first form of the Latin for the following: allow ambuscades any attack (verb) become accustomed be on one 's guard but if change deceive depart despise discuss favorable for (conj.) for a long time former happen halt insult lay aside meanwhile name old promise recent rely reply suffer take one 's stand talk than train trouble try unexpectedly victory wonder 801. Syntax. When Latin direct discourse becomes indirect, vv^hat changes take place? Conditions : Define an assumed condition. Give rule. Define a future more vivid condition. Give rule. Define a contrary to fact condition. Give rule. Define a future less vivid condition. Give rule. Wishes: Into what two classes are wishes divided as to meaning? Into what two classes are impossible wishes divided? How is each expressed? How is a possible wish expressed? 802. Composition. Make up short English sentences as examples of: indirect discourse ; each of the four kinds of conditions ; of a possible wish ; of an impossible w4sh. Translate the sentences into Latin. CHAPTEB XV 289 CHAPTEE XV-XXIX Note. — From this point the text is given connectedly with notes instead of being divided into lessons as heretofore. The exercises for writing are placed at the end of each chapter, and may be divided in the assignment of lessons, at the discretion of the teacher. 15. Postero die castra ex eo loco movent. Idem facit 265 Caesar equitatumque omnem, ad numerum quattuor milium, quem ex omni provincia et Aeduis atque eorum socils coactum habebat, praemittit qui videant quas in partes hostes iter faciant. Qui cupidius novissimum agmen msecutl alieno loco cum equitatu Helvetiorum 27o proelium committunt; et pauci de nostrls cadunt. Quo proelo sublati Helvetii, quod quingentis equitibus tan- tam multitudinem equitum propulerant, audacius sub- sistere nonnumquam et novissimo agmine proelio nostros lacessere coeperunt. Caesar suos a proelio continebat 275 ac satis habebat in praesentia hostem raplnis, pabula- tionibus, populationibusque prohibere. Ita dies circiter quindecim iter fecerunt, uti inter novissimum hostium .265. movent: supply Helvetii. idem: neuter accusative. 266. equitatum: direct object of praemittit. quattuor milium: see §648, Note c. 268. coactum habebat: compare with habere obstrictas, §615, Note 4. qui videant: to see. See §423, 1. qui: plural, because it refers to the individuals of the collective antecedent, equitatum. quas in partes: in what direction. 269. faciant: see §370. cupidius: too eagerly. 271. pauci de ncstris: a few of our men. 272. equitibus: why no preposition? See §581, Note 1. 274. novissimo agmine: place in which, proelio: see §313. 276. satis (esse) habebat . . . prohibere: he held that (it) was enough . . . to I'eep away: prohibere is the subject of the esse supplied. 277. ita: correlative with uti. circiter: an adverb modifying the adjective quindecim. 290 BELLUM HELVETICUM agmen et nostrum primum non amplius quinis aut senis 280 milibus passuum interesset. 279. primum: supply agmen. amplius: used as a noun, the subject of interesset. quinis aut senis: the distributives are used to indicate that the two armies were this distance apart each day. 280. interesset: see §437. EXERCISES Eeview: Time Constructions, §§ 320, 327. Eeflexive Pronoun, §407. Eelative Pronoun, §§ 150, 152. 1. They will come back in ten days. 2. Caesar, on that day, persuaded the soldiers. 3. For many years, he tried to hold the royal power. 4. Orgetorix died at that time. 5. The rear of the enemy marched thus for about fifteen days. 6. In twenty days the cavalry will come to that place from which they had started out. 7. At the same time the Helvetians were elated by a battle by means of which they had begun to rout a large number of horsemen. 8. We shall take with use five or six men each, if you will take the same number with you. 9. Caesar always kept the tenth legion with him, because it was most friendly to him. 16. Interim cotidie Caesar Aeduos frumentum quod essent ptiblice poUiciti flagitare. Nam propter frigora, quod Gallia sub septentrionibus, ut ante dictum est, 281. Aeduos frumentum: grain from the Aeduans; verbs of demand- ing govern two accusatives. 282. essent . . . polliciti = polliciti essent. flagitare = flagitabat. In animated description the present infinitive may be used for the imperfect or perfect indicative, and has its subject in the nominative. This is called the historical inpiitive. 283. ut: how translated? See §472, Note 2. CHAPTER XVI 291 posita est, non modo frumenta in agris mattira non erant, sed ne pabull quidem satis magna copia suppetebat ; eo 285 autem frtimento quod fiumine Arari navibus subvexerat propterea titi minus poterat, quod iter ab Aran Helvetil averterant, a quibus discedere nolebat. Diem ex die dticere Aedui; conferri, comportari, adesse dicere. Ubi se diutius duel intellexit et diem instare quo die fru- 290 mentum militibus metiri oporteret, convocatis eorum prmcipibus, quorum magnam copiam in castris habebat, 284. frumenta: standing grain; frumentum: (harvested) grain, used in the singular because in bulk. 285. ne . . . quidem: always emphasizes what comes between the two words, pabuli: see §491. 286. frumento: see §635. flumine, navibus: ablates of means. 287. minus = non. 288. diem: see §327. diem . . . Aedui; the Aeduans Jcept putting him (Caesar) off from day to day. 289. diicere, dicere: for form and translation, see note on flagitare, line 282, above, conferri . . . dicere: they (the Aeduans) kept saying it (the grain) was being collected, it ivas being brought, it was close at hand, ubi: connects intellexit with acctisat. Before trying to trans- late this sentence, render into English the following sentences: 1. Ubi se diutius duci intellexit et diem instare quo die frumen- tum militibus metiri oporteret, principes eorum convocavit. 2. Eorum magnam copiam in castris habebat. 3. In his Diviciacum convocavit et Liscum qui summo magistratui praeerat. 4. Hunc vergobretum appellant Aedui qui creatur annuus et vitae necisque in suos habet potestatem. 5. Graviter eos principes acciisat quod, cum friimentum neque emi neque ex agris siimi possit, tam necessario tempore, tam propinquis hostibus, ab eis non sublevetur. 291. se (understood) is the subject and frumentum the object of metiri. friimentum metiri is the subject of oporteret, but translate: it was necessary to measure out grain to the soldiers, oporteret: see §751, Note c. convocatis principibus: ablative absolute, denoting time and modifying acciisat: after summoning the chief men, he reproached, etc. eorum: the Aeduans. 292. quorum . . . habebat: explains principibus. 292 BELLUM HELVETICUM in his Diviciaco et Lisco, qui summo magistratuT praeerat, quern vergobretum appellant Aedul, qui creatur animus 259 et vitae necisque in suos habet potestatem, graviter eos acctisat, quod, cum neque emi neque ex agris sum! possit, tarn necessario tempore, tarn propinquis hostibus, ab eis non sublevetur; praesertim cum magna ex parte eorum precibus adductus bellum susceperit, mult5 etiam gravius 300 quod sit destitutus queritur. 293. Diviciaco et Lisco: appositives of principibus. qui . . . prae- erat: explains Lisco. 294. quern . . . Aedul: explains magistratui: gee §527. qui . . . potestatem: explains vegobretum. annuus: an adjective, here used with the force of an adverb. 295. in suos: over his subjects. 296. possit: the subject is frumentum (understood). 297. propinquis hostibus I ablative absolute denoting time. 298. sublevetur: see §692. In this case the reason is Caesar's own, not another's. Yet he is quoting the reason he gave for his complaint; hence the subjunctive, i. e., the reason is given by Caesar the general and quoted by Caesar the author, ex: in. 299. multo: see §620. EXERCISES Review: Place Constructions, §§327, 460, 468, 476. Appositive and Predicate Noun, §85. Demonstrative Pronouns, §§134, 135, 142, 482. 1. The soldiers are in the town. 2. He hastened from Geneva to Gaul. 3. In these places were large forests. 4. Their territory extends forty miles. 5. The grain in that place will not be ripe this month. 6. Meantime Caesar turns away from the same river because he wishes to follow the Helvetians. 7. The Boii have gone to Noreia, but not even now are they far from home. 8. Caesar hastened from Aquileia, a large town of Italy, to Ocelum, the last town of the nearer province. 9. Liscus had been the chief of the CHAPTER XVII 293 Aeduans, by whom he was considered (habeo) very power- ful. 10. He calls the chiefs from the fields into that camp in which he himself has been for many days. 17. Tum demum Liscus oratione Caesaris adductus quod antea tacuerat proponit: Esse nonnullos quorum auctoritas apud plebem plurimum valeat, qui privatim plus possint quam ipsi magistratus. Hos seditiosa atque improba oratione multitudinem deterrere ne frumentum 305 conferant quod debeant: praestare, si iam principatum Galliae obtinere non possint, Gallorum quam Romanorum imperia perferre; neque dubitare quTn, si Helvetios superaverint Roman!, una cum reliqua Gallia Aeduis libertatem sint erepturi. Ab eisdem nostra eonsilia 310 302. quod: supply the antecedent id, the object of pr5p6nit. The rest of the chapter beginning with esse nonnullSs is explanatory of (id) quod. 303. qui . . . possint: who, though private citizens, possess more influence than, etc. 305. ne . . . conferant: from collecting the grain. The negative clause of purpose with ne or quominus after a verb of hindering may be rendered by from with the verbal noun in -ing, 306. conferant: plural because of the plural idea in multitudinem. praestare . . . erepturi: the arguments by which these men (hos) influence the multitude, praestare, Gallorum . . . perferre; neque dubitare, etc.: {saying that) it was better to endure the rule of the Gauls than that of the Eomans; and they did not doubt, etc. praestare is used impersonally and has perferre, line 308, for its subject. 308. quin . . . sint erepturi: after a negatived expression of douit (here dubitare), quin, that, and the subjunctive must be used, dubitare has hos, line 304, for its subject. 309. superaverint: the future perfect indicative in direct discourse becomes perfect subjunctive in the indirect. Aeduis . . . sint erep' turi: they would wrest from the Aeduans. Some verbs compounded with ab, de, ex govern the dative (here Aeduis), instead of the abla^ tive, of separation, sint erepturi: see §722. Una cum: together with, 310. eisdem: i. e., the nonnullos of line 302. 294 BELLUM HELVETICUM quaeque in castris gerantur hostibus enuntiari; hos a se coerceri non posse. Quln etiam, quod necessariam rem coactus Caesari enuntiarit, intellegere sese quanto id cum periculo fecerit, et ob earn causam quam diu potuerit 815 tacuisse. ' . 311. quaeque = et (ea) quae. 312. se: i. e., Liscus. quod . . . enuntiarit: "because under compul- sion he disclosed the critical matter to Caesar, enuntiarit = enuntiaverit. 313. quanto . . . fecerit: indirect question, the object of intellegere. id: i. 6., made this disclosure. EXERCISES Eeview: Ablative of Agent, §306. Ablative of Manner, §627. Ablative of Accompaniment, §642. Adjectives with Genitive in -ius, §283. 1. To which man (of two) will you give this? 2. No grain was brought in by any (of the) traders. 3. The bridge torn down (ablative absolute), they returned very hopefully to the camp, 4. Are you allowed (is it allowed to you) to establish peace with your neighbors? 5. Liscus, who was influenced by Caesar, declared that some were very powerful. 6. Other things that were being done in the whole camp were reported by one man. 7. I know with how much danger Liscus informed Caesar. 8. The people were so hindered that no grain was collected by them. 9. Then at last a reply was made (it was replied) by Caesar. 10. A hundred towns were taken by the men of one legion. 18. Caesar hac oratione Lisci Dumnorigem, Diviciaci fratrem, designari sentiebat ; sed, quod pltiribus praesen- 317. pluribus praesentibus: (with) too many present; ablative ab- solute. CHAPTER XVIII 295 tibus eas res iaetari nolebat, celeriter concilium dimittit, Liscum retinet. Quaerit ex solo ea quae in conventu dixerat. Dicit liberius atque audacius. Eadem secreto 320 ab aliis quaerit; reperit esse vera: Ipsum esse Dum- norlgem, summa audacia, magna apud plebem propter liberalitatem gratia, cupidum rerum novarum. Com- pltires annos portoria reliquaque omnia Aeduorum vecti- galia parvo pretio redempta habere, propterea quod illo 326 licente contra liceri audeat nemo. His rebus et suam rem familiarem auxisse et facultates ad largiendum magnas comparasse; magnum numerum equitatus suo sumptu semper alere et circum se habere; neque solum domi, sed etiam apud fmitimas civitates largiter posse, atque sso huius potentiae causa matrem in Biturigibus homini illic nobilissimo ac potentissimo collocasse, ipsum ex Helvetiis 319. quaerit: he asJcs about, solo: supply eo, referring to Liseus. 321. (ea) esse vera: that (these reports) are true, (reperit) ipsum esse Dumnorigem, etc.: (he discovers) that Bumnorix is the very man, etc. 322,323. audacia, gratia: see §649. 324. annos: see §327. 325. parvo pretio: at a small price; ablative of price, a subdivision of ablative of means, redempta habere: had bought up; compare with habere obstrictas, §615, Note 4. iUo licente: ablative absolute. 326. contra: against him. audeat: a few verbs like auded, having no perfect stem, use passive forms for tenses of completed action. Such verbs are called semi-deponent. See App. 74. It was the custom of the Eomans to auction off the right to collect the taxes of the provinces. The tax collector often exacted much more than the legal amount, keeping the balance for himself, rebus: see §313. et . . . et: both . . . a7id. 327. auxisse and comparasse: supply se (Dumnorix) as subject. 329. neque = et non. 331. causa: for the sal^e. matrem . . . potentissimo: translate in the following order; matrem homini in (among) Biturigibus nobilis* simo et potentissimo illic. 332. collocasse: he had married of. ipsum: i. e., Dumnorix. 296 BELLUM HELVETICUM uxorem habere, sororem ex matre et propinquas suas nup- tum in alias civitates collocasse. Favere et cupere Helve- 335 tils propter earn affinitatem, odisse etiam su5 nomine Caesarem et Romanos, quod eorum adventu potentia eius deminiita et Diviciacus frater in antiquum locum gratiae atque honoris sit restitutus. Si quid accidat Romanis, summam in spem per Ilelvetios regnl obtinendl 340 venire ; imperio populi Romani n5n modo de regn5, sed etiam de ea quam habeat gratia desperare. Reperiebat etiam in quaerendo Caesar, quod proelium equestre adver- sum paueis ante diebus esset factum, initium fugae factum a Dumnorlge atque eius equitibus (nam equitatui, quem 345 auxilio Caesari Aedui miserant, Dumnorix praeerat) ; eorum fuga reliquum esse equitatum perterritum. 333. uxorem: icJio icas she? See line 58. ex matre: on his mother's side, propinquas suas: his female relatives, nuptum: a supine with collocasse, which is considered here as a verb of motion, as is evident from the phrase in alias civitates. Translate: he had married of his mother, etc., into other states. 334. Helvetiis: see §529. 335. suo nomine: on his own account {name). 337. deminuta: supply sit. 338. quid: the indefinite pronoun. See §571, Note 5. 339. summam . . . venire: he {came into) entertained the highest hope, etc. regni obtinendi: see §§499, 682. 340. imperio: under the control; see §626, Note d. 342. quod . . . factum: respecting the unfortunate engagement of cavalry which had occurred a few days before. For a description of this engagement, see Chap. 15. 343. ante: an adverb, diebus: see §620. 345. auxilio: see §544. CHAPTER XIX 297 EXERCISES Eeview: Ablative of Separation, §609. Ablative of Cause, §611. Conjugation of fero, §714. 1. We shall ask whether they are going-to-carry the grain. 2. Dumnorix was very powerful because-of his property and kindness. 3. On this account he had dared to speak very freely in the conference. 4. No one desired to increase the price of the taxes. 5. He married off his mother and sister according-to his own will. 6. Did you know that he took (as) wife the daughter of Orgetorix from the Helvetians ? 7, When he was alone in the council, he was thoroughly frightened. 8. He will always favor the Helvetians and hate the Romans be- cause-of that cavalry battle. 9. The grain was being very quickly collected from the neighboring states. 19. Quibus rebus cognitis, cum ad has suspiciones certissimae res accederent, quod per fines Sequanorum Helvetios tradtixisset, quod obsides inter e5s dandos curasset, quod ea omnia non modo iniussti suo et civitatis 350 sed etiam inscientibus ipsTs fecisset, quod a magistratu Aeduorum accusaretur, satis esse causae arbitrabatur qua- 347. quibus: how translated here? cum . . . accederent: since the most clearly proven facts were added to these suspicions. These facts (res) are stated in the following quod clauses. 348. accederent: (ViteraWy, went in addition to) ; freely, were added to. quod: the fact that. 349. traduxisset: the subject is Dumnorix; for mood, see §752. dandos curasset: compare with faciendum curavit, line 221. e6s = Helvetios et Sequanos. 350. iniussu . . . ipsis: without his oicn order and (that) of the state but also without their (Caesar's and the Aeduans') Tcnowledge. 351. magistratii: i. e., Liscus. 352. satis esse causae: that it was a sufficient reason, satis: here used as a noun, the subject of esse, causae: see §491. arbitrabatur: the subject is Caesar. 298 BELLUM HELVETICUM re in eum aut ipse animadverteret aut civitatem animad- vertere iuberet. His omnibus rebus unum repugnabat, quod Diviciaei fratris summum in populum Romanum studium, summam in se voluntatem, egregiam fidem, itistitiam, temperantiam cognoverat; nam ne eius sup- plieio Diviciaci animum offenderet verebatur. Itaque priusquam quicquam conaretur, Diviciacum ad se vocari 360 iubet et, cotidianTs interpretibus remotis, per C. Valerium Troucillum, principem Galliae provinciae, familiarem suum, cui summam omnium rerum fidem habebat, cum eo colloquitur; simul commonefacit quae ipso praesente in coneilio de Dumnorige sint dicta, et ostendit quae 365 separatim quisque de eo apud se dixerit. Petit atque hortatur ut sine eius offensione animi vel ipse de eo causa cognita statuat vel civitatem statuere iubeat. 353. animadverteret: see §370. 354. rebus: see §529. Ms . . . repugnabat: one consideration offset all these facts. 355. quod . . . cognoverat: explains unum. 357. cognoverat: (lie had learned) , he Tcnew (of), ne . . . oflfenderet verebatur: see §430. eius: refers to Dumnorix and modifies suppli- cium; see §499. 358. animum: feelings. 359. conaretur: priusquam takes the subjunctive when the sub- ordinate act is foreseen. 360. per . . . Troucillum: modifies colloquitur. 361. principem: a prominent man. Galliae: appositive to pr5vinciae. 362. cui . . . habebat: in whom he had the greatest confidence in all matters, fidem habebat = confidebat: see §529. eo: i e., Diviciacus. 363. ipso: i. e., Diviciacus. ipso praesente: compare with pliiribus praesentibus, line 317. 364. sint dicta, dixerit: see §370. 365. eo: i. e., Dumnorix. se: i. e., Caesar. 366. sine eius offensione animi: without hurting Ms (Diviciacus*s) feelings, ipse de e5 statuat: that he (Caesar) should decide about him (Dumnorix) . 367. causa cognita: after investigating the case, statuat, iubeat: see §423, 2. civitatem, i. e., of the Aeduans. CHAPTER XX 299 EXERCISES Eeview: Ablative of Means, §313. Ablative with Certain Deponent Verbs, §635. Ablative of Description, §649. Ablative of Specification, §656. Ablative Absolute, §398. Participles, §§388,390. 1. Dumnorix was using the cavalry of the Aeduans with- out their knowledge. 2. His brother, Diviciacus, was (a man) of eminent justice. 3. No one was so remarkable in zeal and good will. 4. Having learned these things, Caesar urged that Diviciacus call his brother to him. 5. But Diviciacus feared that he would be unable to win over Dumnorix with this speech. 6. To his brother, whom he was going-to-defend, he sent this messenger. 7. He had not dared to favor these men. 8. Caesar said that Dumnorix was increasing the dangers of the state by heavy (great) taxes. 9. He did not attempt to do anything until Dumnorix should decide (subj.) about his brother. 10. After these things were done, Caesar returned to his home. 20. Diviciacus multis cum lacrimis Caesarem com- plexus obsecrare coepit ne quid gravius in fratrem statueret : Scire se ilia esse vera, nee quemquam ex eo 370 plus quam se doloris capere, .propterea quod, cum ipse [Throughout this chapter use proper names in place of pronouns wherever the meaning would not otherwise be clear.] 368. multis cum lacrimis: denotes the manner of obsecrare. 369. quid: form and meaning? see §571, Note 5. gravius: too severe. in: against. 370. ilia: refers to the charges made in Chap. 19. nee quemquam: and nohody. ex eo: from that fact. 371. doloris: modifies plus; see §491. propterea quod: connects crevisset with capere. cum connects posset with crevisset. se (in line 370) and ipse refer to Diviciacus. 300 BELLUM HELVETICUM gratia plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia, ille mini- mum propter adulescentiam posset, per se crevisset; quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam gra- 375 tiam, sed paene ad perniciem suam uteretur. Sese tamen et amore fraterno et existimatione vulgi commoverT. Quod SI quid ei a Caesare gravius aceidisset, cum ipse eum locum amicitiae apud eum teneret, neminem existi- mattirum non sua voluntate factum; qua ex re futurum 880 uti tdtlus Galliae animi a se averterentur." Haec cum pluribus verbis flens a Caesare peteret, Caesar eius dex- tram prendit; consolatus rogat finem orandi faciat; tanti eius apud se gratiam esse ostendit utI et rei publicae 372. gratia: see §611. plurimum: modifies posset. Between Gallia and ille, insert et. ille, i. e., Dumnorix. minimum posset: had very little influence. 373. per se crevisset: means that Dumnorix had gained power through Diviciacus. 374. opibus, nervis: see §635. 375. suam: refers to Diviciacus. uteretur: the subject is Dumnorix. 376. et . . . et: both . . . and. 377. si: connects aceidisset with existimaturum (esse), ei: i.e., Dumnorix. ipse: i. e., Diviciacus. 378. eum locum: such a position, apud eum: with him (Caesar). 379. sua: i. e., Diviciacus. voluntate: see §611. futiirum (esse) ula . . . averterentur: the result would he that the sympathies, etc., would he turned from, etc. futiirum esse with the subjunctive is here used for the future passive infinitive, which rarely occurs. The same form is necessarily used when the given verb has no future active participle. 380. averterentur: see §437. cum: while. 381. peteret: see §701. 382. rogat . . . faciat: he aslcs him to malce, etc. The substantive clause of purpose without an introductory ut may follow verbs of ashing, urging, and desiring, including volo and its compounds. 383. tanti . . . ostendit: he shows that his (Diviciacus 's) favor with him (Caesar) is of so great value. The genitive tanti is used to express indefinite price or value. CHAPTER XX 301 initiriam et simm dolorem eius voluntati ac precibus condonet. Dumnorigem ad se vocat, fratrem adhibet ; 385 quae in eo reprehendat ostendit ; quae ipse intellegat, quae civitas queratur, pr5p6nit; monet ut in reliquum tempus omnes suspiciones vTtet; praeterita se Diviciaco fratri condonare dicit. Dumnorigi custodes ponit, ut quae agat, quibuscum loquatur, scire possit. ^90 384, suum: i.e., Caesar's, eius: i.e., Diviciacus. voluntati ac pre- cilDUs: indirect object of condonat: literally, he freely gives the wrong to his wish and entreaties; freely, he yardons the wrong at his wish and entreaties. 387. in reliquum tempus: for the future. 388. vitet: see note on faciat, line 382. praeterita: the past. 389. fratri: for {the saTce of) his brother. Dumnorigi: over Dumnorix, EXERCISES Eeview: Ablative of Comparison, §618. Ablative of Measure of Difference, §620. Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs, §§in, 566, 567, 573, 574, 575, 583, 589. Declension of Comparatives, §§112, 576. 1. Dumnorix wept much less than Diviciacus. 2. Diviciacus especially wished Caesar to call Dumnorix to him. 3. I know these things and no one feels (capio) more (of) dis- tress than I. 4. You are using this power for the sake (causa) of obtaining royal power. 5. On the same day he talked a very long time with many others. 6. If anything rather severe happens (future perfect) to him, the people will think I did it. 7. For this reason very many (of) my friends will not pardon me. 8. The common people of the state had not dared to complain very much. 9. Not even Caesar was able to speak more freely to Dumnorix than to Diviciacus. 10. Diviciacus was the first wath whom Caesar talked. 302 BELLUM HELVETICUM 21. Eodem die ab exploratdribus certior factus hostea sub monte consedisse milia passuum ab ipslus castris octo, qualis esset natura montis et qualis in circuitu ascensus qui cognoscerent misit. Renuntiatum est 395 facilem esse. De tertia vigilia T. Labienum, legatum pro praetore, cum duabus legionibus et eis ducibus qui iter cognoverant, summum iugum montis ascendere iubet ; quid sul e5nsilil sit ostendit. Ipse de quarta vigilia eodem itinere quo hostes ierant ad eos contendit equi- 400 tatumque omnem ante se mittit. P. Considius, qui rei mllitaris perltissimus habebatur et in exercitu L. Sullae et postea in M. Crassi fuerat, cum exploratoribus prae- mittitur. 391. factus: agrees with Caesar (understood), subject of misit. hostes consedisse: indirect statement with certior factus: hemg in- formed that the enemy had encamped at the foot of the mountain. 392. milia: see §288. 393. qualis . . . ascensus: object of cognoscerent, which is a purpose clause depending on misit: he sent {men) to find out what the nature, etc. 395. esse: supply ascensum as subject, de: (after the beginning of ) , in, Labienum: subject of ascendere. legatum pro praetore: his lieu- tenant-general; literally, a general in place of the commander, i. e., with special delegated powers. 396. ducibus: as guides. 398. quid sui consilii sit: what his plan is. consilii: see §491. sit: see §370. 399. quo: see §313. 400. qui . . . habebatur: who was regarded as very sJcillful in military science. 402. Crassi: supply exercitu. Both in reading the Latin and in translating give the names in full. CHAPTER XXII 303 EXERCISES Eeview: Genitive with Nouns, §35. Objective Genitive, §499. Possessive Genitive, §489. Conjugation of void, nolo, maid, §560. 1. Diviciacus's love for his brother was (for) a great help to Caesar. 2. Caesar's scouts afterwards learned what the character of the mountain was. 3. One wished to report that the road was very easy, but the other was unwilling. 4. They prefer not to hinder Caesar's plan. 5. The Helvetians' army will encamp at the foot of the mountain. 6. What-sort-of an army can Caesar make with these legions? 7. After the flight of the enemy was seen (ablative absolute), Caesar returned to Noreia. 8. The scouts informed Caesar that the beginning of the flight had been made by Dumnorix. 9. Considius was so skillful that Caesar preferred to send him against the enemies' forces. 10. Caesar wanted to use all the power that he had. 22. Prima luce, cum summus mons a Labieno teneretur, ipse ab hostium castrTs non longius mille et 405 quTngentls passibus abesset, neque, ut postea ex captivis comperit, aut ipsius adventus aut Labieni cognitus esset, Considius equo admisso ad eum accurrit, dicit mon- tem quem a Labieno occupari voluerit ab hostibus teneri ; id se a Gallicis armis atque msignibus cognovisse. 410 Caesar suas copias in proximum collem subducit, aciem 404. prima luce: at daybreak, cum connects teneretur, abesset and cognitus esset with accurrit. See §701. summus mons: the summit of the mountain. Adjectives denoting order and succession are used in agreement with the noun to designate a particular part. 405. ipse: i.e., Caesar. 406. passibus: see §618. neque == et non, the non modifying cogni- tus esset. 304 BELLUM HELVETICUM instruit. Labienus, ut erat el praeceptum a Caesare ne proelium committeret, nisi ipsius copiae prope hostium castra visae essent, ut undique uno tempore in hostes 4i5impetus fieret, monte occupatd nostr5s exspeetabat proelioque abstinebat. Mult5 denique die per ex- ploratores Caesar cognovit et montem a suis tenerl et Helvetios castra movisse et Considium timore perterritum quod non vidisset pro viso sibi rentintiavisse. Eo die, 42oqu6 consuerat intervallo, hostes sequitur et milia pas- suum tria ab eorum castrls castra ponit. 412. ut erat ei praeceptum: as he had been directed; the verb is intransitive and so used impersonally in the passive, the subject being the clause, ne committeret. 413. committeret: see §423, 3. ipsius = Caesaris. 415. fieret: see §414. exspeetabat and abstinebat: note the tense. See §161. 416. multo die: in broad day, contrasted with prima luce. 417. et . . . et . . . et: in translating, omit the first. 419. quod . . . renuntiavisse: had reported to him (for) as if seen what he had not seen; supply id as the antecedent of quod and object of renuntiavisse. viso: a participle used as a noun. 420. quo consuerat intervallo: (at which interval he was accustomed), at the usual interval. EXERCISES Review: Partitive Genitive, §491. Genitive of Description, §649. Genitive of Measure, §648, Note c. 1. I will tell you what my plan is. 2. He sent ahead Publius Considius, who had been considered rather skillful. 3. It was said that Considius was too desirous of making an attack. 4. Caesar drew up a battle line of five hundred soldiers. 5. A large number of cavalrymen was sent to the hill by Labienus to make an attack. 6. The fear of Con- sidius for the enemy was finally reported to Caesar. 7. At CHAPTER XXIII 305 daybreak two thousand horses were seen near the-top-of the mountain. 8. They ran from place to place and finally returned to the bank of the river. 9. A battle line of great length had been seen by Considius. 10. Considius had been considered (a man) of remarkable bravery. 23. Postridie eius diei, quod omnino biduum supererat cum exercitui frumentum metiri oporteret, et quod a Bibracte, oppido Aeduorum longe maximo et copiosis- sim5, non amplius mllibus passuum xviii aberat, rel 425 frumentariae prospiciendum existimavit; itaque iter ab Helvetiis avertit ac Bibracte ire contendit. Ea res per fugitives L. AemiliT, decurionis equitum Gallorum, hostibus nuntiatur. Helvetii, seu quod timore per- territos Romanes discedere a se existimarent, eo magis 430 quod pridie superioribus locis oecupatTs proelium non commlsissent, sive eo, quod re frumentaria intercltidl 422. diei: see §489. 423. cum . . . oporteret: (when) within which it was necessary to measure out grain to the army, oporteret: the subject is frumentum metiri. 425. aberat: the subject is Caesar, rei . . . prospiciendum: the verb is intransitive and therefore used impersonally in the passive; (it must he provided for the supplies), that he must provide for supplies. rei: see §537. 427. Bibracte: see §460. 428. fugitives L. Aemilii: i. e., those that had been members of his force. Gallorum: here an adjective. 429. quod . . . existimarent: gives the first reason for insequi coeperunt, line 435. 430. eo magis, quod: the more for this reason, giving the reason for existimarent. See §611. 431. superioribus . . . occupatis: ablative absolute, denoting eon- cession; though they had seised the higher positions. 432. sive eo: or for this reason, quod . . . confiderent: gives the second reason for insequi coeperunt. re . . . posse: that they (the Romans) could he cut off from supplies (at Bibracte). re frumentaria: 306 BELLUM HELVETICUM posse confiderent, commutato consilio atque itinere con- verso nostros a novissimo agmine insequi ac laces- 435 sere coeperunt. EXERCISES Review: Indirect Object, §53. Dative with Special Verbs, §529. Dative with Compound Verbs, §537. Conjugation of fio, §633. 1. Caesar turned aside iiis line-of -march (iter) so that he might seek grain. 2. He started out for Bibracte because that town was full of grain. 3. Caesar did not attack the enemy on the day before, because he had trusted Considius. 4. Caesar thought it was fitting to give grain to his (men) on the next day. 5. He had always favored the plan of starting out at daybreak. 6. Labienus had been placed-in- command of the rear line. 7. But the enemy had made war upon them the same year. 8. On this account he easily per- suaded them to harass (see §423, 2) our (men) on the rear. 9. Caesar's army did not have enough (of) grain. 10. A cavalry attack will be made by the Helvetians. 24. Postquam id animum advertit, copias suas Caesar in proximum collem subduxit equitatumque qui sustineret hostium impetum misit. Ipse interim in colle medio tri- plicem aeiem mstruxit legionum quattuor veteranarum; in 440 summo iugo duas legiones quas in Gallia citeriore pro- 436. advertit: iurned his attention to; for construction of animum and id, compare that of partes and flumen, §705, Note 2. 437. qui sustineret: to checJc. See §423, 1. 438. in colle medio: midway up the slope. 439. legionum: see §649. 440. legiones: one of the subjects of collocari, line 441. CHAPTER XXIV 307 xime conscrlpserat et omnia auxilia collocarT, ac totum montem hominibus complerT, et interea sarcinas in tinum locum conferri, et eum ab eis qui in superiore acie con- stiterant muniri iussit. Helvetil cum omnibus suis carrls sectiti impedimenta in unum locum contulerunt ; ipsT 445 confertissima acie, reiecto nostro equitatu, phalange facta, sub primam nostram aciem successerunt. 441-444. collocari, compleri, conferri, muniri: all depend on iussit. ac: and thus. 442. hominibus: ablative of means; see §581, Note 1. 443. eum: supply locum. 444. cum . . . cams: not only the fighting men, but the baggage and the women and children. This was to make the men fight more desperately. 446. acie: see §627. 447. sub . . . successerunt: came up . . . near to. EXERCISES Review: Dative of Agent, §727. Dative of Purpose, §544. Dative with Adjectives, §546. Periphrastic Conjugations, §§721-725. 1. Caesar thought his troops ought-to-be-led away. 2. He was going-to-draw up a triple line-of-battle midway up the slope. 3. When he had filled the mountain with men, he sent soldiers as aid to the four legions. 4. This very com- pact battle-line was a (source of) hindrance to the Helvetians. 5. The baggage had-to-be-carried into one place by these legions. 6. This place was very near our van (first line). 7. Our cavalry was very friendly to the cavalry of the Gauls. 8. The mountain on which the battle line had been drawn up was an excellent place for a conference. 9. All 308 BELLUM PIELVETICUM the wagonu had-to-be-brought from this place by the Helve- tians. 10, Caesar said he was going-to-enroll these legions in hither Gaul. 25. Caesar primum su5, deinde omnium ex conspectu remotls equTs, ut aequato omnium perlculo spem fugae 450 tolleret, cohortatus suos proelium commTsit. Milites e loco superiore pilis missis facile hostium phalangem per- fregerunt. Ea disiecta gladiis destrictis in eos impetum fecerunt. Gallis magno ad pugnam erat impedimento quod, pluribus eorum scutTs uno ictu pilorum transflxTs 455 et colligatis, cum ferrum se inflexisset, neque evellere 448. suo (equo remote) : sending away his own horse, omnium: refers to staff-officers only. /l 449. aequato means. . . periculo: ablative absolute denoting 450. tolleret: see §414. e loco: modifies missis. 451. pilis missis: ablative absolute de- noting means. 452. gladiis destrictis: with drawn swords, 453. fecerunt: supply nostri as subject. erat: the subject is the following quod clause. Gallis . . . impedimento quod: it was a great hindrance to the Gauls for fighting that. For the two datives, see §544, 543, c. 454. pluribus . . . colligatis: ablative absolute, denoting cause and modifying poterant; inany of their shields having been pierced through and fastened together by one blow of the javelins, ictu:' ablative of means, modifying transfixis et colligatis. 455. cum . . . inflexisset: when the iron | \ GLADros point had become bent, evellere: supply pila pilium as object, evellere and pugnare: complementary infinitives^ depending on poterant: supp'y Galli as subject. CHAPTER XXV 309 neque sinistra impedlta satis commode pugnare poterant, multi ut diu iactat5 bracchio praeoptarent scutum manu emittere et nudo corpore pugnare. Tandem vul- neribus defessi et pedem referre et, quod mons aberat circiter niTlle passtis, eo se recipere coeperunt. Capto 460 monte et succedentibus nostris, Boi et Tulingi, qui homi- num milibus circiter xv agmen hostium claudebant et novissimis praesidio erant, ex itinere nostros ab latere aperto aggressi circumvenire, et id conspicati HelvetiT, qui in montem sese receperant, rursus instare et proe- 465 lium redintegrare coeperunt. R5mani conversa signa bipertito intulerunt: prima et secunda acies, ut victis ae submotis resisteret; tertia, ut venientes sustineret. • 457. multi ut . . . praeoptarent: so that many preferred. See §437, multi, being emphatic, precedes ut, which usually stands first in its clause. 458. manu: see §609. nudo corpore : icitlihocly unprotected. See §627. 459. aberat . . . passtis: was about a mile distant. 460. mille: an adjective, passus: see §?27. capto monte et suc- cedentibus nostris: after the mountain was talen and while our men were coming up. 463. novissimis praesidio: a protection to the rear: see §§543, c, 544. ex itinere: turning aside from their march. 464. aggressi: modifies Boi et Tulingi. circumvenire: depends on coeperunt. 466. conversa signa intulerunt: literally, carried forward their reversed standards; freely, wheeled about and advanced. 467. acies: supply verb from intulerunt. victis ac submotis: the conquered and dislodged (Helvetians). See §529. 468. ut venientes sustineret: to ivithstand those (the Boii and Tulingi) who were advancing. Observe that the present participle is here equivalent to a relative clause. 310 BELLUM HELVETICUM EXERCISES Eeview: Subject Accusative, §521. Infinitives, §377. Declension of domus, §458. 1. The shield and javelin were chosen by the Romans (as) their arms. 2. Caesar had removed from sight all (of) the horses. 3. At length they began to ask (for) the aid of Caesar. 4. Did the first line try to resist those who had gone out from home? 5. He says one side of their bodies was covered (compleo) with wounds. 6. The shields which were carried in one hand served-as (were) a hindrance for battle. 7. He said he would follow them home and readily conquer them. 8. He ordered the Gauls to remain at home and not to complain. • 26. Ita ancipiti proelio diu atque acriter pugnatum 470 est. Diutius cum sustinere nostrorum impetus non pos- sent, alter! se, ut coeperant, in montem receperunt, alter! ad impedimenta et carros suos se contulerunt. Nam hoc toto proelio, cum ab hora septima ad vesperum pugnatum sit, aversum hostem videre nemo potuit. Ad multam 475 noctem etiam ad impedimenta pugnatum est, propterea quod pro vallo carros obiecerant et e loco superiore in 469. ancipiti proelio: in a double {-headed) tattle. See §313. pug- natum est: {it icas fought), they fought. 470. possent: supply as subjects Helvetii, B6i, Tulingi. 471. alter! . . . alter!: the one party (Helvetians) . . . the other party (Boii and Tulingi). 473. cum pugnatum sit: although they fought, hora septima: about one o'clock (reckoned from sunrise). 474. aversum: {turned away) in flight, ad multam noctem: till late at night. 475. etiam ad: close to. 476. in nostros venientes: upon our men as they came up. CHAPTER XXVI 311 nostros venientes tela coniciebant, et nonnuUi inter carros raedasque mataras ac tragulas subiciebant nos- trosque vulnerabant. Diu cum esset pugnatum, impedi- mentls castrisque nostri potiti sunt. Ibi Orgetorigis 480 filia atque unus e flliis captus est. Ex eo proelio cir- eiter hominum milia cxxx superfuerunt eaque tota nocte continenter ierunt; nullam partem noctis itinere inter- misso in fines Lingonum die quarto pervenerunt, cum et propter vulnera militum et propter sepulttiram occiso- ^^ rum nostri triduum morati eos sequi non potuissent. Caesar ad Lingones litteras nuntiosque misit ne eos fru- raento neve alia re iuvarent; qui si itivissent, se eodem loco quo Ilelvetios habiturum. Ipse triduo intermisso cum omnibus copiis eos sequT coepit. ^^ 477. coniciebant: note the imperfect tenses here and in the next line, nonnulli . . . subiciebant: some among the carts and wagons were casting pikes and darts. 479. cum essot pugnatum: when they had fought; see §701. impedimentis: see §635. 481. atque: and aUo. unus e filiis: one of his sons; the partitive genitive might have been used, circiter: an adverb modifying the numeral adjective. 482. ea tota nocte: during the entire night. 483. partem: see §327. 483-486. nullam . . . potuissent: translate in the following order: Itinere intermisso nullam partem noctis, pervenerunt in fines Lingonum die quarto, cum nostri non potuissent sequi eos, morati triduum et propter vulnera militum et propter sepulturam occisorum. 485. occisorum: of (the) slain. 486. triduum: see §327. 487. eos = Helvetios. ne . . . habiturum: this is all indirect state- ment quoting the purport of the letter, ne . . . iuvarent: {ordering them) not to help, etc. 488. alia: see vocabulary, qui si: for if they, itivissent: for the future perfect indicative of the direct statement, se eodem . . . habitiirum (esse): he would regard them in the same position as (he regarded) the Helvetians. 312 BELLUM HELVETICUM EXERCISES Review: Complementary Infinitive, §508, Note h. Indirect Discourse, §§752, 753. Declension of Personal Pronouns, §552. Conjugation of possum, §506. 1. You will be able to help me within an hour. 2. Caesar had always been unwilling to delay at home longer than one night. 3. The Helvetians did not desire to receive the attacks of Caesar's troops until (ad) evening. 4. It was reported to Caesar that you had fought very fiercely in a double (-headed) battle. 5. I said I would be friendly to you if you would be friendly to me. 6. He says they took Orgetorix's son and daughter who were in the camp. 7. It is said that the Romans are not able to follow them because about a hundred soldiers are wounded. 8. Caesar said he would send a dispatch and message to the Lingones, if they tried to help the Helvetians. 9. I replied that a retreating (turned-away) army was seen by no one. 10. After this battle the Romans got-possession-of the Gauls' property. 27. Helvetii omnium rerum inopia adducti legatos de deditione ad eum miserunt. Qui cum eum in itinere convenissent seque ad pedes proiecissent suppliciterque locuti flentes pacem petissent, atque e5s in eo loco quo 495 tum essent suum adventum exspectare iussisset, paru- erunt. Eo postquam Caesar pervenit, obsides, arma, servos qui ad eos perfugissent poposcit. Dum ea con- 491. remm: see §499. 492. qui cum: a^id when these (ambassadors), cum: introduces convenissent, proiecissent, petissent and iussisset. 494. eos: i. e., the Helvetians. 495. iussisset: the subject is Caesar. CHAPTER XXVII 313 quiruntur et conferuntur, nocte intermissa, circiter honii- num milia vi eius pagi qui Verbigenus appellatur, sive tiinore perterriti ne armis traditls supplicio afficerentur, 500 sIve spe salutis inducti, quod in tauta multitudirie dedi- ticiorum suam fugam aut occultari aut omnino ignorarl posse existimarent, prima nocte e castrls Ilelvetiorum egress! ad Rhenum finesque Germanorum contenderunt. 498-504. circiter hominuin . . . contenderunt: alout six thousand men . . . either overwhelmed with fear lest, after their arms were surren- dered, they would he afflicted with punishment or, influenced hy a hope of safety, because in so great a number of prisoners they thought their flight would either be concealed or entirely unobserved, after going out . . . , hastened. 499. Verbigenus: see §85. 500-505. perterriti, inducti, egressi: agree with the subject of contenderunt, which is supplied from hominum. 501. quod, etc.: states the reason for spe . . . inducti. 503. prima nocte: in the first part of the night. EXERCISES Eeview: Gerund, §681. Gerundive, §G82. Supine in -um, §737. Five ways of denoting purpose, §740. Declension of deus, §715. 1. The soldiers were sent to hunt up the slaves. {Translate in five ways.) 2. The Helvetians obeyed Caesar because they feared him. 3. Caesar demanded all who had fled to the Helvetians. 4. The hope of safety was taken away by the scarcity of grain. 5. The Helvetians thought that the gods were a help to the Romans. 6. Those things that Caesar demanded were brought. because of their fear of the Romans. 314 BELLUM HELVETICUM 505 28. Quod ubi Caesar resciit, quorum per fines ierant, his uti conquTrerent et redticerent, si sibi purgati esse vellent, imperavit; reduetos in hostium numero habuit; reliquos omnes obsidibus, armls, perfugis traditis in deditionem accepit. Helvetios, Tulingos, Latobrigos in 510 fines suos, unde erant prof ecti, reverti iussit : et, quod omnibus frugibus amissTs domi nihil erat quo famem tolerarent, Allobrogibus imperavit ut els frumenti copiam facerent; ipsos oppida vieosque quos incenderant resti- tuere iussit. Id ea maxime ratione fecit, quod noluit 515 eum locum unde Ilelvetii discesserant vacare, ne propter bonitatem agrorum German!, qui trans Rhenum incolunt, ex suTs finibus in Helvetiorum fines transTrent et fmitimi Galliae provinciae Allobrogibusque essent. Boios peten- 505. quod: and . . . this, quorum: the antecedent is his, the in- direct object of imperavit. 506. uti conquirerent et reducerent: to search out and hring hack (the six thousand men who had escaped), uti: how distinguished from the present infinitive of utor? si sibi . . . vellent: if they wished to he hlameless he fore him (or in his eyes). The dative sibi indicates the person in reference to whom the statement is made. 507. reductds: supply eos; render by a temporal clause, after they had heen hrought hack, in . . . habuit: he treated them as enemies, i. e., he put them to death. 508. obsidibus . . . traditis: after the hostages, etc., had heen given over. 511. omnibus . . . amissis: noiv that all the produce was lost, quo famem tolerarent: on which they could live. 512. ut eis . . . facerent: to provide them (the Helvetians, etc.) with, etc. 513. ips5s: i. e., the Helvetians, etc. 514. ea ratione: for this reason. 515. eum locum: the subject of vacare. 517. suis == Germanorum. 518. provinciae: see §546. Boios . . . concessit: translate in the following order: concessit Aeduis petentibus ut collocarent Boios in suis finibus quod erant cogniti egregia virtiite. B5ids is placed first for emphasis. CHAPTER XXIX 315 tibus Aeduis, quod egregia virtute erant cognitT, ut in finibus suTs collocarent, concessit ; quibus ill! agros ^20 dederunt quosque postea in parem iuris libertatisque condicionem atque ipsi erant receperunt. 519. virtute: see §611. 520. concessit: he gave permission, quibus and quos: i. e., the Boil; translate by demonstratives. 521. parem . . . atque . . . erant: the same as they themselves iccre in. 522. atque (ac) generally means as or than after words of likeness and comparison. EXERCISES Review: Subjunctive of Result, §437. Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing, §430, Sequence of Tenses, §371. Questions, Direct and Indirect, §§3,68,370. Interrogative Pronoun and Adjective, §595. Possessive Adjectives, §553. 1. Their hunger has very recently been so great that they are not able to fight. 2. I am afraid that the Helvetians have lost everything. 3. They feared that the Romans w^ould not leave them anything. 4. Were not the Helve- tians equal to the Romans in bravery? 5. The Helvetians were not equal to the Romans, were they? 6. Caesar asked from what place the Tulingi had started out. 7. I do not remember whether the Helvetians got back their property. 8. I do not know who has set-fire-to my home and yours. 9. The Helvetians were so cast down tliat they returned to their homes. 10. Do you think they made war on the Romans afterward? 29. In castrls Helvetiorum tabulae repertae sunt litterTs Graecis confectae et ad Caesarem relatae, quibus in tabulis nominatim ratio c5nfecta erat, qui numerus ^^ 524. et: connects repertae and relatae. quibus in tabulis: in which. 525. ratio confecta erat qui: a list had been made up (telling) what. 316 BELLUM HELVETICUM domo exisset eorum qui arma ferre possent, et item separatim quot pueri, senes mulieresque. Summa erat capitum Helvetiorum milium cclxiii, Tulingorum milium XXXVI, Latobrigorum xiiii, Rauracorum xxiii, Boiorum 530 xxxii ; ex his, qui arma ferre possent, ad milia nona- ginta duo. Summa omnium fuerunt ad milia ccclxviii. Eorum qui domum redierunt censu liabito, ut Caesar imperaverat, repertus est numerus milium c et x. 526. eorum: modifies numerus. 527. summa erat capitum: the aggregate of persons was. 528. milium: genitive of measure. 530. ex his: supply erant, of which nonaginta duo is subject. In reading the numerals, give the Latin words representing them, instead of the abbreviations: CCLXIII, ducenta sexaginta tria; XXXVI, triginta sex; XIIII, quattuordecim; XXIII, viginti tria; XXXII, triginta duo; CCCLXVIII, trecenta sexaginta octo; C et X, centum et decem. See App. 47 and 50. 531. ad: about; here an adverb modifying the numeral adjective. fuerunt: agrees with the plural predicate. 533. milium: see §648, c. EXERCISES Eeview: Cum Causal, §694. Cum Temporal, §701. Quod, quia, quoniam, §692. Numerals, §708. 1. When the Helvetians went out to the war, there were three hundred sixty eight thousand men, women, and chil- dren. 2. When they had returned, there were one hundred ten thousand. 3. All these persons (caput) had been lost because (as they said) Orgetorix had been desirous of royal power. 4. Since the Helvetians had a narrow terri- tory, they desired to go out of their territory. 5. But they were conquered because they did not have enough (of) men. C. lULII CAESARIS BELLI GALLICI LIBEE PEIMUS {The first three chapters are given in simplified form.) 1. Gallia est omnis divlsa in partes tres ; iinam partem incolunt Belgae, aliam Aquitani, tertiam Celtae. Nostra lingua Celtas Gallos appellamus. HI omnes lingua, Insti- tutls, legibus differunt. Gallos ab Aquitanis Garumna flumen dividit; Gallos a Belgis Matrona et Sequana 5 dividit. Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, prop- terea quod ab humanitate provinciae longissime absunt, et non saepe mercatores ad eos commeant et ea quae animos effeminant important ; et proximi sunt Germanis, qui trans Khenum incolunt, quibuscum continenter bellum lo gerunt. Ob earn causam Helvetii quoque reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt, quod fere cotldianTs proeliTs cum Germanis contendunt, cum aut suls finibus eos prohibent, aut in Germanorum finibus bellum gerunt. Horum om- nium una pars, quam Galll obtinent, initium capit a 15 fltimine Rhojiano ; continetur Garumna flumine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum ; attingit etiam flumen Rhenum ; vergit ad septentriones. Belgae ab extremis Galliae finibus initium capiunt ; pertinent ad Inferiorem partem fluminis RhenI ; spectant in septentriones et orientem solem. AquI- 20 tania a Garumna flumine ad Pyrenaeos montes et eam partem OceanI quae est ad Hispaniam pertinet; spectat inter occidentem solem et septentrionem. 317 318 BELLUM HELVETICUM 2. Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus fuit et ditis- 25 simus Orgetorix. Is, regni cupiditate inductus, coniti- rationem nobilitatis fecit, et civitati persiiasit ut de finibus suTs cum omnibus copiis exirent. Orgetorix, ** Facile est,'' inquit, *'quod virtute omnibus praestamus, totius Galliae imperium occupare." Helvetils persuasit 80 quod undique loci natura continentur : una ex parte fltimine Rheno, latissimo atque altissimo, qui agrum Ilelvetium a GermanT^ dividit; altera ex parte monte lura altissimo, qui est inter Sequanos et Helvetios ; tertia lacti Lemanno et flumine Rhodano, qui nostram provin- 35 ciam ab Helvetils dividit. Ob eas res HelvetiT et minus late errabant et minus facile cum fmitimls bellum gere- bant. Ob earn eausam hi homines, qui erant belli cupidi, magno dolore afficiebantur. Pro multitudine autem hominum et pro gloria belli atque fortitudinis, angustos 40 fines, ut existimabant, habebant, qui in longitudinem milia passuum ducenta et quadraginta, in latitudinem centum et octoginta patebant. 3. His rebus adducti et auctoritate Orgetorigis per- moti, Helvetii constituerunt omnia ad profectionem com- 45 parare, iumentorum et carrorum quam maximum nume- rum coemere, sementes quam maximas facere, cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amicitiam confirmare. Ad eas res conficiendas biennium satis esse duxerunt ; in ter- tium annum profectionem lege confirmant. Ad eas res c5n- 50 ficiendas Orgetorix deligitur. Is sibi legationem ad civi- tdtes suscipit. In eo itinere persuadet Castico, Cataman- taloedis filio, Sequano, cuius pater regnum in Sequanis multos annos obtinuerat et a senatii populi Eomani amicus appellatus erat, ut regnum in sua civitate occu- 55 paret, quod pater ante habuerat ; itemque Dumnorigi Aeduo, fratri Diviciaci, qui ^6 tempore principatum in BOOK ONE 319 civitate obtinebat ac maxime plebi acceptus erat, per- {juadet ut hoc in civitate sua faceret, eique filiam suam in matrimonium dat. Orgetorix, "Facile est," inquit, ''conata nostra perficere, propterea quod meae cTvitatis eo imperium obtenturus sum; atque Helvetil potentissimi sunt omnium Gallorum ; meis copiis meoque exercitu vobis regna conciliabo." Hac oratione adducti, inter se fidem et itis iurandum dant, et, regno occupato, per tres potentissimos ac firmissimos populos totius Galliae 65 imperium occupare conantur. 4. Ea res est Helvetiis per indicium enuntiata. Moribus suTs Orgetorlgem ex vinculis causam dicere coegerunt; damnatum poenam sequi oportebat, ut ignl cremaretur. Die constituta causae dictionis Orgetorix ad indicium 70 omnem suam familiam, ad hominum milia decem, undique coegit, et omnes clientes obaeratosque suos, qu5rum mag- num numerum liabebat, eodem conduxit; per eos, ne causam diceret, se eripuit. Cum civitas ob eam rem incitata armis ius suum exsequi conaretur, multitudi- 75 nemque hominum ex agris magistratus cogerent, Orgeto- rix mortuus est; neque abest suspicio, ut Helvetil arbi- trantur, quin ipse sibi mortem cunsciverit. 5. Post eius mortem nihilo minus Helvetil id quod constituerant facere conantur, ut e finibus suTs exeant. go Ubi iam se ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida sua omnia, numero ad duodecim, vicos ad quadringentos, reliqua privata aedificia incendunt ; frumentum omne, praeter quod secum portaturi erant, combtirunt, ut, domum reditionis spe sublata, paratiores ad omnia 85 pericula subeunda essent; trium mensium molita cibaria sibi quemque domo efferre iubent. Persuadent RauracTs et TulingTs et LatobrigTs, fmitimis, uti eodem usi con- silio, oppidis suTs vTcTsque exustis, una cum els profici- 320 BELLUM HELVETICUM 90 scantur ; Boiosque, qui trans Rhenum incoluerant et in agrum Noricum transierant >l5reiamque oppugnarant, receptos ad se socios sibi adsciscunt. 6. Erant omnino itinera duo quibus itineribus domo exire possent: unum per Sequan5s, angustum et difficile, 95 inter montem luram et flumen Rhodanum, vix qua singuli carri ducerentur; mons autem altissimus impendebat, ut facile perpauci prohibere possent : alterum per provin- ciam nostram, multo facilius atque expedltius, propterea quod inter fines Helvetiorum et Allobrogum, qui nuper 100 pacati erant, Rhodanus fluit isque nonnullis locis vado transitur. Extremum oppidum Allobrogum est proxi- mumque Helvetiorum finibus Genava. Ex eo oppido pons ad Helvetios pertinet. Allobrogibus sese vel per- suasuros, quod n5ndum bono animo in populum Roma- 105 num viderentur, exTstimabant vel vi coacturos ut per suos fines eos Ire paterentur. Omnibus rebus ad profec- tionem comparatis, diem dicunt qua die ad ripam Rhodani omnes conveniant. Is dies erat a. d. V. Kal. Apr., L. Pisone, A. Gablnio consulibus. 110 7. Caesarl cum id nuntiatum esset, eos per provin- ciam nostram iter facere conari, maturat ab urbe pro- ficlsci, et quam maximis potest itineribus in Galliam ulteriorem contendit et ad Genavam pervenit. Provin- ciae toti quam maximum potest militum numerum im- 115 perat (erat omnino in Gallia ulteriore legio una), pontem qui erat ad Genavam iubet rescindl. Ubi de eius adventti Helvetii certiores fact! sunt, legat5s ad eum mittunt, nobilissimds eivitatis, cuius legationis Nammeius et Verucloetius principem locum obtinebant, qui dicerent 120 sibi esse in animo sine iillo malefici5 iter per provinciam facere, propterea quod aliud iter haberent nullum: rogare ut eius voluntate id sibi facere liceat. Caesar, BOOK ONE 321 quod memoria tenebat L. Cassium consulem occlsum exercitumque eius ab Helvetiis pulsum et sub iugum mis- sum, concedendum non putabat ; neque homines inimico 125 animo, data facultate per provinciam itineris faciendi, temperatures ab iniuria et maleficio exTstimabat. Tamen, ut spatium intercedere posset, dum milites quos im- peraverat convenirent, legatis respondit diem se ad deliberandum sumpttirum : si quid vellent, ad Id. Apr. i30 reverterentur. 8. Interea ea legione quam secum habebat militi- busque qui ex provincia convenerant, a lacu Lemanno, qui in fltimen Rhodanum influit, ad montem luram, qui fines Sequanorum ab Helvetiis dividit, milia passuum xviiii 135 tnurum in altitiidinem pedum sedecim fossamque perdiicit. Eo opere perfecto praesidia disponit, castella communit, quo facilius, si se invito transire c5nentur, prohibere possit. Ubi ea dies quam constituerat cum legatis venit et legati ad eum reverterunt, negat se more et exempl5 140 populi Romani posse iter ulli per provinciam dare; et, si vim facere conentur, prohibitiirum ostendit. Helvetii ea spe deiecti, navibus itinctis ratibusque compliiribus factis, alii vadis Rhodani, qua minima altitude fliiminis erat, nonnumquam interdiu, saepius noctii, si perrumpere 145 possent conati, operis miinitione et militum concursii et telis repulsi, hoc conatii destiterunt. 9. Reliniquebatur una per Sequanos via, qua Sequanis invitis propter angustias ire non poterant. His cum sua sponte persuadere n5n possent, legatos ad Dum- 150 norigem Aeduum mittunt, ut eo deprecatore a Sequanis impetrarent, Dumnorix gratia et largitione apud Sequa- nos plurimum poterat, et Helvetiis erat amicus quod ex ea civitate Orgetorigis filiam in matrimonium dtixerat; et cupiditate regni adductus novis rebus studebat et 155 322 BELLUM HELVETICUM quam plurimas civitates suo beneficio habere obstrictas volebat. Itaque rem suscipit et a Sequams impetrat ut per fines suos Helvetios Tre patiantur, obsidesqiie uti inter se dent perficit: Sequani, ne itinere Helvetios pro- 160 hibeant ; Helvetii, ut sine maleficio et initiria transeant. 10, Caesari ntintiatur Helvetiis esse in animo per agrum Sequanorum et Aeduorum iter in Santonum fines facere, qui non longe a Tolosatium finibus absunt, quae civitas est in provincia. Id sT fieret, intellegebat magno 165 cum perlculo provinciae futurum ut homines bellicosos, populT Roman! inimicos, locis patentibus maximeque frumentariis finitimos haberet. Ob eas causas ei munltioni quam fecerat T. Labienum legatum prae- ficit; ipse in Italiam magnis itineribus contendit 170 duasque ibi legiones conscribit, et tres, quae circum Aquileiam hiemabant, ex hibernis educit, et, qua proxi- mum iter in ulteriorem Galliam per Alpes erat, cum his quinque legionibus Tre contendit. Ibi Ceutrones et Graiocell et Caturiges locis superioribus occupatis 175 itinere exercitum prohibere conantur. Compltiribus his proeliis pulsis, ab Ocelo, quod est oppidum citerioris provinciae extremum, in fines Vocontiorum ulterioris provinciae die septimo pervenit; inde in Allobrogum fines, ab Allobrogibus in Segusiavos exercitum ducit. 180 Hi sunt extra provinciam trans Rhodanum primi. 11. Helvetii iam per angustias et fines Sequanorum suas copias tradtixerant et in Aeduorum fines per- venerant eorumque agros populabantur, Aedui, cum se suaque ab eis defendere non possent, legatos ad 185 Caesarem mittunt rogatum auxilium : Ita se omni tem- pore de populo Romano meritos esse ut paene in con- spectu exercitus nostri agri vastari, liberi in servittitem abduci, oppida expugnari non debuerint. Eodem tern- BOOK ONE 323 pore Ambarri, necessarii et consanguinei Aeduorum, Caesarem certiorem faciunt sese depopulatis agris non 190 facile ab oppidTs vim hostium prohibere. Item Allobroges, qui trans Rhodanum vic5s possessionesque habebant, fuga se ad Caesarem recipiunt et demonstrant sibi praeter agri solum nihil esse reliqui. Quibus rebus adductus Caesar non exspectandum sibi statuit dum, omnibus 195 fortHnls sociorum eonsumptis, in Santonos Helvetii pervenirent. 12. Flumen est Arar, quod per fines Aeduorum et Sequanorum in Rhodanum influit incredibili lenitate ita ut oculis in utram partem fluat iudicari non possit. Id 200 Helvetii ratibus ac lintribus iunctis transTbant. Ubi per exploratores Caesar certior factus est tres iam partes copiarum Helvetios id flumen traduxisse, quartam fere partem citra flumen Ararim reliquam esse, de tertia vigilia cum legidnibus tribus e castrls profectus ad eam 205 partem pervenit quae nondum flumen transierat. Eos impeditos et inoplnantes aggressus magnam partem eorum concidit; reliqui sese fugae mandarunt atque in proximas silvas abdiderunt. Is pagus appellabatur Tigurinus ; nam omnis civitas Helvetia in quattuor 210 pagos divisa est. Hic pagus unus, cum domo exisset patrum nostrorum memoria, L. Cassium consulem inter- fecerat et eius exercitum sub iugum miserat. Ita sive casu sive consilio deorum immortalium, quae pars cTvitatis Helvetiae msignem calamitatem populo Romano intulerat, 215 ea prmceps poenas persolvit. Qua in re Caesar non solum piiblicas sed etiam privatas iniurias ultus est, quod eius soceri L. Pisonis avum, L. Pisonem legatum, Tigurmi eodem proelio quo Cassium interfecerant. 13. H5c proelio facto, reliquas copias Helvetiorum ut 220 consequi posset, pontem in Arari faciendum curat atque 324 BELLUM HELVETICUM ita exercitum traducit. Helvetii repentino eius adventu commotl, cum id quod ipsi diebus xx aegerrime con- fee erant, ut flumen translrent, ilium un5 die fecisse 225 intellegerent, legatos ad eum mittunt; cuius legationis Divico princeps fuit, qui bello Cassiano dux Ilelvetiorum fuerat. Is ita cum Caesare egit: Si pacem populus Romanus cum Helvetils faceret, in eam partem ituros atque ibi futuros Helvetios ubi eos Caesar constituisset 230 atque esse voluisset ; sin bello persequi perseveraret, reminisceretur et veteris incommodi populT Roman! et pristinae virtutis Helvetiorum. Quod improviso unum pagum adortus esset, cum ei qui flumen transissent suis auxilium ferre non possent, ne ob eam rem aut suae 235 magnopere virtuti tribueret aut ipsos despiceret ; se ita a patribus maioribusque suis didicisse ut magis virtute contenderent quam dolo aut insidiis niterentur. Quare ne committeret ut is locus ubi constitissent ex calamitate populi Roman! et internecione exercittis nomen caperet 240 aut memoriam proderet. 14. His Caesar ita respondit: Eo sibi minus dubita-_ tionis dar!, quod eas res quas legat!Helveti! commemoras- sent memoria teneret, atque eo gravius ferre quo minus merito popul! Roman! accidissent ; qui s! alicuius iniuriae 245 sibi conscius fuisset, non fuisse difficile cavere ; sed eo deceptum, quod neque commissum a se intellegeret quare timeret, neque sine causa timendum putaret. Quod SI veteris contumeliae oblivisci vellet, num etiam recentium iniuriarum, quod eo invito iter per provinciam 250 per vim temptassent, quod Aeduos, quod Ambarros, quod AUobroges vexassent, memoriam deponere posse? Quod sua victoria tam Insolenter gloriarentur, quodque tam diu se impune initirias intulisse admlrarentur, e5dem pertinere. Consuesse enim de5s immortales, qu5 gravius BOOK ONE 325 homines ex commutatione rerum doleant, quos pro 255 scelere eorum ulcisci velint, his secundiores interdum res et dititurniorem impunitatem concedere. Cum ea ita sint, tamen, si obsides ab eis sibi dentur, uti ea quae pollice- antur facturos intellegat, et si Aeduis de iniurils quas ipsis sociisque eorum intulerint, item si Allobrogibus 260 satisfaciant, sese cum eis pacem esse faeturum. Divico respondit: Ita Helvetios a maioribus suls mstitutos esse uti obsides accipere, non dare, consuerint ; eius rei popu- lum Romanum esse testem. Hoc response dato discessit. 15. Postero die castra ex eo loco movent. Idem facit 265 Caesar equitatumque omnem, ad numerum quattuor milium, quem ex omni provincia et Aeduis atque eorum sociis coactum habebat, praemittit qui videant quas in partes hostes iter faciant. Qui cupidius novissimum agmen insectiti alieno loco cum equitatu Helvetiorum 270 proelium committunt; et pauci de nostrls cadunt. Quo proelio sublati Helvetii, quod quingentls equitibus tan- tam multitudinem equitum propulerant, audacius sub- sistere nonnumquam et novissimo agmine proelio nostros lacessere coeperunt. Caesar suos a proelio continebat 275 ac satis habebat in praesentia hostem rapinis, pabula- tionibus, populationibusque prohibere. Ita dies circiter quindecim iter fecerunt, uti inter novissimum hostium agmen et nostrum primum non amplius quinls aut senis mllibus passuum interesset. 28O 16. Interim cotidie Caesar Aeduos frumentum quod essent publice polliciti flagitare. Nam propter frigora, quod Gallia sub septentrionibus, ut ante dictum est, posita est, non modo frumenta in agris matura non erant, sed ne pabuli quidem satis magna copia suppetebat ; eo 285 autem frumento quod flumine Arari navibus subvexerat propterea uti minus poterat, quod iter ab Arari Helvetii 326 BELLUM HELVETICUM averterant, a quibus discedere nolebat. Diem ex die dtieere Aedui; conferri, comportari, adesse dicere. Ubi 290 se diutius duel intellexit et diem instare quo die fru- mentum militibus metiri oporteret, convocatis eorum principibus, quorum magnam copiam in castris habebat, in his Diviciaco et Lisco, qui summo magistratui praeerat, quern vergobretum appellant Aedui, qui creatur annuus 295 et vitae necisque in suos habet potestatem, graviter eos accusat, quod, cum neque em! neque ex agrls sum! possit, tam necessario tempore, tam propinquls hostibus, ab els non sublevetur; praesertim cum magna ex parte e5rum precibus adductus bellum susceperit, multo etiam gravius 800 quod sit destitutus queritur. 17. Tum demum Liscus oratione Caesaris adductus quod antea tacuerat proponit: Esse nonnullos quorum auctoritas apud plebem plurimum valeat, qui privatim plus possint quam ipsi magistratus. Hos seditiosa atque 805 improba oratione multittidinem deterrere ne frumentum conferant quod debeant: praestare, si iam principatum Galliae obtinere non possint, Gallorum quam Romanorum imperia perferre; neque dubitare quin, si Helvetios superaverint RomanI, una cum reliqua Gallia Aeduls 810 libertatem sint erepturl. Ab elsdem nostra consilia quaeque in castris gerantur hostibus enuntiarl; hos a se coercerl non posse. QuIn etiam, quod necessariam rem coactus Caesarl enuntiarit, intellegere sese quanto id cum perlculo fecerit, et ob cam causam quam diu potuerit 815 tacuisse. 18. Caesar hac oratione LiscI Dumnorlgem, Dlviciaci fratrem, designarl sentiebat; sed, quod pluribus praesen- tibus eas res iactarl nolebat, celeriter concilium dimittit, Liscum retinet. Quaerit ex solo ea quae in conventu aaodixerat. Dicit llberius atque audacius. Eadem secreto BOOK ONE 327 ab alils quaerit; reperit esse vera: Ipsum esse Dum- norigem, summa audacia, magna apud plebem propter liberalitatem gratia, cupidum rerum novarum. Com- pltires annos port5ria reliquaque omnia Aeduorum vecti- galia parvo preti5 redempta habere, propterea quod 1116 325 licente contra licerl audeat nemo. His rebus et suam rem familiarem auxisse et facultates ad largiendum magnas comparasse; magnum numerum equitatus suo sumptu semper alere et circum se habere; neque solum domi, sed etiam apud finitimas civitates largiter posse, atque 330 huius potentiae causa matrem in Biturigibus homini illic nobilissimo ac potentissimo collocasse, ipsum ex Helvetiis uxorem habere, sororem ex matre et propinquas suas nup- tum in alias civitates collocasse. Favere et cupere Helve- tils propter eam affinitatem, odisse etiam suo nomine 335 Caesarem et Romanos, quod eorum adventu potentia eius deminuta et Diviciacus frater in antiquum locum gratiae atque honoris sit restitutus. Si quid accidat Romanis, summam in spem per Helvetios regni obtinendi venire ; imperio populi Roman! non modo de regno, sed 340 etiam de ea quam habeat gratia desperare. Reperiebat etiam in quaerendo Caesar, quod proelium equestre adver- sum panels ante diebus esset factum, initium fugae factum a Dumnorige atque eius equitibus (nam equitatuT, quern auxilio Caesari Aedui miser ant, DumnorTx praeerat) ; 345 eorum fuga reliquum esse equitatum perterritum. 19. Quibus rebus cognitis, cum ad has suspiciones certissimae res accederent, quod per fines Sequanorum Helvetios tradtixisset, quod obsides inter eos dandos ctirasset, quod ea omnia non modo iniussu suo et civitatis 350 sed etiam Inscientibus ipsTs fecisset, quod a magistratu Aeduorum accusaretur, satis esse causae arbitrabatur qua- re in eum aut ipse animadverteret aut civitatem animad- 328 BELLUM HELVETICUM vertere iuberet. His omnibus rebus unum repugnabat, 355 quod Diviciaci fratris summum in populum Romanum studium, summam in se voluntatem, egregiam fidem, iustitiam, temperantiam cognoverat; nam ne eius sup- plicio Diviciaci animum offenderet verebatur. Itaque priusquam quicquam conaretur, Diviciacum ad se vocari 360 iubet et, cotidianis interpretibus remotis, per C. Valerium Troucillum, principem Galliae provinciae, familiarem suum, cui summam omnium rerum fidem habebat, cum eo colloquitur; simul commonefacit quae ipso praesente in concilio de Dumnorige sint dicta, et ostendit quae 365 separatim quisque de eo apud se dixerit. Petit atque hortatur ut sine eius offensione animi vel ipse de eo causa cognita statuat vel civitatem statuere iubeat. 20. Diviciacus multis cum lacrimis Caesarem com- plexus obsecrare coepit ne quid gravius in fratrem 370 statueret : Scire se ilia esse vera, nee quemquam ex eo plus quam se doloris capere, propterea quod, cum ipse gratia plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia, ille mini- mum propter adulescentiam posset, per se crevisset; quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam gra- 375 tiam, sed paene ad perniciem suam uteretur. Sese tamen et amore fraterno et exTstimati5ne vulgT commoverT. Quod SI quid ei a Caesare gravius accidisset, cum ipse eum locum amicitiae apud eum teneret, neminem existi- maturum non sua voluntate factum; qua ex re futurum 380 uti totlus Galliae animi a se averterentur. Haec cum pluribus verbis flens a Caesare peteret, Caesar eius dex- tram prendit; consolatus rogat flnem orandi faciat; tanti eius apud se gratiam esse ostendit uti et rei publicae iniuriam et suum dolorem eius voluntatT ac precibus 385 condonet. Dumnorigem ad se vocat, fratrem adhibet ; quae in eo reprehendat ostendit; quae ipse intellegat, BOOK ONE 329 quae civitas queratur, proponit; monet ut in reliquum tempus omnes susplciones vitet; praeterita se Diviciaco fratri condonare dicit. Dumnorigi custodes ponit, ut quae agat, quibuscum loquatur, scire possit. 390 21. Eodem die ab exploratoribus certior faetus hostes sub monte consedisse milia passuum ab ipsius castrls octo, qualis esset nattira montis et qualis in circuitu ascensus qui cognoscerent misit. Rentintiatum est facilem esse. De tertia vigilia T. Labienum, legatum 395 pro praetore, cum duabus legionibus et eis ducibus qui iter cognoverant, summum iugum montis ascendere iubet ; quid sul cdnsilii sit ostendit. Ipse de quarta vigilia eodem itinere quo hostes ierant ad eos contendit equi- tatumque omnem ante se mittit. P. Considius, qui rei 400 mllitaris peritissimus habebatur et in exercitti L. Sullae et postea in M. Crassi fuerat, cum exploratoribus prae- mittitur. 22. Prima luce, cum summus mons a Labieno teneretur, ipse ab liostium castrls non longius mille et 405 quTngentis passibus abesset, neque, ut postea ex captivTs comperit, aut ipsius adventus aut LabienI cognitus esset, Considius equo admisso ad eum accurrit, dIcit mon- tem quem a Labieno occuparl voluerit ab hostibus tenerl ; id se a Gallicis armis atque Insignibus cognovisse. 410 Caesar suas copias in proximum collem subducit, aciem instruit. Labienus, ut erat el praeceptum a Caesare ne proelium committeret, nisi ipsius copiae prope hostium castra visae essent, ut undique uno tempore in hostes impetus fieret, monte occupato nostros exspectabat 415 proelioque abstinebat. Multo denique die per ex- ploratores Caesar cognovit et montem a suls tenerl et ITelvetios castra movisse et Considium timore perterritum 330 BELLUM HELVETICUM quod non vidisset pro viso sibi renuntiavisse. Eo die, 420 quo consuerat intervallo, hostes sequitur et milia pas- suum tria ab eorum castrls castra ponit. 23. Postiidie eius diel, quod omnino biduum supererat cum exercitui frumentum metiri oporteret, et quod a Bibracte, oppido Aedudrum longe maximo et copiosis- 425 simo, non amplius milibus passuum xviii aberat, rei frumentariae prospieiendum existimavit ; itaque iter ab Helvetils avertit ac Bibracte ire eontendit. Ea res per fugitivos L. Aemilii, decurionis equitum Gallorum, hostibus nuntiatur. Helvetii, seu quod timore per- 430 territos Romanos discedere a se existimarent, eo magis quod prldie superioribus locis occupatis proelium non commTsissent, sive eo, quod re frumentaria intercludi posse confiderent, commutato consilio atque itinere con- verso nostros a novissimo agmine insequi ac laces- 4S5 sere coepenint. 24. Postquam id animum advertit, copias suas Caesar in proximum collem subdilxit equitatumque qui sustineret hostium impetum misit. Ipse interim in colle medio tri- plicem aciem instruxit legi5num quattuor veteranarum ; in 440 summo iugo duas legiones quas in Gallia citeriore pro- ximo conscrTpserat et omnia auxilia collocarl, ac totum montem hominibus compleri, et interea sarcinas in unum locum conferri, et eum ab eis qui in superiore acie con- stiterant munlri iussit. Helvetii cum omnibus suTs c arris 445 secuti impedimenta in unum locum contulerunt ; ipsi confertissima acie, reiecto nostro equitatu, phalange facta, sub primam nostram aciem successerunt. 25. Caesar primum suo, deinde omnium ex conspectu remotis equis, ut aequato omnium perTculo spem fugae 150 tolleret, cohortatus suos proelium commTsit. Milites e BOOK ONE 331 loco superiore pills missis facile hostium phalangem per- fregerunt. Ea disiecta gladiis destrictis in eos impetum fecerunt. Gallis magn5 ad pugnam erat impedimento quod, pluribus eorum scutis uno ictu pilorum transfixis et Golligatis, cum ferrum se inflexisset, neque evellere 455 neque sinistra impedita satis commode pugnare poterant, multi ut diu iactato bracchio • praeoptarent scutum manti emittere et nudo corpore pugnare. Tandem vul- neribus defessi et pedem referre et, quod mons aberat circiter mille passus, eo se recipere coeperunt. Capto 460 monte et succedentibus nostris, Boi et TulingT, qui homi- num milibus circiter xv agmen hostium claudebant et novissimis praesidio erant, ex itinere nostros ab latere aperto aggressi circumvenire, et id conspicati Helvetil, qui in montem sese receperant, riirsus instare et proe- 455 Hum redintegrare coeperunt. Roman! conversa signa bipertito intulerunt: prima et secunda acies, ut victis ac submotis resisteret; tertia, ut venientes sustineret. 26. Ita ancipiti proelio diu atque acriter pugnatum est. Dititius cum sustinere nostrorum impetus non pos- 470 sent, alter! se, ut coeperant, in montem receperunt, alter! ad imped!menta et carros suos se contulerunt. Nam hoc toto proelio, cum ab hora septima ad vesperum pugnatum sit, aversum hostem vldere nemo potuit. Ad multam noctem etiam ad imped!menta pugnatum est, propterea 475 quod pro vallo carros obiecerant et e loco superiore in nostros venientes tela coniciebant, et nonnulli inter carros raedasque mataras ac tragulas subiciebant nos- trosque vulnerabant. Diu cum esset pugnatum, impedi- ment!s castrisque nostr! pot!t! sunt. Ibi Orgetor!gis 480 f!lia atque unus e filils captus est. Ex eo proelio cir- citer hominum m!lia cxxx superfuerunt eaque tota noete continenter ierunt; nullam partem noctis itinere inter- 332 BELLUM HELVETICUM misso in fines Lingonum die quarto pervenerunt, cum et 485 propter vulnera militum et propter sepulturam occiso- rum nostrl triduum morati eos sequi non potuissent. Caesar ad Lingones litteras nuntiosque misit ne eos frti- mento neve alia re iuvarent; qui si iuvissent, se eodem loco quo Helvetios habitiirum. Ipse triduo intermisso 490 cum omnibus copils eos scqui eoepit. 27. Helvetil omnium rerum inopia adducti legatos de deditione ad eum miserunt. Qui cum eum in itinere convenissent seque ad pedes proiecissent suppliciterque loctitl flentes pacem petlssent, atque eos in eo loco quo 495 tum essent suum adventum exspectare iussisset, paru- erunt. Eo postquam Caesar pervenit, obsides, arma, serv5s qui ad eos perfugissent poposcit. Dum ea con- qulruntur et conferuntur, nocte intermissa, circiter homi- num milia vi eius pagi qui Verbigenus appellatur, sive 500 timore perterriti ne armis traditis supplicio afficerentur, sive spe salutis inducti, quod in tanta multitudine dedi- ticiorum suam fugam aut occultarl aut omnino ignorari posse existimarent, prima nocte e castrls Helvetiorum egress! ad Rhenum finesque Germanorum contenderunt. 505 28. Quod ubi Caesar resciit, quorum per fines ierant, his uti eonquirerent et reducerent, si sibi purgati esse vellent, imperavit; reductos in hostium numero habuit; reliquos omnes obsidibus, armIs, perfugis traditis in deditionem accepit. Helvetios, Tulingds, LatobrIg5s in 510 fines suos, unde erant profecti, reverti iussit : et, quod omnibus frugibus amissis domi nihil erat quo famem tolerarent, Allobrogibus imperavit ut eis frumenti copiam facerent; ipsos oppida vicosque quos incenderant resti- tuere iussit. Id ea maxime ratione fecit, quod noluit 515 eum locum unde Helvetil discesserant vacare, ne propter bonitatem agrorum German!, qu! trans Rhenum incolunt, BOOK ONE 333 ex suls finibus in Helvetiorum fines transTrent et fmitiml Galliae provinciae Allobrogibusque essent. Boios peten- tibus Aeduls, quod egregia virtute erant cogniti, ut in finibus suls collocarent, concessit ; quibus illi agros 520 dederunt quosque postea in parem iuris libertatisque condicionem atque ipsi erant receperunt. 29. In castrls Helvetiorum tabulae repertae sunt litterls Graecis T^onfectae et ad Caesarem relatae, quibus in tabulls nominatim ratio c5nfecta erat, qui numerus 525 dom5 exisset eorum qui arma ferre possent, et item separatim quot pueri, senes mulieresque. Summa erat capitum Helvetiorum milium cclxiii. Tulingorum milium XXXVI, Latobrlgorum xiiii, Rauracdrum xxiii, Boiorum XXXII ; ex his, qui arma ferre possent, ad milia nona- 530 ginta duo. Summa omnium fuerunt ad mIlia ccclxviii. Eorum qui domum redierunt censu habito, ut Caesar imperaverat, repertus est numerus milium c et x. 334 BELLUM HELVETICUM SELECTED EULES GENDER GENERAL RULES Masculine. — The names of male beings, rivers, winds, and months are masculine. App, 13, a. Feminine. — The names of female beings, countries, towns, islands, plants, and trees are feminine. App. 13, 5. Neuter. — Indeclinable nouns, and infinitives, phrases, and clauses used as nouns are neuter. App. 13, c. SPECIAL RULES First Declension. — Nouns of the first declension are feminine, except names of male beings. §59. Second Declension. — Nouns of the second declension ending in -um are neuter; others are masculine. §60. Third Declension. — a. Masculine are names of male beings and nouns ending in -or, -6s, -er, -es. §98, 1. fc. Feminine are names of female beings and nouns ending in -6, -as, -es, -is, -us, -x, and ' ' consonant-and-s. ' ' §98, 2. c. Neuter are all others; namely, nouns in -c, -i, -t, -y, -1, -a, -n, -e; -ar, -ur, -us. §98, 3. Fourth Declension. — Nouns of the fourth declension ending in -us are masculine, except domus, manus, and Idus, which are feminine; those ending in -u are neuter. §291. Fifth Declension. — Nouns of the fifth declension are feminine except dies, which is usually masculine. §298. AGREEMENT Verb. — A finite verb agrees with its subject in person and number. §34. Adjective. — Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, number, and case. §63. Appositive. — An appositive or a predicate noun agrees in case with the word it explains. §85. SELECTED RULES 335 Relative Pronoun. — A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender and number, but its case depends on its construction in its own clause. §152. CASES NOMINATIVE Subject. — The subject of a finite verb is put in the nominative case. §32. GENITIVE General Use. — A noun which modifies another noun and does not mean the same person or thing is put in the genitive. §35. Possessive. — The possessive genitive is used to denote the person or thing that possesses something. §489. Partitive. — The partitive genitive (or genitive of the whole) is used to express the whole of which a part is mentioned. §491. Objective. — An objective genitive is used to denote the person or thing that receives the act or feeling implied in a noun or ad- jective. §499. Description. — The ablative, or genitive, modified by an adjective, describes a person or thing by naming some quality. §649. DATIVE Indirect Object. — The indirect object of a verb is put in the dative. §53. With Special Verbs. — A dative which is translated by a direct object is used with most Latin verbs signifying benefit or injure, please or displease, serve or resist, trust or distrust, command or chcy; believe, envy, favor, pardon, persuade, spare, threaten, and the like. §529. With Compound Verbs. — The dative of the indirect object is used with many verbs compounded with ad, ante, con, in, inter, ob, post, prae, pro, sub, super, and sometimes circum. §537. Purpose. — The dative is used to denote the purpose which a thing serves. §544. With Adjectives. — Adjectives meaning near, also fit, friendly, similar, and the like, with their opposites, may have a modifying da- tive. §546. 336 BELLUM HELVETICUM Agent. — The dative is used with the second (passive) periphrastic conjugaltion to denote the person who has the thing to do. §727. ACCUSATIVE Direct OlDJect. — The direct object of a verb is put in the accusative case. §38. Extent. — The accusative without a preposition is used to express duration of time and extent of space. §327. Place to Which. — Place to which is denoted by the accusative with ad or in; but names of towns, domus, and rus, omit the preposi- tion. §460. Subject of Infinitive. — The accusative is used as the subject of infinitives. §521. ABLATIVE Agent. — Agency with the passive voice is expressed by the ablative with a or ab. §306. Means. — Means is expressed by the ablative without a preposition. §313. Time. — Time, when or within which, is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. §320. Absclute. — A noun and an agreeing participle (or their equivalents) are used in the ablative independently. §398. Place from Which. — Place from which is denoted by the ablative with ab, de, or ex; but names of towns, domus, and rus, omit the preposition. §468. Place in Which. — ^Place in which is denoted by the ablative with in, but names of towns, domus, and rus, omit the preposition and use the locative if there is one. §476. Separation. — Separation is expressed by the ablative, with or without ab, de, or ex. §609. Cause. — Cause may be expressed by the ablative, usually without a preposition. §611. Comparison. — A comparative without quam is followed by the abla- tive. §618. Measure of Difference. — The ablative without a preposition is used with comparatives to express the measure (or degree) of differ- ence. §620. SELECTED RULES 337 Manner. — Manner is expressed by the ablative with either cum or a modifying adjective, rarely with both. §627. With Certain Deponent Verbs. — Utor, fruor, fungor, potior, and vescor, and their compounds, govern an ablative which is translated by a direct object. §635. Accompaniment. — Accompaniment is expressed by the ablative with cum. §642. Description. — The ablative, or genitive, modified by an adjective, describes a person or thing by naming some quality. §649. Specification. — The ablative, without a preposition, is used to denote that in respect to which a statement is true. §656. MOODS INFINITIVES With Verbs of Saying, etc. — After verbs of saying, thinlcing, Jcnowing, perceiving, and the like, the main verb of a statement is in the infinitive mood with its subject in the accusative. §522. Indirect Discourse. — In indirect discourse main clauses containing a statement require the infinitive with subject accusative; subordinate verbs require the subjunctive. §752. SUBJUNCTIVE Sequence of Tenses. — If the main verb is present, future, or future perfect, a subordinate subjunctive verb is present or perfect; if the main verb is imperfect, perfect, or pluperfect, a subordinate subjunctive verb is imperfect or pluperfect. The present and imperfect subjunctive denote incomplete action; the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive denote completed action. §371. Indirect Question. — The verb of an indirect question is in the subjunctive. §370. Purpose. — The subjunctive is used to express purpose, introduced by ut (affirmative), ne (negative). §414. With Verbs of Fearing. — Verbs expressing fear take the subjunctive with ne (affirmative), ut (negative). §430. Result. — Result is expressed by the subjunctive with ut (affirmative), ut non (negative). §437. 338 BELLUM HELVETICUM Commands. — (1) A command in the first person is expressed by the first person plural of the present subjunctive, the negative be- ing ne. §673, 1. (2) A command in the third person is expressed by the present subjunctive, the negative being ne. §673, 3. Wishes. — Future (possible) wishes are expressed by the present subjunctive with or without utinam; present and past (impos- sible) wishes are expressed by the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive with utinam. The negative is ne. §782. IMPERATIVE Commands. — A positive command in the second person is expressed by the present imperative. The negative is usually expressed by noli or nolite, the present infinitive. §673, 2. CAUSAL CLAUSES With Quod, Quia, Quoniam. — Quod, quia, quoniam are used with the indicative unless the reason is quoted. §692. With Cum. — Cum, meaning since or hecause, is used with the subjunc- tive. §694. TEMPORAL CLAUSES With Cum. — When the main verb is historical, cum temporal takes the subjunctive; otherwise the indicative is regularly used. §701. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES Assumed. — Assumed and more vivid future conditional sentences have both verbs in the indicative. §764. Contrary to Fact. — Contrary to fact conditional sentences have both verbs in the imperfect subjunctive, if referring to present time; in the pluperfect subjunctive, if referring to past time. §772. Less Vivid Future. — Less vivid future conditional sentences have both verbs in the present (or perfect) subjunctive. §774. SUPINES Accusative. — The accusative of the supine is used with verbs of motion to express purpose. §737. Ablative. — The ablative of the supine is used with adjectives as an ablative of specification. §739. APPENDIX INTEODUCTION In this Appendix the regular paradigms are given in full, with only such exceptional forms as are needed for the reading of Caesar and Cicero. PEONUNCIATION QUANTITY OF VOWELS 1. A vowel is usually short: a. Before another vowel, or h; as eo, nihil. h. Before nd and nt; as laudandus, laudant. c. In words of more than one syllable, before any other final consonant than s; as laudem, laudat. 2. A vowel is long: a. Before nf, ns, nx, and net; as infero, c5nsul, iunxi, iunctum. h. When it results from contraction; as isset, for iisset. 3. A vowel is usually long: a. In monosyllables not ending in b, d, 1, m, or t; as me, Mc; but ab, ad. SOUNDS OF VOWELS 4. Long vowels, whether accented or not, should be given twice the time given to short vowels. This is the chief difficulty in the Roman pronunciation, because in English only accented syllables are commonly given more time than others. 339 340 BELLUM HELVETICUM a = a in Cuba 3i = ahf e= e in net e = e in ihcy i= t in pin i = i in machine = in for (not as in got) 6 = oh! u = 00 in foot u = 00 in boot y = French u or German w; it rarely occurs. SOUNDS OF DIPHTHONGS 5. The following are the commonly recognized diphthongs which appear in classical Latin: ae = at in aisle oe = oi in oil au = ow in how eu has no English equivalent. Run together in one syllable the sounds eh'-oo. ui has no English equivalent. Eun together in one syllable the sounds oo'-ee. The diphthong appears in cut, huic, cuius, and huius. a. When the consonant 1 (= j ) stands between two vowels, as in maior, eius, Troia, and cuius, though i was written only once, it was pronounced twice, as if the spelling were, mailer, elius, Troiia, and cuiius. The second i is the consonant, pronounced like y in yet. The first i makes a diphthong with the preceding vowel. In such cases, ai = ai in aisle ei = ey in they oi = oi in oil ui as indicated above. SOUNDS OF CONSONANTS 6. The consonants are, in general, pronounced as in English; but the following points should be noted: c and g are always hard, as in can, go i (consonant, sometimes printed j) =y in yet n before c, g, q, and x = n^ in sing r pronounced distinctly s as in this, never as in these t as in tin, never as in nation APPENDIX 341 V = w x = ks ch, ph, th = c, p,t bs, ht = ps, pt qu = qu in quart ngu = ngu in anguish su = sw in suadeo, suavis, suesco, and their compounds. a. When consonants are doubled, as in mitto, annus, both consonants should be soundedj as they are in out-talk, pen-knife. We sound only one consonant in ditty, penny 7. i is generally a consonant between vowels, and at the beginning of a word before a vowel. In compounds of iacio, the form icio was written. It is commonly believed that in these words consonant i was pronounced, though not written, before vowel i; as deicld, pronounced as if deiicio; abicio, as if abiicio. SYLLABLES 8. Every Latin word has as many syllables as it has vowels or diphthongs. a. A single consonant between two vowels is pronounced with the second vowel; as fe-ro, a-go, mo-ne. h. The combination of a mute and a liquid (b, c, d, g, p, t, ch, ph, or th, followed by 1 or r) is pronounced together so easily that it goes with the second vowel like a single consonant; as pa-tris, a-gri. But in poetry such a combination was often divided; as pat-ris, ag-ri. c. Any other combination of two or more consonants is divided before the last consonant, or before the combination of a mute and a liquid; as mit-to, dic-tus, magis-ter, magis-tri. QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES 9. A syllable is long: a. If it contains a long vowel or diphthong; as both syllables of laud5, and the first syllable of eius (5, a). h. If its vowel is followed by any two consonants except a mute and a liquid, or by one of the double consonants x and z. The quan- tity of a short vowel is not changed by this position: est is est, not est. The time taken in pronouncing a consonant at the end of the syllable before the consonant at the beginning of the next syllable (8, e) lengthens the syllable. This will be felt if the consonants are 342 BELLUM HELVETICUM pronounced distinctly in mit-to (6,0), an-nus, dic-tus, par-tes, nos-ter. c. Often in poetry when a short vowel is followed by a mute and a liquid. The pronunciation is then pat-ris, ag-ri (8, h). In prose such a syllable is always considered short. ACCENT 10. Words of two syllables are accented on the first syllable; as om'nis. 11. Words of more than two syllables are accented on the penult if it is long, otherwise on the antepenult; as divi'sa, appel'lo, in'colunt. 12. When an enclitic is joined to another word, the accent falls on the syllable immediately preceding the enclitic; as Gallia'que. INFLECTIONS NOUNS GENERAL RULES OF GENDER 13. The gender of most nouns is determined by the nominative ending or must be learned for the individual words; but the following rules will prove helpful. a. The names of male beings, rivers, winds, and months are masculine. b. The names of female beings, countries, towns, islands, plants, trees, and of most abstract qualities are feminine. c. Indeclinable nouns, and infinitives, phrases, and clauses used as nouns are neuter. DECLENSIONS 14. There are five declensions of Latin nouns, distinguished from each other by the final letter of the stem, and the ending of the genitive singular. ENDING OF GENITIVE SINGULAB -ae -I -is -fis -ei or -ei ILENSION r FINAL LETTER OF STEM L a n. m. f consonant IV. u V. fi APPENDIX 343 a. Strictly speaking, the cases are usually formed by adding case- endings to the stem. But when the stem ends in a vowel, that vowel is often modified in some way, or is so combined with the true case- ending that neither the stem-vowel nor the true case-ending can be seen. Therefore it is more convenient to apply the name case-ending to the combined stem-vowel and true case-ending, and to say that the cases are formed by adding case-endings to the base. The base of a noun is found by dropping the ending of the genitive singular. FIRST DECLENSION 15. The stem ends in -a; the nominative in -a. The gender is usually feminine. lingua, F., tongue, language SINGULAR ENDINGS Nom. lingua a language {as subject) -a Gen. linguae of a language, language's -ae Bat. linguae to or for a language -ae Ace. linguam a language {as object) -am Foe. lingua {or thou) language -a AU. lingua, by. from, in, or with a language PLURAL -a Nom. linguae languages {as subject) -ae Gen. linguarum of languages, languages' -arum Bat. Unguis to or for languages -is Ace. linguas languages {as object) -as Voc. linguae {or ye) languages -ae AU. Unguis, by , from , in, or with languages -is a. Exceptions in gender are shown by meanings (13); as Belgae, m., the Belgae; Matrona, m., the {river) Marne. b. The locative singular ends in -ae; as S&m&ro'hTiY&e, at Samarobriva. SECOND DECLENSION 16. The stem ends in -o; the nominative masculine in -us, -er, -ir; the nominative neuter in -um. 344 BELLUM HELVETICUM animus, m., puer, M., ager, m., vir, M., bellum, N., mind boy field SINGULAR man war Norn, animus puer ager vir bellum Gen. animi pueri agri viri belli Bat. animo puero agro viro bello Ace. animum puerum agrum virum bellum Voc. anime puer ager vir bellum AU. animo puero agro PLURAL viro bello Nom. animi pueri agri viri bella Gen. animorum puer drum agrorum virorum bellorum Bat. animis pueris agris viris bellis Ace. animos pueros agros viros bella Voc. animi pueri agri viri bella AU. animis pueris agris viris bellis fUius, M., Gains, m., Boi, M., deus, M., son Gains the Boil god SINGULAR SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL Nom. filius Gaius Boi deus dii, di Gen. fili Gai Boiorum dei deorum Bat. filio Gaio Bois deo diis, dis Ace. filium Gaium Boios deum deos Voc. fili Gai Boi deus dii, di AU. filio Gaio Bois deo diis, dis a. Exceptions in gender are usually shown by the meanings (13). Vulgus, crowd, is usually neuter. Locus, m., place, has plural loca, N., places. h. The locative singular ends in -i; as Agedinci, at Agedincum. c. Nouns in -ius regularly form the genitive and vocative singular in -i instead of -ii and -ie, and nouns in -ium form the genitive in -i. The words are accented as if the longer form were used; consi'li, of a plan; Ini'ti, of a beginning. d. Proper names ending in -aius, -elus, and -oius are declined like Gaius and Boi. e. A few words have -um instead of -orum in the genitive plural; socium (or soclorum), of allies. APPENDIX 345 THIBD DECLENSION 17. Third declension stems end in a consonant or in -i. Nominative case-ending for masculines and feminines, -s or none; for neuters, none. A. CONSONANT STEMS 18. Stems ending in a labial mute, b or p. The nominative ending is -s. SINGULAR Nom. princeps Gen. principis Dat. principi Ace. principem Voc. princeps Ahl. principe princeps, m., chief Stem priucip- PLUEAL prmcipes principum principibus principes principes principibus 19. Stems ending in a dental mute, d or t. The for masculines and feminines is -s, and the final d dropped before it. nominative ending or t of the stem is laus, F , praise miles, M., soldier caput, N., head Stem laud- Stem miUt- Stem i capit- SING. PLUR. SING. PLUR. SING. PLUR. Nom. laus laudes miles milites caput capita Gen. laudis laudum militis militum capitis capitum Dat. laudi laudibus militi militibus capiti capitibus Ace. laudem laudes militem milites caput capita Foe, laus laudes miles milites caput capita Ahl laude laudibus milite militibus capite capitibus 20. Stems ending in a guttural mute, g or c. The nominative ending is -s, which unites with the final g or c of the stem to form x. lex, p., law dux, M. leader Stem leg- Stem duc- SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL Nom. lex leges dux duces Gen. legis legum ducis ducum Dat. legi legibus duel ducibus Ace. legem leges dueem duces Voc. lex leges dux duces Abl. lege legibus duce ducibus 346 BELLUM HELVETICUM 21. Stems ending in a. liquid, 1 or r. There is no nominative case- ending. consul, M., consul pater, m., father aequor, n., sea Stem c5usul- Stem patr- Stem aequor- SING. PLUR. SING. PLUR. Nom. consul consules pater patres Gen. consults consulum patris patrum consul! consulibus patri patribus consulem consules patrem patres consul consules pater patres consule consulibus patre patribus SING. PLUR. Dat. Ace. Voc. All. aequor aequora aequoris aequorum aequori aequoribus aequor aequora aequor aequora aequore aequoribus 22. Stems ending in a nasal, m or n. There is no nominative case- ending, except in hiems, the only stem in -m. The nominative of the masculines and feminines usually drops the final n and changes the preceding vowel to 6. homo, M., P., human being ratid, f., reason flumen, n., river Stem homin- Stem ration- Stem flumin- SING. PLUB. SING. PLUR. SING. PLUR. Nam. homo homines ratio rationes flumen flumina Gen. hominis hominum rationis rationum fluminis fluminum Dat. homini hominibus ration! rationibus flumin! fluminibus Ace. hominem homines rationem rationes flumen flumina Voc. homo homines ratio rationes flumen flumina Abl homine hominibus ratione rationibus flumine fluminibus 23. Stems ending in s (apparently r, "because s changes to r between two vowels). The nominative has no case-ending, but usually ends in s, sometimes in r. mos, M. ,, custom honor, m., honor tempus, N., time Stem L mds- Stem honos- Stem tempos- SING. PLUR. SING. PLUR. SING. PLUR. Nom. mos mores honor honores tempus tempora Gen. moris morum honoris hondrum temporis temporum Dat. mori moribus honor! honoribus tempor! temporibus Ace. morem mores honorem honores tempus tempora Voc. mos mores honor honores tempus tempora Ahl. more moribus honore honoribus tempore temporibus APPENDIX 3^7 B. i-STEMS « 24. Here belong (1) masculine and feminine nouns ending in -i3 or -es if they have the same number of syllables in the genitive as in the nominative, and (2) neuters in -e, -al, -ar. 25. Theoretically the i should appear in all cases except the nominative and vocative plural of masculines and feminines, and the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular of some neuters; but this declension became confused with that of consonant stems, and no absolute rule can be given for the endings. Masculine and feminine nouns usually have accusative -em, ablative -e, accusative plural either -es or -is. Neuters have ablative -i. turris, f., tower hostis, M., F., enemy caedes, F., sZai Stem turri- Stem liosti- SINGULAR Stem caec Norn. turris hostis caedes Gen. turris hostis caedis Bat. turri host! caedi Ace. turrim or -em hostem caedem Voo. turris hostis caedes Am. turri or -e hoste PLUBAL caede Nom. turres hostes caedes Gen. turrium hostium caedium Dat. turribus hostibus caedibus Ace. turris or -es hostes or -is caedes or Voc. turres hostes caedes Ahl. turribus hostibus caedibus cubile, N., couch vectigal, n., tax Stem cubili- SINGULAR Stem vectigali- Nom. cublle vectlgal Gen. cubilis vectlgalis Dat. cubili vectigali Ace. cubile vectigal Voo. cubile vectigal Am. cubm vectigali -is 348 BELLUM HELVETICUM PLURAL vectlgalia vectigalium vectigalibus vectlgalia vectlgalia vectigalibus a. Most nouns in -is are declined like hostis. Arar (for Araris), M., the Saone, and Liger (for Ligeris), m., the Loire, are declined in the singular like turris. Ignis, m., p-e, and navis, f., ship, often have ablative -i. Mare, n., sea, is declined like cubile, but commonly has no other plural cases than nominative and accusative. Norn. cubilia Gen. cubilium Bat. cubilibus Ace. cubilia Voc. cubilia All. cubilibus C. MIXED STEMS 26. Some consonant stems have borrowed from -i stems the genitive plural in -ium and the accusative plural in -is. Here belong most monosyllables in -s and -x preceded by a consonant; most nouns in -ns and -rs; and a few nouns in -tas, -tatis. cUens, M., retainer urbs, r ■., city Stem client- Stem urb- SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL Norn. cliens clientes urbs urbes Gen. clientis clientium urbis urbium Bat. client! clientibus urbi urbibus Ace. clientem clientes or -is urbem urbes or -is Voc. cliens clientes urbs urbes AU. cliente clientibus urbe urbibus 27. B. lEKEGULAR NOUNS The following nouns present peculiarities of inflection; senex, m., OS, N., vis, F., bos, M., p., ] iuppiter, M.. old man lone force SINGULAR ox, cow Jupiter Norn. senex OS vis bos luppiter Gen. senis ossis vis bovis lovis Bat. seni ossi vi bovi lovi Ace. senem OS vim bovem lovem Voc. senex OS vis bos luppiter All. sene osse vi bove love APPENDIX PLURAL Nom. senes ossa Vires boves Gen. senum ossiura virium bovum or bourn Bat. senibus ossibus viribus bobus or biibus Ace. senes ossa vires boves Voe. senes ossa vires boves Am. senibus ossibus viribus bobus or biibus 349 28. The gender of many nouns is shown by the meaning (13). There are numerous exceptions to the following rules: a. Masculine are nouns in 6 (except those in -do, -go, -io), -or, -os, -er, -es. 6. Feminine are nouns in -do, -go, -16, -as, -es, -is, -us, -ys, -x, and in -s when preceded by a consonant. c. Neuter are all others; namely, nouns in -a, -e, -i, -y, -c, -1, -n, -t, -ar, -ur, -us. FOURTH DECLENSION 29. Stem ends in -u; nominative masculine in -us; nominative neuter in -u. passus, M., pace cornu, N., horn SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL Norn. passus passus cornu cornua Gen. passus passuum cornus cornuum Bat. passu! passibus cornu cornibus Aoc. passum passus cornu cornua Voc. passus passus cornu cornua All. passu passibus cornu cornibus a. Domus, house, manus, Tiand, Idds, Ides, are feminine. h. The dative singular of nouns in -us sometimes ends in -ii. c. The dative and ablative plurals of a few nouns sometimes end in -ubus. d. Domus, F., house, has some second declension forms. The forms in common use are: 350 BELLUM HELVETICUM SINGULAR Norn. domus Gen. domus Bat. domui or domo Ace. domum Voc. domus All. domo or domu Loe. domi (at home) Norn. dies Gen. diei Vat. diei Ace. diem Voc. dies AU. die PLURAL domus domuum domibus domos domus domibus FIFTH DECLENSION 30. Stem ends in -e; nominative in -es. Usually feminine. dies, M., day res, f., thing SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL dies res res dierum rei rerum diebus rei rebus dies rem res dies res res diebus re rebus a. Dies in the singular is either masculine or feminine (feminine usually in the sense of an appointed day or a long space of time); in the plural it is masculine. Its compounds are masculine. h. The ending of the genitive and dative singular is -ei after a vowel, -ei after a consonant, -e is sometimes used instead of either. c. Dies and res are the only nouns of this declension that are declined throughout the plural. Acies, spes, and a few others have nominative and accusative plural forms. ADJECTIVES 31. ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS magnus, large SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. magnus magna magnum magni magnae magna Gen. magni magnae magni magnorum magnarum magnorum Dat. magno magnae magno magnis magnis magnis Ace. magnum magnam magnum magnos magnas magna Voc. magna magna magnum magni magnae magna Ahl. magno magna magno magnis magnis magnis Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. AM. Norn. Gen. Bat. Ace. Voc. Ahl. APPENDIX 351 liber, free SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. liber libera liberum liberi libera© libera liberi liberae liberi liberorum liberarum liberorum libero liberae libero liberis liberis liberis liberum liberam liberum liberos liberas libera liber libera liberum liberi liberae libera libero libera SINGULAR libero noster liberis ', our liberis PLURAL liberis Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut, noster nostra nostrum nostri nostrae nostra nostri nostrae nostri nostrorum nostrarum nostrorum nostrd nostrae nostro nostris nostris nostris nostrum , nostram nostrum nostros nostras nostra noster nostra nostrum nostri nostrae nostra nostro nostra nostrd nostris nostris nostris ADJECTIVES WITH GENITIVE IN -TUS 32. Nine adjectives of the first and second declensions have the genitive singular in -ius (in alter, usually -ius) and the dative singular in -i in all genders. These are alius, another, solus, ojily, totus, whole, ullus, any, nullus, no, tinus, one, alter, the other, uter, which (of two), neuter, neither. In the plural the case-endings of these adjectives aie exactly the same as in magnus. Note the ending -ud in the neuter of alius. Mas. Fern. SINGULAR Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nam. iinus lina iinum totus tota totum Gen. unius vinius unius totius totius totius Dat. uni lini uni toti toti toti Ace. iinum unam iinum totum totam totum Abl. lino i"ina uno toto tota toto 352 BELLUM HELVETICUM Nom. alius alia aliud alter altera alterum Gen. alius alius alius alterius alterius alterius Bat. alii alii alii alteri alteri alteri Ace. alium aliam aliud alterum alteram alterum AU. alio alia alio alters altera altero ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 33. There are both consonant stems and i-stems. Adjectives of three terminations have a special form in the nominative singular for each gender; adjectives of two terminations have one form in the nominative singular for the masculine and feminine, another for the neuter; adjectives of one termination have the same form in the nominative singular for all genders. Except comparatives, all adjectives of two or three terminations have only -i in the ablative singular. A. CONSONANT STEMS 34. Two Terminations. fortior, hraver SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. and Fern. Neut. Mas. and Fem. Neut. Nom. fortior fortius fortiores fortiSra Gen. fortioris fortioris fortiorum fortiorum Bat. fortiori fortiori fortioribus fortioribus Ace. fortiorem fortius fortiores fortiora Voc. fortior fortius fortiores fortiora AU. fortiore fortiore fortioribus fortioribus a. Here belong all comparatives; but plus, more, is irregular and defective. In the singular it is used only as a noun. SINGUI-AR PLURAL Neut. Mas. and Fem. Neut. Nom. plus plures plura Gen. pluris plurium plurium Bat. pluribus pluribus Ace. plus plures or -is plura AU. plure pluribus pluribus APPENDIX 353 35. One Termination. vetus, old SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. and Fern. Neut. Mas. and Fern. Neut. Norn, vetus vetus veteres Vetera Gen. veteris veteris veterum veterum Dat. veteri veteri veteribus veteribus Ace. veterem vetus veteres Vetera Voc. vetus vetus veteres Vetera Abl. vetere vetere veteribus veteribus a. Here belongs princeps, chief. Dives, rich, also belongs here, but has ditia for the nominative, accusative, and vocative neuter plural. 36. Three Terminations. SINGULAR Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. acer acris acre Gen. acris acris acris Dat. acri acri acri Ace. acrem acrem acre Voc. acer acris acre Ahl. acri acri acri a. Here belong celeber, famous, pedestrian; names of months in -ber; 37. Two Terminations. ?. i-STEMS acer, sharp PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. acres acres acria acrium acrium acrium acribus acribus acribus acres or -is acres or -is acria acres acres acria acribus acribus acribus equester, equestrian, and a few others. pedester, omnis, all SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. and Fern. Neut. Mas. and Fem. Neut. Nom. omnis omne omnes omnia Gen. omnis omnis omnium omnium Vat. omni omni omnibus omnibus Ace. omnem omne omnes or -is omnia Voc. omnis omne omnes omnia Ahl. omni omni • omnibus omnibus 35^ BELLUM HELVETICUM a. Here belong all adjectives in -is, e. 38. One Termination. audax, hold SINGUT.AR PLURAL Mas. and Fern. Neut. Mas. and Fern. Neut. Nom. audax audax audaces audacia Gen. audacis audacis audacium audacium Bat. audaci audaci audacibus audacibus Ace. audacem audax audaces or -is audacia Voc. audax audax audaces audacia Ahl audaci audaci oriens. audacibus rising audacibus SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. and Fern. Neut. Mas. and Fern. Neut. Nom. oriens oriens orientes orientia Gen. orientis orientis orientium orientium Bat. orient! orienti orientibus orientibus Ace. orientem oriens orientes or -is orientia Voc. oriens oriens orientes orientia 4hl oriente or -i oriente or -i orientibus orientibus a. Here belong most adjectives of one termination, and all participles in -ans and -ens. Participles usually have the ablative singular in -i only when used as adjectives; in e when used as participles or nouns. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 39. The regular comparative endings are -ior, -ius; superlative, -issimus, -a, -um. They are added to the base of the positive (found by removing the case-ending from the genitive singular). Examples: altus, high; altior, -ius, higher; -^Jtissimus, -a, -um, highest; fortis, hrave; fortior, braver; fortissimus, bravest. 40. Adjectives in -er form the comparative regularly, but form the superlative by adding -rimus to the nominative of the positive. Example: acer, sharp (base, acr-), acrior, acerrimus. APPENDIX 355 41. Most adjectives in -ills are compared regularly. Six, while forming the comparative regularly, form the superlative by adding -limus to the base of the positive. They are facilis, easy; difficilis, difficult; similis, ^iA;e; dissimilis, unlike ; hximilis, loic; gxsicilis, slender. Example: facilis, facilior, facillimus. 42. IREEGULAK COMPARISON bonus, melior, optimus, good, hetter, best. malus, peior, pessimus, bad, worse, worst. magnus, maior, maximus, great, greater, greatest. parvus, minor, minimus, small, less, least. multus, plus, pltirimus, much, more, most. dexter, dexterior, dextimus, on the right, dexterous, etc. DEFECTIVE COMPARISON 43. The following comparatives and superlatives appear without a positive because formed from stems not used as adjectives: (citra, adv., on this side) citerior, citimus, hither, hithermost. (de, prep., down) deterior, deterrimus, worse, worst. (intra, prep., in, within) interior, intimus, inner, inmost. (prae, prep., before) prior, primus, former, first. (prope, adv., near) propior, proximus, nearer, next. (ultra, adv., beyond) ulterior, ultimus, farther, farthest. 44. Of the following, the positive forms are rare, except when used as nouns (generally in the plural): exterus, exterior, extremus (extimus), outer, outmost. inferus, inferior, infimus (imus), lower, lowest. posterus, posterior, postremus (postumus), latter, last. superus, superior, supremus (summus), higher, highest. COMPARISON BY ADVERBS 45. Most adjectives in -us preceded by a vowel, and many others, form the comparative and superlative by using the adverbs magis, more, and maxime, most. Example: idoneus, suitable; magis idoneus, more suitable; maxime idoneus, most suitable. 356 BELLUM HELVETICUM COMPARISON OF ADVERBS 46. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives in all the degrees of comparison. a. The positive is formed from adjectives of the first and second declensions by adding -e to the base; as latus, wide, late, widely; from adjectives of the third declension by adding -ter or -iter to the base, except that adjectives whose base ends in nt add only -er; as audax, audacis, &oW, audacter, 6o?di^; f ortis, brare, ioriitQT, bravely ; prudens, prudentis, prudent, prudenter, prudently. But the neuter accusative singular of adjectives of all declensions may be used adverbially; as multum, much, facile, easily. h. The comparative is the accusative singular neuter of the com- parative of the adjective; as latius, more widely; audacius, more loldly ; fortius, more bravely; prudentius, more prudently; plus, more, facilius, more easily. c. The superlative is formed by adding -e to the base of the super- lative of the adjective; or, less often, is its accusative singular neuter; as latissime, most ividely ; audacissime, most boldly; fortissime, most bravely; prudentissime, most prudently; plurimum, most, facillime, most easily. NUMERALS 47. Numeral adjectives are of three classes: cardinals, answering the question, how many? as one, two, etc.; ordinals, answering the question which in order? as iirst, second, etc.; and distributives, answer- ing the question how many each? as one each, two each, etc. "Roman Numerals Cardinal I. unus, -a, -um II. duo, -ae, -o III. tres, tria IV. quattuor V. quinque VI. sex VII. septem VIII. oeto IX. novem X. decern XI. iindeeim Ordina I Distributive primus, -a, - um singuli, -ae, -a secundus or • alter bini tertius terni or trlnl quartus quaterni quintus quini sextus sen! Septimus septeni octavus octoni nonus noveni decimus deni undecimus iindeni . APPENDIX 357 XII. duodecim duodecimus duodeni Xill. tredecim tertius decimus terni deni XIV. quattuordecim quartus decimus quaterni deni XV. quindecim quintus decimus quini deni XVI. sedecim sextus decimus seni deni XVII. septendecim Septimus decimus septeni deni XVIII. duodeviginti duodevlcesimus duodeviceni XIX. undeviginti undevicesimus undeviceni XX. viginti , vicesimus viceni XXI. unus et vlginti (viginti unus) vicesimus primus viceni singuli XXVIII. duodetriginta duodetricesimus duodetriceni XXIX. undetriginta undetricesimus iindetriceni XXX. triginta tricesimus triceni XL. quadraginta quadragesimus quadrageni L. quinquaginta qulnquagesimus quinquageni LX. sexaginta sexagesimus sexageni LXX. septuaginta septuagesimus septuageni LXXX. octoginta octogesimus octogeni XC. nonaginta nonagesimus nonageni C. centum centesimus eenteni CI. centum (et) centesimus (et) centeni (et) unus primus singuli cc. ducentl, -ae, -a ducentesimus duceni ccc. trecenti trecentesimus treceni cccc. quadringenti quadringentesimus quadringeni D. quingenti quingentesimus quingeni DC. sescenti sescentesimus sesceni DCC. septingenti septingentesimus septingeni DCCC. octingenti octingentesimus octingeni DCCCC. nongenti nongentesimus nongeni M. mille millesimus singula milia MM. duo milia bis millesimus bina milia a. The ending -ensimus is often used for -esimus. 48. Of the cardinals, iinus, duo, and ties are declined; quattuor to centum, inclusive, are indeclinable; ducenti to nongenti, inclusive, are declined like the plural of magnus (31); mille as an adjective is inde- clinable, as a substantive is declined like the plural of cuMle (25) and 358 BELLUM HELVETICUM generally spelled milia. Ordinals are declined like magnus, distribu- tives like the plural of magnus. 49. For the declension of unus, see 32. Its plural usually means only or alone, but is used in the sense of one with nouns used only in the plural; as, una castra, one camp. Duo and tres are declined as follows: duo, two tres, three Mas. Few. Neut. Mas. and Fern. Neut. Norn. duo duae duo tres tria Gen. duorum duarum duorum trium trium Bat. du5bus duabus duobus trlbus tribus Ace. duos, duo duas duo tres, tris trla AU. duobus duabus duobus tribus tribus 50. The numbers intermediate between those given in the table are expressed as follows: In a combination of tens and units the units may precede, followed by et; as tres et quadraginta, three and forty; or the tens may precede without an et; as quadraginta tres, forty three. In other combinations of two numerals the higher precedes, with or without et; as ducenti (et) viginti, two hundred and twenty. In com- binations of three or more numerals, the order is as in English without et; as duo milia sescenti viginti sex, two thousand six hundred and twenty six. 51. PRONOUNS PERSONAL PRONOUNS First person, ego, I Second person, tu, you (thou) SINGULAR PLURAL Norn, ego nos Gen. mei fnostrum l^nostri Dat. mihi nobis Ace. me nos AM. me nobis SINGULAR PLURAL tu VOS tui f vestrum \vestri tibi vobls te VOS te vobis a. There is no personal pronoun of the third person. Its place is taken either by a demonstrative pronoun, usually is, he, ea, she, id, it, 57; or, when him, them, etc., refer to the subject, by the reflexive pro- APPENDIX 359 J), nostrum and vestrum are the forms used as partitive genitives; nostri and vestri, as objective genitives. c. The preposition cum is enclitic with personal pronouns j as, ndbis- cum, with us. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 52. A reflexive pronoun can neither be the subject of a finite verb nor agree with such a subject: therefore there can be no nominative. For the first and second persons the personal pronouns are used as re- flexives. For the third person there is a special pronoun. First person, mei, Second person, tui, Third person, sui, of myself of yourself of himself, etc. SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL Gen. mei (-nostrum 1 nostri tui -< ^ vestrum ^ vestri sui sui Dat. mihi nobis tibi vobis sibi sibi Ace. me nos te vos 86 se Abl. me nobis te vobis se se a. The preposition cum is enclitic with reflexive pronouns; as, seciim, with himself. 53. 1st pers. Sd pers. 3d pers. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS meus, -a, -um, my tuus, -a, -um, your (of one) suus, -a, -um, his, her, its (when referring to the subject) eius (gen. sing, of is) his, her, its (when not referring to the subject) noster, -tra, -trum, our vester, -tra, -trum, your (of more than one) suus, -a, -um, their (when re- ferring to the subject) eorum, earum, e5rum (gen. plur. of is) their (when not referring to the subject) 54. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS hie, this (near the speaker) SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. hie haee hoc hi hae haec Gen. huius huius huius horum harum horum Dat. huic huic huic his his his Ace. hunc hanc hoe h5s has haec All. hoc hac hoc his his his 360 BELLUM HELVETICUM a. The nominative and accusative neuter, hoc, is pronounced hocc when the next word begins with a vowel. The syllable is therefore long. See 6, a. 55. iste, that (near the person spoken to) SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. iste ista istud Gen, istius istius istius Dat. isti isti isti Ace. istum istam istud Abl. ist5 ista isto Mas. Fern. Neut. isti istae ista istorum istarum istorum istis istis istis istos istas ista istis istis istis 56. Hie, that (something more remote) is declined like iste. 57. is, this, that, he, she, it (unemphatic) SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut, Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. is ea id ii,ei eae ea Gen. eius eius eius eorum earum eorum Dat. ei ei ei iis, eis iis, eis iis, eis Ace. eum earn id eos eas ea AU. eo ea 60 iis, eis iis, eis iis, eis 58. idem, the same SINGULAR PLURAL Mas, Fern. Neut, Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. idem eadem idem idem or eidem eaedem eadem Gen. eiusdem L eiusdem eiusdem eorundem earundem eorundem Dat, eidem eidem eidem isdem or eisdem isdem or eisdem isdem or eisdem Ace. eundem eandem idem eosdem easdem eadem Abl. eodem eadem eodem isdem or eisdem isdem or eisdem isdem or eisdem APPENDIX 361 59. THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN ipse, self SINGULAR PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. ipse ipsa ipsum ipsi ipsae ipsa Gen, ipsius ipsius ipsius ipsorum ipsarum ipsorum Dat, ipsi ipsi ipsi ipsis ipsis ipsis Ace. ipsum ipsam ipsum ipsos ipsas ipsa AU, ipso ipsa ipso ipsis ipsis ipsis 60. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN qui, who SINGUl AU PLURAL Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. Neut, Nom. qui quae quod qui quae quae Gen. cuius cuius cuius quorum quarum qu5rum Dat. cui cui cui quibus quibus quibus Ace, quem quam quod quos quas quae Ahl. quo qua quo quibus quibus quibus a. Qmcumque and quisquis, whoever, are generalizing relatives. The qui of quicumque is declined regularly. Quisquis, quicquid (quid- quid)/ and quoquo are the only common forms of quisquis. h. The preposition cum is usually enclitic with the relative pronoun; as quibuscum, with whom. 61. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS Qui, quae, quod, the adjective what? is declined like the relative. Quis, quid, the substantive who? what? is used in the singular. quis, who.^ SINGULAR Mas. and Fern. Neut. Nom. quis quid Gen. cuius cuius Dat. cui cui Ace, quem quid Ahl. qu5 quo 362 BELLUM HELVETICUM a. The enclitic -nam is sometimes added to an interrogative to strengthen it; quisnam, ivho, pray? h. Cum is usually enclitic with the interrogative pronoun. 62. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS The indefinite pronouns are quis, qui, and their compounds. Quis and qui in this sense are in general declined like the interrogatives. SUBSTANTIVE ADJECTIVE quis, quid, anyone qui, quae (qua), quod, any aliquis, aliquid, some one aliqui, aliqua, aliquod, some quispiam, quidpiam, some one quispiam, quaepiam, quodpiam, some quisquam, quicquam (quidquam), (adjective supplied by ullus) any one (abl. singular and entire plural supplied by ullus, -a, -um) quivis, quaevis, quidvis ^ quivis, quaevis, quodvis ^ quilibet, quaelibet, quidlibet J quilibet, quaelibet, quodlibet J any one, etc., you like any you like quidam, quaedam, quiddam, a cer- quidam, quaedam, quoddam, a cer- tain man tain quisque, quidque, each quisque, quaeque, quodque, each a. In qui and aliqui the nominative and accusative plural neuter are qua (or quae) and aliqua. h. In the declension of quidam, m becomes n before d; as quendam. VERBS 63. There are four conjugations of Latin verbs, distinguished from one another by the final vowel of the stem, best seen in the present infinitive- CONJUGATION FINAL VOWEL OF STEM PRESENT INFINITIVE I. a -are n. e -ere m. e(i,u) -ere IV. i -ire 64. All forms of a verb are formed on one or another of three stems, — the present stem, the perfect stem, and the supine stem. In regular verbs the perfect and supine stems are based on the present stem, but in some irregular verbs they are formed on distinct roots. APPENDIX 363 a. On the present stem are formed: active and passive, — ^present, imperfect, and future indicative; present and imperfect subjunctive; imperative; present infinitive: active, — present participle; gerund: passive, — gerundive. h. On the perfect stem are formed: active, — perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect indicative; perfect and pluperfect subjunctive; perfect infinitive. c. On the supine stem are formed: active and passive, — future in- finitive; active, — future participle; supine: passive, — ^perfect, pluper- fect, and future perfect indicative; perfect and pluperfect subjunc- tive; perfect infinitive; perfect participle. 65. The principal parts are forms which show to which conjuga- tion a verb belongs and what each of its stems is. They are, in the active, (1) the first person singular present indicative (as the first form of the verb), (2) the present infinitive (to indicate the conju- gation and give the present stem), (3) the first person singular per- fect indicative (to give the perfect stem), (4) the supine (to give the supine stem). For example, the principal parts of laudo are: laudo, laudare (present stem, lauda). laudavi, (perfect stem, laudav). laudatum (supine stem, laudat). The supine of the majority of verbs is not found in Latin litera- ture, so that other forms of the verb are often given instead of the supine. But no one form is found for every verb, and it is simpler to give the supine always. In the passive the principal parts are (1) the first person singular present indicative, (2) the present infinitive, (3) the first person sin- gular perfect indicative. 66. CONJUGATION OF SUM (irregular verb) Principal parts: sum, esse, fui INDICATIVE Present SINGULAR PLURAL sum sumus es estis est sunt SUBJUNCTIVE Present SINGULAR PLURAL Sim simus SIS sitis sit sint a64 BELLUM HELVETICUM Imperfect Imperfect eram eramus essem (or forem) essemus {or foremus) eras eratis esses {or fores) essetis {or foretis) erat erant esset {or foret) assent {or forent) Future erd erimus eris eritis erit enint Perfect Perfect fui fuimus fuisti fuistis fuit fuerunt or-6re Pluperfect fueram fueramus fueras fueratis fuerat fuerant Future Perfect fuero fuerimus fueris fueritis fuerit fuerint IMPEEATIVE Present Sd pers. es este Future Sd pers. esto estote 3d pers. esto sunto fuerim fuerimus fueris fueritis fuerit fuerint Pluperfect fuissem fuissemus fuisses fuissetis fuisset fuissent PAETICIPLE Fut. futHrus - INFINITIVE Pres. esse Perf. fuisse Fut. fu turns (esse) or fore APPENDIX 365 67. FIRST CONJUGATION ACTIVE VOICE Principal parts: laudo, laudare, laudavi, laudatum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Present Present SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL laudo laudamus laudem laudemus laudas laudatis laudes laudetis laudat laudant laudet laudent Imperfect Imperfect laudabam laudabamus laudarem laudaremus laudabas laudabatis laudares laudaretis laudabat laudabant laudaret laudarent Future laudabo laudabimus laudabis laudabitis laudabit laudabunt Perfect Perfect laudavi laudavimus laudaverim laudaverimus laud^visti laudavistis laudaveris laudaveritis laudavit laudaverunt laudaverit laudaverint or -ere Pluperfect Pluperfect laudaveram laudaveramus laudavissem laudavissemus laudaveras laudaveratis laudavisses laudavissetis laudaverat laudaverant laudavisset laudavissent Future Perfect laudavero laudaverimus laudaveris laudaveritis laudaverit laudaverint 366 BELLUM HELVETICUM IMPERATIVE INFINITIVE Present Sd pers. lauda laudate Future M pers. laudato laudatote 3d pers. laudato laudanto Fres. laudare Ferf. laudavisse Fuf. laudattirus (esse) PARTICIPLE SUPINE Fres. laudans Ace. laudatum Fut. laudaturus All. GERUND Gen. laudandi Bat. laudando Ace. laudandum AU. laudando laudatu FIEST CONJUGATION PASSIVE VOICE Pri ncipal parts : laudor, laudari, laudatus sum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Present SINGULAR PLURAL laudor laudamur laudaris or -re laudamini laudatur laudantur Imperfect laudabar laudabamur laudabaris or -re laudabamini laudabatur laudabantur Future laudabor laudabimur laudaberis or -re laudabimini laudabitur laudabuntur Present SINGULAR lauder lauderis or -re laudetur PLURAL laudemur laudemini laudentur Imperfect laudarer laudareris or -re laudaretur laudaremur laudaremini laudarentur APPENDIX 367 Perfect laudatus sum laudati sumus laudatus es laudati estis laudatus est laudati sunt Pluperfect laudatus eram laudati eramus laudatus eras laudati eratis laudatus erat laudati eraut Future Perfect laudatus ero laudati erimus • laudatus eris laudati eritis laudatus erit laudati erunt IMPEKATIVE Present Sd vers, laudare laudamini Future £d pers. laudator 3d pers. laudator laudantor Perfect laudatus sim laudati simus laudatus sis laudati sitis laudatus sit laudati sint Pluperfect laudatus essem laudati essemus laudatus esses laudati essetis laudatus esset laudati esseut INFINITIVE Pres. laudari Perf. laudatus esse Fut. laudatum iri PAKTICIPLE Perf. laudatus Fut. laudandus 68. SECOND CONJUGATION ACTIVE VOICE Principal parts: moneo, monere, monui, monitum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Present Present SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL moneo monemus moneam moneamus mones monetis moneas moneatis monet monent moneat moneant 368 BELLUM HELVETICUM Imperfect monebam monebamus monebas monebatis monebat monebant Imperfect monerem moneremus moneres moneretis moneret monerent Future monebo monebimus monebis monebitis monebit monebunt Perfect monui monuimus monuisti monuistis monuit monuerunt or -ere Perfect monuerim monueriinus monueris monueritis monuerit monuerint Pluperfect monueram monueramus monueras monueratis monuerat monuerant Pluperfect monuissem monuissemus monuisses monuissetis monuisset monuissent Future Perfect monuero monuerimus monueris monueritis monuerit monuerint IMPEEATIVE Present Sd pers. mone monete Future Sd pers. moneto monetote 3d pers. moneto monento INFINITIVE Pres. monere Verf. monuisse Fut. monitiirus (esse) PAETICIPLE Pres. monens Fut. moniturus Ace. SUPINE monitum Abl. monitu GERUND Gen. monendi Bat. monendo Ace. monendum Ahl. monendo APPENDIX 369 SECOND CONJUGATION PASSIVE VOICE Principal parts: moneor, moneri, monitus sum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Fresent Present SINGULAR moneor moneris or -re monetur PLURAL monemur monemini monentur SINGULAR monear monearis or -re moneatur PLURAL moneamur moneamini moneantur Imperfect monebar monebamur monebaris or -re monebamini monebatur monebantur Imperfect monerer monereris or -re moneretur moneremur moneremini monerentur Future monebor monebimur moneberis or -re monebimini monebitur monebuntur Ferfect monitus sum monitus es monitus est moniti sumus moniti estis moniti sunt Perfect monitus sim moniti simus monitus sis moniti sitis monitus sit moniti sint Pluperfect monitus eram moniti eramus monitus eras moniti eratis monitus erat moniti erant Pluperfect monitus essem moniti essemus monitus esses moniti essetis monitus esset moniti essent Future Perfect monitus ero moniti erimus monitus erls moniti eritis monitus erit moniti erunt 370 BELLUM HELVETICUM IMPERATIVE Present 2d pers. monere monemini Future Sd pers. monetor 3d pers. monetor INFINITIVE Pres. moneri Ferf. monitus Fut. monitum iri monentor PARTICIPLE Ferf. monitus Fut. monendus 69. THIRD CONJUGATION ACTIVE VOICE Principal parts: duco, ducere, duxi, ductum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Present Present SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL duco ducimus ducam ducamus ducis ducitis ducas ducatis ducit ducunt ducat ducant Imperfect Imperfect duceham ducebamus ducerem duceremus ducebas ducebatis duceres duceretis ducebat ducebant duceret ducerent Future ducam ducemus duces ducetis ducet ducent Perfect duxi duxist^ duxit duximus duxistis duxerunt or -6re Perfect duxerim duxeris duxerit duxerimus duxeritis duxerint APPENDIX 3YJ. Pluperfect Pluperfect duxeram duxeramus duxissem duxissemus duxeras duxeratis duxisses duxissetis duxerat duxerant duxisset duxissent Future Perfect duxero duxerimus duxeris duxeritis duxerit duxerint IMPEEATIVE INFINITIVE Present 2d pers. due* ducite Pres. ducere Future Perf. duxisse M pers. dueito ducitote Fut. ductunis (esse) 3d pers. ducito ducunto PAETIOIPLE SUPINE Pres. ducens Ace. duetum Put. ductunis All. duetu GERUND Gen. ducendi Bat. ducendo Ace. ducendmn AU. ducendo THIRD CONJUGATION PASSIVE VOICE Principal parts : ducor, duci, ductus sum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Present Present SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL ducor dueimur ducar ducamur diiceris or -re duciminT ducaris or -re ducamini ducitur ducuntur ducatur ducantur * Irregular for duce. 372 BELLUM HELVETICUM Imperfect ducebar ducebamur ducebaris or -re ducebamini ducebatur ducebantur Imperfect ducerer duceremur ducereris or -re duceremini ducerStur ducerentur Future ducar ducemur duceris or -re ducemini ducetur ducentur ductus sum ductus es ductus est Perfect ducti sumus ducti estis ducti sunt Perfect ductus sim ducti simus ductus sis ducti sitis ductus sit ducti sint Pluperfect ductus eram ducti eramus ductus essem ductus eras ducti eratis ductus esses ductus erat ducti erant ductus esset Pluperfect ducti essemus ducti essetis ducti essent Future Perfect ductus ero ducti erimus ductus eris ducti eritis ductus erit ducti erunt IMPERATIVE Present 2d pers. ducere ducimini Future M pers. ducitor 3d pers. ducitor ducuntor INFINITIVE Pres. duci Perf. ductus esse Fut. ductum iri PARTICIPLE Perf. ductus Fut. ducendus APPENDIX 373 70. FOURTH CONJUGATION ACTIVE VOICE Principal parts: audio, audire, audivi, auditum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Present Present SINGULAR PLUEAL SINGULAR PLURAL audio audimus audiam audiamus audis auditis audias audiatis audit audiunt audiat audiant Imperfect Imperfect audiebam audiebamus audirem audiremus audiebas audiebatis audires audiretis audiebat audiebant audiret audirent Future audiam audiemus audies audietis audiet audient Perfect Perfect audivi audlvimus audiverim audiverimus audlvisti audlvistis audiveris audiveritis audivit audiverunt or -ere audiverit audiverint Pluperfect audiveram audiveramus audiveras audiveratis audiverat audiverant Pluperfect audivissem audivissemus audivisses audivissetis audivisset audivissent Future Perfect audlvero audiveris audiverit audiverimus audiveritis audiverint 374 BELLUM HELVETICUM IMPEKATIVE Present Sdpers. audi audite Future 2d pers. audito auditote 3d pers. audito audiunt5 PARTICIPLE Pres. audiens Fut. auditurus Ace. SUPINE auditmn AM. auditu INFINITIVE Pres. audire Perf. audivisse Fut. auditurus (esse) GERUND Gen. audiendi Dat. audiendo Ace. audiendum Ahl audiendo FOUETH CONJUGATION PASSIVE VOICE Principal parts: audior, audiri, auditus sum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Present Present SINGULAR audior audiris or -re auditur PLURAL audimur audimini audiuntur Imperfect audiebar audiebamur audiebaris or -re audiebamini audiebatur audiebantur audiar audieris or audietur Future audiemur -re audiemini audientur Perfect auditus sum auditus es auditus est audit! sumus audit! estis audit! sunt SINGULAR PLURAL audiar audiamur audiaris or -re audiamini audiatur audiantur Imperfect au direr audiremur audireris or -re audiremini audiretur audirentur Perfect auditus Sim auditi simus auditus sis auditi sitis auditus sit auditi sint APPENDIX 375 Pluperfect auditus eram audit! eramus auditus eras audit! eratis auditus erat audit! erant Future Perfect auditus ero audit! erimus auditus eris audit! eritis auditus erit audit! erunt IMPEEATIVE Present 2d pers. aud!re audimini Future 2d pers. aiiditor Pluperfect auditus essem audit! essemus auditus esses audit! essetis auditus esset audit! essent INFINITIVE Pres. aud!r! Perf. auditus esse Fut. auditum iri 3d pers. aud!tor audiuntor PAETICIPLE Perf. auditus Fut. audiendus 71. THIRD CONJUGATION IN /O ACTIVE VOICE Principal parts : capio, capere, cepi, captum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Present Present SINGULAR PLURAL capio capimus capis capitis capit capiunt Imperfect capiebam capiebamus eapiel)as capiebatis capiebat capiebant Future capiam capiemus capies capietis capiet capient SINGULAR PLURAL capiam capiamus capias capiatis capiat capiant Imperfect caperem caperemus caperes caperetis caperet caperent 376 BELLUM HELVETICUM Perfect cepi cepimus cepisti cepistis cepit ceperunt or -ere Pluperfect ceperam ceperamus ceperas ceperatis ceperat eeperant Perfect ceperim ceperimus ceperis ceperitis ceperit ceperint Pluperfect cepissem cepissemus cepisses cepissetis cepisset cepissent Future Perfect cepero ceperimus ceperis ceperitis ceperit ceperint IMPERATIVE INt^INITIVE Present 2d pers. cape capite Pres. capere Future Perf. cepisse 2d pers. capito capitote Fut. capturus (esse) 3d pers. capito capiunto PAETICIPLE Pres. capiens Fut. capturus SUPINE Ace. captum Ahl. captu GERUND Gen. capiendi Dat. capiendo Ace. capiendum AH. capiendo THIRD CONJUGATION IN 10 PASSIVE VOICE Principal parts: capior, capi, captus sum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Present SINGULAR PLURAL capior capimur caperis or -re capimini capitur capiuntur Present SINGULAR PLURAL capiar capiamur capiaris or -re capiamini capiatur capiantur APPENDIX 377 Imperfect capiebar capiebaris or -re capiebatur capiebamur capiebamini capiebantur Imperfect caperer capereris or caperetur ■re caperemur caperemini caperentur Future capiar eapieris or -re capietur capiemur capiemini capientur captus sum captus es captus est Perfect capti sumus capti estis capti sunt captus Sim captus sis captus sit Perfect capti simus capti sitis capti sint Pluperfect captus eram captus eras captus erat capti eramus capti eratis capti erant captus essem captus esses captus esset Pluperfect capti essemus capti essetis capti essent Future Perfect captus ero captus eris captus erit capti erimus capti eritis capti erunt IMPERATIVE Present Sdpers. capere capimini Future Sd pers. capitor 3d per s. capitor capiuntor INFINITIVE Pres. capi Perf. captus Fut. captum iri PARTICIPLE Pcrf. captus Fut. capiendus 378 BELLUM HELVETICUM CONTRACTED FORMS 72. When the perfect stem ends in v, the v is sometimes dropped, and usually the two vowels thus brought together contract into one. a. Perfects in -avi, -evi, and -ovi, and the other tenses based on the same stem, sometimes (apparently) drop ve, ve, or vi before r or s. Examples: laudastiforlaudavisti; laudasse forlaudavisse; delerunt for deleverunt; norim for noverira. 6. Perfects in -ivi, and the other tenses based on the same stem, sometimes drop v in all forms. When the resulting combination is iis it usually contracts to is. Examples: audil for audivi; audieram for audiveram; audisse for audivisse. DEPONENT VERBS 73. Deponent verbs have passive forms with active meanings. But the future passive participle is passive in sense, and the perfect participle is sometimes so. On the other hand they have the follow- ing active forms: future infinitive, present and future participles, gerund, supine. Of the following verbs the principal parts, indicative, subjunctive, and imperative are precisely the same as those for the passive voice of the verbs already given for the corresponding conjugations. hortor, urge vereor, fear sequor, follow INFINITIVE Pres. hortari vereri sequi . Terf. hortatus esse veritus esse secutus Fut. hortatums (esse) veriturus (esse) secuturus partior, share partiri partltus esse partiturus ) (esse) PARTICIPLE Tres. hortans Perf. hortatus Fut. hortaturus Fut. Pass, hortandus verens veritus veriturus verendus sequens secutus secuturus sequendus partiens partltus partiturus partiendus GERUND hortandi, -6, etc. verendi, etc. sequendi, etc. partiendi, etc. SUPINE hortatum, -tu veritum, -tu secutum, -tu partitum, -tfl APPENDIX 379 SEMI-DEPONENT VERBS 74. Semi-deponent verbs have active forms for the tenses based on the present stem, passive forms for those based on the perfect stem. They are: audeo, audere, ausus sum, dare gaudeo, gaudere, gavisus sum, rejoice soleo, solera, solitus sum, he accustomed fido, fidere, fisus sum, trust PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION 75. The active periphrastic conjugation expresses future or intended action. It is formed by combining the future active participle with the verb sum: thus, Fres. laudaturus sum, I am about to praise, I intend to praise. Imp. laudaturus eram, I was about to praise, I intended to praise, etc. 76. The passive periphrastic conjugation expresses obligation or necessity. It is formed by combining the future passive participle with the verb sum: thus, Pres. laudandus sum, I am to be (must be) praised, I have to be praised. Imp. laudandus eram, I was to be praised, I had to be praised, etc. IRREGULAR VERBS SUM AND ITS COMPOUNDS 77. For the conjugation of sum, see 66. Sum is inflected in the same way when compounded with the prepositions ad, de, in, inter, ob, prae, sub, super. Praesum has a present participle, praesens. 78. In absum, sum is inflected in the same way, but a is used for ab before f, giving afui, afuturus, etc. There is a present participle absens. 79. In prosum, sum is inflected in the same way, but the preposi- tion pro has its original form prod before all forms of sum beginning with e; as, prodesse, proderam. The present tense is, prosum, prodes, prodest, prosumus, prodestis, prosunt. 80. Possum, be able, can, is a compound of pot- and sum. Principal parts : possum, posse, potui 380 BELLUM HELVETICUM INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Pres. possum, potes, potest possumus, potestis, possunt possim Imp. poteram possem Fut. potero Perf. potui potuerim Plup. potuerara potuissem Fut. Perf. potuero INFINITIVE PAETICIPLE Pres. posse Pres. potens Perf. potuisse 81. f ero, f erre, tuU, latum, bear ACTIVE VOICE INDICATIVE Pres. fero, fers, fert, ferimus, fertis, ferunt Imp, ferebam Fut. feram Perf. tull Plup. tiileram Fut. Perf. tulero IMPEKATIVE Pres. fer ferte Fut. ferto fertote ferto ferunto GEEUND f erendi, etc. INFINITIVE Pres. ferre Perf. tulisse Fut. laturus (esse) PASSIVE VOICE INDICATIVE Pres. feror, ferris, fertur, ferimur, ferimini, feruntur Imp. ferebar Fut. ferar Perf. latus sum Plup. latus eram Fut. Perf. latus ero SUBJUNCTIVE feram ferrem tulerim tulissem PAETICIPLE Pres. ferens Fut. laturus SUPINE latum, -tu SUBJUNCTIVE ferar ferrer latus sim latus essem IMPEKATIVE Pres. ferre, ferimini Fut. fertor fertor, feruntor APPENDIX INFINITIVE Pres. ferri Perf. latus esse Fut. latum iri 82. volo, velle, volui, he willing nolo, nolle, nolui, he U7iwilling malo, malle, malui, prefer 381 PAKTICIPLE Perf. latus FuU ferendus INDICATIVE Pres. volo nolo malo vis non vis mavis vult non vult mavult volumus nolumus malumus vultis non vultis mavultis volunt nolunt malunt Imp. volebam nolebam malebam Fut. volam nolam malam Perf. volui nolui malui Plup. volueram nolueram malueram Fut. Perf. voluero n61uer5 SUBJUNCTIVE maluero Pres. velim nolim malim Imp. vellem nollem mallem Perf. voluerim noluerim maluerim Plup, voluissem noluissem IMPEEATIVE maluissem Pres . noli nolite Fut. nolito nolitote nolito nolunto INFINITIVE Pres. velle nolle malle Perf. voluisse noluisse maluisse PAETICIPLE Pres, volens nolens 382 BELLUM HELVETICUM 83. Fio, be made, 1)6 done, 'become, happen, is the irregular passive of facio, male. Note the i before all vowels, except before e in the combination -er. Principal parts: fio, fieri, f actus sum INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Pres. fio, fis, fit, fimus, fitis, fiunt fiam Imp. fiebam fierem Fut. fiam Perf. factus sum factus sim Plup. factus eram factus essem Fut. Perf. factus ero IMPERATIVE INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE Pres. fi, fite Pres. fieri Perf. factus Perf. factus esse Fut. faciendus Fut. factum Iri 84. eo, ire, ii, itum, go INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE Pres. eo, is, it, imus, itis, eunt earn Imp. ibam irem Fut. ibo Perf. ii {for ivi) ierim Plup. ieram iissem or issem Fut. Perf. ier5 IMPERATIVE INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE Pres. i, ite Pres. ire Pres. iens {Gen. euntis) Fut. ltd, itote Perf. iisse or isse Fut. itiirus ito, eunto Fut. itiirus (esse) GERUND SUPINE eundi, etc. itum, -tii a. In the tenses based on the perfect stem, ii usually contracts to i before s. APPENDIX 383 85. Do, dare, dedi, datum, give, is conjugated like a verb of the first conjugation, except that the stem-vowel is regularly short a. a appears only in the following active forms, — das, da, dans. 86. DEFECTIVE VERBS The most important of these are the perfects memini, I remember; odi, I hate; and coepi, I have begun. Notice that memini and odi have the meanings of presents. Their pluperfects and future perfects have the meanings of imperfects and futures. INDICATIVE Perf. memini odi coepi Plup. memineram oderam coeperam Fut. Perf. meminero odero SUBJUNCTIVE coeperd . Perf. meminerlm oderim coeperim Plup. meminissem odissem IMPEEATIVE coepissem Sing. memento Plur. mementote INFINITIVE Perf. meminisse odisse coepisse Fut. osurus (esse) PARTICIPLE coepturus (esse) Perf. osus coeptus Fut. osurus coepturus a. Instead of coepi the passive form coeptus sum is regularly used when a passive infinitive depends on it. Example: laudari coeptus est, he began to be praised. 87. IMPERSONAL VERBS Impersonal verbs correspond to English impersonals with it. They have no personal subject, but most of them take as subject a substantive clause or sometimes a neuter pronoun. They appear only in the third 384 BELLUM HELVETICUM person singular of the indicative and subjunctive tenses, the present and perfect infinitives, and occasionally in the participles and gerund. They are: a. Most verbs expressing actions of nature; as pluit, it rains. J). The following, which are exclusively impersonal: decet, it te- comes; libet, it pleases; licet, it is permitted; miseret, it causes pity; oportet, it is right; paenitet, it repents; piget, it displeases; pudet, it shames; refert, it concerns; taedet, it wearies. All of these except refert belong to the second conjugation. c. Personal verbs used impersonally with a special meaning; as accedit, it is added, from accedo, I approach. d. The passives of most intransitive verbs; as puguatur, it is fought. LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY References to the body of the book are thus: §736; to the Appendix thus: App. 86. The numerals refer to the lines as numbered in the continuous text, pages 317-333. A., the abbreviation for Aulus, a Roman ''first name" [prae- nomen] a, ab, abs, preposition with abla- tive, away from, from; express- ing agency with passive verbs, hy; with verbs of happening, at the hands of, line 377; at, on, e. g., line 463. In composition with verbs it means away, from ab-do, ab-dere, ab-didi, ab-ditum [do, dare, dedi, datum, give, which in composition often means put], literally, put away; regularly, conceal, hide (transi- tive), se abdere, literally, con- ceal one's self, i.e., hide (in- transitive), withdraw ab-duc6, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, . lead away, carry away abs-tineo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum [teneo, tenere, tenui, tentum, hold], literally, hold away, i.e., refrain ab-sum, ab-esse, a-fui, (a-futurus), present participle absens, he away, he from; in translating any adverbial modifier of this verb, put it before the word away or from in English; e. g., longe abesse, to he far away; neque abest suspicio, literally, and the suspicion is not away, or is not lacking, i. e., there is good reason to suspect ac, a form of atque, used before some consonants ac-cedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum [ad, to], literally, go to or toward; approach; he added, line 348. acceptus, -a, -um, participle of acciplo ac-cido, ac-cidere, ac-cidi, , [ad, to, cado, cadere, cecidi, casum, fall], literally, fall to (anyone); regularly, he fall, hap- pen ac-cipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum [ad, to, capio, capere, cepi, cap- turn, take], literally, take to (one's self); regularly, receive; acceptus, -a, -um, perfect pas- sive participle used as an ad- jective, literally, having heen received; acceptahle ac-curro, -currere, -cucurri or -curri, -cursum [ad, to], liter- ally, run to; ride up, hasten ac-cus6, -are, -avi, -atum [ad, to, and a verb derived from causa. 385 386 BELLUM HELVETICUM caiisel, literally, call to account; reproach, line 296; accuse, line 352 ficer, acris, acre, comparative acrior, superlative acerrimus, sharp, leeii acies, aciei, f., plural limited to nominative and accusative [acer, s/iar2)], literally, sharpness, point, edge; regularly, line of battle, battle line, line 467 acri-ter, adverb, comparative 5cri- us, superlative acerrime [acer, sharp], sharply ad, preposition with accusative; with verb denoting motion, to, toward, or in hostile sense, against; with verbs denoting situation, in the vicinity of, near, at, on, e. g., ad Hispaniam, line 22; before numerals, as many as, to the number of, about, e. g., line 71; denoting purpose or design, for, e. g., ad earn rem, line 81, and so with gerund and gerundive, e.g., line 47; in ex- pressions of time, to, till, e. g., ad vesperum, ad multam noc- tem, lines 473, 474; in composi- tion with verbs it means to, toward, near ad-diico, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, literally, lead on, induce; regu- larly, in perfect passive parti- ciple modified by ablative, in- duced ad-hibeo, -hibere, -hibui, -hibitum [habeo, habere, habui, habi- tum, have, hold], literally, hold near; have . . . present, line 385 ad-miror, -ari, -atus sum, wonder, be surprised ad-mltto, -mittere, -misi, -missum, literally, let go toward Sinjthmg; equo admisso, literally, his horse having been let go, i. e., at full speed, on the gallop ad-orior, -oriri, -ortus sum, liter- ally, rise against; regularly, at- tach ad-scisc6, -sciscere, -scivi, -scitum [scio, Mow, receive as true], lit- erally, receive to anyone; accept ad-sum, ad-esse, af-fui, , be near adulescentia, -ae, f. [adulescens, a youth], youth, youthfulness adventus, -us, m. [ad-venio, confie to], literally, a coming to any- one; i.e., coming, arrival, ap- proach adversus, -a, -um, participle of ad-verto ad-verto, -vertere, -verti, -versum, literally, turn to; animum ad- vertere, literally, turn the mind to, i. e., notice; see animadverts. Perfect passive participle used as an adjective, literally, turned against, i. e., unsuccessful, ad- verse aedificium, -i, n. [aedifico, build, from aedes, dwelling, and facio, maJce], building Aeduus, -a, -um, adjective, Aeduan ; of the Aeduans, relating to the Aeduans. Masculine used as a substantive: singular, an Aedu- an, the Aeduan, lines 56, 151; plural, the Aeduans, the Aedui, the leading tribe of Gaul VOCABULARY 387 aeger, aegra, aegrum, comparative aegrior, superlative aegerrimus, ill, sick aegre, adverb, comparative aegrius, superlative, aegerrime, [aeger, ill'\, literally, illy; regularly, hardly, with difficulty; superla- tive, with the greatest difficulty Aemilius, -i, m. (Lucius) Aemilius, a Koman decurion of cavalry aequo, -are, -avi, -atum [aequus, even], literally, maTce even, i.e., equalize af-ficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum [ad, to, facio, facere, feci, factum do], literally, do to; affect, fill, line 38; visit, line 500 affinitas, affinitatis, f. [ad, to, finis, boundary], connection, re- lationship by marriage ager, agri, m., literally, cultivated land; regularly, field; territory, lines 31, 91, 162; land, line 520 ag-gredior, ag-gredi, ag-gressus sum [ad, to, gradior, gradi, gressus sum, step], literally, go toward, ''go for"; regularly, attacTc agmen, agminis, n. [ago, drive], army on the march; line of march, line 462 ; novissimum ag- men, literally, the newest part of the line of march, i. e., the rear ago, agere, egi, actum, literally, put in motion, drive; speaTc, dis- cuss, line 227; do, line 390 alienus, -a, -um [alius, another], literally, belonging to another; unfavorable, line 270 aliqui, aliqua, aliquod, genitive alicuius, dative alicui, etc., in- definite adjective (some), any alius, alia, aliud, genitive alius, dative alii, etc.; singular, an- other; plural, other or others. Masculine used as a substantive with the same meanings, alia res, literally, another thing, i. e., any- thing else, line 488. As correl- atives, alius . . . alius, one . . . another; plural, alii . . . alii, some . . . others. See §283 Allobroges, Allobrogum, m., the Allohroges, a tribe in that part of Italy beyond the Po, which was called Cisalpine Gaul alo, alere, alui, alitum or altum, literally, nourish; support, line 329 Alpes, Alpium, p., the Alps, a term applied by the Romans to all the mountains in the vicinity of modern Switzerland alter, altera, alterum, genitive alterius, dative alteri, etc., regu- larly, the other (of two), line 97; the second (of more than two), line 32. As correlatives, alter . . . alter, the one . . . the other; plural, alteri . . . alteri, the one party . . . the other party; the one force . . . the other force, line 471. See §283 altitude, altitudinis, r. [altus, high, deep], height, depth altus, -a, -um, high, deep Ambarri, -orum, m. [ambi, about, Arar, the Saone], the Ambarri, kinsmen of the Aeduans, south- east of them, near the Saone amicitia, -ae, f. [amicus, friendly], 388 BELLUM HELVETICUM literally, friendliness ; regularly, friendship, which in foreign re- lations practically meant alliance^ line 47 amicus, -a, -um, friendly, line 153. Masculine used as a substantive, friend, line 54 a-mitto, -mittere, -misi, -missum, literally, let go away; regularly, lose amor, amoris, m. [amo, love'], love amplus, -a, -um, large, great. Neuter comparative used as a substan- tive, more anceps, genitive ancipitis, adjec- tive [ambo, loth, two, caput, head], literally, two-headed; doubtful, line 469 angustiae, -arum, f. [angustus, narrow], literally, narrowness, line 149; narrow pass, line 181 angustus, -a, -um, literally, nar- row, line 94; small, limited, line 39 anim-ad-verto, -vertere, -verti, -versum [animum, accusative of SLUimus, mind], literally, turn the mind to; in eum animadvertere, attend to him, punish him animus, -i, m., literally, mind; en- ergy, courage ; feelings, lines 358, 366 ; sympathies, line 380 annus, -i, m., year annuus, -a, -um [annus, year], year- ly, annual; translated by adverb, annually, line 294 ante, adverb and preposition with accusative, "before; ante diem quintum, the fifth day before antea, adverb, before antiquus, -a, -um [ante, before], former a-perio, -perire, -perui, -pertum, open. Perfect passive participle, used as an adjective, literally, opened; regularly, exposed, open, unprotected apertus, -a, -um, participle of aperio appello, -are, -avi, -atum, call (by name) Aprilis, -e, abbreviation Apr., ad- jective, of April apud, preposition with accusative; with plural object, regularly among; with singular object, with, lines 378, 383; apud se, literally, before himself, i. e., in his presence, line 365 Aquileia, -ae, f., Aquileia, a Roman city at the head of the Adriatic sea Aquitania, -ae, f. [Aquitani], Aquitania, the southern of the three parts into which Caesar divided Gaul Aquitanus, -a, -um, of Aquitania, Aquitanian. Masculine used as a substantive, an Aquitanian, one of the Aquitani; plural, the Aqui- tanians, the Aquitani, inhabit- ants of Aquitania Arar, Araris, m., accusative Ara- rim, ablative Arari, the Saone, a river of southern Gaul, tribu- tary to the Rhone arbitror, -ari, -atus sum, thinh arma, -orum, n., arms a-scendo, -scendere, -scendi, -scen- sum [ad, to, scando, scandere. VOCABULARY 389 scandi, scansum, climh], literallj, climb to; climb up, ascend ascensus, -us, m. [ascendo, ascend], ascent atque, coordinate conjunction, and, usually emphasizing what fol- lows; after words which imply comparison it means thayi, as, from what, etc., according to the English requirement; e. g,, par atque, the same as, lines 521, 522 at-tingo, at-tingere, at-tigi, at- tactum [ad, to, tango, tangere, tetigi, tactum, touch], literally, tonch upon; border on auctoritas, auctoritatis, f., in- fluence audacia, -ae, f. [audax, audacis, daring, bold], daring, boldness audac-ter, adverb, comparative audacius, superlative audacis- sime [audax, genitive audacis, comparative audacior, superla- tive audacissimus (from aude5, dare), daring], daringly, boldly auded, audere, ausus sum, semi- deponent, dare audio, audire, audivi, auditum, hear augeo, augere, auxi, auctum, in- crease Aulus, -i, M., abbreviation A., Aulus, a Eoman *^ first name'' [prae-nomen] aut, coordinate conjunction, or; aut . . . aut, correlative, either . . , or autem, coordinate conjunction, moreover auxilium, -i, n. [augeo, increase], aid, help; reinforcement, line 345; plural, auxiliary forces, auxiliaries a versus, -a, -um, participle of averto a-verto, -vertere, -verti, -versum, turn away. Perfect passive parti- ciple used as an adjective, liter- ally, turned away, i. e., with his bach turned, fleeing, retreating avus, -i, M., grandfather Belga, -ae, m., Belgian, an inhab- itant of the northern of the three divisions of Gaul bellicosus, -a, -um [bellum, war], literally, full of war; warlilce bello, -are, -avi, -atum [bellum, war], make war; fight bellum, -i, n., locative belli, war beneficium, -i, n. [bene, well, f acio, do], Mndness, hind deed Bibracte, Bibractis, n., locative ablative Bibracte or Bibracti, Bibracte, the most important town of the Aeduans biduus, -a, -um [bis, twice, dies, day], literally, of the space of two days, two days. Neuter used as a substantive, with tempus understood, literally, two days' time, i. e., tivo days biennium, -i, n. [bis, twice, annus, year], literally, the space of two years, i. e., two years bipertito, adverb [bis, twice, pars, part], literally, in two parts; in two divisions Bituriges, Biturigum, m., the Bi- turiges, a tribe of central Gaul 390 BELLUM HELVETICUM Boi, -oruin, m., the Boii, a tribe that migrated with the Helve- tians. See App. 16 "bonitas, bonitatis, f. [bonus, good] , literally, goodness; of land, fer- tility bonus, -a, -um, comparative me- lior, superlative optimus, good bracchium, -i, n., forearm, arm C, the abbreviation for Gaius, a Eoman "first name'' [prae- nomen] cado, cadere, cecidi, casum, fall Caesar, Caesaris, m., a Eoman family name [cog-nomen] ; es- pecially (Gains Julius) Caesar, the Roman general and states- man, author of the Commentaries on the Gallic War calamitas, calamitatis, f., disaster, defeat capid, capere, cepi, captum, regu- larly, talce; feel, line 371 ; occupy, line 460 captivus, -a, -um [capio, talce], captive. Masculine used as a substantive, a captive caput, capitis, n., head carrus, -i, m., cart Cassianus, -a, -um [Cassius], re- lating to Cassius; bellum Cassi- anum, the war with Cassius Cassius, -i, m., a Roman name (nomen) ; (Lucius) Cassius (Lon- ginus, consul in 107 B.C., who was attacked and defeated by the Helvetians castellum, -i, n. [diminutive of castrum, fortress], fort Casticus, -i, m., Casticus, a power- ful chief of the Sequanians castra, -drum, n. [castrum, -i, i singular, fortress, not used by i Caesar], a (fortified) camp casus, -us, M. [cado, faZZ], literally, a falling; regularly, chance Catamantaloedes, Catamantaloe- dis,M., Catamantaloedes, a power- ful Sequanian, father of Casticus Caturiges, Caturigum, m., the Caturigcs ; an Alpine tribe causa, -ae, f., regularly, reason, cause; in legal matters, case, lines 68, 74, 367; ablative of cause, for the salce, line 331 caveo, cavere, cavi, cautum, he on one's guard cedo, cedere, cessi, cessum, go (from) ; yield celer, celeris, celere, comparative celerior, superlative celerrimus, quicTc, swift celeri-ter, adverb, comparative celerius, superlative celerrime, [celer, quicTc], quicldy Celta, -ae, m., Celt; as used by Caesar, the local name for the people of central Gaul census, -us, m. [censeo, estimate], estimate, enumeration, census centum, indeclinable cardinal (nu- meral) adjective, one hundred certus, -a, -um, literally, certain, undoubted, line 348; eum certio- rem facio, literally, I maTce him more certain; regularly, I inform him; passive, certior fio, liter- ally, I am made more certain, regularly, / am informed VOCABULARY 391 Ceutrones, Ceutronum, m., the Ceutrones, an Alpine tribe cibarius, -a, -urn [cilDUS, food^, re- lating to food. Neuter plural used as substantive (like English food-stufs), provisions circiter, adverb, al)out circuitus, -us, m. [circum-eo, go around], Uterally, a going around; in circuitu, hy a roundabout route circum, preposition with accusa- tive, around, about circum-venio, -venire, -veni, -ven- tum, literally, come around; in military expressions, outflanTc citerior, citerius, comparative ad- jective (no positive), superla- tive citimus [citra, on this side], nearer; with provincia or Gallia it refers to the province of Cisalpine Gaul, the part of Italy north of the Po citra, preposition with accusative, on this side of, this side civitas, civitatis, f. [civis, citizen], literally, citizenship ; regularly, state; as collective noun, citizens claudo, claudere, clausi, clansum, close; agmen claudere, literally, close the line of march, i. e., bring up the rear cliens, clientis, M.orr., dependent, retainer co-emo, -emere, -emi, -emptum [con, intensive], buy, purchase, the compound resembles the English "buy up" coepi, coepisse, coeptus, defective verb, began (or have begun) ; pluperfect, had begun, etc, pres- ent system supplied by incipio, begin. See App. 86 co-erceo, -ercere, -ercui, -ercitum [con, together, arceo, arcere, arcui, arcitum, enclose], liter- ally, confine; restrain cognitus, -a, -um, participle of cognosce co-gnosc6, -gnoscere, -gnovi, co- gnitum [(g)n6sc6, (g)noscere, (g)n6vi, (g)n6tum, come to Icnow], literally, become acquaint- ed with, regularly, ascertain; when the perfect means I have ascertained, it may be translated I Jcnow, and similarly the phi- perfect I Tcnew, etc. Perfect pas- sive participle used as an adjec- tive, noted, line 519 cogo, cogere, co-egi, co-actum [con, together, ago, agere, egl, actum, drive], literally, drive to- gether, collect; [con, intensive] compel; with infinitive co-hortor, -ari, -atus sum [con, in- tensive, hortor, urge], regularly, address; i. e., speak a few words of encouragement and appeal be- fore a battle col-ligo, -are, -avi, -atum [con, together], fasten together coUis, collis, M., hill col-loco, -are, -avi, -atum [con, in- tensive, locus, place], place; give in marriage, marry off, line 332, and the same with nuptum, line 334 (literally, place to marry) col-loquor, col-loqui, col-locutus sum [con, together], talk with com-buro, -burere, -bussi, -bustum 392 BELLUM HELVETICUM [con, intensive], hum up, the up being intensive in English com-memoro, -are, -avi, -atum [con, intensive, memor, mijid- ful], literally, call to mind, i.e., mention com-me5, -meare, -meavi, -meatum [con, intensive], literally, go bacTi and forth, i. e., resort com-mitt5, -mittere, -misi, -missum [con, together], literally, send together; with proelium, begin, Join; allow, permit, line 238 ; do, line 246 commode, adverb, compared regu- larly [commodus, convenient], conveniently, well com-mone-facio, -facere, -feci, -factum [con, intensive, moneo, warn], passive com-mone-fio, -fieri, -factus sum, literally, make warned, i. e., impress upon com-moveo, -movere, -movi, -mo- tum [con, intensive], literally, move strongly; regularly, alarm; influence, line 376 com-munio, -munire, -munivi, -munitum [con, intensive], lit- erally, fortify strongly; castella communire, literally, fortify forts strongly, i. e., construct strong forts commutatio, commutationis, f. [com-muto, change], a change com-muto, -are, -avi, -atmn [con, intensive], change completely com-paro, -are, -avi, -atum [con, intensive], prepare, provide com-perio, -perire, com-peri, -per- tum [con, intensive], find out com-plector, -plecti, -plexus sum [con, together], literally, weave together; regularly, embrace com-pleo, -plere, -plevi, -pletum [con, intensive], completely fill; cover com-plures, com-plura (or com- pluria), genitive com-plurium [con, intensive], several, quite a number of. Used also sub- stantively com-porto, -are, -avi, -atum [con, together], bring together, bring to one place con-, form of cum [com] in com- position, meaning with or to- gether; very often merely in- tensive conatum, -i, n. [really the neuter of the perfect, here passive, participle of conor], literally, a thing attempted, i. e., an attempt conatus, -us, m. [conor, attempt], attempt con-cedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum [con, intensive], grant con-cido, -cidere, -cidi, -cisum [con, intensive, caedo, caedere, cecidi, caesum, cut down], cut to pieces, Mil con-cilio, -ciliare, -ciliavi, -cilia- tum [concilium, council], liter- ally, bring together; regularly, win, gain concilium, -i, n., assembly, council concursus, -us, m, [con-curro, run together], literally, a running to- gether ; charge condicio, condicionis, f. [con-dico, say together], literally, a saying together, i. e., terms con-ddno, -are, -avi, -atum [con, VOCABULARY 393 intensive, donum, gift], forgive; the dative accompanying this verb may be translated out of regard for con-duco, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, lead together, bring together, collect confectus, -a, -urn, participle of conficio con-fero, con-ferre, con-tuli, col- latum, bring together, collect ; se conferre, literally, convey one's self, regularly, retire confertus, -a, -um, crowded con-ficio, -ficere, -feci, -factum • [con, intensive, facio, facere, feci, factum, do], literally, do completely, ' ' do up, ' ' i. e., finish, complete; malce out, write, lines 524, 525 edn-fido, -fidere, -fisus sum, semi- deponent [con, intensive], trust; governs dative con-firmo, -are, -avi, -atum [con, intensive], literally, maTce firm, confirm, i. e., establish; affirm, declare, line 49 con-icio, -icere [pronounced as if spelled coniicio, coniicere], -ieci, -tectum [con, intensive, iacio, iacere, ieci, iactum, throw], throic coniuratio, coniurationis, f., liter- ally, a swearing together, i. e., a conspiracy Conor, -ari, -atus sum, fry, attempt; idem conari, literally, attempt the same thing, i. e., maTce the same attempt con-quiro, -quirere, -quisivi, -qui- situm [con, intensive, quaero. quaerere, quaesivi, quaesitum, seelc], seelc out, search out con-sanguineus, -a, -um [con, to- gether, sanguis, blood], literally, of common blood, i. e., related. Masculine used as a substantive, Mnsman con-scisco, -sciscere, -scivi, -sci- tum [scio, ]c7iow], literally, de- cree; sibi mortem c5nsciscere, literally, decree death to one's self, i. e., commit suicide con-scius, -a, -um [con, with, scio, Inow], literally, Tcnowing with some one, i. e., conscious, aware con-scribo, -scribere, -scripsi, -scriptum, literally, write to- gether, i. e., enroll con-sequor, con-sequi, con-secutus sum [con, intensive], literally, follow closely, i. e., pursue or overtale Considius, -i, m. (Publius) Con- sidius, an oflScer in Caesar 's army con-sido, -sidere, -sedi, -sessum [related to seded, sit], literally, sit down together, settle; regu- larly, encamp consilium, -i, n., plan con-sisto, -sistere, con-stiti, [con, together], literally, stand together; regularly, take one's stand c6n-s61or, -ari, -atus sum, comfort, console conspectus, -iis, m., sight con-spicor, -ari, -atus sum, see c5n-stituo, -stituere, -stitui, -sti- tutum [con, intensive, statuo, statuere, statui, statiitum, sta- tion (transitive), from sto, 394 BELLUM UELVETICUM Stand (intransitive)], with com- plementary infinitive, decide; with direct object or in pas- sive, determine; appoint, lines 70, 139 con-suesco, -suescere, -suevi, -sue- tum, become accustomed ; perfect, I have become accustomed = (regularly) I am accustomed; pluperfect, / had become accus- tomed = I was accustomed, etc. consul, consulis, m., consul, the title given to one of the two co- ordinate chief executive officers of the Eoman republic con-sumo, -sumere, -sumpsi, -sump- tum, literally, take away alto- gether, i. e., use up, destroy, con- sume con-tendo, -tenders, -tendi, -ten- turn [con, intensive, tendo, stretchl, literally, strain, strug- gle; regularly, either (1) fight, contend, or (2) hurry, hasten continenter, adverb [continens, present participle of contineo, hold together], continually ; with- out stopping, line 483 con-tineo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum [con, intensive, teneo, tenere, tenui, tentum, hold], literally, hold fast; bound, lines 16, 30; Tceep, line 275 contra, adverb, against; against him, line 326 contumelia, -ae, f., insult, afront con-venio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, literally, come together, i. e., as- semble (intransitive) ; meet, line 493 conventus, -us, m. [convenio, come together], literally, a coming to- gether; assembly conversus, -a, -um, participle of convert© con-verto, -vertere, -verti, -ver- sum [con, intensive], literally, turn completely, turn around; reverse, line 433 con-voco, -are, -avi, -atum, call to- gether copia, -ae, f., singular, plenty, supply; number, line 292; plural, forces, troops copiosus, -a, -um [copia, supply], literally, full of supplies, i. e'., well supplied, wealthy, prosperous cornu, cornus, n., horn; of an army, uHng corpus, corporis, n., body cotidianus, -a, -um [cotidie, daily], daily; regular, usual, line 360 cotidie, adverb [quot, each, dies, day], daily Crassus, -i, m., a Eoman family name [cog-nomen] ; (Marcus Licinius) Crassus, the wealthy Eoman, who, with Caesar and Pompey, formed the first trium- virate cremo, -are, -avi, -atum, burn, used of persons creo, creare, creavi, creatum, liter- ally, produce; elect, line 294 cresco, crescere, crevi, cretum, literally, groic, increase; become powerful, line 373 cultus, -Us, M. [colo, cultivate], civilisation, comfort cum, preposition with ablative, with. Enclitic with personal pro- VOCABULARY 395 nouns, and often with quis and qui cum, subordinate conjunction, when, since, or although; if it introduces a verb in the indica- tive it means when; if it intro- duces a verb in the subjunctive, it is necessary to consider which one of the three meanings makes the best sense. For more exact description of uses, see §§693, 700 cupide, adverb, compared regularly [cupidus, desirous, eager], eager- ly; comparative, too eagerly, line 269 cupiditas, cupiditatis, f. [cupidus, desirous, fond], desire, fondness cupidus, -a, -um [cupio, desire], desirous, fond; modified by a genitive cupio, cupere, cupivi, cupitum, regularly, desire; wish well, line 334; governs dative cur, adverb, why cHro, -are, -avi, -atum, literally, care for; with object modified by a gerundive, cause custos, custodis, m. or f., regu- larly, guard, watch; watchers, ''secret service men," line 389 damno, -are, -avi, -atum, condemn de, preposition with ablative, regu- larly (1) down from, down; or (2) concerning, of; with causa, for; in expressions of time, dur- ing ; taking place of partitive genitive, of, line 271. In com- position with other words, away, down, thoroughly (intensive) debeo, debere, debui, debitum, (1) oive or (2) ought (which was the past of owe in old English) decern, indeclinable cardinal (nu- meral) adjective, ten de-cipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum [capio, capere, cepi, captum, taJce], literally, taJce away (one's security), i.e., deceive; compare the English ''take in'' decurio, decurionis, m. [decern, ten], decurion, the officer in com- mand of a small squad of cavalry (originally ten men) dediticius, -a, -um, literally, given up. Masculine used as a sub- stantive, prisoner, captive deditio, deditionis, f. [de-do, give up], a giving up, i.e., surrender de-f endo, -f endere, -f endi, -f ensum, literally, tvard of from; usually, defend defessus, -a, -um, exhausted; vul- neribus defessi, literally, ex- hausted with wounds, i. e., many being wounded, on account of their heavy losses de-icio, -icere (pronounced as if spelled deiicid, deiicere), -ieci, -iectum [iacio, iacere, ieci, iac- tum, throw], literally, throw dotvn,cast down; disappoint, line 143 de-inde, adverb, literally, thence, regularly, then delibero, -are, -avi, -atum, delib- erate, consider 396 BELLUM HELVETICUM de-ligo, -ligere, -legi, -lee turn, choose {from), select de-minu6, -minuere, -minui, -mi- nutum [de, from, minus, less], lessen, diminish de-monstro, -are, -avi, -atum, point out, show demum, adverb, at length denique, adverb, finally de-pono, -ponere, -posui, -positum, literally, 2)lace down; lay aside de-populor, -ari, -atus sum, ravage (completely) dgprecator, deprecatoris, m., iti- tercessor, advocate; eo depreca- tore, ablative absolute, he (being) intercessor, i. e., with him as in- tercessor de-signd, -are, -avi, -atum [signum, marJc], literally, marlc down, i. e., designate, mean de-sisto, -sistere, de-stiti, , literally, stop (intransitive) from something, i. e., cease de-spero, -are, -avi, -atum [spes, hope], literally, hope away, i. e., despair. With this verb an accom- panying preposition de means of de-spicio, -spicere, -spexi, -spec- tum, literally, look down on, i. e., despise de-stitu6, -stituere, -stitui, -stitll- tum [statuo, statuere, statui, statutum, station (transitive), from sto, stand (intransitive)], literally, sta/ion (transitive) down, put aside, i. e., desert destrictus, participle of destringo de-stringo, -stringere, -strinxi, -striatum, draw (from) de-terreo, -terrere, -terrui, -terrl- tum, frighten (from), deter, pre- vent; ne with subjunctive fol- lowing is translated by from with the English verbal in -ing deus, -i, M., god. For declension see §713 dexter, dextra, dextrum, some- times dexter, dextera, dexterum, right (opposite of left). Femi- nine used as a substantive, with manus understood, right hand died, dicere, dixi, dictum, say ; ap- point, line 107; causam dicere, plead a case dictio, dictionis, f. [dico, say], lit- erally, a faying; causae dictio, the pleading (of) the case didici, perfect of disco dies, diei, usually masculine, some- times feminine in the singular (when referring to a definite day), day; time, line 129 dif-fero, dif-ferre, dis-tuli, di-la- tum [dis-, apart], literally, bear apart, i. e., differ, be different dif-ficilis, -e, comparative dif- ficilior, superlative difficillimus [dis-, apaH, facilis, easy], diffi- cult, hard di-mitto, -mittere, -misi, -missum [dis-, apart], literally, send opart, i. e., dismiss, adjourn dis-, inseparable prefix meaning apart, having also the forms di- and dif- dis-cedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, literally, go apart, regularly, go away, depart disco, discere, didici, , learn dis-icio, -icere (pronounced as if spelled disiicid, disiicere), -lea, VOCABULARY 397 -iectum [iacio, iacere, ieci, iac- tum, throw], literally, throw apart; break dis-pono, -ponere, -posui, -positum, literally, place apart, i. e., place at intervals ditissimus, -a, -um, superlative of dives diu, adverb, comparative diutius, superlative diutissime, long, for a long time; comparative too long, line 290 diuturnus, -a, -um [diu, adverb, long], long, adjective, referring to time dives, genitive divitis, adjective, (for declension see App. 35, a), comparative divitior or ditior, superlative divitissimus or ditis- simus, rich Diviciacus, -i, m., Diviciacus, a very influential Aeduan Divico, Diviconis, m., Divico, a Helvetian chief divide, dividere, divisi, divisum [dis-, apart, video, see], divide, separate divisus, -a, -um [perfect passive participle of divide], divided do, dare, dedi, datum, give; allow, line 242. See §52, last part doled, dolere, dolui, , feel pain, suffer dolor, doloris, m. [doled, feel pain], distress dolus, -i, M., deceit domus, -us, F., home. For de- clension, see §457 dubitatio, dubitationis, r. [dubito, hesitate], hesitation dubitd, -are, -avi, -atum, . [dubius, doubtful], hesitate; when fol- lowed by quin, usually, doubt dubius, -a, -um [duo, two], doubtful ducenti, -ae, -a [duo, two, centum, hundred], two hundred duco, dticere, duxi, ductum, regu- larly, lead; sometimes consider, as line 48; draw, line ^Q; put of, lines 289, 290; in matri- monium ducere, literally, lead into marriage, i. e., marry dum, subordinate conjunction, while; until Dumnorix, Dumnorigis, m., Dum- norix, a troublesome Aeduan chief duo, duae, duo, cardinal (numeral) adjective two. For declension, see §504 duo-decim, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective [duo, two, decem, ten], twelve duo-de-viginti, indeclinable car- dinal (numeral) adjective, lit- erally, two from twenty, i. e., eighteen dux, ducis, M. or f. [duc5, lead], leader; guide, line 396 e, form of the preposition ex, be- fore many of the consonants e-duco, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, lead out ef-femino, -are, -avi, -atum [femi- na, woman], literally, malce wom- anish, i, e., weaken ef-fero, ef-ferre, ex-tuli, e-latum, literally, bear out; talce ego, mei, first personal pronoun, I. For declension, see §551 398 BELLUM HELVETICUM e-gredior, e-gredi, e-gressus sum [gradior, gradi, gressus sum, step], go out egregius, -a, -um [e, out, grex, floclc], literally, out of the com- mnon herd, i. e., conspicuous, pre- eminent e-mitto, -mittere, -misi, -missum, literally, let go out of ; drop emo, emere, emi, emptum, liter- ally, take; regularly, huy enim, coordinate conjunction, for e-nuntio, -nuntiare, -nuntiavi, nuntiatum [nuntius, messen- ger], liteTally, tell out; regularly, disclose, report, announce eo, ire, ii, or ivi, itum, go; travel, line 481. For conjugation, see §465 eo, adverb, literally, thither, i. e., to that point, or, less exactly, there eodem, adverb, to the tame point eques, equitis, m. [equus, horse], horseman; plural, horsemen, cav- alry equester, equestris, equestre [eques, horseman], literally, per- taining to cavalry, i. e., cavalry (adjective) equitatus, -us, m. [eques, horse- man], (body of) cavalry equus, -i, m., horse e-rlpio, -ripere, -ripui, -reptum [rapid, rapere, rapui, raptum, snatch], literally, snatch out; talce away, line 310; free; se eripere, literally, free one's self, i. e., escape, line 74 erro, -are, -avi, -atum, wander et, coordinate conjunction, and; et . . . et, both . . . and etiam, adverb [et, and, iam, al- ready], even; also e-vell6, -vellere, -velli, -vulsum, pull out ex, preposition with ablative, out from, out of, or merely from; taking place of partitive geni- tive, of, lines 481, 530; giving point of view, on, lines 30, 32; in, line 68; diem ex die, from day to day. In composition with verbs, from, out, completely exemplum, -i, n., example, prece- dent ex-eo, ex-ire, ex-ii or ex-ivi, ex- itum, go out exercltus, -us, m. [exerceo, exer- cise], literally, exercise, train- ing; regularly, (a trained, i. e., Eoman) army existimatio, existimati5nis, f. [existimo, thiiilc], opinion, judg- ment existimo, -are, -avi, -atum, thinTc ex-pedio, -pedire, -pedivi, -pedi- tum [pes, pedis, foot], literally, get one's foot out, i. e., extricate one's self. Perfect passive par- ticiple as adjective, quicTc, free expeditus, -a, -um, participle of expedio explorator, exploratoris, m. [ex- ploro, find out], literally, one who finds out, i. e., regularly, scout ex-pugno, -are, -avi, -atum [pug- na, fight], literally, fight out; regularly, talce by storm ex-sequor, ex-sequi, ex-secutus sum, literally, follow out; we say follow up, i. e., enforce, line 75 VOCABULARY 399 ex-specto, -are, -avi, -atum, liter- ally, looTc out (intransitive), looJc out for (transitive); regularly, wait (intransitive), wait for or await (transitive) exterus, -a, -um, comparative ex- terior, superlative extremijs (or extimus), outside, comparative outer, exterior, superlative most distant, farthest extra, preposition with accusative, outside extremus, -a, -um, superlative of exterus ex-uro, -iirere, -ussi, -ustum, liter- ally, hum out; we say, hum up facile, adverb, comparative faci- lius, superlative facillime, [fa- cilis, easy], easily facilis, -e, comparative facilior, superlative facillimus [faci5, do], literally, do-ahle; regularly, easy facid, facere, feci, factum, regu- larly malce or do ; with vis, use ; withproelium, /i^7i<; wath pons, huild; with copia, ^{i;e; iter fa- cere, literally, make a march, i. e., march; with certior, see certus; with satis, see that word. Passive, fio, fieri, factus sum, regularly, he made or he done; happen, line 379. For conjuga- tion, see §632 facultas, facultatis, f. [facilis, easy], opportunity; plural, re- sources fames, famis, f., ablative fame, hunger; famem tolerare, liter- ally, satisfy hunger, i. e., live familia, -ae, f. [famulus, servant] ^ literally, a hody of servants, i. e., retinue familiaris, -e [familia, hody of servants], literally, belonging to the household, res familiaris, private property. Masculine used as a substantive, literally, one belonging to the household, i. e., personal friend faveo, favere, favi, fautum, he favorable, favor; governs dative fere, adverb, almost; nearly fero, ferre, tuli, latum, bear, carry; with auxilium, bring; gravius ferre, literally, hear more heavily^ i. e., be more displeased. For cinjugation, see §714 fides, fidei, f., plural limited to nominative and accusative, pledge; fidelity, loyalty, line 356; confidence, line 362 filia, -ae, f., dative and ablative plural filiabus; daughter filius, filii, m., son finis, finis, m.; ablative fini or fine; singular, end; plural regu- larly territory, sometimes bound- aries finitimus, -a, -un^ [finis, end, boundary], literally, neighboring, near, lines 330, 517. Masculine used as a substantive, neighbor fio, fieri, factus sum, see faciS firmus, -a, -um, strong flagito, -are, -avi, -atum, demand (strongly); governs two accusa- tives fleo, flere, flevi, tetum, weep, cry. 400 BELLUM HELVETICUM Present participle, literally, weeping, better translated, with tears flumen, fluminis, n. [fluo, flow], river fluo, fluere, fluxi, fluxum, flow fortis, -e, hrave forti-ter, adverb, compared regu- larly [fortis, irave], bravely fortitudo, fortitudinis, r. [fortis, brave], bravery fortuna, -ae, f., fortune; plural in the sense of possessions, property, line 195 fossa, -ae, f. [fodid, dig], ditch, trench frater, fratris, m., brother f raternus, -a, -um [ frater, b rother] , brotherly frigus, frigoris, n., cold; plural, literally, cold ipclls friimentarius, -a, -um [frumen- tum, grain], literally, pertaining to grain; productive (of grain), line 167; res friimentaria, grain supply, supply of grain frumentum, -i, n. [fruor, enjoy], literally, the means of enjoyment; regularly, grain; plural, stand- ing grain, grain in the fields frux, frugis, f., usually plural, crops, produce fuga, -ae, f. [fugio, flee], flight fugitivus, -a, -um [fugio, flee], fleeing, fugitive. Masculine used as substantive, deserter Gabinlus, -i, m. (Aulus) Gabinius, consul 58 B.C. Gallia, -ae, f. [Gallus, a Gaul], Gaul, the country, a name used by Caesar in two senses (1) the territory comprising what is now France with all the country north of it to the Khine; used thus, line 1; (2) the central division of the above, described in lines 2-5 Gallicus, -a, -um [Galli, the Gauls], pertaining to the Gauls, i.e., Gallic Gallus, -a, -um, relating to Gaul, i. e., Gallic, line 428. Masculine used as a substantive, singular, a Gaul, plural, the Gauls, terms used in two senses as in the case of Gallia above Garumna, -ae, m., the Garonne river, in southwestern Gaul Genava, -ae, f., modern Geneva, a city of the Allobroges gens, gentis, f., race, tribe Germanus, -a, -um, relating to Ger- many, i. e., German. Masculine used as a substantive, German gero, gerere, gessi, gestum, usually with bellum, carry on, ivage; do, line 311 gladius, -i, m., sword gloria, -ae, f., reputation glorior, gloriari, gl5riatus sum [gloria, glory], boast (of), glory (in) Graecus, -a, -um, Greelc Graioceli, -orum, m., the Graioceli, a Gallic tribe living in the Graian Alps gratia, -ae, f., favor, popularity gravis, -e, literally, heavy; compar- ative, too serious, lines 369, 377 graviter, adverb, compared regu- larly [gravis, heavy], literally, heavily; bitterly; see also fero VOCABULARY 401 habeo, habere, habui, habitum, have; have means hold, and in the passive the regular meaning of this verb is be held, in the sense of he considered Helveticus, -a, -um, Helvetian Helvetius, -a, -um, Helvetian (Swiss). Masculine used as a substantive, singular, a or the Helvetian (Swiss), plural, the Helvetians, Helvetii (Swiss), the ancient inhabitants of part of modern Switzerland hibernus, -a, -um, winter. Neuter plural used as a substantive with castra understood, literally, win- ter camp, i. e., winter quarters hie, haec, hoc, demonstrative ad- jective and pronoun, this, plural, these. For declension, see §134, and for uses, §136 hiemo, -are, -avi, -atum [hiems, winter'], winter, pass the winter Hispania, -ae, f., /Spain homo, hominis, m. or f., literally, a human being (as distinguished from an animal); usually man (in the above sense) honor or honos, honoris, m., o^ce, distinction, honor hora, -ae, f., hour, among the Eomans one of the twelve equal divisions of the daylight hortor, -ari, -atus sum, urge hostls, hostis, M,, a public enemy; singular, an enemy, one of the enemy; usually plural, the enemy, which is generally a collective noun in English humanitas, humanitatis, f. [huma- nus, human, from homo, mani, refinement I (vowel) ibi, adverb, there, in that place ictus, -us, M., blow idem, eadem, idem, the same. For declension, see §482 idus, Iduum, plu., f., the Ides of a month, the 15th of March, May, July, and October, the 13th of other months ignis, ignis, m., ablative igni, fire ignoro, -are, -avi, -atum, he un- acquainted with, ignore ; passive, he unknown, be overlooJced ille, ilia, illud, demonstrative ad- jective and pronoun, that, plural, those. For declension, see §135, and for uses, §136 illic, adverb [ille, that], there im-mortalis, -e [in-, not, mors, death], literally, not liable to death, i. e., immortal impedimentum, -i, n. [impedio, hinder], hindrance, impediment; plural, regularly, baggage of an army im-pedio, -pedire, -pedivi, -peditum [in, in, pes, pedis, foot], liter- ally, cause a man to "get his foot into it," i. e., hinder; im- pede, interfere with, line 456; perfect passive participle, at a disadvantage, line 207 impeditus, -a, -um, participle of impedid im-pende6, -pendere, , [in, into], literally, overhang, 402 BELLUM HELVETICUM i. e., in the case of a mountain, tower above imperium, -i, n. [impero, rule}, control, rule im-pero, -are, -avi, -atum, with da- tive and ut clause, command, the dative being translated by an objective J with dative and ac- cusative, demand (from), levy (upon) im-petro, -are, -avi, -atum, ohtain one's request impetus, -us, m. [in, for, peto, seeJc], attack or charge im-porto, -are, -avi, -atum, bring in, import im-probus, -a, -um [in-, not, probus, approved], reclless, malicious im-proviso, adverb, not compared [in-, not, provisus, participle of pro-video, fore-see], unexpectedly impune, adverb (im-punis, unpun- ished), without punishment, with innpunity impunitas, impunitatis, f. [im-pti- nis, un-punished], freedom from punishment, impunity in, preposition with accusative and ablative. (1) With accusative, into; to, toward; with latitudi- nem, longitudinem, altitudinem, in, and so with many verbs that imply motion in Latin but not in English; also upon, on to. (2) With ablative, i??; on, at; among. (3) In composition with verbs it means in, on, into, against in-, an inseparable negative par- ticle, used chiefly with adjec- tives, meaning not; like the English ''incapable," "unbear- able," etc. in-cendo, -cendere, -cendi, -censum, set fire to, set on fire in-cito, -are, -avi, -atum, urge on, arouse in-colo, -colere, -colui (-cultum), literally, live in; transitive, in- habit, line 2; elsewhere intran- sitive, live in-commodus, -a, -um, in-convenient. Neuter used as a substantive, literally, an inconvenient thing, an inconvenience ; disaster, line 231 in-credibilis, -e, literally, un-believ- able; incredible, extraordinary inde, adverb, thence, from that place; in colloquial English, "from there" indicium, i, n., information, evh dence ; freely, informers, line 67 in-duco, -ducere, -duxi, -ductumf lead on, induce, influence inductus, -a, -um [perfect passive participle of induco], influenced in-fero, in-ferre, in-tuli, il-latum, literally, bring upon; with ca- lamitatem, iniurias, inflict . . . upon inferus, -a, -um, comparative in- ferior, superlative infimus or imus, low in-flecto, -flectere, -flexl, -flexum, bend (in), bend over in-flu6, -fluere, -fluxi, -fluxum, flow (into) in-imicus, -a, -um [in, not, amicus, friendly], unfriendly, lir.e 125. Masculine used as a substantive, (personal) enemy, line 166 VOCABULARY 403 initium, -i, n. [in-eo, go into, begin], beginning iniuria, -ae, f. [in-iurus, not right, from ius, right], wrong; harm, damage, lines 127, 160 in-iussu, adverb [in-, not, iussu, ablative, by order], without com- mand in-opia, -ae, f., lacJc in-opinans, -opinantis, adjective, literally, not expecting, unaware ; when modifying a subject or an object, it may be translated by the adverb, unawares, unexpect- edly inoLuam, inquis, inquit, and per- fect tense, third person singu- lar, inquit, a defective verb, used only within a direct quo- tation, say in-sciens, -scientis, adjective [in-, not, sciens, present participle of scio, "know], literally, not Jcnoiv- ing, unwitting in-sequor, in-sequi, in-secutus sum, follow (close) upon, follow closely, fellow up insidiae, -arum, f., amhiiscades in-signis, -e [signum, marlc], liter- ally, having a mark upon one, i. e., marled. Neuter used as a substantive, a sign, signal; plural, decorations insolenter, adverb, compared regu- larly [in-solens, unaccustomed], literally, unwontedly ; haughtily in-stituo, -stituere, -stitui, -stitu- tum [statuo, statuere, statui, statutum, station (transitive), from sto, stand (intransitive)]. literally, station upon, establish; train, line 262 instittitum, -i, n. [neuter of perfect passive participle of instituo, establish], literally, a thing estab- lished, i. e., custom in-sto, -stare, -stiti, -statum [sto, stare, steti, statum, stand (in- transitive)], literally, stand on; draw near, line 290; press for- ward, line 405 in-stru6, -struere, -struxi, -struc- tum, literally, build on, con- struct; with aciem, draw up intel-lego, -legere, -lexi, -lectum [inter, among, lego, legere, legi, lectum, choose], understand; realize inter, preposition with accusative; used with reference to two ob- jects, between; with reference to more than two, among, inter se (eos) dare, literally, give among themselves (them), i. e., exchange inter-cedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, literally, go between, i. e., inter- vene inter-cludo, -cludere, -clusi, -clu- sum [claudo, claudere, clausi, clausum, close], literally, close something between two objects, regularly, cut of inter-diu, adverb [dies, day], dur- ing the day, by day inter-dum, adverb, literally, as we say, between whiles; regularly, meamvhile inter-ea, adverb (ea, some old case form of is), meanwhile inter-ficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum 404 BELLUM HELVETICUM [facio, facere, feci, factum, do, maJce], literally, malce to be among other things, as we say, maTce away with; regularly, Tcill interim, adverb [inter, 'between, among], meanwhile interior, interius, comparative ad- jective (no positive), superlative intimus [inter, inside], inner, inmost inter-mitto, -mittere, -misi, -mis- sum, literally, send into the midst of something, i. e,, interrupt, line 483; passive, intervene, line 489; come on, line 498 internecio, intemecionis, f. [inter- neco, destroy], destruction inter-pres, inter-pretis, m. or f., literaUj, one who explainshetween two parties, i. e,, an interpreter inter-sum, inter-esse, inter-f m, — , he between inter-vallum, -i, n. interval in-vitus, -a, -um, un-willing. se (eo) invito, ablative absolute, literally, he (being) unwilling, 1. e., without his consent. Simi- larly, Sequanis invitis, without the consent of the Sequanians ipse, ipsa, ipsum, intensive pro- noun, himself, herself, itself, plural themselves. For declen- sion, see §404, and for uses, §406. The genitive may often be used instead of an agreeing form of suus, a, um, for empha- sis or contrast, e. g., ipsius, his own, lines 407, 413. Sometimes translated in other ways, e. g., ipsum, the very one, line 321 is, ea, id, demonstrative adjective and pronoun, this, that, he, she, it, etc. For declension, see §142, and for uses, §143 ita, adverb, so, in the sense of in such a manner ; as follows, lines 227, 241. Contrast the meaning of tam Italia, -ae, f., Italy ita-que, conjunction and adverb, and so, therefore item, adverb [idem, the same], likewise iter, itineris, n. [eo, go], literally, a going; journey; route; pas- sage; march; iter facere, liter- ally, maTce a march, i. e., march; ex itinere, on the march I (consonant) iacto, -are, -avi, -atum [frequenta- tive or intensive verb of iacio, throw], literally, Tceep throwing, toss; jerJc about, line 457 ; figur- atively, discuss, line 318 iam, adverb, already; now iubeo, iubere, iussi, iussum, order iudicium, -i, n. [iudico, judge], trial iudico, -are, -avi, -atum, judge iugum, -i, N. [iug, stem of iungo, join],yo'ke; of a hill, the ridge iumentum, -i, n. [iugum, yolce], lit- erally, a yoke animal, i. e., beast of burden, pack animal, applied to oxen and horses iungo, iungere, iunxi, iunctum, join lura, -ae, m., the Jura mountain range, the Jura mountains, which extend from the Ehine to the Rhone VOCABULARY 405 iuro, -are, -avi, -atum, swear, in the sense of taJce an oath ius, iuris, n., right ius iurandum, iuris iurandi, n., compound nonn, used only in the singular, oath itistitia, -ae, f. [iiistus, just, from ius, right], justice iuvo, iuvare, iuvi, iiitum, help Kalendae, -arum, f., abbreviation Kal., the Kalends, the first day of the Eoman month L., abbreviation for Lucius, a Roman '^ first name" [prae- nomen] Labienus, -i, m. (Titus) Ldhienus, Caesar's favorite officer. lacesso, lacessere, lacessivi, laces- situm, literally, prorofce; in mili- tary language, harass lacrima, -ae, f., tear lacus, -us, M., dative and ablative plural lacubus, lalce largior, largiri, largitus sum, liter- ally, give freely; hrihe largiter, adverb, comparative lar- gius, superlative largissime, lit- erally, ahundantlii ; largiter pos- se, literally, he abundantly able, i. e., have great influence largitio, largitionis, f. [largior, give freely], free giving late, adverb, compared regularly [latus, ivide, broad], widely, broadly latitudo, latitudinis, f. flatus. wide, broadl, width, breadth Latobrigi, -orum, m., the Latobrigi, a tribe living north of the Hel- vetians latus, -a, -um, wide, broad latus, lateris, n., side; in military language, flanlc laudo, -are, -avi, -atum, praise legatio, legationis, f. [legatus, am- bassador], embassy legatus, -i, m. [lego, -are, seiid as one's representative], literally, a man delegated with power ; hence in military language, lieutenant of any rank, especially a lieu- tenant-general or staf -officer; in diplomatic relations, ambassador, commissioner legio, legionis, f. [lego, -ere, choose], legion, a division of the Roman army of about 3600 men Lemannus, i, m., (Lalce) Geneva lenitas, lenitatis, f. [lenis, smooth], smoothness lex, legis, f., law liber, libera, liberum, comparative liberlor, superlative liberrimus, free liberalitas, liberalitatis, f. [libera- lis, generous], generosity libere, adverb, comparative liberius, superlative liberrime [liber, li- berior, liberrimus, free], freely liberi, -orum, m. [liber, free], free children libertas, libertatis, f. [liber, free], freedom liceor, liceri, licitus sum, bid at auction; line 326 licet, licerO; licuit, impersonal verb, it is permitted Lingones, -um, m., the Lingones, 406 BELLUM HELVETICUM a Gallic tribe north of the Aeduans lingua, -ae, f., literally, tongue, but often in the sense of language linter, lintris, f., genitive plural lintrlum, small boat, probably a "dug-out^' Liscus, -i, M., Lisciis, a chief of the Aeduans littera, -ae, f., a letter of the al- phabet; plural, literally, letters of the alphabet, regularly a letter in the sense of an epistle; dis- patch locus, -i, M., place, plural loca, -orum, N., places. [The regular masculine plural is used (not in Caesar) in the sense of places in a hooTc, passages, topics^ longe, adverb, compared regularly [longus, long^, far; hy far longituda, longitudinis, r. [longus, long], length longus, -a, -um, long loquor, loqui, locutus sum, talk, speaJc Lucius, -i, M., Lucius, a Eoman "first name" [prae-nomen] lux, lucis, F., light; prima lux, lit- erally, the first part of the light, regularly, daybreaJc M M., abbreviation for Marcus, a Eoman ''first name" [prae- ndmen] magis, comparative adverb, positive supplied by magnopere, superla- tive maxime [magnus, maior, maximus, great], more^ rather; superlative most, mostly, es- pecially magistratus, -us, m., literally, mag- istracy, line 293; elsewhere, mag- istrate magno opera, a phrase often con- tracted into magnopere, literally, with great work ; especially, line 235. See magis magnus, -a, -um, comparative maior, superlative maximus, great, large maior, comparative of magnus; with natii understood, lines 236, 262, comparative of senex maleficium, -i, n. [male, hadly, facio, do], wrong-doing malo, malle, malui, , prefer. For conjugation, see §560 malus, -a, -um, comparative peior, superlative pessimus, l)ad mando, -are, -avi, -atum [manus, hand, do, give, put], literally, put into the hands, i. e., entrust ; se fugae mandare, entrust one's self to flight, i. e., take to flight, flee manus, -lis, f., harid Marcus, -i, m., Marcus, a Eoman ' ' first name ' ' [prae-nomen] mare, maris, n., sea matara, -ae, f., a Gallic javelin mater, matris, f., mother matrimonium, -i, n.^ [mater, moth- er], marriage, in with the ac- cusative of this word is trans- lated in Matrona, -ae, m., the Marne, a tributary of the Seine from the northeast mature, -are, -avi, -atum [matu- rus, ripe, early], hasten VOCABULARY 407 maturus, -a, -um, superlative ma- turissimus or maturrimus, ripe maxime, superlative of magis maximus, -a, -um, superlative of magnus me, accusative of ego medius, -a, -um, middle; usually having partitive force, the mid- dle of; hence, in coUe medio, in the middle of the hill, i. e., half way up the hill memoria, -ae, f., memory, recollec- tion mensis, mensis, m., month mercator, mercatoris, m., trader mereor, mereri, meritus sum, de- serve meritum, -i, n. [neuter of perfect participle of mereo, deserve], de- sert metior, metiri, mensus sum,, meas- ure, measure out meus, -a, -um, possessive adjective, masculine singular vocative mi; my mihi, flative of ego miles, militis, m., soldier militaris, -e [miles, soldier], liter- ally, pertaining to a soldier, i. e, military; res militaris, military affairs mille, indeclinable in the singular, which is usually an adjective, a thousand, plural, milia, milium, milibus, n., thousands, mille pas- siis, literally, a thousand paces, regularly, a mile; milia passuum, literally, thousands of paces, regu- larly, miles. See passus minime, superlative of parum minimus, superlative of parvus minor, comparative of parvus minuo, minuere, minui, minutum [minus, less], lessen minus, adverb, comparative of parum miser, misera, miserum, poor mitto, mittere, misi, missum, send; throw, line 451. In composition it often means let (something) go mode, adverb, only, lines 284, 340, 350 mold, molere, molui, molitum, grind; molita cibaria, literally, ground food stuffs, i. e., meal moneo, monere, monui, monitum, icarn; advise, line 387 mons, montis, m., mountain; not necessarily as high as our strict use of the term requires, and often best translated hill morior, mori (or moriri), mortuus sum, future participle morittirus, die moror, -ari, -atus sum, delay mors, mortis, f., death m5s, moris, m., custom moveo, movere, movi, motum, move; with castra, break mulier, mulieris, r., woman multitude, multittidinis, f, [mul- tus, much^, literally, "much- ness," multitude; numher, lines 273, 501; great numher, line 75; common people, line 305; multi- tude hominum, literally, multi- tude of human beings, i. e., large population, lines 38, 39 multum, adverb, comparative plus, superlative plurimum [multus], much, more, most; pliis posse, be more powerful, line 304; pluri- 408 BELLUM HELVETICUM mum posse or valere, he the most powerful, he very powerful multus, -a, -um, much; plural, many; multa nocte, late at night; multo die, late in the day. mult5, ablative used as an ad- verb, (6y) much, (hy) far, lines 98, 299; see §619. Comparative, plus; for declension, see §575; more, lines 371, 381; plural, several, many, lines 317, 454. Su- perlative plurimus, -a, -um, most mtinio, munire, munivi, munitum, fortify munitio, munitionis, r. [munio, fortify], fortification; strength, line 146 murus, -i, m., wall N nam, coordinate conjunction, for Nammeius, -i, m., Nammeius, a Hel- vetian ambassador natura, -ae, f., character navis, navis, f., accusative navem or navim, ablative navi or nave (ship) ; boat ne, negative subordinate conjunc- tive or adverb, in order that . . . not, that . . . not; after verbs of fearing, that; some- times for fear that, line 515 -ne, enclitic interrogative particle j see §593, 2, a nee, a form of neque necessarius, -a, -um, literally, nec- essary; critical, lines 297, 312. Masculine used as a substan- tive, close friend nego, -are, -avi, -atum, deny; or say . . . not, the English nega- tive belonging with the objec- tive verb nemo, nuUius, nemini, neminem, nuUo, M. or f. [ne, negative, homd, man], no one ne-que, negative coordinate con- junction, and not; neque . . . neque, neither . . . nor nervus, -i, m., literally, sinew, ten- dan; plural, poicers ne-ve, a continuing negative sub- ordinate conjunction, used in sec- ond member of clause introduced by ne, literally, or not; or nex, necis, f., death nihil, N., indeclinable noun used only in the nominative and ac- cusative, other cases supplied from (nihilum), -i, n., nothing. nihilo minus, literally none the less (see §619), i. e., nevertheless nisi, subordinate conjunction [ne, not, si, if], literally, if not, often, unless nitor, niti, nisus or nixus sum, lit- erally, lean, rest; rely nobilis, -e [nosco, Jcnow], well known, also noble in the sense of luell-born; superlative, most prominent nobilitas, nobilitatis, f. [nobilis, 7ioble], nobility, in the sense of a collective noun, i. e., nobles nobis, dative and ablative plural of ego noceo, nocere, nocui, , harm; governs dative noctu, adverb [nox, night], by night, i. e., during the night nolo, nolle, nolui, [ne or non, n/)t, void, wish] J be unwilling, not VOCABULAET 409 luish. For conjugation, see §560 ndmen, nominis, n. [nosed, Tcnow], name nominatim, adverb [ndmen, name], hy name non, adverb, not nonaginta, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective, ninety non-dum, adverb, not yet non-ne, interrogative particle, hint- ing an affirmative answ^er, not. See §593, 2 non-nullus, -a, -um, literally, not not any, regularly, some. For de- clension, see §283 non-numquam, adverb, literally, not never, regularly, sometimes Noreia, -ae, f., Noreia, a town of the Norici Noricus, -a, -um, of the Norici, a people living north of the Alps nos, plural of ego noster, nostra, nostrum [nos, we], possessive adjective, our. Mas- culine plural used as a- substan- tive, our (men), i. e., our soldiers, i. e., in Caesar's narrative, the Koman forces novem, indeclinable cardinal (nu- meral) adjective, nine novus, -a, -um, no comparative, superlative novissimus, new. novae res, literally, new things, regularly, change, revolution. novissimum agmen, literally, the newest part of a marching col- umn; regularly, the rear, and so novissimi, the masculine superla- tive used substantively, line 463 nox, noctis, f., night nub5, nubere, nupsi, nuptum, lit- erally, veil one's self ; regularly, marry, used of the woman nudus, -a, -um, literally, hare; un- protected, line 458 nuUus, -a, -um [ne, not, ullus, any], literally, not any, i. e., no (adjec- tive). For declension, see §283 num, interrogative particle hinting a negative answer, not translat- able by any one word. For uses, see §593, 2, c numerus, -i, m., number numquam, adverb [ne, not, um- quam, ever], literally, not ever, i. e., never nuntio, ntintiare, nuntiavi, nun- tiatum [nuntius, messenger], re- port nuntius, -i, m., messenger ; message nuper, adverb, no comparative, superlative nuperrime, recently ob, preposition with accusative, used in Caesar only with forms of res and causa, on account of. In composition with other words it means against, toward ob-aeratus, -i, m., debtor ob-icio, -icere (pronounced as if spelled obiicio, obiicere), -ieci, -iectum [iacio, iacere, ieci, iac- tum, throw], literally, throw toward; throiv up ob-liviscor, -livisci, -litus sum, forget; governs the genitive ob-secro, -are, -avi, -atum, implore obses, obsidis, m. or f., hostage, a person given by one party to an- other as security for an agree- ment 410 BELLUM IIELVETICUM ob-stringo, -stringere, -strinxi, -strictum, hii^d ob-tiueo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum [teneo, tenere, tenui, tentum, hold], hold; stronger than teneo, For pronunciation, see §6 occasus, -us, M. [oc-cido, fall iipon, from cado, fall], literally, a fall- ing, occasus solis, literally, the setting of the sun, 1. e., sunset, 1. e., the west occidens, occidentis, adjective [present participle of occidd, fall, sef], literally, falling, i. e., setting, occidens sol, literally, the setting sun, i. e., the west oc-cido, -cidere, -cidi, -cisum [ob, intensive, caedo, caedere, cecidi, caesum, cause to fall, cut, Icill], cut of, kill, occisi, occisorum, masculine plural of perfect pas- sive participle used as a sub- stantive, the slain, the dead oc-culto, -are, -avi, -atum, hide oc-cup6, -are, -avi, -atum, seize Oceanus, -i, m., the ocean Ocelum, -i, n., Ocelum, a town of Cisalpine Gaul octo, indeclinable cardinal (nu- meral) adjective, eight octo-decim, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective [octo, eight, decem, ten], eighteen octoglnta, indeclinable cardinal (nu- meral) adjective [octo, eight], eighty oculus, -i, M., eye odi, odisse, osus, defective verb, hate. For conjugation, see App. 86 of-fendo, -f endere, -f endi, -f ensum, literally, ivard off against some one; regularly, offend offensio, offensionis, f. [offendo, offend], offence omnino, adverb [omm.B,all],in all; entirely, line 502 omnis, -e, all; singular often in the sense of as a whole oportet, oportere, oportuit, imper- sonal verb, it is fitting, it is right; freely translated by the auxiliary ought oppidum, -i, n., town op-pugno, -are, -avi, -atum [ob, against], literally, fight against; regularly, assault, attach, storm (ops), opis, F., no dative singular, poiver; plural, resources opus, operis, n., work; in the sense of fortification, line 146 oratio, 5rati6nis, f. [oro, speak], speech Orgetorix, Orgetorigis, m., Orgeto- rix, a chief of the Helvetians oriens, orientis, adjective [present participle of orior, rise], rising. oriens sol, literally, the rising sun, i. e., the east orior, oriri, ortus sum, future par- ticiple oriturus, rise oro, -are, -avi, -atum, speak; en- treat os-tendo, -tendere, -tendi, -tentum, show P., abbreviation for Publius, a Eoman ''first name" [prae- n5men] pabulatid, pabulationis, f. [pabu- VOCABULARY 411 lor, forage, from pabulum, fod- der], foraging pabulum, -i, n., fodder paco, -are, -avi, -atum [pax, pacis, peace], literally, pacify; regu- larly, subdue paene, adverb, almost pagus, -i, M., canton, district par, paris, adjective, equal, same. For declension, see App, 38 paratus, -a, -um [perfect passive participle of paro, prepare], lit- erally, prepared, i. e., ready pareo, parere, parui, , obey; governs dative paro, -are, -avi, -atum, prepare pars, partis, f., part; side, lines 30, 32, -where ex is translated on; direction, lines 200, 269 parum, adverb, too little, compar- ative minus, less, superlative minime, least, very little parvus, -a, -um, little, small; com- parative minor, minus, less, line 241; superlative minimus, -a, -Vim,lcast (very Utile) ; minimum posse, literally, be very little powerful, i. e., have very little power passus, -us, M., pace, which with the Eomans was a double step, a little over five of our feet. See mille pateo, patere, patui, , liter- ally, he open, be exposed; extend, line 42. Present participle used as an adjective, open, exposed, line 166 pater, patris, m., father patior, pati, passus sum, sufer, usually in the sense of allow or permit pauci, -ae, -a, few pax, pacis, r., peace pello, pellere, pepuli, pulsum, liter- ally, drive; beat per, preposition with accusative, through. In composition, through or thoroughly , intensive per-duco, -ducere, -dtixi, -ductum, literally, lead through; construct, extend per-fero, per-ferre, per-tuli, per- latum, literally, bear through, i. e., endure per-ficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum [facio, facere, feci, factum, do], literally, do thoroughly, i. e., com- plete; arrange, line 159 per-fring5, -fringere, -fregi, -frac- tum [frango, frangere, fregi, fractum, brealc], breaTc through per-fuga, -ae, m. [per-fugio, de- sert], deserter per-fugio, -fugere, -ftigi, -fugitum, literally, flee through, i.e., desert periculum, -i, n., danger peritus, -a, -um, sMlled; a modi- fying genitive is translated by the preposition in per-move5, -movere, -movi, -mo- tum, literally, move thoroughly, i. e., arouse pernicies, pemiciei, f., no plural, destruction per-pauci, -ae, -a, very few per-rumpo, -rumpere, -riipi, -rup- tum, brealc through per-sequor, per-sequi, per-secutus sum, literally, follow thoroughly, i. e., follow up 412 BELLUM HELVETICUM per-severo, -axe, -avi, -atum, con- tinue per-solvo, -solvere, -solvi, -solutum, literally, release completely; pay {in full) per-suadeo, -suadere, -suasi, -sua- sum, literally, urge through, 1. e., persuade; governs dative per-terreo, -terrere, -terrui, -terri- tum, frighten thoroughly; (tim5- re) perterritus, literally, terrified {hy fear), i. e., demoralized, panic-stncJcen per-tineo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum [teneo, tenere, tenui, tentum, hold], literally, hold through; usually, extend; pertain, he nec- essary; e5dem illo (adverbs) per- tinere, literally, hold through to that same {point), i.e., amount to the same thing per-venio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, literally, come through, i. e., arrive pes, pedis, m., foot peto, petere, petivi, petitum, seeTc phalanx, phalangis, f., phalanx, a closely massed body of troops pilum, -i, N., spear, javelin Piso, Pisonis, m., a Eoman "last name" [cog-nomen]. In lines 109 and 217, Lucius {Calpurnius) Piso {Caesonius), consul 58 B.C. In line 218, Lucius {Calpurnius) Piso, consul 112 B.C., grandfather of the last mentioned plebs, plebis [also plebes, plebei], F., the common people, correspond- ing to the plebeians at Kome. For the pronunciation of the nominative, see §6 plurimum, adverb, superlative of multum plurimus, -a, -um, superlative of multus plus, pluris, etc., comparative of multus; for declension, see §501 poena, -ae, f., punishment; yvith persolvere, penalty poUiceor, poUiceri, poUicitus sum, promise pono, ponere, posui, positum, place; with castra, pitch; pas- sive, he situated, line 284 pons, pontis, m., hridge populatio, populationis, f. [popu- lor, ravage], ravaging populor, -ari, -atus sum, ravage populus, -i, M., people; plural, peoples porta, -ae, f., gate ports, -are, -avi, -atum, carry portorium, -i, n. [porto, carry], literally, a duty on imports; translate, customs taxes posco, poscere, poposci, , de- mand possessio, possessionis, f., possum, posse, potui, [potis, able, sum, h e], h e ahle; with an infinitive it is translated by the auxiliary, can, could. For conju- gation, see §505 post, preposition with accusative, after postea, adverb, afterwards posterns, -a, -um, comparative posterior, superlative postremus or postumus [post, after], fol- lowing VOCABULARY 413 postquam, subordinate conjunc- tion, after postridie, adverb [posterus, folloiv- ing, dies, day^, the following day; postridie eius diei, literally, on the following day of this day, i. e., the next day potens, potentis, adjective [present participle of possum, he aUe^, powerful potentia, -ae, f. [potens, 'power- ful^, power potestas, potestatis, f. [potis,aZ)Ze], literally, ability; power potior, potiri, potitus sum [potis, able], literally, become powerful, obtain control of or over, gain; governs ablative which is trans- lated by an objective prae, preposition with ablative. Tn composition, before, very prae-cedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, literally, go before, i. e., surpass; governs accusative prae-cipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum [capio, capere, cepi, captum, taTce], literally, tahe in advance, give precepts to; usually, direct prae-ficio, -ficere, -feci, -factum [facio, facere, feci, factum, malce], literally, malce to be be- fore; regularly, 2? i!ace . . . in com- mand of, put . . . in charge of prae-mitto, -mittere, -misi, -mis- sum, se7id in advance, send ahead prae-opto, -are, -avi, -atum, liter- ally, choose before, i. e., prefer praesens, praesentis, present par- ticiple of praesum praesentia, -ae, f. [praesens, pres- ent], the present; in praesentia, for th'e present prae-sertim, adverb, especially prae-sidium, -i, n., garrison, protec- tion, line 137; guard, line 463 prae-sto, prae -stare, prae-stiti, prae-statum [sto, stare, steti, statum, stand], literally, stand before; i. e., surpass, with dative, line 28; impersonal (direct dis- course, prae-stat), it is -better, line 306 prae-sum, prae-esse, prae-f ui, , literally, be before, usually, be in command of; hold, line 293. Present participle, praesens, praesentis, present praeter, preposition with accusa- tive, except. In composition, past praeter-eo, praeter-ire, praeter-ii or praeter-ivi, praeter-itum, go past, praeter-ita, neuter plural of perfect passive participle, literally (things) gone past, i. e., the past praeterita, see praeter-eo praetor, praetoris, m. [prae-eo, go ahead] , general, legatus pro prae- tore, literally, lieutenant for gen- eral, i. e., lieutenant-geiieral prehendo, prehendere, prehendi, prehensum, often contracted to prendo, prendere, prendi, pren- sum, grasp pretium, -i, n., price prex, precis, f., prayer pridie, adverb [prior, former, dies, day], the day before primum, adverb, superlative of prius primus, -a, -um, superlative of prior princeps, principis, adjective [pri^ 414 BELLUM HELVETICUM mus, first], first, lines 119, 216. Masculine used as a substantive, literally, the first man, i. e., chief, leader, lines 226, 292, 361 principatus, -us, m. [princeps, leader], leadership prior, prius, comparative adjective (no positive), former, superlative primus, first pristinus, -a, -um [prior, former] former prius, comparative adverb (no posi tive), sooner, superlative primunij first priusquam, subordinate conjunc tion, literally, sooner than, i. e. before privatim, adverb [privatus, pri vate], personally privatus, -a, -um, private; per sonal, line 216 pro, preposition Mith ablative, for in view of, lines 38, 39. In compo- sition with other words it means forth, forward probo, -are, -avi, -atum, prove pro-do -dare, -didi, -ditum [do, dare, dedi, datum, give], liter- ally, give forth; hand down (to future generations) proelium, -i, n., hattle profectio, profectionis, f. [profi- ciscor, depart], departure proficiscor, proficisci, profectus sum, start out pro-hibeo, -hibere, -hibui, -hibitum [habeo, habere, habui, habitum, have, hold], literally, hold forth; keep away, lines 13, 191; checTc (them), lines 97, 138, 142; pre- vent, line 277, and lines 160 and 175, where itinere means from passing pro-icio, -icere (pronounced as if spelled proiicio, proiicere), -ieci, -iectum [iacio, iacere, ieci, iac- tum, throw], literally, throw for- ward; throw on the ground, line 493 prope, adverb and preposition with accusative, near; comparative propius, nearer; superlative proxime, nearest; last, line 440 pro-pello, -pellere, pro-puli, -pul- sum [pello, pellere, pepuli, pul- sum, drive], drive off propinquus, -a, -um, near. Feminine used as a substantive, female relative propior, propius, comparative ad- jective (no positive), nearer; superlative proximus, -a, -um, nearest, next, very near pr6-p6n6, -p5nere, -posui, -positum, literally, place before, i. e., set forth propter, preposition with accusative, on account of propterea, adverb [propter, on ac- count of, and some case form of is], on this account. With a fol- lowing quod, because, the transla- tion of propterea may be omitted pro-spicio, -spicere, -spexi, -spec- turn, looJc out provincia, -ae, f., province proxime, superlative of prope proximus, -a, -um, superlative of propior publico, adverb [piiblicus, public], officially VOCABULARY 415 publicus, -a, -um, -public, res puT)- lica, public interests Publius, -i, M., Publius, a Roman ''first name'' [prae-nomen] puer, pueri, m., boy; child pugna, -ae, f., fight, fighting pugno, -are, -avi, -atum [pugna, fight], fight purgo, -are, -avi, -atum, cleanse. Perfect passive participle used as an adjective, literally, cleansed, i. e., blameless puts, -are, -avi, -atum, literally, reckon; regularly, thinlc Pyrenaeus, -a, -um, Pyrenees qua, relative adverb, where lines 95, 144, 171 quadraginta, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective [quattuor, four], forty quadringenti, -ae, -a, cardinal (nu- meral) adjective [quattuor, /owr, centum, hundred], four hmidred quaero, quaerere, quaesivi or quaesii, quaesitum, asl; quails, -e, interrogative adjective, of what sort, what quam, adverb; preceding superla- tive, translated by possible placed after superlative in English quam, coordinate conjunction with words implying a comparison, than, quam diu, line 314, as long as quantus, -a, -um, interrogative ad- jective, how great quare, see res quartus, -a, -um, ordinal (numeral) adjective [quattuor, four], fourth quattuor, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective, four quattuor-decim, indeclinable cardi- nal (numeral) adjective [quat- tuor, four, decem, teii], fourteen -que, enclitic coordinate conjunc- tion, a7id; appended to the initial word of the second of two con- nected expressions. For the place of accent, see §12 queror, Queri, questus sum, com- plain, complain of qui, quae, quod, as relative pro- noun or adjective, and interroga- tive adjective, who, which, etc. See §§150, 154. As indefinite, any. See §570, Note 5 quidem, adverb, indeed, ne . . . quidem, not . . . even, always separated, and emphasizing what intervenes quin, conjunction; introducing sub- junctive, that, quin etiam, liter- ally, nay, more, i. e., indeed, in fact quin-decim, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective, [quinque, five, decem, ten], fifteen quin-genti, -ae, -a, cardinal (nu- meral) adjective [quinque, five, centum, hundred], five hundred quini, -ae, -a, distributive (nu- meral) adjective [quinque, five], literally, five by five; five each, line 279 quinque, indeclinable cardinal (nu- meral) adjective, five quintus, -a, -um, ordinal (numeral) adjective [quinque, five], fifth quis, quae, quid, (1) interrogative pronoun, who, what. (2) indefi- 416 BELLUM HELVETICUM nite pronoun, when used after si, nisi, ne, or num, anyone, any- iliing quis-quam, no feminine, quid-quam or qiiic-quam, indefinite pronoun, anyone, anything quis-que, quae-que, quid-que (quod-que), indefinite pronoun, each one quo, subordinate conjunction, used to introduce a purpose clause that contains a comparative, that; lines 138, 254 quod, subordinate conjunction, he- cause. See §690 quoque, adverb, also. Notice the short o quot, indeclinable interrogative ad- jective, how many raeda, -ae, f., wagon rapiua, -ae, f., plundering ratio, rationis, f., reckoning ratis, ratis, f., raft Rauraci, -drum, m., the Eauraci, a tribe living north of the Hel- vetians re-, red", an inseparable prefix, meaning iaclc or again recens, recentis, adjective, recent re-cipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum [capio, capere, cepi, captum, take], literally, take hack, i. e., receive; with reflective, se re- cipere, literally, take one's self hack, hetake one's self, usually, retreat, retire, in good order red-eo, red-ire, red-ii or red-ivi, red-itum, go hack, i. e., return red-imo, -imere, -emi, -emptum [emo, eraere, emi, emptum, hity], literally, buy hack, i. e., hiiy up red-integro, -are, -avi, -atum [integer, whole, fresh], literally, make fresh again, i. e., renew reditio, reditionis, f. [redeo, re- turn], (a) returning re-duc6, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, literally, lead lack; hring hack re-fero, re-ferre, ret-tuli, re-latum, carry (hack); pedem referre, lit- erally, carry hack the foot, i. e., retreat, retire, under pressure regnum, -i, n. [rex, king], literally, royal power, sovereignty re-icio, -icere (pronounced as if spelled reiicio, reiicere), -ieci, -iectum [iacio, iacere, ieci, iac- tum, throw], literally, throw hack; drive hack re-linqu6, -linquere, -liqui, -lictum, leave (behind) reliquus, -a, -um [relinquo, leave hehind] , literally, remaining; reg- ularly, the rest of, the remain- ing; in the sense of left, line 204; nihil reliqui, literally, noth- ing of left, i. e., nothing left. Masculine used as a substantive, the rest, lines 208, 508 re-miniscor, -minisci, , remem- her re-moveo, -movere, -movi, -motum, literally, move hack; remove re-nuntio, -nuntiare, -nuntiavi, nuntiatum, [nun tins, messen- ger], literally, anjiounce hack, i. e., report re-pelI6, re-pellere, rep-puli, re- VOCABULARY 417 pulsum [pello, pellere, pepuli, pulsum, drive], drive haclc repentinus, -a, -um, unexpected re-perio, re-perire, rep-peri, re- pertum, find out re-prehendo, -prehendere, -pre- hendi, -prehensum, hlame re-pugno, -are, -avi, -atum [pugna, fight], literally, fight had:; oif- set, outweigh; governs dative res, rei, f., thing, matter, afair, consideration, etc. qua-re, lit- erally, on account of which thing ; and therefore; introducing a questi' why. For resptibllca, see publicus re-scindo, -scindere, re-scidi, -scis- sum,]*terally, cut hack; cut down, hreaTc down re-scisc6, -sciscere, -scivi or re-scii, -scitum [scio, Icnow], literally, hegin to know again; find out re-sisto, re-sistere, re-stiti, , literally, stand hack; resist, gov- erns dative re-spondeo, -spondere, -spondi, -sponsum, answer, reply responsum, -i, n. [neuter of perfect passive participle of responded], literally, a thing replied, i. e., answer, reply respublica, see publicus re-stitu6, -stituere, -stitui, -stitu- tum [statuo, statuere, statui, statutum, station (transitive), from sto, stand (intransitive)], literally, put up again (transi- tive) ; restore re-tineo, tinere, -tinui, -tentum [teneo, tenere, tenui, tentum, hold], literally, hold hack ; retain re-vertor, re-verti, re-verti, re- versum, deponent in present system, literally, turn hack, in- transitive; return Rhenus, -i, m., the Ehine Rhodanus, -i, m., the Bhone ripa, -ae, f., hank (of a river) rogo, -are, -avi, -atum, ask R5ma, -ae, f., Rome Romanus, -a, -um [Roma, Borne] , Eoman. Masculine used as a sub- stantive, a Roman, plural, the Romans rursus, adverb [contracted from re- versus, turned hack], again S saepe, adverb, comparative saepius, superlative saepissime, often salus, salutis, f., safety Santones, Santonum, line 162, and Santoni, Santonorum, line 196; M., the Santones, a tribe living on the northern bank of the Garonne, in southwestern Gaul sarcinae, -arum, f., soldiers' packs, corresponding to our knapsacks satis, adverb, sufficiently, enough; e. g., satis magna, sufficiently large or large enough; satis commode, literally, sufficiently conveniently, i. e., very well; considered as an indeclinable adjective, sufficient, enough, lines 48, 276; satis causae, sufficient (of) reason; §589, c satis-facio, -facere, -feci, -factum, passive satis-fio, -fieri, -f actus 418 BELLUM HELVETICIJM sum, literally, do enough, i. e., satisfy; pay damages scelus, sceleris, n., crime scio, scire, scivi, scitum, Tcnow scutum, -i, N., shield secrets, adverb, secretly secundus, -a, -mn, [sequor, follow'], second; favorable; secundidres res, literally, more favorable things, i. e., greater prosperity sed, coordinate conjunction, but se-decim (or sex-decim), indeclin- able cardinal (numeral) adjec- tive [sex, six, decern, ten], sixteen seditiosus, -a, -um, seditious, trea- sonable Segusiavi, -orum, m., the Segusiavi, a tribe of Gaul to the south of the Aeduans sementis, sementis, f., sowing, planting semper, adverb, always senatus, -us, m. [senex, an old 7nan], literally, a collection of elders, regularly, senate, in the sense of a governing body of prominent men senex, senis, adjective, comparative senior or maior (natu), super- lative maximus (natu), old. Mas- culine used as a substantive, old man. maiores (with natu under- stood), literally, (those) greater (as to or because of their birth), i. e., ancestors, lines 236, 262 seni, -ae, -a, distributive (numeral) adjective [sex, six], literally, six by six; six each, line 279 sentio, sentire, sensi, sensum, perceive separatim, adverb, separately septen-trio, -trionis, m., generally plural, septen-triones, -trionum, M., literally, the seven plow-oxen, i. e., the seven stars that form the constellation of the Great Bear; i. e., the north Septimus, -a, -um, ordinal (nu- meral) adjective [septem, seven], seventh sepultura, -ae, f., burial Sequana, -ae, m., the Seine Sequanus, -i, m., a Sequanian or one of the Sequani, plural the Sequanians or the Sequani, a tribe living north of the Aeduans sequor, sequi, secutus sum, follow servitus, servitutis, f., [servus, slave], slavery servus, -i, m., slave seu, another form of sive sex, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective, six sex-aginta, indeclinable cardinal (numeral) adjective [sex, six], sixty si, subordinate conjunction, if signum, -i, n., standard silva, -ae, f., forest simul, adverb, at the same time sin, subordinate conjunction, but if sine, preposition vs^ith ablative, without singuli, -ae, -a, distributive (nu- meral) adjective, one by one, one at a time sinister, sinistra, sinistrum, left sive, coordinate conjunction, or if ; sive (seu) . . . sive, either . . . or socer, -soceri, m., father-in-law socius, -a, -um, associated. Mas- culine used as a substantive, ally VOCABULARY 419 sol, solis, M., no genitive plural, sun solum, -i, N., soil, line 194. Notice the short o sdlum, adverb [solus, alone, only], only, lines 216, 329, 374 solus, -a, -um, genitive solius, etc., alone, line 319. For declension, see §283 soror, sororis, f., sister, soror ex matre, literally, sister from (his) mother, i, e., his half-sister (from the same mother) spatium, -i, n., space, of time, line 128; distance spect5, -are, -avi, -atum, literally, ZooA:, face; of countries, lie, be situated spero, -are, -avi, -atum [spes hope], hope, hope for spes, spei, f., plural limited to nominative and accusative, hope sponte, ablative of a defective noun, meaning free will, whose only other form is spontis, geni- tive; sua sponte, hy their own influence status, statuere, statui, statutum [sto, stand, intransitive], liter- ally, station, stand, transitive; decide, line 195; talce measures, line 367; ne quid gravius statu- eret, literally, not to decide any- thing too severe, i. e., not to taTce any too severe measures studeo, studere, studui, , he eager, desire; governs dative studium, -i, n., [studeo, desire], literally, desire; devotion, 356 sub, preposition with accusative (with verb implying motion) or ablative (with verb implying rest), binder; toicard, line 283; at the foot of, line 392; close to, line 447. In composition with other words it means under, from under (which often means up) sub-dtico, --ducere, -du2d, -ductum, literally, lead from under ; regu- larly, withdraw sub-eo, sub-ire, sub-ii, sub-itum, under-go sub-icio, -icere (pronounced as if spelled subiicio, subiicere), -ieci, -iectum [iacio, iacere, ieci, iac- tum, throw], throw (from under) sublatus, -a, -um, perfect passive participle of tollo sub-lev6, -are, -avi, -atum, liter- ally, lift from under; help, line 298 sub-moveo, -movere, -movi, -mo- tum, literally, move from under; plural of perfect passive parti- ciple used as a substantive, liter- ally, the hHving-been-moved-from- under, i. e,, those who had been dislodged, line 468 sub-sidium, -i, n., reserve, reinforce- ment sub-sisto, -sistere, sub-stiti, , literally, stand under (an at- tack) ; i. e., malce stands, stop sub-veho, -vehere, -vexi, -vectum, literally, carry from under; we say, bring up suc-cedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, literally, go under ; approach sui, sibi, se, reflexive pronoun, of himself, herself, itself, them- • selves, etc. See §§404, 405, 407 Sulla, -ae, m., a Eoman ''last name ' ' [cog-nomen] ; {Lucius 420 BELLUM HELVETICUM Cornelius) Sulla, consul 88 B.C., and dictator sum, esse, fui, futurus, be summa, -ae, r. [feminine of sum- mus, superlative of superus, high, with res understood], sum cummus, -a, -um, superlative of Euperus Lum5, sumere, sumpsl, sumptum, tal'e Eumptus, -a, -um, participle of sumo Eumptus, -us, M. [sumo, taTce], ex- pense super-, in composition, over superd, -are, -avi, -atum [super, over] J literall}', get over, as we say, "get on top"; regularly, overcome, conquer super-sum, super-esse, super-fui, literally, he (left) over, i. e., re- main, line 422; survive, line 482 superus, -a, -um, comparative su- perior, superlative supremus or £ummus, high; summus mons, the highest part of the mountain, the top of the mountain sup-peto, -petere, -petivi, -petitum, literally, seeic from under, seeTc to help; regularly, he on hand suppliciter, adverb, humhly supplicium, -i, n., punishment sus-cipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum [capio, capere, cepi, captum, talce], undertake suspicio, suspicionis, f., suspicion sus-tineo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum [teneo, tenere, tenui, tentum, hold], literally, hold under; sus- tain suuS; -a, -um, reflexive, possessive adjective, his (own), her (own), its (own), their (own), accord- ing to the subject of the clause or sentence T., abbreviation for Titus, a Eoman "first name" [prae-nomen] tabula, -ae, f., literally, writing tablet; list taceo, tacere, tacui, tacitum, he silent tam, adverb, so, in the sense of to such a degree. Contrast ita tamen, adverb, nevertheless tandem, adverb, at length tantus, -a, -um, so great telum, -i, N., missile, line 147 ; spear, line 477 temperantia, -ae, f. [tempero, re- frain], moderation tempero, -are, -avi, -atum, refrain tempto, -are, -avi, -atum, try, attempt tempus, temporis, n., time tene5, tenere, tenui, tentum, hold; memoria tenere, literally, hold in memory, i. e., remember tertius, -a, -um, ordinal (numeral) adjective [tres, three], third testis, testis, m. or f., witness Tigurinus, -i, m., Tigurj,nus, the name of one canton of the Hel- vetians; plural, the Tigurini, the name of the individuals of this canton timed, timere, timui, , fear timer, timoris, m. [timed, fear], fear Titus, -i, M., Titus, a Eoman ' ' first name" [prae-nomen] VOCABULARY 421 tolerd, -are, -avi, -atum, endure tolld, toUere, sus-tuli, sub-latum, literally, raise; very often, talce away, lines 85, 450; elate, line 272 Tolosates, Tolosatium, m., the Tol- osates, a tribe in southwestern Gaul near modern Toulouse tdtus, -a, -um, genitive totius, etc., the whole, whole; tota Gallia, the whole (of) Gaul. For declen- sion, see §283 tra-, form of trans in composition tra-do, -dere, -didi, -ditum [do, dare, dedi, datum, give], liter- ally, give over; give up tra-duc6, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, lead . . . across tragula, -ae, f., a Gallic lance trans, preposition with accusative, across, over. In composition it often has the form, tra- trans-eo, trans-ire, trans-ii, trans- itum, literally, go across, i. e., cross trans-figo, -figere, -fixi, -fixum, pierce (across) tre-centi, -ae, -a, cardinal (numeral) adjective [tres, three, centum, hundred], three hundred tres, tria, cardinal (numeral) ad- jective, three. For declension see §106 tribuo, tribuere, tribui, tribtitum, assign (it) triduum, -i, n., [tres, three, dies, day], (the space of) three days triginta, indeclinable cardinal (nu- meral) adjective [tres, three], thirty triplex, triplicis, adjective [tres. three], literally, three- fold; regu- larly, triple Troucillus, -i, m. (Gaius Valerius) Troucillus, a Gallic leader Tulin^, -orum, m., the Tulingi, a tribe north of the Helvetians tum, adverb, then tu, tui, tibi, te, personal pronoun, you; sometimes reflexive (except in the nominative), of yourself, etc. See §551 tuus, -a, -um, possessive adjective, . your, referring to one person U ubi, relative or interrogative ad- verb, where ; relative, when ulciscor, ulcisci, ultus sum, avenge, line 217; punish, line 256 uUus, -a, -um, genitive ullius, etc., any ; as substantive, any one, line 141. See §283 ulterior, ulterius, comparative ad- jective (no positive), farther; superlative ultimus. Gallia ul- terior, farther Gaul, i. e., the por- tion of modern France that had been overrun by the Eomans, contrasted with Gallia citerior or Cisalpina, which was a part of northern Italy iina, adverb [unus, owe], together; lines 89, 309 unde, relative and interrogative ad- verb, literally, whence, i. e., from which un-de-viginti, indeclinable cardi- nal (numeral) adjective, liter- ally, one from twenty, i. e., nine- teen undipue, adverb, literally, from all 422 BELLUM HELVETIC UM sides; on all sides, lines 30, 414; from all directions, line 71 unus, -a, -um, genitive unius, etc., one; only, line 148. See §283 urbs, urbis, f., city, i. e., Rome, line 111. For pronunciation, see §6 Ut or uti, subordinate conjunction; witli subjunctive of purpose, that or in order that; see §414; with subjunctive of result, (so) that; see §436, c; as conjunctive ad- verb with indicative, as uter, utra, utrum, genitive utrius, etc.; interrogative adjective, which (of two). See §283 uti, see ut uti, infinitive of utor utinam, adverb, may, would that, I wish that, I hope that, used in the expression of a wish. See §778 utor, uti, usus sum, use; with con- silio, adopt; governs ablative utrum, conjunction, whether uxor, uxdris, f., wife vaco, -are, -avi, -atum, he vacant vadum, -i, n., ford vagor, -ari, -atus sum, tcander valeo, valere, valui, valitum, he strong ; plurimum valere, he very strong Valerius, -i, m., Valerius; see Troucillus vallum, -i, n,, rampart, wall vasts, -are, -avi, -atum, lay waste vectigal, vectigalis, n., tax, revenue vel, coordinate conjunction, or; vel . . . vel, either . . . or venio, venire, veni, ventum, come Verbigenus, -i, m., Verhigenus, the name of a canton of the Helve- tians verbum, -i, n., word vereor, vereri, veritus sum, fear vergo, vergere, , , literally, slope; stretch vergobretus, -i, m., vergohret, the title of the chief magistrate of the Aeduans Verucloetlus, -i, m., Verucloetius, a Helvetian ambassador verus, -a, -um, true vesper, vesperis, or vesper, vesperi, M., evening vester, vestra, vestrum, possessive adjective [vos, you, plural], your, referring to more than one person veteranus, -a, -um [vetus, old], veteran vetus, veteris, adjective, literally, old; former; comparative vetus- tior, superlative veterrimus. For declension, see App. 35 vexo, -are, -avi, -atum, trouhle, harass via, -ae, f., icay victus, -a, -um, participle of vinco victoria, -ae, f. [victor, victor] ^ victory vicus, -i, M., village video, videre, vidi, visum, see; in passive, he seen; seem, appear vigilia, -ae, f., watch, one of the four equal divisions into which the Eomans divided the time be- tween sunset and sunrise viginti, indeclinable cardinal (nu- meral) adjective, twenty vinco, vincere, vici, victum, con- quer; plural of perfect passive VOCABULARY 423 participle used as a substantive, literally, the having -been con- quered, i. e., those who had 'been conquered vinculum, -i, n., chain vir, viri, m., wan- virtus, virtutis, F. [vir, man^y literally, manliness; regularly, bravery vis, vis, plural vires, virium, f., singular, force; -plnral, strength; per vim, literally, through force, i.e., forcibly; vim facere, use force. See §496 vita, -ae, f., life vito, -are, -avi, -atum, avoid vix, adverb, with difficulty vobis, dative and ablative plural of tu voco, -are, -avi, -atum, call Vocontii, -orum, m., the Vocontii, a tribe living in farther Gaul void, velle, volui, , wish, be willing. See §560 voluntas, voluntatis, f., [volens, present participle of volo, will- ing], literally, icillingness ; per- mission, line 122; goodwill, line 356; consent, line 379; wish, line 384 vos, plural of tu vulgus, -i, N., no plural, the common people; existimatio vulgi, liter- ally, the thought of the common people, i. e., public opinion vulnero, -are, -avi, -atum [vulnus, wound], wound vulnus, vulneris, n., wound ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULAEY (able) be able, possum about, circum, preposition; cirei- ter, adverb abundant, copiosus accomplish, conficio (account), on account of, propter; with forms of res and causa, ob; also expressed by ablative of cause; on this account, prop- terea (accustomed) be accustomed, con- suevi; see consuesco across, trans; lead across, traduco affect, afl&cio after, post, preposition and ad- verb; postquam, subordinate con- junction ; day after, postridie afterwards, postea again, rursus (ahead) send ahead, praemitto aid, auxilium alarm, commoveo all, omnis allow, patior; it is allowed, licet ally, socius almost, fere; paene alone, solus; unus (one) already, lam also, quoque although, quamquam; etsi; cum . always, semper ambassador, legatus ambuscades, insidiae among, inter (amid), apud (with) and, et; atque, emphasising what follows; -que, co7inecting closely; and not, neque; and so, itaque another, alius announce, enuntio answer, respondeo any, aliquis; quis, after si, nisi, ne, num anyone, aliquis; quis, after si, nisi, ne, num anything, aliquid; quid, after si, nisi, ne, num appoint, constituo approach, adventus arms, arma army, exercitus around, circum arouse, commoveS arrange, colloco arrival, adventus arrive, pervenio as, ut with indicative ask, rogo; quaero (asTc a question) assault, oppugno assemble, convenio assert, exsequor at first, primo; at last, demum; at length, tandem; denique (finally) attack, aggredior; oppugno (as- sault) ; impetum facio (maTce a charge) attempt, conor, verb; conatum, . noun avenge, ulciscor 424 VOCABULARY 425 await, exspecto (away) be away, absum; carry away, take away, tollo; keep away, prohibeo; away from, ab (back) come back, r^de5 (go back) ; revertor {turn hack) ; drive back, repello; reicio {throw hack) baggage, impedimenta, 'plural bank, ripa battle, proelium; pugna {liand to hand; battle line, acies be, sum ; be away, be from, absum ; be near at hand, insto; be on hand, suppeto; be over, be in command of, praesum because, quod become, fid before, ante, preposition and ad- verb; antea, adverb; antequam, priusquam, subordinate conjunc- tion; day before, pridie began, coepi begin, incipio; coepi, perfect, plu- perfect, and future perfect tenses beginning, initium between, inter block, impedio boat, navis body, corpus bound, contineo boy, puer brave, fortis bravery, virtus; fortitiid5 bravest, fortissimus breadth, latitude bridge, pons bring in, importo bring together, conduco, of men; confero, of things bring upon, inf ero broad, latus brother, frater build, f acio building, aedificium but, sed; but if, sin buy, coemo by, ab, or ablative call, appello {address); voco; call together, eonvoco camp, eastra, plural can, possum {he able), with infini- tive canton, pagus carry, porto; carry away, tollo; carry on, gero; carry through, perfero cart, carrus cause, causa, noun; euro, verb cavalry, equitatus, collective; equi- tes {horsemen) cavalryman, eques cease, desisto certain, certus chance, casus change, commutatiS character, natiira charge, concursus chief, princeps child, puer; children, pueri; liberi {free) choose, deligS close friend, necessarius city, urbs collect, conduco {lead together), of men; cogo {drive together), of 426 BELLUM HELVETICUM men; confero (bring together), of things come, venio; come back, redeo (go back) ; reverter (turn back) come together, convenio (command) be in command, prae- siim; place in command, praeficio common people, vulgus; multitudo (the multitude) compact, confertus compel, c5g6 complain, queror complete, cdnficio conceal, abdo concerning, de conference, concilium conquer, supero; vinco conspiracy, eoniuratio construct, perdiico consul, consul consume, consumo continually, continenter control, imperium conveniently, commode com, frumentum council, concilium courage, virtus cross, transeo custom, institutum ; mos cut to pieces, concido daily, eotidianus, adjective; coti- die, adverb danger, periculum dare, audeo daughter, f ilia day, dies; day after, postridie; day before, pridie daybreak, prima lux death, mors deceive, decipio decide, eonstituo declare, confirmo deep, alius defeat, calamitas defend, defendo delay, moror demand, posed depart, discedo departure, profectio dependent, cliens depth, altitfido deserve, mereor desire, studeo, with dative; cupio, ivith dative or with accusative and infinitive desirous, cupidus despise, despicid determine, eonstituo difficult, difficilis disappoint, deicio disaster, calamitas disclose, enuntio discuss, ago dispatch, litterae distance, spatium (distant) most distant, extremus distress, dolor ditch, fossa divide, divido do, f acio doubleheaded, anceps doubtful, dubius down from, de draw up, Instruo drive, ago; drive back, repello; reicio (throw back) each, quisque eagerness, studium VOCABULARY 427 easily, facile easy, facilis eight, octo eighty, octdginta either, aut, excluding other alter- native; vel elate, tollo embassy, legatio eminent, egregius encamp, consido end, finis endure, perf ero enemy, hostis, hostes enough, satis enroll, conscribo entrust, mando equal, par especially, maxime; praesertim establish, confirms even, etiam; not even, ne . . . qui- dem, emphasizing the intervening word evening, vesper except, praeter extend, pertineo, pate5 extraordinary, incredibilis eye, oculus fact, res faith, fides fall, cado far, longe farther, ulterior, ad j ective ; longius, adverb farthest, extremus, adjective; lon- gissime, adverh father, pater favor, gratia, noun; faveo, verb, with dative favorable, secundus fear, timer, noun; timeo, verb (he timid about anything) ; vereor, verb (fear reasonably) feel, sentio few, pauci field, agar fiercely, acriter fifteen, quindecim fight, contendo fill, compleo finally, denique find, reperio finish, conficio fire, ignis; set fire to, set on fire, incendo first, primus, princeps, adjectives; primum, adverb; at first, prirao (fitting) it is fitting, oportet five, quinque; five each, quini; five hundred, quingenti flee, fugio flight, fuga flow, fluo follow, sequor following, posterus foot, pes for, conjunction, nam; enim, post- positive force, vis; forces, copiae ford, vadum forest, silva forget, obliviscor former, vetus fort, castellum fortification, miinitio fortify, miiniS fortune, fortuna forty, quadraginta four, quattuor; four each, quater- ni; four hundred, quadringenti fourth, quartus 428 BELLUM liELVETICUM free, liber, adjective; eripio, verl) freely, libenter free will, sponte friend, amicus friendly, amicus, -a, -um friendship, amicitia frighten away, deterreo; frighten thoroughly, perterreo from, ab; de; ex; from there, inde; from all sides, undique gain, concilio garrison, praesidium gate, porta get hack, recipio; get possession of, potior, with ablative give, do go, eo; go across, transeo god, deus good, bonus grain, frumentum grant, concede great, magnus; great number, mul- titiido guard, praesidium; be on one's guard, caveo half-way, medius halt, consist© hand, manus; be near at hand, insto; be on hand, suppeto happen, accido (befall); fio (be- come) harm, iniuria, noun; uoceo, verb harass, lacesso hardly, aegre hasten, contendo (strive) ; ma- ture; ivitJi object infinitive hate, odi have, habe5 he, is head, caput hear, hear of, audid heavily, graviter height, altitiido help, auxilium her, earn, objective, when not re- flexive; her (self), se; her, eius, when not reflexive; her (own), suus, -a, -um here, hie hide, abdo (init away) ; occulto (conceal) high, altus; higher, altior; supe- rior, ichen not definitely compared with something else hill, collis him, eum, whe7i not reflexive hinder, prohibeo (Iceep away from); deterreo (frighten from); impe- dio (impede) hindrance, impedimentum his, eius, when not reflexive; his (own), suus, -a, -um hither, citerior, adjective hold, teneo; obtineo home, domus hope, spes, noun; spero, verb horn, cornii horse, equus horseman, eques hostage, obses hour, hora how large, quantus hundred, centum; for two hun- dred, etc., see two, etc. hunger, fames hunt up, conquiro VOCABULARY 429 I, ego if, si; if not, nisi, when the entire condition is negatived; but if, sin ill, aeger import, importo in, in, with ablative; in all, om- nino; in view of, pro; in that place, ibi increase, augeo induce, adduc5 inflict, infero influence, auctoritas, noun; ad- diico, verb inform, certior(-em) facio inhabit, incolo injure, noceo injury, iniiiria insult, contumelia intervene, intercedo into, in, with accusative iron, ferrum it, id; also is, ea (accusative eum, earn), if the gender of the Latin noun represented is masculine or feminine its, eius, tchen not reflexive; its (own), suus, -a, -um javelin, telum, general term (mis- sile) ; pilum join, iungo journey, iter judge, iudico keen, acer keep away, prohibeo kill, interficio (maJce way with) occTdo (slay) kindness, gratia kinsman, consanguineus know, intellego (understand) ; cog- novi (I have ascertained) (knowing) not knowing, insciens (knowledge) without the knowl- edge of, insciens (7iot Tcnowing) (known) well known, nobilis lack, inopia lake, lacus language, lingua large, magnus (last) at last, demum lately, nuper law, lex lay aside, dep6n5 lay waste, vasto lead, duco; lead across, traduco; lead out, ediico leader, dux leadership, prineipatus learn, cognosco least, minimus, adjective; minimo, adverb leave, relinquo legion, legio length, longitude ; at length, deni- que less, minor, adjective; minus, ad- verb letter, littera (letter of the alpha- bet) ; litterae (epistle) levy, conscrlbo lie, verg5 lieutenant, legatus light, lux likewise, item limited, angustus 430 BELLUM HELVETICUM line of march, iter; line of battle, acies (little) too little, parum live (in), incolo long, longus long, for a long time, diu lose, amitto love, amor low, inferus M (made) be made, fid make, facio magistrate, magi stratus man, homo; vir manliness, virtus many, multl march, line of march, iter; march, iter facio {malce a march) marked, insignis marry off, colloco, uitli niiptum, expressed or understood meanwhile, interim memory, memoria message, nuntius messenger, nuntius mile, mllle passus miles, milia passuum military, militaris mind, animus mine, mens mischief, maleficium missile, telum mission, legatio month, mensis moreover, autem most, plurimus, adjective; maxime, adverb; also hy superlative mother, mater mountain, mons move, moveo much, multus; adverb, multo multitude, multitude my, mens i name, nomen, noun; appello, verb narrow, angustus ; narrowness, narrows, angustiae near, prope, preposition and ad- verb; nearer, citerior {nearer Borne) ; propior, adjective; pro- pius, preposition and adverb; nearest, proximiis; be near at hand, insto neighbor, finitimus neighboring, finitimus, -a, -um neither, neque nevertheless, nihilo minus new, nevus night, nox; night watch, vigilia nine, novem nineteen, undeviginti, {one from twenty) ninety, nonaginta no, adjective, nullus; in answering a question, minime; no one, nemo noble, nobilis nobility, nobilitas none, nihil {nothing); niilli {no persons) nor, neque north, septentrio(-nes) not, non; sometimes ne with sub- junctives, according to use; not even, ne . . . quidem, emphasiz- ing the intervening word; not yet, nondum; not only . . . but also, non s51ura . . . sed etiam noted, nobilis; cognitus nothing, nihil VOCABULARY 431 now, lam number, numerus; great number, miiltitudd oath, ius iurandum obey, pareo obtain one's request, impetro ocean, Oceanus often, saepe old, vetus (former) ; senex (ad- vanced in years) on, in with ablative; sometimes ex wJien denoting the point of view ; on account of, propter; ob with forms of res and causa; also expressed hy ablative of cause; on all sides, undique; on the other hand, contra; carry on, gero; on this account, prop- terea one, unus ; one by one, singuli only, solum (alone) ; mode (merely) (open), be open, pateo opportunity, facultaa or, aut, excluding other alternative ; vel order, iubeo, with accusative and infinitive; imper5, with accusa- tive and dative, or dative and ut clause O that, expression of wish (Jiope or regret) other, alii (of more than two), the other, alter (of tivo) ; the others reliqui ought, oportet (it is fitting) ; debeo (owe) our, ours, noster cut of, out from, ex outer, exterior' outmost, extremus (over) be over, praesum overcome, superd overtake, consequor pace, passus pardon, condono part, pars pay, persolvo peace, pax people, populus; common people, vulgus; multitiido (the multi- tude) persuade, persuaded place, locus, noun; colloco, verb; place in command, praeficio plan, consilium pledge, fides plenty, copia point out, demonstro popularity, gratia population, multitiido hominum (multitude of human beings) possible, quam, with superlatives power, potestas; royal power, reg- num powerful, potens praise, laud5 prefer, malo (wish more) ; prae- opt5 (choose in preference) prepare, comparo; paro price, pretium private, privatus productive, frumentarius prominent, nobilis promise, polliceor property, f ortiiiiae protection, praesidium province, provincia public, publieus 432 BELLUM HELVETICUM Q (quarters) winter quarters, hi- berna quickly, celeriter raft, ratis ravage, populor ready, paratus realize, intellego rear, novissimum agmen (the last part of the marching column; no- vissimi (the last ones) reason, causa receive, reeipio recent, recens recently, nuper reckoning, ratio refinement, humanitas refrain, tempero rely, nitor remaining, reliquus remarkable, incredibilis remember, reminiscor reply, respondeo, verlj; respon- sum, noun report, enunti5 republic, res public a (request) obtain one's request, impetro reserve, subsidium resort, commeo resources, opes (rest) the rest of, reliquus retreat, se recipere return, reverter (turn hacTc) ; red- eo {go iaclc) revolution, novae res right, ius ripe, maturus rise, orior rising, oriens river, fliimen road, iter; via rout, pello; propello royal power, regnum rule, imperium run, aceurro S safety, salus same, idem; to the same place, eodem say, dico scarcely, vix scarcity, inopia scout, explorator sea, mare second, the second, alter see, video seek, pet5 seise, oecupo senate, senatus send, mitto;* send ahead, prae- mitto separate, divid5 servant, servus set fire to, set on fire, ineendo; set out, proficiscor setting, oecasus seven, septem seventh, septimus several, compliires she, ea shield, scutum ship, navis show, ostendo (declare); demon- stro (point out) sick, aeger side, latus VOCABULARY 433 sight, conspectus signal, insignis sister, soror six, sex sixteen, sedecim skillful, peritus slay, occido slave, servus slavery, servitus (slope) half way up the slope, in colle medio snatch, eripio so, ita (in such a manner); tarn {to such a degree); so great, tantus. soldier, miles some, nonnulli; aliqui son, f ilius space, spatium speech, oratio (stand), take one's stand, con- sisto Start out, proficiscor state, civitas, {body of citizens); res piiblica {commonwealth) sternly, graviter storm, oppugno strong, firmus struggle, contends subdue, paco sudden, subitus suffer, patior sufficient, sufficiently, satis sun, sol sunset = the setting of the sun supply, copia surpass, praecedo {get ahead of), u-ith accusative; praesto {he ahead of), with dative suspicion, susplcio sword, gladius take, capio; sumo {tal-e away); take away, toll5 {raise); take by storm, expugno talk, ago {discourse) ; loquor {con- verse) tax, vectigal tear down, rescinds ten, decem territory, fines than, quam that, is; ille their, eorum, earum, when not re- flexive; their (own), suus, -a, -um them, eos, eas, ea thence, inde there, ibi these, hi, hae, haec they, 61, eae, ea thing, res think, arbitror (judge) ; existimo (estimate) ; puto (reckon) third, tertius this, hie though, quamquam; etsi; cum those, ei, illi thousand, mille, usually an adjec- tive; thousands, milia three, ires through, per; carry through, per- fero throw, eonicio; throw down, de- icio thus, ita time, tempus; for a long time, diu to, ad; also expressed by indirect object together, una, ; bring together, con- duco, of men; ednfero, of things; call together, convoco 434 BELLUM HELVETICUM too little, parum (top) the top of, summus touch upon, attingo toward, ad town, oppidum trader, mercator train, institud triple, triplex troops, copiae trouble, vexo trust, confido try, Conor turn aside, turn away, averto twelve, duodecim twenty, viginti two, duo; two hundred, ducenti under, sub, with accusative or alia- tive undergo, subeo undertake, suscipio unexpected, repentinus unexpectedly, improviso unfavorable, adversus unhampered, expeditus unless, nisi until, dum unwilling, invitus; be unwilling, nolo urge (on), hortor use, utor; use up, consumo very, translated by Latin superla- tive; very few, perpauci victory, victoria (view) in view of, pr5 village, vicus violence, vis W wall, murus; vallum (rampart) wander, erro; vagor war, bellum warn, moneo (watch) night watch, vigilia way, via; iter weapon, telum wearied, defessus we, nos weep, fleo well known, nobilis west = the setting of the sun what? quid? qui, quae, quod, when adjective; what sort of? qualis when, cum; ubi, relative; quando, interrogative whence, unde where, ubi, qua whether, utrum; si which, quod; which (of two), uter while, dum who, qui, relative; quis, interrog- ative whole, totus whom, quem whose, cuius why, cur wide, latus widely, late width, latitudo wife, uxor will, sponte (willing) be willing, volo willingness, voluntas win, concilio wing, cornu winter, pass the winter, hiemo winter quarters, hiberna VOCABULARY 435 wish, volo ; wish that, optative suJ)- junctive with, cum; with difficulty, vix withdraw, disc e do without, sine woman, mulier wonder, admiror work, opus would that, optative subjunctive wound, vulnus, noun; vulnero, verb wrong, iniOria Y year, annus (yet) not yet, nondum yield, conced5 yoke, iugum you, tu, singular; vos, plural your, tuus, singular; vester, plural INDEX (Eeferences are to Sections; light faced figures refer to the body of the book; heavy figures to the Appendix.) Ablative, absolute, 397, 398; agent, 305, 306; accompaniment, 641, 642; accordance, 456, 2; cause, 610, 611; certain deponent verbs, 634, 635; comparison, 617, 618; descrip- tion, 648, 649; manner, 626, 627; measure of difference, 619, 620; means, 312, 313; place from which, 467, 468; place in which, 475, 476; separation, 608, 609; specification, 655, 656; time, 319, 320; with prepositions, 113 absum, 78 Accent, 10-12, 10-12 Accusative, extent, 326, 327; object, 32; to which, 459, 460; subject, 520, 521; with prepositions, 113 Active, see Voices ad, expressing purpose, 733, 740 Adjectives, declension of, first and second declension, 61, 63; in -er, 67, 85, 31; third declension, 103, 33-38; comparatives. 111. 34; with genitive in -Tus, 283, 284, 32 comparison; 566, 567, 573-575, 39- 45 demonstrative, 134, 135, 142; In- terrogative, 154; numeral, 707, 70S, 47-50 possessive, 648, 53 Use of; agreement, 63; with da- tive, 545, 546 Adjective pronouns, 63 Adverbs, formation and comparison of, 583, 46; comparison of irregu- lar adverbs, 589; numerals, 47 Adversative clauses, see Clauses Agreement, adjectives, 63; apposi- tive and predicate noun, 85; verb, 34 aliquis, 52 Alphabet, 1 Answers, 595, d Antecedent, 152 Appositive, 85 atque, == as, note Ch. 28, 16 B Base, 18, 40, 45, 290, 297 bos, 27 Caesar, page 14 Calends, 541, 5 Cardinal numbers, 707, 708, 48 Case endings, 19 Cases, 14; with prepositions, 113, 114 See also nominative, genitive, etc. causa, 685 Causal clauses, see Clauses Cause, .see Ablative, and Clauses Characterizing or characteristic clauses, see Clauses Clauses, subordinate: after verbs of fear- ing, 429, 430; causal, 691, 692, 693, 694; conditional, 759-764; (sub- stantive of) desire (purpose), 558, Ji', indirect discourse, 520-522, 751, 752; indirect questions, 369, 370; (of) purpose, 413, 414; result (fact), 436, 437; temporal, 700, 701 coepi, 86 Commands, 672-674 Comparative adjectives, meaning of, 583 Comparison, of adjectives, 111, 566, 567, 573-575, 39-45; of adverbs, 583, 589; 46 Complementary infinitive, 507 complures, 576 Conclusions, see Conditional sen- tences Conditional sentences, 759-764 Conjugations, 25, 63; first, 25, 30, 167, 188, 198, 243, 245, 263, 340, 356, 377, 388, 421, 443, 668, 67; second, 46, 167, 189, 198, 243, 245, 263, 341, 357, 377, 388, 422, 443, 669, 68; third, 118, 178, 209, 243, 245, 263, 348, 358, 377, 388, 422, 443, 669, 69; third in lo, 124, 180, 211, 243, 245, 263, 350, 360, 377,' 388, 422, 443, 669, 71; fourth, 123, 179, 210, 243, 245, 263, 349, 359, 377, 388, 422, 443, 669, 70; periphrastic, 721-725, 75, 76 Consonants, 6 437 438 BELLUM HELVETICUM Contingent futurity, see Subjunctive Coordinate clauses, see Clauses cum, conjunction, 205, 694; causal, 693, 694; temporal, 700, 701 cum, preposition, 552, c Dative, agent, 726, 727; indirect ob- ject, 53; with intransitive verbs, 536, 537; with compound verbs, 536, 537; of purpose, 543, 544; of separation, note on, Ch. 17, 8; two datives (double dative), 543, c, with adjectives, 545, 546 Declarative sentences, see State- ments Declension: of nouns, 15, 14; first declension. 16. 17, 15; second de- clension, 40, 45, 51, 16; third de- clension, 77, 90, 17-28; fourth de- clension, 270, 29; fifth declension, 297, 30; declension of adjectives, 61; first and second declension, 55, 31; ending in -er, 67, 31; with genitive in -Tus, 283, 284, 32; third declension, 103, 33-38; compara- tives. Ill, 34 Defective verbs, see Verbs Demonstrative adjectives, 134, 135, 142, 54-58 Dependent clauses, see Clauses Deponent, see Verbs Descriptive cases, see genitive and ablative under Cases Desire, subjunctive of, see Subjunc- tive; substantive clauses of, see Clauses deus, 16 dies, 30, a Diphthongs, 5, 5 Distributives. 707, 708, 47 do, 52, end; 85 domus, declension of, 392, 29, d; syntax of. 460, 468, 476 (louhtinff, expressions of, note on Ch. 17, 8 dum, 571, 2 duo, 505, 49 ego, 552, 51 Enclitics, 12, 12 Endings, personal, active, 30, 225; passive, 190 eo, verb, 446, 84 Exhortations, 672, a Gender, 57-60, 98, 291, 298, 13, and see rules under each declension Generalizing, relative, 60, a Genitive, attributive, 35; descriptive (of description or quality), 648, 649; objective, 498. 499; of meas- ure, 648, c; partitive (of the whole), 490, 491; possessive, 488, 489; with nouns, 35 Gerund, 443, 680-685 Gerundive, 680, 682-685 H Helvetians, page 14 hic, 134, 54 hindering, verbs of, note on Ch. 17, 6 Historical, infinitive, note on, Ch. 16. 2 i, consonant and vowel, 7, 7 i- stems, 90, 24-26, 36-38 idem. 482, 58 ille, 135, 136, 2 Imperative mood, 667-669 Imperfect, see Tenses Impersonal verbs, 444, 445, 87 in, 114 Indefinite pronouns, see Pronouns Indirect discourse, 522, 751, 752 Indirect object, see Dative Indirect questions, 369, 370 Infinitives, subject of, 507, 521, 522; tenses of. 520; periphrasis for fu- ture, note on, Ch. 20, 12; in in- direct discourse, 520-522; as sub- ject, 507; historical, note on Ch. 16, 2 Intensive pronouns, see Pronouns Interrogative adjectives, see Pro- nouns Interrogative particles. 595, 2 Interrogative pronouns, see Pro- nouns Interrogative sentences, see Ques- tions Ipse, 406, 59 Irregular verbs, 77-85 is, 142, 143, 157 note, 552, 57 iste, 55 J (I consonant) i, consonant and vowel, 7, 7 Juppiter, 27 Fact, clauses of, see Clauses fearinfj, expressions of, 429, 430 Feminine, see Gender fero, 714. 81 fid, 633, 83 Future, see Tenses Future perfect, see Tenses Kalends, 541. 5 Legion, 550, 11 Locative, 474 INDEX 439 M Malo, 560, 82 Masculine, sec Gender Memoranda, 131, I Mile, Roman, 96, 328 MTIIe, mllia, 96, 328, 48 Mixed stems, 91, 97, 98 Modes, see Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative Moods, see Modes N -nam, 61, a ne, with clauses of purpose, 413, 414, 740; after verbs of fearing, 429, 430; with hortatory (and jus- sive) subjunctive, 673; with opta- tive subjunctive, 782 ne quidem, note on Ch. 16, 5 -ne, 595, o Neuter nouns, rule for declension of, 84; see Gender nisi, 759 nolT, 672, 673 nolo, 560, 82 Nominative, 32 nonne, 595, & nos, 552 Noun, predicate, 85 Nouns, irregular, 27; see also De- clensions, Gender, Stems num, 595, c Numerals, 707, 708; 47-50 Object, direct, 33; indirect, 53 Optative subjunctive. 781-782 Ordinal numbers, 707, 708, 47 Pace, Roman, 292 Participles, 388; present, 390, 38; perfect, 264; translation of, 391; agreement of, see Adjectives Passive, see Voices Perfect, see Tenses Perfect stem, see Stems Periphrastic conjugation, active, 721-723. 38; and see Tenses; pas- sive, 723-727, 76 Personal endings, active, 30, 225; passive, 190 Personal Pronouns, see Pronouns Place, from which, 467. 468; in which, 475. 476; to which, 459, 460. Pluperfect, see Tenses plus, 576, 34, a Possessive adjectives (pronouns), see Pronouns possum, 506, 80 Potential subjunctive, see Subjunc- tive potior, 634, 635 Predicate adjectives, 83-85; nouns, S5 Prepositions, use of, 113; with abla- tive, 163, 164; verbs compounded with, 536, 537 Present, see Tenses Present stem, see Stems Principal parts, 234-242, 65 Principal tenses, 371 Prohibitions (negative commands), 672-674 Pronouns, 51-62; in indirect dis- course, 751, d demonstrative, 135, 136, 142, 143. 482, 54-58 indefinite, 571, d intensive, (ipse) 404-407, 59 interrogative, 154, 61 personal, 552, 51 possessive, including possessive adjectives, 553. 53 reflexive, 404-407, 52 relative, 149-153. 60; generalizing, 60, a, and see Clauses Pronunciation, 1-13, 1-12 propior, 589 prosum, 79 proximus, 589 Purpose, expressions of, 413, 414, 733 Q quam, 617, 618; omitted, 618 Quantity, of vowels, 3, 3; of sylla- bles. 9, 3 Questions, direct, 595; indirect, 369, 370 qui, relative, 150; indefinite, 571, 5; interrogative, 154 quia, 692 quicumque, 60 quidam, 62 quTlibet, 62 quis, indefinite, 571, 5; 62; inter- rogative, 154, 61 quispiam, 62 quisquam, 62 quisque, 62 quisquis, 60, a quivis, 62 quod, 692 quoniam, 692 Reflexive pronouns, see Pronouns Relative clauses, of purpose, 413, a Relative pronouns, see Pronoun Result, see Clauses Rhetorical question, see Questions S saying, verbs of, 522 Semi-deponent verbs, note on, Ch. 18, 11, 74 senex, 27 Sentences, see Statements, Ques- tions, Commands, Prohibitions, Wishes; compound, complex 440 BELLUM HELVETICUM Separation, see Dative and Ablative Sequence of tenses, 371 si, 759 similis, 567 sin, 759 Sounds of consonants, 6, 6; of Diph- thongs, 5, 5; of vowels, 4, 4 Stems of verbs, 64, a, 6, c Subject, nominative, 32; accusative, 521, 522 Subjunctive, hortatory, 672-673; jussive, 673; of purpose, 413, 414; of result, 436, 437; of wish (opta- tive), 781-782; with verbs of fear- ing, 429, 430; with cum, casual, 693, 694; with cum, .temporal, 700, 701 Subordinate clauses, see Clauses Substantive clauses, 558, 4; and see Clauses of Desire, Purpose, Re- sult, Fact, quod, Indirect ques- tions. Infinitive clauses, under Clauses Substantives, see Nouns. Pronouns, Adjectives used substantively; agreement of, see Agreement suT, suus, 205, 405. 407, 52 sum, 69, 160. 224. 333, 66; com- pounds of, 535, 77-80 Superlative, meaning of, 583, 3 Supine. 734-739 Supine Stem, see Stems Syllables, 8, 9, 8, 9 Temporal clauses, see Clauses Tenses, sequence of, 371; principal and historical. 371; imperfect, 161, 169; perfect, 225, 226 of subjunctive, sequence of, 371; in indirect discourse, 520 of periphrastic conjugations, in- dicative, 721, 1, a; subjunctive, 721; 1, d of infinitive, 678 Tense signs, 169, 226, 201, 342, 361, 362 Time, expressions of, cases, 320, 327; clauses, 701 tres, 708. 49 to, 552, 51 uiius, 283 Onus, 283 ut, 413, 414, 472, 2; 436, 437 ut non, 437 utinam, 782 utor, 635 Verbs, 63-87, and see Agreement, Clauses, Gerund, Gerundive, In- finitive, Modes, Participles, Sen- tences, Supine, Tenses, Voices compound, 272 defective, 86 deponent. 420-422, 72, 73 impersonal, 444, 445, 87 irregular, 77-85 semi-deponent, see note on Ch. 18, 10, 74 vTs, 497, 27 void, 560, 82 vos, 552, 51 vowels, 4, 4 W V/atches of the night, 706 Wishes, 781, 782 UNIVERSITY OF CALIPORNIA LIBRARY, BERKELEY THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW Books not returned on time are subject to a fine of 50c per volume after the third day overdue, increasing to $1.00 per volume after the sixth day. Books not in demand may be renewed if application is made before expiration of loan period. WAY 1 VJ3 w^tiiti •^ 28Sep RECD LD SEP 17 1?56 75m-7,'30 YB 41214 417J90 UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA LIBRARY ^^Ji